MORI  AND  SETTLER 


G.A.HENTY 


UNIV 


.  OF  CALIF.  LIBRARY,  LOS  ANGELES 


ATHtRTON  TO  THE  RESCUE.— Page  52 


MAORI   AND   SETTLER. 


A  STORY  OF  THE  NEW  ZEALAND  WAR. 


BY   G.  A.  HENTY, 

Aiutlior  of  "  With  Clive  in  India,"  "Under  Drake's  Flag," 
Freedom's  Cause,"  '•'The  Young  Carthaginian"  "For 
the  Temple,"  "Facing  Death,"  "Bonnie  Prince 
Charlie,"  etc.,  etc. 


WITH  FIVE  PAGE  ILLUSTRATIONS  BY  ALFRED  PEARSE, 
AND  A  MAP. 


NEW  YORK 

THE  FEDERAL  BOOK  COMPANY 

PUBLISHERS 


MY  DEAR  LADS  :  In  the  following  story  I  have  made  no 
attempt  to  give  anything  like  a  general  history  of  the 
long  struggle  between  the  brave  tribes  of  New  Zealand 
and  the  forces  of  England  and  the  colony.  That  strug- 
gle lasted  over  a  period  of  some  years,  and  to  do  justice 
to  its  numerous  incidents  in  the  course  of  a  single  volume 
would  have  left  no  space  whatever  available  for  the  tell- 
ing of  a  story.  It  was  divided  into  two  distinct  epochs. 
In  the  first  the  natives  of  the  north  of  the  islands  fought 
for  their  independence  and  their  right  to  have  a  king, 
and  be  governed  by  their  own  laws.  Nothing  could  ex- 
ceed the  courage  with  which  they  struggled  for  these 
ends,  and  it  needed  a  very  strong  force  of  British  troops 
to  storm  their  pahs  or  fortified  camps,  and  overcome 
their  resistance.  The  second  epoch  embraces  the  strug- 
gle brought  about  by  the  conversion  of  a  portion  of  the 
tribes  to  the  fanatical  belief  called  the  Fai  Marire  (liter- 
ally "good  and  peaceful"),  whose  votaries  were  generally 
known  as  the  Hau-Haus.  During  the  earlier  war  the 
natives  behaved  with  great  moderation,  and  there  were 
but  few  cases  of  the  murder  of  outlying  settlers.  The 
slaying  of  all  whites  was,  however,  the  leading  feature  of 
the  Hau-Hau  religion,  and  many  cold-blooded  massacres 
occurred  during  the  struggle.  The  British  troops  had 
been  for  the  most  part  withdrawn  before  the  commence- 


iv  PREFACE, 

ment  of  the  Hau-Hau  troubles,  and  the  war  was  carried 
on  by  bodies  of  constabulary  raised  by  the  colonists,  and 
with  the  aid  of  tribes  that  remained  friendly  to  us.  The 
massacre  of  Poverty  Bay,  which  forms  the  leading  feature 
of  my  story,  and  the  events  that  followed  it,  are  all 
strictly  in  accordance  with  facts. 

Yours  sincerely, 

G.  A.  HENTY. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER    L  PAOB 

A  Home  Broken  Up. 1 

CHAPTER    U. 
The  Embarkation 19 

CHAPTER    III. 
The  Voyage 87 

CHAPTER    IV. 
A  Row  on  Shore 51 

CHAPTER  V. 
A  Boat  Expedition 67 

CHAPTER    VI. 
Putting  in  the  Refit 88 

CHAPTER  VII. 
A  Savage  Surprise 106 

CHAPTER   VIIL 
The  End  of  the  Vbynge 125 

CHAPTER    IX. 
The  New  Zealand  War. 144 

CHAPTER  X. 
The  Glade ., 163 

CHAPTER  XI. 
TheHau-Haus w .  188 


vi  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  XII. 
The  First  Alarm. 200 

CHAPTER  XIIL 
The  Attack  on  the  Glade 219 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
Fresh  Troubles — 237 

CHAPTER  XV. 
The  Massacre  at  Poverty  Bay 255 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
The  Pnrsuit  of  Te  Kooti 274 

CHAPTER  XVIL 
Back  at  the  Farm 293 

CHAPTER  XVIIL 
In  England... $10 


MAORI   AND   SETTLER. 


CHAPTER   I. 

A    HOME    BROKEN    UP. 

"WELL,  mother,  one  thing  is  certain — something  has 
got  to  be  done.  It  is  no  use  crying  over  spilled  milk,  that 
I  can  see.  It  is  a  horribly  bad  business,  but  grieving 
over  it  won't  make  it  any  better.  What  one  has  got  to 
do  is  to  decide  on  some  plan  or  other,  and  then  set  to 
work  to  carry  it  out. " 

The  speaker,  Wilfrid  Renshaw,  was  a  boy  between 
fifteen  and  sixteen  years  old.  He  was  standing  with  his 
back  to  an  empty  fireplace,  his  feet  well  apart,  his  hands 
deep  in  his  pockets.  He  was  rather  short  for  his  age, 
but  very  squarely  built.  His  hair  was  dark,  cut  rather 
short,  and  so  ruffled  over  his  head  that  there  were  no 
signs  of  a  parting ;  his  eyebrows  were  heavy,  his  eyes 
bright  but  rather  deeply  set;  his  chin  was  square  and 
his  jaw  heavy ;  his  nose  was  a  little  upturned,  and  this 
together  with  his  eyes  gave  a  merry  expression  to  a  face 
that  would  otherwise  have  been  heavy  and  stern. 

At  school  Wilfrid  Renshaw  had  been  regarded  as 
rather  a  queer  fellow.  He  was  full  of  quiet  fun,  and  saw 
a  humorous  side  in  everything.  He  did  not  take  a  very 
leading  part  in  the  various  school  sports,  though  there 
was  a  general  idea  that  if  Renshaw  only  chose  to  exert 
himself  he  could  excel  in  any  of  them.  In  point  of  actual 


2  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

strength,  although  there  were  several  boys  in  the  school 
older  than  himself,  it  was  generally  admitted  that  he 
was  by  far  the  strongest  there.  But  he  always  went  his 
own  way  and  always  knew  his  own  mind,  and  when  he 
had  once  given  his  decision  everyone  knew  that  it  was 
of  no  use  attempting  to  alter  it;  indeed,  his  reputation 
for  obstinacy  was  so  great  that  when  he  had  once  said  "I 
won't"  or  "I  will,"  no  one  ever  attempted  to  argue  with 
him. 

He  was  given  to  long  walks  and  to  collecting  insects  or 
flowers.  He  could  never  be  persuaded  to  make  one  of  the 
cricket  eleven ;  but  in  winter,  when  there  was  little  scope 
for  his  favorite  pursuit,  he  threw  himself  into  football; 
and  although  he  absolutely  refused  to  acceptthe  captaincy 
when  unanimously  elected  to  that  honor,  he  was  con- 
sidered by  far  the  most  valuable  member  of  the  team. 
He  was  scarcely  popular  among  the  boys  of  his  own  age ; 
for  although  his  fun  and  general  good  temper  were  appre- 
ciated by  them,  his  determination  to  go  his  own  way,  and 
his  entire  disregard  for  the  opinion  of  others,  caused  him 
to  be  considered  an  unsociable  sort  of  fellow,  an  impres- 
sion increased  by  the  fact  that  he  had  no  particular  chums. 

Among  the  smaller  boys  he  was  greatly  liked.  He 
would  never  allow  any  bullying  when  he  was  present; 
and  although  his  interference  was  often  resented  by  some 
of  the  elders,  his  reputation  for  strength  and  obstinacy 
was  so  great  that  he  had  never  been  called  upon  to  take 
active  measures  to  support  his  decisively  expressed  opin- 
ions. His  father  lived  in  a  pretty  house  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  outside  Reading;  and  as  Wilfrid  attended  the  gram- 
mar-school there,  he  was  much  more  free  to  indulge  his 
own  tastes  and  go  his  own  way  than  if  he  had  been  in  a 
boarding-school.  His  chief  companion  in  his  rambles 
was  his  only  sister  Marion,  who  was  a  year  his  senior, 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  3 

although  strangers  would  not  have  taken  her  to  be  so, 
either  from  her  appearance  or  manner.  She  had  an  active, 
lithe  figure,  and  was  able  to  keep  up  with  him  even  dur- 
ing his  longest  excursions.  They  were  in  fact  great 
chums  and  allies,  and  Marion  would  have  indignantly 
scouted  the  idea  had  any  one  suggested  to  her  that  her 
brother  was  either  obstinate  or  unsociable. 

Mr.  Renshaw  had  been  intended  for  the  bar,  and  had 
indeed  been  called  to  that  profession ;  but  shortly  after- 
ward he  came  into  a  fortune  at  the  death  of  his  father, 
and  at  once  abandoned  all  idea  of  practicing.  After 
traveling  for  a  few  years  on  the  Continent  and  in  the 
East,  he  married  and  settled  down  near  Reading.  His 
time  was  for  the  most  part  devoted  to  archaeology.  He 
had  a  rare  collection  of  ancient  British,  Saxon,  and  Nor- 
man anus,  ornaments,  and  remains  of  all  sorts;  had 
written  several  books  on  the  antiquities  of  Berkshire  and 
Oxfordshire;  was  an  authority  upon  tumuli  and  stone 
weapons ;  and  was  regarded  by  his  acquaintances  as  a  man 
of  much  learning. 

The  management  of  the  house  and  children,  and  indeed 
of  all  affairs  unconnected  with  his  favorite  hobby,  he 
left  to  his  wife,  who  was,  fortunately  for  him,  a  clear- 
headed and  sensible  woman.  Mr.  Renshaw  was,  in  fact, 
an  eminently  impractical  man,  weak  and  easy  in  dispo- 
sition, averse  to  exertion  of  any  kind,  and  without  a 
shadow  of  the  decision  of  character  that  distinguished  his 
son.  Except  when  away  upon  antiquarian  excursions  he 
passed  his  time  entirely  in  his  own  study,  engaged  upon 
a  work  which,  he  anticipated,  would  gain  for  him  a  very 
high  position  among  the  antiquarians  of  the  country,  the 
subject  being  the  exact  spot  at  which  Julius  Caesar 
landed  in  Britain. 

He  made  his  appearance  only  at  meal-times,  and  then 


4  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

paid  but  little  attention  to  what  was  going  on  around 
him,  although  he  was  kind  to  his  children  in  a  gentle, 
indifferent  sort  of  way.  For  many  years  he  had  been 
engaged  in  making  up  his  mind  as  to  the  school  to  which 
Wilfrid  should  be  sent;  and  the  boy  had  at  first  only 
been  sent  to  the  grammar  school  at  the  suggestion  of  hia 
mother  as  a  temporary  measure  until  the  important 
decision  should  be  arrived  at.  This  had  been  six  years 
before,  and  Mr.  Kenshaw  had  postponed  his  decision  until 
it  was  too  late  for  Wilfrid  to  enter  at  any  of  the  great 
public  schools. 

Knowing  from  long  experience  what  would  be  the  re- 
sult were  he  consulted  as  to  Marion's  education,  Mrs. 
Kenshaw  had,  when  the  girl  was  nine  years  old,  engaged 
a  governess  for  her  without  any  previous  consultation 
with  her  husband,  simply  telling  him  of  the  arrangement 
after  it  was  concluded,  saying :  "I  know,  Alfred,  that  you 
have  not  yei  decided  whether  an  education  at  home  or  at 
school  is  best  for  a  girl,  and  I  have  consequently  arranged 
with  a  young  lady  to  come  as  governess  until  you  can 
come  to  a  conclusion  upon  the  point." 

Wilfrid  Renshaw  was  extremely  fond  of  his  mother. 
His  father  he  regarded  with  a  somewhat  contemptuous 
kind  of  affection.  He  did  not  doubt  that  he  was  a  very 
learned  man,  but  he  had  small  patience  with  his  inability 
to  make  up  his  mind,  his  total  want  of  energy,  and  his 
habit  of  leaving  everything  for  his  wife  to  decide  upon 
and  carry  out. 

"It  would  do  father  an  immense  deal  of  good  if  some- 
thing were  to  happen  that  would  wake  him  up  a  bit  and 
get  him  to  take  an  interest  in  things,"  he  had  said  over 
and  over  again  to  Marion.  "I  cannot  understand  a  man 
having  no  opinion  of  his  own  about  anything." 

"I  do  not  think  you  ought  to  speak  in  that  sort  of  way, 
Wil,  about  father." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  5 

"Oh,  that  is  all  nonsense,  Marion.  One  cannot  be 
blind  about  a  person,  even  if  he  is  one's  own  father.  Of 
course,  he  is  very  kind  and  very  indulgent,  but  it  would 
be  very  much  pleasanter  if  he  were  so  because  he  wished 
to  give  us  pleasure,  instead  of  because  it  is  the  easiest 
thing  to  do.  I  should  be  downright  pleased  if  sometimes 
when  I  ask  him  for  anything  he  would  say  positively  I 
could  not  have  it. ' ' 

Now  the  something  that  Wilfrid  had  hoped  might  occur 
to  rouse  his  father  had  taken  place,  and  had  come  in  a  form 
very  unpleasantly  violent  and  unexpected.  The  papers  a 
week  before  had  brought  the  news  of  the  failure  of  the 
bank  in  which  the  greater  portion  of  Mr.  Eenshaw's 
property  was  invested,  and  a  letter  had  the  following 
morning  been  received  from  a  brother  of  Mrs.  Kenshaw, 
who  was  also  a  shareholder  in  the  bank,  saying  that  the 
liabilities  were  very  large,  and  that  the  shareholders 
would  undoubtedly  be  called  upon  to  pay  even  their  last 
penny  to  make  up  the  deficiency.  This  news  had  been 
confirmed,  and  there  could  be  no  doubt  absolute  ruin 
had  fallen  upon  them. 

Mr.  Kenshaw  had  been  completely  overwhelmed  by  the 
tidings,  and  had  taken  to  his  bed.  Wilfrid's  holidays 
had  begun  a  few  days  before,  and  his  mother  at  once 
acquainted  him  with  the  misfoTtune  that  had  befallen 
them,  and  she  now  told  him  that  the  calls  that  would  be 
made  upon  the  shares  would  more  than  swallow  up  the 
rest  of  their  fortune. 

"There  will  be  absolutely  nothing  remaining,  Wilfrid, 
except  a  thousand  pounds  that  I  had  at  my  marriage,  and 
which  were  fortunately  settled  upon  me.  This  cannot  be 
touched.  Everything  else  will  have  to  go." 

"Well,  it's  a  bad  business,  mother.  I  will  go  for  a 
walk  and  think  it  over.  Marion,  put  on  your  hat  and 
come  out  with  me." 


6  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

They  had  been  for  their  walk — a  long  one,  and  he  was 
now  expressing  the  result  at  which  they  had  arrived. 

"One  thing  is  certain — something  has  got  to  be  done." 

"Yes,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  replied,  with  a  faint  smile. 
"The  question  is,  What  is  it?" 

"Well,  mother,  it  is  quite  certain  that  we  four  cannot 
live  on  the  interest  of  a  thousand  pounds  unless  we  go  into 
a  hovel  and  live  on  bread  and  water." 

"I  quite  see  that,  Wilfrid;  but  I  am  sure  I  do  not  see 
how  we  are  to  earn  money.  It  is  far  too  late  for  your 
father  to  go  back  to  the  bar  now,  and  it  might  be  years 
before  he  got  a  brief.  At  any  rate,  we  could  not  afford 
to  live  in  London  till  he  does  so.  I  have  been  thinking 
I  might  open  a  little  school  somewhere." 

The  boy  waved  his  hand. 

"No,  mother,  you  are  not  going  to  take  us  all  on  to 
your  shoulders.  You  have  got  to  look  after  father ;  that 
will  be  a  full  share  of  the  work,  I  am  sure.  Marion  and  I 
have  been  talking  it  over,  and  the  only  possible  thing  we 
can  see  is  for  us  to  emigrate." 

"To  emigrate!"  Mrs.  Eenshaw  repeated  in  astonish- 
ment. "Why,  my  dear  boy,  what  should  we  be  fit  for  in 
the  colonies  more  than  here?" 

"A  good  deal,  mother.  A  thousand  pounds  is  nothing 
here,  and  it  would  be  a  good  deal  out  there.  It  would  be 
horrible  to  come  down  to  live  in  a  little  cottage  like  work- 
ing people  here,  after  living  like  this ;  but  it  would  be 
nothing  out  there.  We  could  buy  land  for  next  to 
nothing  in  New  Zealand,  and  could  employ  a  couple  of 
men  to  work  with  me  to  clear  it  and  cultivate  it;  and  get 
a  few  cows  and  sheep  to  start  with,  and  still  have  a  little 
money  in  hand.  You  and  Marion  could  look  after  things 
indoors;  I  should  look  after  things  out  of  doors." 

"You  don't  seem  to  count  your  father  at  all,"  Mrs. 
Eenshaw  said  a  little  reproachfully. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  7 

"No,  mother,  I  don't,"  Wilfrid  said  bluntly.  "You 
know  as  well  as  I  do  that  father  would  be  of  no  use  to 
speak  of  in  a  life  like  that.  Still,  I  think  he  could  make 
himself  happy  out  there  as  well  as  here.  He  could  take 
all  his  books  with  him,  and  could  inquire  into  the  man- 
ners and  customs  of  the  natives,  who  are  every  bit  as  good 
as  the  ancient  Britons  ;  better,  I  should  say.  But  what- 
ever we  do,  mother,  whether  it  is  here  or  anywhere  else, 
we  must  settle  upon  it  and  do  it.  Of  course  we  must 
consult  him  ;  but  we  must  quite  make  up  our  minds 
before  we  do  so.  If  you  wait  a  few  weeks  for  father  to 
make  up  his  mind  what  we  had  better  do,  we  shall  wait 
till  this  thousand  pounds  is  spent  and  there  is  nothing  to 
do  but  to  go  into  the  workhouse. 

"I  am  sure  that  my  plan  is  the  best  for  us.  I  am  ai 
strong  as  a  great  many  men;  and  anyhow,  out  there, 
there  ought  to  be  no  fear  about  our  keeping  ourselves. 
I  have  no  doubt  that  when  we  get  out  there  father  will  be 
able  to  help  in  many  ways,  though  I  do  not  know  at  pres- 
ent what  they  are.  Anyhow,  we  shall  have  a  house  to  live 
in,  even  if  it  is  only  a  log  hut,  and  I  have  no  doubt  have 
plenty  to  eat  and  drink  ;  and  that  is  more  than  we  shall 
do  if  we  stay  here.  I  could  not  earn  anything  to  speak 
of  here  ;  the  most  I  could  expect  to  get  would  be  ten 
shillings  a  week  as  an  office-boy.  And  as  to  your  idea  of 
a  school,  you  might  be  years  before  you  got  pupils  ;  and, 
beside,  when  there  are  two  men  in  a  family  it  would  be 
shameful  to  depend  upon  a  woman  to  keep  them." 

"Why  do  you  think  of  New  Zealand  more  than  Canada, 


"Because,  in  the  first  place,  the  climate  is  a  great  deal 
pleasanter,  and,  in  the  second  place,  I  believe  that  as  the 
passage-money  is  higher  the  emigrants  are  of  a  better 
class,  and  we  are  likely  to  have  more  pleasant  neighbors 


g  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

people  that  you  and  father  can  associate  with — than  we 

should  have  if  we  went  to  a  backwoods  clearing  in  Can- 
ada. Tom  Fairfax  has  an  uncle  in  New  Zealand,  and  I 
have  heard  him  say  there  are  lots  of  officers  in  the  army 
and  people  of  that  sort  who  have  settled  there.  Of 
course  I  know  it  is  going  to  be  hard  work,  and  that  it 
will  be  very  rough  for  you  and  father  when  we  land  at 
first,  but  I  expect  it  will  be  better  after  a  time ;  and  any- 
how, mother,  I  do  not  think  we  can  starve  there,  and  I 
feel  sure  that  it  will  come  to  that  if  we  stop  here.  At 
any  rate,  you  had  better  think  it  over. 

"Of  coarse  if  you  hit  on  anything  better   I   shall   be 
ready  to  agree  at  once ;  but  whatever  it  is  we  must  quite 
make  up  our  minds  together  and   then  tell  father.     But 
when  we  do  tell  him  we  shall  have  to  say  that  we  are 
quite  convinced  that  the  plan  we  have  fixed  on  is  the  only 
one  that  offers  a  hope  of  success.     Of   course   I   do   not 
expect  that  he  will  see  it  as  we  do,  but  if  we  put  it  that 
if  he  can  suggest  anything  better   to  be  done  we  will  set 
about  it  at  once,  I  think  he's  pretty  certain  to  let  things 
go  on  as  we  arrange.     I  do  not  mean  to  speak  disrespect- 
fully of  father,"  he  went  on,  seeing  that  his  mother's  face 
was  a  little  clouded,  "but  you  know,  mother,  that  people 
who  are  learned,  scientific,  and  all  that  sort  of  thing  are 
very  often  bad  hands   at   everyday   matters.     Sir  Isaac 
Newton,  and  lots  of  other  fellows  I  have  read  about,  were 
like  that ;  and  though  father  is  a  splendid  hand  at  ary- 
thing  to  do  with  the  Britons  or  Danes,  and  can  tell  you 
the  story  of  every  old  ruin  in  the  kingdom,  he  is  no  good 
about  practical  matters.     So  that  we  take  all  the  trouble 
off  his  hands,  I  think  he  will  be  quite  ready  to  agree  to 
do  whatever  you  think  is  the  best.     At  any  rate,  mother, 
I  think  my  plan  is   well    worth    thinking   over,  and   the 
Booner  we  make  up  our  minds  the  better;  after  all  it  is  a 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  9 

great  thing  having  something  to  look  forward  to  and 
/Ian  about." 

Three  or  four  days  later  Mrs.  Renshaw  told  Wilfrid 
that  think  as  she  would  she  could  see  no  better  plan  for 
utilizing  her  little  capital  than  for  them  to  emigrate. 

"It  is  putting  great  responsibility  on  your  shoulders, 
my  boy,"  she  said;  "for  I  do  not  disguise  from  myself 
that  it  is  upon  you  that  we  must  principally  depend. 
Still  you  will  be  sixteen  by  the  time  we  can  arrive  there, 
and  I  think  we  should  be  able  to  manage.  Besides,  as 
you  say,  we  can  hire  a  man  or  two  to  help,  and  shall 
have  some  money  to  fall  back  upon  until  things  begin  to 
pay.  There  are  plenty  of  women  who  manage  even  with- 
out the  assistance  of  a  son,  and  I  do  not  know  why  I 
should  not  be  able  to  get  on  with  you  and  Marion  to  help 
me,  especially  as  farming  is  a  comparatively  simple  busi- 
ness in  a  new  country.  At  any  rate,  as  you  say,  with 
two  or  three  cows  and  plenty  of  ducks  and  hens,  and 
what  we  can  grow  on  the  ground,  there  will  be  no  fear  of 
our  starving." 

The  next  day  Mr.  Renshaw  came  downstairs  for  the 
first  time  since  he  had  heard  of  the  misfortune.  He  had 
received  a  letter  that  morning  saying  that  a  call  was  at 
once  to  be  made  on  each  shareholder  for  the  amount  still 
standing  on  each  share,  and  this  sum  was  in  itself  more 
than  he  could  meet  even  after  the  sale  of  his  house  and 
its  contents.  He  was  in  a  state  of  profound  depression. 
He  had,  while  upstairs,  been  endeavoring  to  think  of 
some,  means  of  supporting  his  family,  but  had  been  wholly 
unable  to  think  of  any  plan  whatever.  He  knew  that  at 
his  age  he  should  find  it  next  to  impossible  to  obtain 
employment,  even  as  a  clerk  at  the  lowest  salary ;  his 
knowledge  of  archaeology  would  be  absolutely  useless  to 
him,  for  the  books  he  had  already  published  had  not  even 
paid  the  expenses  of  printing. 


10  MA  OEI  AND  SETTLER. 

Few  words  were  spoken  at  breakfast,  but  when  the 
meal  was  finished  Mrs.  Renshaw  began :  "My  dear  Alfred, 
Wilfrid  and  I  have  been  talking  over  what  we  had  better 
do  under  the  circumstances.  I  have  told  him  that  the  fail- 
ure of  the  bank  involves  the  loss  of  all  our  property,  that 
the  house  will  have  to  be  sold,  and  that,  in  fact,  there  re- 
mains nothing  but  the  thousand  pounds  of  my  settlement. 
We  have  talked  it  over  in  every  light,  and  have  quite 
arrived  at  the  conclusion  as  to  what  we  think  the  best 
thing  to  be  done  if  you  see  matters  in  the  same  light  and 
will  consent  to  our  plan.  I  had  at  first  thought  of 
starting  a  little  school." 

"I  would  never  agree  to  that,"  Mr.  Renshaw  said; 
"never.  I  must  do  something,  my  dear,  though  I  have 
not  maae  up  my  mind  in  what  direction.  But  whatever 
it  is,  it  is  for  me  to  work,  and  not  for  you." 

"Well,  we  have  already  given  up  the  idea,"  Mrs.  Ren- 
shaw went  on.  "Wilfrid  was  sure  that  you  would  not 
like  it,  and,  as  he  pointed  out,  the  money  might  be  spent 
before  I  could  obtain  sufficient  pupils  to  pay.  Beside, 
he  is  anxious  to  be  of  use;  but  the  difficulty  struck  us  of 
obtaining  any  kind  of  remunerative  work  here." 

"That  is  what  I  have  been  thinking, "  Mr.  Renshaw 
said.  "I  shall  be  willing  to  work  at  anything  in  my 
power,  but  I  don't  see  what  possible  work  I  can  get." 

"Quite  so,  my  dear.  In  this  country  it  is  of  course 
terribly  difficult  for  any  one  to  get  employment  unless  he 
has  been  trained  in  some  particular  line,  therefore  Wil 
and  I  are  agreed  that  the  very  best  plan,  indeed  the  only 
plan  we  can  think  of,  is  for  us  to  go  out  to  a  new  country. 
My  little  money  will  take  us  to  New  Zealand,  buy  a  good- 
sized  piece  of  land  there,  and  suffice  to  enable  us  to  clear 
it  and  stock  it  to  some  extent.  The  life  will  no  doubt 
be  rough  for  us  all  for  a  time;  but  none  of  us  will  care 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  11 

for  that,  and  at  any  rate  we  are  sure  to  be  able  to  keep 
the  wolf  from  the  door." 

"To  New  Zealand!"  Mr.  Benshaw  repeated,  aghast. 
"That  is  a  terrible  undertaking.  Beside,  I  know  nothing 
whatever  about  i'arming,  and  I  fear  that  I  am  quite  unfit 
for  hard  work." 

"I  do  not  think  it  will  be  at  all  necessary  for  you  to 
work  yourself,  Alfred.  Of  course  we  can  hire  men  there 
just  as  we  can  in  England.  I  believe  the  natives  are 
willing  to  work  at  very  low  rates  of  pay,  so  we  need  have 
no  difficulty  on  that  score.  Wilfrid  is  growing  up  now, 
and  will  soon  be  able  to  relieve  you  of  all  responsibility, 
and  then  you  will  be  able  to  devote  yourself  to  your 
favorite  studies ;  and  I  should  think  that  a  book  from 
your  hand  upon  native  manners  and  customs  would  be  sure 
to  be  a  great  success.  Accustomed  as  you  are  to  tracing 
things  up  from  small  remains,  and  with  your  knowledge 
of  primitive  peoples,  your  work  would  be  very  different 
from  those  written  by  men  without  any  previous  acquaint- 
ance with  such  matters." 

"The  idea  certainly  pleases  me,"  Mr.  Kenshaw  said; 
"but,  of  course,  I  shall  want  time  to  think  over  your 
startling  proposal,  Helen." 

"Of  course,  my  dear.  In  the  meantime  we  will  go  on 
packing  up  and  preparing  to  move  at  once  from  here,  as 
you  say  that  there  must  be  a  sale  of  everything ;  then 
you  can  think  the  matter  over,  and  if  you  decide  upon 
any  better  scheme  than  ours  we  can  carry  that  out.  If 
not,  we  shall  be  ready  to  put  ours  into  execution." 

The  next  month  was  a  busy  one.  There  was  great  sym- 
pathy evinced  by  all  the  Eenshaws5  neighbors  and  ac- 
quaintances when  it  was  heard  that  their  whole  fortune 
was  swept  away  by  the  failure  of  the  bank.  There  were 
farewell  visits  to  be  paid,  not  only  to  these,  but  to  their 


12  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

poorer  neighbors.  In  answer  to  inquiries  as  to  their 
plans,  Mr.  Renshaw  always  replied  that  at  present  noth- 
ing whatever  was  settled.  Mrs.  Eenshaw  hinted  that, 
although  their  plans  were  not  definitely  fixed,  she 
thought  it  probable  that  they  would  go  abroad;  while 
"Wilfrid  and  Marion  both  informed  their  friends  confi- 
dently that  they  were  going  to  New  Zealand. 

The  work  of  packing  went  on.  A  few  articles  of  furni- 
ture that  were  special  favorites  with  them  all  were  packed 
up  and  sent  to  be  warehoused  in  London,  in  order  that 
they  might  some  day  be  forwarded  to  them  when  they 
had  made  themselves  a  home ;  but  nothing  else  was  taken 
beyond  their  clothes,  a  good  selection  of  books  for  their 
general  reading,  a  large  box  of  those  which  Mr.  Kenshaw 
declared  absolutely  indispensable  to  himself,  and  a  few 
knickknacks  specially  prized.  Everything  else  was 
handed  over  for  sale  for  the  benefit  of  the  creditors  of  the 
bank.  During  these  weeks  Mr.  Eenshaw  continued  to 
speak  as  if  he  regarded  the  New  Zealand  project  as  wholly 
impracticable,  and  on  each  occasion  when  he  did  so  his 
wife  replied  cheerfully:  "Well,  my  dear,  we  are  in  no 
way  wedded  to  it,  and  are  quite  ready  to  give  it  up  and 
adopt  any  plan  you  may  decide  upon.  The  matter  is 
entirely  in  your  hands." 

But  Mr.  Kenshaw  could  hit  upon  no  other  scheme; 
and,  indeed,  his  wife's  suggestion  as  to  a  book  on  the 
natives  of  New  Zealand  had  much  taken  his  far_cy.  Cer- 
tainly he,  a  trained  antiquarian,  should  be  able  to  pro- 
duce a  book  upon  such  a  subject  that  would  be  of  vastly 
greater  value  than  those  written  by  settlers  and  others 
having  no  training  whatever  that  would  qualify  them  for 
such  work.  It  was  probable  that  he  should  be  able  to 
throw  some  entirely  new  light  upon  the  origin  and  his- 
tory of  the  Maoris  or  natives  of  New  Zealand,  and  that 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  13 

his  book  would  greatly  add  to  his  reputation,  and  would 
sell  well.  Really  the  idea  was  not  -such  a  very  bad  one, 
and,  for  himself,  he  should  certainly  prefer  a  life  in  a 
new  country  to  shabby  lodgings  in  some  out-of-the-way 
place,  after  having  for  so  many  years  been  a  personage  of 
importance  in  his  own  neighborhood. 

"I  see  one  great  objection  to  your  scheme,  Helen,  and 
that  is  that  there  is  a  war  going  on  with  the  Maoris." 

"I  know  there  is,"  Mrs.  Renshaw,  who  had  talked  the 
matter  over  with  Wilfrid,  replied;  "but  it  is  confined  to 
two  or  three  of  the  tribes,  and  the  settlers  in  other  parts 
have  been  in  no  way  disturbed.  The  troops  have  taken 
most  of  their  strongholds,  and  the  troubles  are  considered 
to  be  approaching  an  end;  therefore  I  do  not  think 
there  is  any  occasion  to  be  uneasy  on  that  score.  Be- 
side, in  some  respects  the  trouble  will  be  advantageous, 
as  we  should  ;  probably  be  able  to  buy  land  cheaper  than 
we  otherwise  should  have  done,  and  the  land  will  rapidly 
rise  in  value  again  when  the  disturbances  are  over.  But, 
of  course,  we  should  not  go  to  the  disturbed  districts. 
These  are  round  Auckland  and  New  Plymouth,  and  the 
troubles  are  confined  to  the  tribes  there.  Everything  is 
perfectly  peaceable  along  the  other  parts  of  the  coast." 

It  was  not  until  two  or  three  days  before  the  move  was 
to  be  made  from  the  house  that  Mrs.  Renshaw  recurred 
to  the  subject. 

"You  have  not  [said  yet,  Alfred,  what  plans  you  have 
decided  upon.  As  we  shall  leave  here  in  three  days  it  is 
quite  time  that  we  made  up  our  minds  about  it,  as,  of 
course,  our  movements  must  depend  on  your  decision. 
If  you  have  fixed  upon  any  place  for  us  to  settle  down  in, 
it  would  be  cheaper  for  us  to  move  there  at  once  instead 
of  wasting  money  by  going  up  to  London  first.  Another 
reason  I  have  for  asking  is,  that  Robert  and  William 


14  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Grimstone,  the  gardener's  sons,  who  have  got  an  idea 
from  something  Wilfrid  said  to  them  that  we  might  be 
going  abroad,  have  asked  him  to  ask  you  if  you  would 
take  them  with  you.  They  have  been  working  in  the 
garden  under  their  father  for  the  last  two  or  three  years, 
and  are  strong,  active  young  fellows  of  nineteen  and 
twenty.  As  their  father  has  worked  here  ever  since  we 
came,  and  we  have  known  the  young  fellows  since  they 
were  children,  such  an  arrangement  would  have  been  a 
very  pleasant  one  had  you  liked  my  plan  of  emigrating  as 
it  would  have  been  much  more  agreeable  having  two 
young  fellows  we  knew  with  us  instead  of  strangers.  Of 
course  I  told  Wilfrid  to  tell  them  that  nothing  whatever 
was  settled,  and  that  our  plans  were  not  in  any  way 
formed,  and  that  they  had  better,  therefore,  look  out  for 
situations  about  here,  and  that  I  was  sure  you  would  give 
them  good  letters  of  recommendation." 

Mr.  Kenshaw  was  silent.  "I  really  do  not  see  that 
there  is  any  occasion  to  come  to  a  decision  in  a  hurry," 
he  said  irritably. 

"Not  in  a  hurry,  Alfred,"  his  wife  said  quietly.  "You 
see  we  have  had  a  month  to  think  it  over  and  I  do  not 
see  that  we  shall  be  more  likely  to  settle  upon  an  advan- 
tageous scheme  at  the  end  of  six  months  than  we  are  now. 
From  the  day  we  leave  here  and  hand  over  everything  to 
the  receiver  of  the  bank  we  shall  be  drawing  on  our  little 
capital,  and  every  pound  is  of  importance.  I  think  there- 
fore, Alfred,  that  you  and  I  should  make  up  our  minds 
before  we  leave  here  as  to  what  course  we  are  going  to 
adopt.  As  I  have  said,  I  myself  see  no  scheme  by  which 
we  are  likely  to  be  able  to  maintain  ourselves  in  England, 
even  in  a  very  humble  way.  A  life  in  the  c61onies  would, 
to  me,  be  very  much  more  pleasant  than  the  struggle  to 
make  ends  meet  here. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  15 

"It  would  afford  an  opening  for  Wilfrid,  and  be  vastly 
more  advantageous  for  him  than  anything  we  should  hope 
to  get  for  him  here ;  and  I  think  it  will  be  far  better  for 
Marion  too.  Of  course,  if  we  decided  to  emigrate,  we 
could,  should  you  prefer  it,  go  to  Canada,  Australia,  or 
the  United  States  in  preference  to  New  Zealand.  I  only 
incline  to  New  Zealand  because  I  have  heard  that  there  is 
a  larger  proportion  of  officers  and  gentlemen  there  than 
in  other  colonies,  and  because  I  believe  that  the  climate 
is  a  particularly  pleasant  one.  But,  of  course,  this  is 
merely  a  suggestion  at  present,  and  it  is  for  you  to 
decide." 

"If  we  are  to  emigrate  at  all,"  Mr.  Renshaw  replied, 
"I  should  certainly  prefer  New  Zealand  myself.  The 
Maoris  are  a  most  interesting  people.  Their  origin  is  a 
matter  of  doubt,  their  customs  and  religion  are  peculiar, 
and  I  have  no  doubt  that  I  should,  after  studying  them, 
be  able  to  throw  much  new  and  valuable  light  upon  the 
subject.  Personally,  I  am  sure  that  I  am  in  no  way  fitted 
for  the  life  of  a  settler.  I  know  nothing  of  farming,  and 
could  neither  drive  a  plow  nor  wield  an  ax ;  but  if  I  could 
make  the  native  subject  my  own,  I  might  probably  be 
able  to  do  my  share  toward  our  expenses  by  my  books, 
while  Wilfrid  could  look  after  the  men.  The  offer  of 
these  two  young  fellows  to  go  with  us  has  removed  several 
of  my  objections  to  the  plan,  and  I  agree  with  you  that  it 
would  be  more  advantageous  for  Wilfrid  and  Marion  than 
to  be  living  in  wretched  lodgings.  Therefore,  my  dear, 
I  have  decided  to  fall  in  with  your  plan,  and  only  hope 
that  it  will  turn  out  as  well  as  you  seem  to  expect.  It  will 
be  a  great  cfVange  and  a  great  trial;  but  since  you  seem 
to  have  set  your  heart  upon  it,  I  am  willing  to  adopt  your 
plans  instead  of  my  own,  and  we  will  therefore  consider 
it  settled  that  we  will  go  to  New  Zealand." 


16  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Mrs.  Renshaw  was  too  wise  a  woman  to  point  out  that 
her  husband  had  not,  so  far  as  she  was  aware,  any  plans 
whatever  of  his  own,  and  she  contented  herself  by  saying 
quietly:  "lam  glad  you  have  decided  so,  my  dear.  I 
do  think  it  is  the  best  thing  for  us  all,  and  I  am  quite 
sure  it  is  the  best  for  Wilfrid  and  Marion.  If  it  had  not 
been  for  them  I  should  have  said  let  us  take  a  tiny  cot- 
tage near  some  town  where  I  might  add  to  our  income  by 
giving  lessons  in  music  or  other  things,  and  you  might 
have  the  companionship  of  people  of  your  own  tastes; 
but,  being  as  it  is,  I  think  it  far  better  to  give  them  a 
start  in  a  new  country,  although  I  know  that  such  a  life 
as  we  shall  lead  there  must  entail,  at  any  rate  at  first,  some 
hardships,  and  the  loss  of  much  to  which  we  have  been 
accustomed." 

Wilfrid  and  Marion  were  delighted  when  they  heard 
from  their  mother  that  the  matter  was  settled.  Both  had 
had  great  hopes  that  Wilfrid's  scheme  would  be  finally 
accepted,  as  there  did  not  seem  any  other  plan  that  waa 
possible.  Still  Wilfrid  knew  the  difficulty  that  his  father 
would  have  in  making  up  his  mind,  and  feared  there 
might  be  a  long  delay  before  he  could  bring  himself  to 
accept  the  plan  proposed  to  him.  Mrs.  Eenshaw,  who 
was  a  good  business  woman,  lost  no  time  in  arranging 
with  Robert  and  William  Grimstone  as  to  their  accom- 
panying them.  Their  passage-money  was  to  be  paid,  and 
they  were  to  bind  themselves  to  remain  for  three  years  in 
Mr.  Renshaw's  service  on  wages  similar  to  those  they  would 
have  obtained  at  home;  after  that,  they  were  to  be  paid 
whatever  might  be  the  colonial  rate  of  wages. 

The  excitement  that  the  prospect  of  emigration  caused 
to  the  young  people  lessened  their  pain  at  leaving  the 
house  where  they  had  been  born  and  brought  up,  with  all 
its  pleasant  associations  and  material  comforts.  It  was, 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  17 

however,  very  trying  to  them  when  they  bade  good-by 
for  the  last  time  to  their  surroundings  and  shook  hands 
with  their  old  servants. 

"If  ever  we  get  rich  in  New  Zealand,  father,"  Wilfrid 
said,  "we  will  come  back  and  buy  the  house  again." 

Mr.  Renshaw  shook  his  head.  Just  at  present  he  was 
disposed  to  regard  himself  as  a  martyr,  and  considered 
that  he  had  made  an  unprecedented  sacrifice  of  his  own 
•wishes  and  comforts  for  the  sake  of  his  children,  and  that 
no  good  could  be  expected  to  arise  from  the  plan  to 
which  he  had  consented.  A  good  many  friends  had 
gathered  at  the  station  to  say  good-by,  and  it  was  some 
time  after  the  train  had  started  on  its  way  to  London 
before  any  of  the  party  felt  themselves  inclined  to  speak. 
On  arriving  in  town  they  went  at  once  to  lodgings  they 
Lad  engaged  in  Eastbourne  Terrace,  facing  the  station. 
Once  settled  there,  no  time  was  lost  in  making  prepara- 
tions for  their  voyage.  The  files  of  the  advertisements 
had  already  been  searched  and  the  names  of  the  vessels 
sailing  for  New  Zealand  and  the  addresses  of  their  owners 
noted,  and  after  paying  a  visit  to  several  shipping  offices 
the  choice  of  vessels  remained  at  last  between  the  Flying 
Scud  and  the  Mayflower.  They  were  vessels  of  about  the 
same  size,  both  bore  a  good  reputation  as  sailers,  and 
they  heard  excellent  accounts  of  the  captains  who  com- 
manded them. 

The  Mayflower  was  to  sail  direct  to  Wellington  round 
the  Cape.  The  Flying  Scud  was  taking  in  cargo  for  Rio 
and  Buenos  Ayres,  and  would  proceed  thence  via  Cape 
Horn.  Her  rates  of  passage  were  somewhat  lower  than 
those  of  the  Mayflower,  as  the  route  via  the  Cape  of  Good 
Hope  was  that  more  generally  used,  and  the  number  of 
passengers  who  had  secured  berths  by  her  were  very 
much  smaller  than  those  who  intended  to  travel  by  th« 


18  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Mayflower.  It  was  this  that  principally  decided  them  in 
choosing  the  western  route ;  Mr.  Eenshaw  was  in  a 
depressed  and  nervous  state,  and  his  wife  considered  that 
he  would  be  far  more  comfortable  with  a  comparatively 
small  number  of  fellow-passengers  than  in  a  crowded  ship. 
Marion  quite  agreed  with  her  mother ;  and  Wilfrid  was 
also  in  favor  of  the  Flying  Scud,  as  he  thought  it  would 
b.e  pleasant  to  break  the  passage  by  putting  into  the  great 
South  American  ports  and  getting  a  glimpse  of  their 
inhabitants.  Mr.  Renshaw  himself  was  quite  satisfied  to 
accept  his  wife's  decision,  whatever  it  might  be.  The 
Flying  Scud  was  therefore  selected,  and  passages  for  the 
party  secured  in  her. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  19 


CHAPTER  H. 

THE     EMBARKATION. 

THE  Flying  Scud  was  to  sail  in  ten  days ;  and  this  was 
ample  time  for  their  preparations,  for~  Mrs.  Eenshaw 
wisely  decided  that  it  was  better  to  buy  all  that  waa 
requisite  for  starting  their  new  life  in  New  Zealand. 

"We  have  none  of  us  the  least  idea  what  will  be  re- 
quired," she  said.  "It  will.be  far  better  to  pay  some- 
what higher  prices  for  what  we  really  do  want  out  there 
than  to  cumber  ourselves  with  all  sorts  of  things  that  may 
be  useless  to  us.  We  have  already  a  considerable  amount 
of  baggage.  There  are  our  clothes,  linen,  and  books, 
your  father's  two  double-barreled  guns,  which,  by  the 
way,  I  do  not  think  he  has  ever  used  since  we  have  been 
married.  The  only  thing  we  had  better  get,  as  far  as  I 
see,  will  be  four  rifles,  which  no  doubt  we  can  buy  cheap 
second-hand,  and  four  revolvers. 

"I  do  not  for  a  moment  suppose  we  shall  ever  want  to 
use  them,  but  as  we  may  be  often  left  in  the  house  alone 
I  think  it  would  be  pleasant  to  know  that  we  are  not  alto- 
gether defenseless.  We  had  better  lay  in  a  good  stock  of 
ammunition  for  all  these  weapons.  Besides  the  clothes 
we  have  we  had  better  get  serge  dresses  and  suits  for  the 
voyage*  and  a  few  strong,  serviceable  gowns  and  suits 
for  rough  work  out  there.  Beyond  this  I  do  not  think 
that  we  need  spend  a  penny.  We  can  certainly  get 
everything  we  shall  want  for  our  new  life  at  Wellington, 
which  is  a  large  place." 


20  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

On  the  morning  of  the  day  on  which  they  were  to  em- 
bark the  Grimstones  came  up  from  Reading.  All  the 
heavy  luggage  had  been  sent  on  board  ship  on  the  pre- 
vious day,  and  at  twelve  o'clock  two  cabs  drove  up  to  the 
side  of  the  Flying  Scud  in  St.  Catherine's  Docks.  The 
one  contained  Mr  and  Mrs.  Renshaw,  Marion,  and  a  vast 
quantity  of  small  packets  inside.  Wilfrid  was  on  the  box 
with  the  driver,  and  the  roof  was  piled  high  with  lug- 
gage. The  other  cab  contained  the  two  Grimstones  and 
the  rest  of  the  luggage.  The  Renshaws  were  already 
acquainted  with  the  ship  in  which  they  were  to  sail,  hav- 
ing paid  her  a  visit  four  days  previously  to  see  their 
cabins.  The  parents  had  a  comfortable  cabin  to  them- 
selves. Marion  was  berthed  in  a  cabin  with  two  other 
ladies,  who,  she  learned,  were  sisters,  the  elder  about  her 
own  age,  and  Wilfrid  found  he  would  have  but  one  fel- 
low-passenger. The  Grimstones  were  in  the  steerage 
forward. 

The  vessel  was  in  a  state  of  bustle,  and  what  to  the 
travelers  seemed  confusion.  Numbers  of  other  passen- 
gers were  arriving,  and  the  deck  was  littered  with  their 
luggage  until  it  could  be  sorted  and  sent  down  to  their 
cabins ;  late  cargo  was  being  swung  on  board  and  lowered 
into  the  hold.  On  the  deck  aft  were  gathered  the  cabin 
passengers,  with  relatives  and  friends  who  had  come  to 
see  them  off.  An  hour  later  the  bell  rang  as  a  signal  for 
all  visitors  to  go  ashore.  There  were  sad  partings  both 
fore  and  aft  as  the  bell  clanged  on  its  impatient  signal. 

"I  am  very  glad,  mother,  that  we  have  no  friends  to 
say  good-by  to  us  here,  and  that  we  got  that  all  over  at 
Beading." 

"So  am  I,  Wil.  I  think  it  much  better  myself  that 
these  partings  should  be  got  through  before  people  leave 
home.  It  is  natural  of  course  that  relatives  and  friends 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  21 

should  like  to  see  the  last  of  each  other,  but  I  think  it  is 
a  cruel  kindness,  and  am  glad,  as  you  say,  that  we  had 
no  dear  friends  in  London.  Those  at  home  have  already 
shown  their  thoughtfulness  and  friendship."  For  in- 
deed during  the  last  few  days  hampers  of  presents  of  all 
kinds  had  arrived  in  a  steady  flow  at  Eastbourne  Terrace. 
There  had  been  great  feeling  of  commiseration  among  all 
their  acquaintances  at  the  misfortune  that  had  befallen 
the  Renshaws ;  and  the  manner  in  which  they  had  at  once 
surrendered  everything  for  the  benefit  'of  the  share- 
holders of  the  bank,  and  the  calmness  with  which  they 
had  borne  their  reverses,  had  excited  admiration,  and 
scarce  a  friend  or  acquaintance  but  sent  substantial  tokens 
of  their  good-will  or  sympathy. 

As  soon  as  it  was  publicly  known  that  the  Renshaws 
were  about  to  sail  for  New  Zealand,  the  boys  and  masters 
of  the  grammar-school  between  them  subscribed  and  sent 
a  handsome  double-barreled  gun,  a  fishing  rod,  and  all 
appurtenances,  to  Wilfrid.  Mr.  Renshaw  received  two 
guns,  several  fishing  rods,  two  crates  of  crockery,  and 
several  cases  of  portable  furniture  of  various  kinds,  be- 
side many  small  articles.  Mrs.  Renshaw  was  presented 
with  a  stove  of  the  best  construction  and  a  crate  full  of 
utensils  of  every  kind,  while  Marion  had  work-boxes  and 
desks  sufficient  to  stock  a  school,  two  sets  of  garden  tools 
and  innumerable  knickknacks  likely  to  be  more  or  less 
useful  to  her  in  her  new  life.  Beside  these  there  were 
several  boxes  of  books  of  standard  literature. 

"Everyone  is  very  kind,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said,  as  the 
crates  and  hampers  arrived;  "but  if  it  goes  on  like  this 
we  shall  have  to  charter  a  ship  to  ourselves,  and  how  we 
are  to  move  about  there  when  we  get  out  with  all  these 
things  I  have  not  the  least  idea. " 

At  last  the  good-bys  were  all  finished,  the  visitors  had 


22  MAORI  AND  SETTLER, 

left  the  ship,  the  hawsers  were  thrown  off,  and  the  vessel 
began  to  move  slowly  toward  the  dock  gates.  As  soon 
as  she  had  issued  through  these  she  was  seized  by  a  tug, 
and  proceeded  in  tow  down  the  crowded  river.  There 
was  a  last  waving  of  handkerchiefs  and  hats  to  the  group 
of  people  standing  at  the  entrance  to  the  docks,  and  then 
the  passengers  began  to  look  round  and  examine  each 
other  and  the  ship.  Sailors  were  hard  at  work — the  last 
bales  and  boxes  were  being  lowered  into  the  hold,  ropes 
were  being  coiled  up,  and  tidiness  restored  to  the  deck. 
Parties  of  seamen  were  aloft  loosening  some  of  the  sails, 
for  the  wind  was  favorable,  and  the  captain  had  ordered 
some  of  the  canvas  to  be  set  to  assist  the  tug. 

"Now,  Marion,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said,  "we  had  better 
go  below  and  tidy  up  things  a  bit.  Wil,  you  may  as 
well  come  down  and  help  me  get  the  trunks  stowed  away 
under  the  berths,  and  put  some  hooks  in  for  the  brush- 
bags  and  other  things  we  have  brought;  the  hooks  and 
gimlet  are  in  my  handbag." 

Wilfrid  assisted  to  set  his  mother's  cabin  in  order,  and 
then  went  to  his  own.  It  was  a  good-sized  cabin,  and 
when  the  ship  was  full  accommodated  four  passengers; 
but  the  two  upper  bunks  had  now  been  taken  down,  and 
t^ere  was,  Wilfrid  thought,  ample  room  for  two.  On  his 
own  bunk  were  piled  his  two  portmanteaus,  a  gun-case,  a 
bundle  of  fishing  rods,  and  other  odds  and  ends,  and  a 
somewhat  similar  collection  of  luggage  was  on  that  op- 
posite. Wilfrid  read  the  name  on  the  labels.  "Ather- 
ton, "  he,  said;  "I  wonder  what  he  is  like.  I  do  hope  he 
will  be  a  nice  fellow." 

Scarcely  had  the  thought  passed  through  his  mind  when 
a  figure  appeared  at  the  cabin  door.  It  was  that  of  a 
tall,  stout  man,  with  immensely  broad  shoulders.  His 
age  Wilfrid  guessed  to  be  about  thirty-five.  He  had  a 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  23 

pleasant  face,  and  there  was  a  humorous  twinkle  in  hia 
eye  as  the  lad  looked  round  in  astonishment  at  the  figure 
completely  blocking  up  the  doorway. 

"So  you  are  Renshaw  ?"  the  big  man  said.  "I  congrat- 
ulate myself  and  you  that  your  dimensions  are  not  of  the 
largest.  My  name  is  Atherton,  as  I  dare  say  you  have 
seen  on  my  luggage.  Suppose  we  shake  hands,  Renshaw? 
It  is  just  as  well  to  make  friends  at  once,  as  we  have  got 
to  put  up  with  each  other  for  the  next  five  or  six  months. 
Of  course  you  are  a  little  appalled  at  my  size, ' '  he  went 
on,  as  he  shook  hands  with  the  lad.  "Most  people  are  at 
first,  but  nobody  is  so  much  appalled  as  I  am  myself. 
Still  it  has  its  amusing  side,  you  know.  I  don't  often 
get  into  an  omnibus,  because  I  do  not  think  it  is  fair;  but 
if  I  am  driven  to  do  so,  and  there  happen  to  be  five  people 
on  each  side,  the  expression  of  alarm  on  those  ten  faces 
when  I  appear  at  the  door  is  a  picture,  because  it  is  man- 
ifestly impossible  that  they  can  make  room  for  me  on 
either  side." 

"What  do  you  do,  sir?"  Wilfrid  asked,  laughing. 

"I  ask  one  of  them  to  change  sides.  That  leaves  two 
places  Vacant,  and  as  I  make  a  point  of  paying  for  two, 
we  get  on  comfortably  enough.  It  is  fortunate  there  are 
only  two  of  us  in  this  cabin.  If  I  have  the  bad  luck  to 
travel  in  a  full  ship  I  always  wait  until  the  others  are  in 
bed  before  I  turn  in,  and  get  up  in  the  morning  before 
they  are  astir ;  but  I  think  you  and  I  can  manage  pretty 
comfortably." 

"Then  you  have  traveled  a  good  deal,  sir?"  Wilfrid 
said. 

"I  am  always  traveling,"  the  other  replied.  "I  am 
like  the  fidgety  Phil  of  the  story  book,  who  could  never 
keep  still.  Most  men  of  my  size  are  content  to  take  life 
quietly,  but  that  is  not  so  with  me.  For  the  last  twelve 


24  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

or  thirteen  years  I  have  been  always  on  the  move,  and  1 
ought  to  b«  worn  down  to  a  thread  paper ;  but  unfortu- 
nately, as  you  see,  that  is  not  the  effect  of  travel  in  my 
case.  I  suppose  you  are  going  out  to  settle?" 

"Yes,  sir.  I  have  my  father,  mother,  and  sister  on 
board." 

"Lucky  fellow!"  Mr.  Atherton  said;  "I  have  no  rela- 
tions worth  speaking  of. ' ' 

"Are  you  going  to  settle  at  last,  sir?"  Wilfrid  asked. 

"No,  I  am  going  out  to  botanize.  I  have  a  mania  for 
botany,  and  New  Zealand,  you  know,  is  in  that  respect 
one  of  the  most  remarkable  regions  in  the  world,  and  it 
has  not  yet  been  explored  with  anything  approaching 
accuracy.  It  is  a  grand  field  for  discovery,  and  there  are 
special  points  of  interest  connected  with  it,  as  it  forms 
a  sort  of  connecting  link  between  the  floras  of  Australia, 
Asia,  and  South  America,  and  has  a  flora  of  its  own  en- 
tirely distinct  from  any  of  these.  Now  let  me  advise  you 
as  to  the  stowing  away  of  your  traps.  There  is  a  good 
deal  of  knack  in  these  things.  Have  you  got  your  port- 
manteaus packed  so  that  one  contains  all  the  things  you 
are  likely  to  require  for  say  the  first  month  of  your  voy- 
age, and  the  other  as  a  reserve  to  be  drawn  on  occasion- 
ally ?  because,  if  not,  I  should  advise  you  to  take  all  the 
things  out  and  to  arrange  them  in  that  way.  It  will  take 
you  a  little  time,  perhaps,  but  will  save  an.  immense 
amount  of  trouble  throughout  the  voyage." 

"Wilfrid  had  packed  his  trunks  with  things  as  they 
came  to  hand,  but  he  saw  the  advantage  of  following  his 
fellow-passenger's  advice,  and  accordingly  opened  his 
portmanteaus  and  piled  the  whole  of  their  contents  upon 
his  berth.  He  then  repacked  them,  Mr.  Atherton  sitting 
down  on  his  berth  and  giving  his  advice  as  to  the  trunk 
in  which  each  article  should  be  placed. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  25 

The  work  of  rearrangement  occupied  balf  an  hour,  and 
Wilfrid  often  congratulated  himself  during  the  voyage 
upon  the  time  so  spent.  "When  all  was  complete  and  the 
cabin  arranged  tidily,  "Wilfrid  looked  in  at  the  next  cabin. 
This  was  occupied  by  two  young  men  of  the  name  of 
Allen.  They  were  friends  of  an  acquaintance  of  Mr. 
Kenshaw,  who,  hearing  that  they  were  journeying  by  the 
same  ship  to  New  Zealand,  had  brought  them  down  to 
Eastbourne  Terrace  and  introduced  them  to  Mr.  Een- 
shaw  and  his  family.  The  two  were  occupied  in  arrang- 
ing their  things  in  the  cabin. 

"Well,  Renshaw, "  James,  the  elder  of  them,  said  when 
he  entered,  "I  am  afraid  I  cannot  congratulate  you  on 
your  fellow-passenger.  We  saw  him  go  into  your  cabin. 
He  is  a  tremendous  man.  He  would  be  magnificent  if 
he  were  not  so  stout.  Why,  you  will  scarce  find  room  to 
move!" 

"  'He  is  a  capital  fellow, "  Wilfrid  said.  'I  think  we  shall 
get  on  splendid  together.  He  is  full  of  fun,  and  makes 
all  sorts  of  jokes  about  his  own  size.  He  has  traveled 
a  tremendous  lot,  and  is  up  to  everything.  He  is  nothing 
like  so  old  as  you  would  think,  if  you  have  not  seen  his 
face.  I  do  not  think  he  is  above  thirty-five  or  so.  Well, 
as  I  see  you  have  just  finished,  I  will  go  up  and  see  how 
we  are  getting  on." 

When  Wilfrid  reached  the  deck  he  found  the  vessel 
was  off  Erith,  and  was  greeted  by  his  sister. 

"You  silly  boy,  you  have  been  missing  the  sight  of  all 
the  shipping,  and  of  Greenwich  Hospital.  The  idea  of 
stopping  below  all  this  time !  I  should  have  come  to  call 
you  up  if  I  had  known  which  was  your  room." 

"Cabin,  you  goose!"  Wilfrid  said;  "the  idea  of  talk- 
ing of  rooms  on  board  a  ship.  I  would  have  come  up  if 
I  had  thought  of  it ;  but  I  was  so  busy  putting  things  to 


$6  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

right  and  making  the  acquaintance  of  the  gentleman  in 
the  cabin  with  me  that  I  forgot  altogether  we  were  mov- 
ing down  the  river. 

"Which  is  he,  Wilfrid?" 

Wilfrid  laughed  and  nodded  in  the  direction  of  Mr. 
Atherton,  who  was  standing  with  his  back  toward  them  a 
short  distance  away. 

Marion's  eyes  opened  wide. 

"Oh,  Wil,  what  a  big  man!  He  must  quite  fill  up  the 
cabin." 

"He  seems  an  awfully  good  fellow,  Marion." 

"I  dare  say  he  may  be,  Wil;  but  he  will  certainly  take 
up  more  than  his  share  of  the  cabin." 

"It  is  awkward,  isn't  it,  young  lady?"  Mr.  Atherton 
said,  suddenly  turning  round  on  his  heel,  to  Marion's 
horror,  while  Wilfrid  flushed  scarlet,  for  he  had  not 
the  least  idea  that  his  words  could  be  heard.  "I  have 
capital  hearing,  you  see,"  Mr.  Atherton  went  on  with  a 
laugh,  "and  a  very  useful  sense  it  is  sometimes,  and  has 
stood  me  in  good  service  upon  many  occasions,  though  I 
own  that  it  effectually  prevents  my  cherishing  any  illu- 
sion as  to  my  personal  appearance.  This  is  your  sister, 
of  course,  Eenshaw ;  in  fact,  any  one  could  see  that  at  a 
glance.  There  is  nothing  like  making  acquaintances 
early  on  the  voyage ;  the  first  day  is  in  that  respect  the 
most  important  of  all." 

"Why  is  that?"  Marion  asked. 

"Because  as  a  rule  the  order  in  which  people  sit  down 
to  table  on  the  first  day  of  the  voyage  is  that  in  which 
they  sit  the  whole  time.  Now,  if  one  happens  to  sit 
one's  self  down  by  people  who  turn  out  disagreeable  it  is 
a  very  great  nuisance,  and  therefore  it  is  very  important 
to  find  out  a  little  about  one's  fellow-passengers  the  first 
day,  so  as  to  take  a  seat  next  to  some  one  whom  you  are 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  <tf 

not  likely  to  quarrel  with  before  you  have  been  a  week  at 
sea." 

"Then  they  do  not  arrange  places  for  you,  Mr.  Ather- 
ton?" 

"Oh,  no;  the  captain  perhaps  settles  as  to  who  are  to 
sit  up  by  him.  If  there  is  any  one  of  special  importance 
a  governor  or  vice-governor  or  any  other  big  wig,  he  and 
his  wife,  if  he  has  got  one,  will  probably  sit  next  to  the 
captain  on  one  side ;  if  not,  he  will  choose  some  one  who 
has  been  specially  introduced  to  him  or  who  has  sailed 
with  him  before,  and  the  steward,  before  the  party  sit 
down,  puts  their  names  on  their  plates;  everyone  else 
shifts  for  themselves.  Kenshaw,  I  shall  be  glad  if  you 
will  introduce  me  to  your  father  and  mother,  and  if  we 
get  on  well  I  will  -go  down  below  and  arrange  that  we  get 
places  together.  I  have  been  chatting  with  the  first  officer, 
who  is  a  very  pleasant  fellow;  I  have  sailed  with  him  be- 
fore. The  rule  is  he  sits  at  the  end  of  the  table  facing  the 
captain,  and  my  experience  is  that  when  the  first  officer 
happens  to  be  a  good  fellow,  which  is  not  always  the  case, 
his  end.  of  the  table  is  the  most  pleasant  place.  There 
is  generally  more  fun  and  laughing  at  that  end  than  there 
is  at  the  other ;  for  all  the  people  who  fancy  that  they  are 
of  importance  make  a  point  of  getting  seats  as  near  as 
they  can  to  the  captain,  and  important  people  are  not,  as 
a  rule,  anything  like  as  pleasant  as  the  rest  of  us." 

Wilfrid  walked  across  the  deck  with  Mr.  Atherton  to 
the  point  where  his  father  and  mother  were  sitting. 
"Mother,  this  is  Mr.  Atherton  who  is  in  my  cabin.  "Mr. 
Atherton  shook  hands  with  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Eenshaw. 

"I  asked  your  son  to  introduce  me  at  once,  Mrs.  Een- 
shaw, because,  as  I  have  been  telling  him,  a  good  deal  of 
the  comfort  of  the  voyage  depends  upon  making  a  snug 
little  party  to  sit  together  at  meals.  There  is  nothing  I 


28  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

dread  more  than  being  put  down  between  two  acidulated 
women,  who  make  a  point  of  showing  by  their  manner 
every  time  one  sits  down  that  they  consider  one  is  taking 
up  a  great  deal  more  than  one's  share  of  the  seat." 

Mrs.  Renshaw  smiled.  "I  should  think  people  were 
not  often  as  rude  as  that. 

"I  can  assure  you  that  it  is  the  rule  rather  than  the 
exception,  Mrs  Renshaw.  I  am  not  a  particularly  sensi- 
tive man,  I  think;  but  I  make  a  point  of  avoiding 
crowded  railway  carriages,  being  unable  to  withstand  the 
expression  of  blank  dismay  that  comes  over  the  faces  of 
people  when  I  present  myself  at  the  door.  I  have  thought 
sometimes  of  hiring  a  little  boy  of  about  four  years  old 
to  go  about  with  me,  as  the  two  of  us  would  then  only 
take  up  a  fair  share  of  space.  I  have  been  looking  to  the 
cabin  arrangements,  and  find  that  each  seat  holds  three. 
Your  son  and  daughter  are  neither  of  them  bulky,  so  if 
they  won't  mind  sitting  a  little  close  they  will  be  con- 
ferring a  genuine  kindness  upon  me." 

"We  shall  not  mind  at  all,"  Wilfrid  and  Marion  ex- 
claimed together,  for  there  was  something  so  pleasant 
about  Mr.  Atherton's  manner  they  felt  that  he  would  be 
a  delightful  companion. 

"Very  well,  then;  we  will  regard  that  as  settled.  Then 
we  five  will  occupy  the  seats  on  one  side  of  the  chief 
officer." 

"We  will  get  the  two  Aliens  opposite,"  Wilfrid  put  in. 

"I  will  look  about  for  three  others  to  make  up  what  I 
may  call  our  party.  Who  do  you  fancy,  Mrs.  Renshaw? 
Now  look  round  and  fix  on  somebody,  and  I  will  under- 
take the  duty  of  engineering  the  business." 

"There  are  two  girls,  sisters,  in  my  cabin,"  Marion 
said.  "I  think  they  seem  nice.  They  are  going  out 
alone  to  join  their  father  and  mother  in  New  Zealand." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  29 

"In  that  case,  Mrs.  Renshaw,  I  had  better  leave  the 
matter  in  your  hands.'' 

"That  will  be  very  simple,  Mr.  Atherton,  as  I  have 
already  spoken  to  them,"  and  she  at  once  got  up  and 
moved  across  to  two  girls  of  about  thirteen  and  seventeen 
respectively,  who  were  standing  together  watching  the 
passing  ships,  and  entered  into  conversation  with  them. 
When  she  proposed  that,  as  they  were  in  the  same  cabin 
with  Marion,  they  should  sit  near  each  other  at  table, 
they  gladly  agreed,  saying,  however,  that  they  had  been 
placed  under  the  special  care  of  the  captain,  and  as  he 
had  said  that  he  would  keep  them  under  his  eye,  they 
were  afraid  he  might  want  them  to  sit  near  him. 

"I  will  speak  to  the  captain  myself,"  Mrs.  Eenshaw 
said.  "I  dare  say  he  will  be  rather  glad  to  have  the 
responsibility  taken  ofJ  his  hands,  especially  if  I  propose, 
which  I  will  if  you  like,  to  take  you  under  my  general 
charge. ' ' 

"Oh,  we  should  like  that  very  much,"  the  elder  of  the 
two  girls  said.  "It  seems  BO  very  strange  to  us  being 
here  among  so  many  people  without  any  lady  with  us. 
We  should  be  so  much  obliged  to  you  if  you  would  take 
us  under  your  wing." 

"I  can  quite  understand  your  feelings,  my  dears,  and 
will  speak  to  the  captain  directly.  I  see  that  he  is 
disengaged.  If  we  were  under  sail  there  would  not  be 
much  chance  of  getting  a  word  with  him ;  but  as  the  tug 
has  us  in  charge,  I  see  that  he  has  time  to  chat  to  the 
passengers. ' ' 

A  few  minutes  later  the  captain  left  the  gentleman  with 
whom  he  was  speaking  and  came  along  the  deck.  The 
Renshaws  had  made  his  acquaintance  when  they  first  came 
down  to  see  their  cabins. 

"How  are  you,  Mrs.  Renshaw?"  he  said  as  he  came  up 


30  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

to  her.  "We  have  fine  weather  for  our  start,  have  we 
not?  It  is  a  great  thing  starting  fair,  as  it  enables  people 
to  settle  down  and  make  themselves  at  home." 

"I  have  been  chatting  with  the  Miss Mitf ords,  captain; 
they  are  in  the  cabin  with  my  daughter.  They  tell  me 
that  they  are  under  your  special  charge." 

"Yes,  they  are  among  the  number  of  my  responsibil- 
ities," the  captain  said,  smiling. 

"They  naturally  feel  rather  lonely  on  board  from  hav- 
ing no  lady  with  them,  and  have  expressed  their  willing- 
ness to  put  themselves  under  my  charge  if  you  will  sanc- 
tion it.  It  will  be  pleasant  both  for  them  and  my 
daughter,  and  they  can  sit  down  with  us  at  meals,  and 
make  a  party  together  to  work  or  read  on  deck." 

"I  shall  be  extremely  glad,  Mrs.  Eenshaw,  if  you  will 
accept  the  responsibility.  A  captain's  hands  are  full 
enough  without  having  to  look  after  women.  There  are 
four  or  five  single  ladies  on  board,  on  all  of  whom  I  have 
promised  to  keep  a  watchful  eye,  and  I  shall  be  delighted 
to  be  relieved  of  the  responsibility  of  two  of  them. " 

So  the  matter  was  arranged,  and  going  down  into  the 
cabin  a  few  minutes  before  the  bell  rang  for  dinner,  the 
party  succeeded  in  getting  the  places  they  desired.  Mr. 
Atherton  was  next  to  the  chief  officer.  Wilfrid  sat  next 
to  him,  Marion  between  her  brother  and  Mrs.  Eenshaw, 
and  Mr.  Eenshaw  next.  The  two  Aliens  faced  Mr.  Ather- 
ton and  Wilfrid;  the  Miss  Mitf  ords  came  next,  facing 
Marion  and  her  mother.  A  Captain  Pearson  and  his  wife 
were  next  to  the  Mitf  ords,  while  a  civil  engineer,  Mr. 
Halbrook,  occupied  the  vacant  seatrnext  to  Mr.  Eenshaw. 
Once  seated,  the  Eenshaws  speedily  congratulated  them- 
selves on  the  arrangements  that  they  had  made  as  they 
saw  the  hesitating  way  in  which  the  rest  of  the  passen- 
gers took  their  places,  and  the  looks  of  inquiry  and  doubt 


31 

they  cast  at  those  who  seated  themselves  next  to  them. 
For  a  time  the  meal  was  a  silent  one,  friends  talking  to- 
gether in  low  voices,  but  nothing  like  a  general  conversa- 
tion being  attempted.  At  the  first  officer's  end  of  the 
table,  however,  the  sound  of  conversation  and  laughter 
began  at  once. 

"Have  you  room,  Miss  Kenshaw?  or  do  you  already 
begin  to  regret  your  bargain?" 

"I  have   plenty  of  room,  thank  you,"  Marion  replied. 
"I  hope  that  you  have  enough?" 

"Plenty,"  Mr.  Atherton  answered.  "I  have  just  been 
telling  your  brother  that  if  he  finds  I  am  squeezing  him 
he  must  run  his  elbow  into  my  ribs.  Let  me  see,  Mr. 
Ryan ;  it  must  be  three  years  since  we  sat  together. ' ' 

"Just  about  that,  "the  mate  replied  with  a  strong  Irish 
accent.  "You  went  with  us  from  Japan  to  Singapore, 
did  you  not?" 

"That  was  it,  and  a  rough  bout  we  had  of  it  in  that 
cyclone  in  the  China  Seas.  You  remember  that  I  saved 
the  ship  then?" 

"How  was  that,  Mr.  Atherton?"  Wilfrid  asked. 

The  first  officer  laughed.  "Mr.  Atherton  always  took 
a  deal  more  credit  to  himself  than  we  gave  him.  When 
the  cyclone  struck  the  ship  and  knocked  her  right  down 
on  her  beam-ends,  he  happened  to  be  sitting  up  to  wind- 
ward, and  he  always  declared  that  if  it  hadn't  been  for 
his  weight  the  ship  "would  never  have  righted  itself." 

There  was  a  general  laugh  at  the  mate's  explanation. 

"I  always  plant  myself  to  windward  in  a  gale,"  Mr. 
Atherton  said  gravely.  "Shifting  ballast  is  a  most  useful 
thing,  although  they  have  abolished  it  in  yacht-racing. 
I  was  once  in-  a  canoe,  down  by  Borneo,  when  a  heavy 
squall  struck  us.  I  was  sitting  in  the  bottom  of  the  boat 
when  we  saw  it  coming,  and  had  just  time  to  get  up  and 


32  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

sit  on  the  weather  gunwale  when  it  struck  us.  If  it  had 
not  been  for  me  nothing  could  have  saved  the  boat  from 
capsizing.  As  it  was  it  stood  up  as  stiff  as  a  roc?,  though 
I  own  I  nearly  drowned  them  all  when  the  blow  was  over, 
for  it  stopped  as  suddenly  as  it  began,  and  the  boat  as 
nearly  as  possible  capsized  with  my  weight.  Indeed  it 
would  have  done  so  altogether  if  it  hadn't  heeled  over  so 
sharply  that  I  was  chucked  backward  into  the  sea.  For- 
tunately the  helmsman  made  a  grab  at  me  as  I  went  past, 
and  I  managed  to  scramble  on  board  again.  Not  that  I 
should  have  sunk,  for  I  can  float  like  a  cork ;  but  there 
are  a  good  many  sharks  cruising  about  in  those  waters, 
and  it  is  safer  inside  a  boat  than  it  is  out.  You  see,  Miss 
Renshaw,  there  are  advantages  in  being  stout.  I  should 
not  wonder  if  your  brother  got  just  my  size  one  day. 
My  figure  was  very  much  like  his  once." 

"Oh,  I  hope  not!"  Marion  exclaimed.  "That  would  be 
dreadful!  No;  I  don't  mean  that,  "she  went  on  hurriedly, 
as  Mri  Atherton's  face  assumed  an  expression  of  shocked 
surprise.  "I  mean  that,  although  of  course  there  may 
be  many  advantages  in  being  stout,  there  are  advantages 
in  being  thin  too." 

"I  admit  that,"Mr.  Atherton  agreed;  "but  look  at  the 
disadvantages.  A  stout  man  escapes  being  sent  trotted 
about  on  messages.  Nobody  would  think  of  asking  him 
to  climb  a  ladder.  He  is  not  expected  to  dance.  The 
thin  man  is  squeezed  into  any  odd  corner;  and  is  not 
treated  with  half  the  consideration  that  is  given  to  a  fat 
man.  He  worries  about  trifles,  and  has  none  of  the  quiet 
contentment  that  characterizes  stout  people.  A  stout 
man's  food  always  agrees  with  him,  or  else  he  would  not 
be  stout,  while  the  thin  man  suffers  indigestion,  dyspep- 
sia, and  perhaps  jaundice.  You  see,  my  dear  young 
lady,  that  almost  all  the  advantages  are  on  our  side.  Of 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  33 

coarse  you  will  say  I  could  not  climb  a  ladder,  but  then 
I  do  not  want  to  climb  a  ladder.  I  could  not  make  the 
ascent  of  Matterhorn ;  but  it  is  much  more  pleasant  to  sit 
at  the  bottom  and  see  fools  do  it.  I  could  not  very  well 
ride  a  horse  unless  it  were  a  dray  horse ;  but  then  I  have 
no  partiality  for  horse  exercise.  Altogether  I  think  I 
have  every  reason  to  be  content,  I  can  travel  wherever  I 
like,  see  whatever  I  want  to  see,  and  enjoy  most  of  the 
good  things  of  life." 

"And  hould  your  own  in  a  scrimmage,"  Mr.  Ryan  put 
in,  laughing.  "I  can  answer  for  that." 

"If  I  am  pushed  to  it, "  Mr.  Atherton  said  modestly, 
"of  course  I  try  to  do  my  best." 

"Have  you  seen  Mr.  Atherton  in  a  scrimmage?"  Tom 
Allen  asked  the  mate. 

"I  have;  and  a  sharp  one  it  was  while  it  lasted. " 

"There  is  no  occasion  to  say  anything  about  it,  Ryan," 
Mr.  Atherton  said  hastily. 

"But  no  reason  in  life  why  I  should  not, "  the  mate 
replied.  "What  do  you  say,  ladies  and  gentlemen?" 

There  was  a  chorus  of  "Go  on,  please,  do  let  us  hear 
about" it, "  and  he  continued: 

"I  don't  give  Mr.  Atherton  the  credit  of  saving  our 
ship  in  the  squall ;  but  it  would  have  gone  badly  with  us 
if  he  hadn't  taken  part  in  the  row  we  had.  You  see,  we 
had  a  mixed  crew  on  board,  for  the  most  part  Chinamen 
and  a  few  Lascars ;  for  we  were  three  years  in  the  China 
Seas,  and  English  sailors  cannot  well  stand  the  heat  out 
there,  and  besides  don't  like  remaining  in  ships  stopping 
there  trading.  So  when,  after  we  arrived  at  Shanghai, 
we  got  orders  to  stop  and  trade  out  there,  most  of  them 
took  their  discharge,  and  we  filled  up  with  natives. 
Coming  down  from  Japan  that  voyage  there  was  a  row. 
I  forget  what  their  pretext  was  now,  but  I  have  no  doubt 


34  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

it  \va8  an  arranged  thing,  and  that  they  intended  to  take 
the  ship  and  run  her  ashore  on  some  of  the  islands,  take 
•what  they  fancied  out  of  her,  and  make  off  in  boats,  or 
perhaps  take  her  into  one  of  those  nests  of  pirates  that 
abound  among  the  islands. 

"They  felt  so  certain  of  overpowering  us,  for  there 
were  only  the  three  officers,  the  boatswain,  and  two  cabin 
passengers,  that  instead  of  rising  by  night,  when  they 
would  no  doubt  have  succeeded,  they  broke  into~mutiny 
at  dinner-time — came  aft  in  a  body,  clamoring  that  their 
food  was  unfit  to  eat.  Then  suddenly  drawing  weapons 
from  beneath  their  clothes  they  rushed  up  the  gangway 
on  to  the  poop ;  and  as  none  of  us  were  armed,  and  had 
no  idea  of  what  was  going  to  take  place,  they  would  have 
cut  us  down  almost  without  resistance  had  it  not  been 
for  our  friend  here.  He  was  standing  just  at  the  top  of 
the  poop  ladder  when  they  came  up,  headed  by  their  sera- 
ing.  Mr.  Atherton  knocked  the  scoundrel  down  with  a 
blow  of  his  fist,  and  then,  catching  him  by  the  ankles, 
whirled  him  round  his  head  like  a  club  and  knocked  the 
fellows  down  like  ninepins  as  they  swarmed  up  the  gang- 
way, armed  with  knives  and  creases. 

"The  captain,  who  was  down  below,  had  slammed  and 
fastened  the  door  opening  on  to  the  waist  on  seeing  the 
fellows  coming  aft,  and  handed  up  to  vis  through  the  sky- 
light some  loaded  muskets,  and  managed,  by  standing  on 
the  table  and  taking  our  hands,  to  get  up  himself.  Then 
we  opened  fire  upon  them,  and  in  a  very  few  minutes 
drove  them  down.  "We  shot  six  of  them.  The  seraing 
of  course  was  killed,  four  of  the  others  had  their  skulls 
fairly  broken  in  by  the  blows  that  they  had  received, 
and  five  werfc  knocked  senseless.  We  chucked  them 
down  the  hatchway  to  the  others,  had  up  four  or  five  of 
the  men  to  work  the  ship,  and  kept  the  rest  fastened 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  35 

below  until  we  got  to  Singapore  and  handed  them  over  to 
the  authorities.  They  all  got  long  terms  of  penal  servi- 
tude. Anyhow,  Mr.  Atherton  saved  our  lives  and  the 
ship,  so  I  think  you  will  agree  with  me  that  he  can  hold 
his  own  in  a  scrimmage. ' ' 

"It  was  very  hot  work,"  Mr.  Atherton  said  with  a 
laugh,  "and  I  did  not  get  cool  again  for  two  or  three 
days  afterward.  The  idea  of  using  a  man  as  a  club  was 
not  my  own.  BeJzoni  put  down  a  riot  among  his  Arab 
laborers,  when  he  was  excavating  ruins  somewhere  out 
in  Syria,!  think  it  was,  by  knocking  the  ringleader  down 
and  using  him  as  a  club.  I  had  been  reading  the  book 
not  long  before,  and  it  flashed  across  my  mind  as  the 
seraing  went  down  that  he  might  be  utilized.  Fists  are 
all  very  well,  but  when  you  have  got  fellows  to  deal  with 
armed  with  knives  and  other  cutting  instruments  it  is 
better  to  keep  them  at  a  distance  if  you  can." 

"That  was  splendid!"  Wilfrid  exclaimed.  "How  I 
should  like  to  have  seen  it!" 

"It  was  good  for  the  eyes,"  the  mate  said;  "and  bate 
Donny brook  entirely.  Such  a  yelling  and  shouting  as 
the  yellow  reptiles  made  you  never  heard." 

By  this  time  the  meal  was  finished,  and  the  passengers 
repaired  on  deck  to  find  that  the  ship  was  just  passing 
Sheerness. 

"Who  would  have  thought,"  Wilfrid  said  to  his  sister 
as  he  looked  at  Mr.  Atherton,  who  had  taken  his  seat  in 
a  great  Indian  reclining  chair  he  had  brought  for  his  own 
use,  and  was  placidly  smoking  a  cigar,  "that  that  easy, 
placid,  pleasant-looking  man  could  be  capable  of  such  a 
thing  as  that!  Shouldn't  I  like  to  have  been  there!" 

"So  should  I, "Marion  agreed;  "though  it  must  have 
been  terrible  to  look  at.  He  doesn't  look  as  if  anything 
•would  put  him  out.  I  expect  Samson  was  something 


36  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

like  him,  only  not  so  stout.  He  seems  to  have  been  very 
good-tempered  except  when  people  wanted  to  capture 
him ;  and  was  always  ready  to  forgive  that  horrid  woman 
who  tried  to  betray  him  to  his  enemies.  Well,  every- 
thing is  very  nice — much  nicer  than  I  expected — and  I 
feel  sure  that  we  shall  enjoy  the  voyage  very  much." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  37 


CHAPTER    III. 

THE    VOYAGE. 

IN  addition  to  those  already  named,  the  Flying  Scud 
carried  some  twenty  other  cabin  passengers.  She  took 
no  emigrants  forward,  as  she  was  full  of  cargo,  and  was 
not,  moreover,  going  direct  to  New  Zealand.  There  were 
therefore  only  three  or  four  young  men  in  addition  to 
the  Grimstones  forward.  The  fine  weather  that  had 
favored  the  start  accompanied  them  dow.n  the  channel  and 
across  the  bay.  Life  went  on  quietly  on  board.  It  was 
early  in  May  when  they  started ;  and  the  evenings  were 
still  too  chilly  to  permit  of  any  sojourn  on  deck  after 
sunset.  Each  day,  however,  the  weather  grew  warmer, 
and  by  the  time  the  vessel  was  off  the  coast  of  Portugal 
the  evenings  were  warm  and  balmy. 

"This  is  not  at  all  what  I  expected,"  Marion  Kenshaw 
said,  as  she  sat  in  a  deck-chair,  to  Mr.  Atherton,  who 
was  leaning  against  the  bulwark  smoking  a  cigar.  "I 
thought  we  were  going  to  have  storms,  and  that  every 
one  was  going  to  be  seasick.  That  is  what  it  is  like  in 
all  the  books  I  have  read;  and  I  am  sure  that  I  have  not 
felt  the  least  bit  ill  from  the  time  we  started." 

"You  have  had  everything  in  your  favor.  There  has 
been  just  enough  breeze  to  take  us  along  at  a  fair  rate 
with  all  our  light  canvas  set,  and  yet  not  enough  to  cause 
more  than  a  ripple  on  the  sea.  The  ship  has  been  as 
steady  as  if  in  port;  but  you  must  not  flatter  yourself 
this  is  going  to  last  all  the  time.  I  think  we  shall  have 


38  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

a  change  before  long.  The  glass  has  fallen  a  little,  and 
the  wind  has  shifted  its  quarter  two  or  three  times  during 
the  day.  The  sky,  too,  does  not  look  so  settled  as  it  has 
done.  I  think  we  shall  have  a  blow  before  long." 

"What!     A  storm,  Mr.  Atherton?" 

"No,  I  don't  say  that;  but  wind  enough  to  get  up  a 
bit  of  sea,  and  to  make  landsmen  feel  very  uncomfort- 
able." 

"But  I  suppose  we  should  not  be  ill  now  even  if  it  w^re 
rough,  after  being  a  week  at  sea?" 

"I  do  not  think  you  would  be  likely  to  be  ill  so  long  as 
you  might  have  been  had  you  encountered  a  gale  directly 
we  got  out  of  the  river,  but  I  think  that  if  it  comes  on 
rough  all  those  addicted  to  seasickness  are  likely  to  suffer 
more  or  less.  Some  people  are  ill  every  time  rough 
weather  comes  along,  however  long  the  voyage.  I  sup- 
pose you  don't  know  yet  whether  you  are  a  good  sailor 
or  not?" 

Marion  shook  her  head.  "We  have  been  at  the  seaside 
almost  every  year,  but  we  have  never  gone  out  in  boats 
much  there.  Papa  was  always  too  busy  to  go,  and  I 
don't  think  he  likes  it.  Mother  gets  a  bad  headache, 
even  if  she  isn't  ill.  So  I  very  seldom  went  out,  and 
never  when  it  was  the  least  rough." 

Mr.  Atherton 's  predictions  turned  out  well  founded. 
The  wind  got  up  during  the  night  and  was  blowing 
freshly  in  the  morning,  and  only  two  or  three  of  the  lady 
passengers  made  their  appearance  at  breakfast;  and  sev- 
eral of  the  gentlemen  were  also  absent.  Wilfrid,  to  his 
great  satisfaction,  felt  so  far  no  symptoms  whatever  of 
impending  illness.  The  two  Aliens  were  obliged  to  keep 
on  deck  during  the  meal,  being  unable  to  stand  the 
motion  below;  but  they  were  well  enough  to  enjoy  the 
cup  of  tea  and  plate  of  cold  meat  Wilfrid  carried  up  to 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER  39 

them.  An  hour  or  two  later  they  went  below.  The 
wind  was  rising  and  the  sea  hourly  getting  up.  Marion 
came  up  after  breakfast,  and  for  some  time  afterward 
walked  up  and  down  on  the  deck  with  Wilfrid,  enjoying 
the  brisk  air,  and  considering  it  great  fun  to  try  to  walk 
straight  up  and  down  the  swaying  deck.  Presently, 
however,  her  laugh  became  subdued  and  her  cheeks  lost 
their  color. 

"'I  am  afraid  I  am  going  to  be  ill,  Wilfrid;  but  I  shall 
stay  on  deck  if  I  can.  Both  the  Mitfords  are  ill,  I  am 
sure,  for  neither  of  them  got  up,  though  they  de 
that  they  felt  nothing  the.  matter  with  them.  I  Lave 
made  up  my  mind  to  stay  on  deck  as  long  as  I  possibly 
can." 

"That  is  the  best  way,"  Mr.  Atherton  said  as  he 
joined  them  in  their  walk,  and  caught  the  last  sentence. 
"There  is  nothing  like  keeping  up  as  long  as  possible; 
because  if  you  do  so  it  will  sometimes  pass  off  after  a 
short  time,  whereas  if  you  give  up  and  take  to  your  berth 
it  is  sure  to  run  its  course,  which  is  longer  or  shorter 
according  to  circumstances — sometimes  two  days  and 
sometimes  five ;  but  I  should  say  that  people  who  are 
what  you  may  call  fair  sailors  generally  get  over  it  in 
two  days,  unless  the  weather  is  very  bad.  So  fight 
against  it  as  long  as  you  can,  and  when  you  cannot  bear 
it  any  longer  I  will  wrap  you  up  in  rugs,  and  you  shall 
have  my  great  chair  to  curl  up  in  close  by  the  lee  bul- 
wark. But  determination  goes  a  long  way,  and  you  may 
get  over  it  yet.  You  take  my  arm,  you.  won't  throw  me 
off  my  balance ;  while  if  the  vessel  gives  a  sharper  roll 
than  usual,  you  and  your  brother  may  both  lose  your 
feet  together. " 

As  soon  as  they  started  on  their  walk  Mr.  Atherton 
began  an  amusing  story  of  some  adventure  of  his  in  the 


40  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"Western  States  of  America,  and  Marion  was  so  interested 
that  she  forgot  all  about  her  uncomfortable  sensation, 
and  was  astonished  when  on  hearing  the  lunch-bell  ring 
she  discovered  she  was  getting  perfectly  well. 

"Where  is  Wilfrid?"  she  asked. 

"There  he  is,  leaning  over  the  lee  bulwark;  the  fiend 
of  seasickness  has  him  in  its  grip." 

"Only  think  of  Wilfrid  being  unwell  and  me  being  all 
right!  You  have  quite  driven  it  away,  Mr.  Atherton,  for 
I  was  feeling  very  poorly  when  I  began  to  walk  with 
you." 

"I  will  go  down  and  get  you  some  luncheon  and  bring 
it  up  here  to  you.  Curl  yourself  up  in  my  chair  until  I 
return,  and  do  not  think  more  about  the  motion  than 
you  can  help.  You  had  better  not  go  near  your  brother 
— people  who  are  ill  hate  being  pitied." 

An  hour  later  Wilfrid  went  below.  In  the  evening, 
however,  the  wind  dropped  considerably,  and  the  next 
morning  the  sea  was  sparkling  in  the  sunlight,  and  the 
Flying  Scud  was  making  her  way  along  with  a  scarcely 
perceptible  motion.  Thenceforth  the  weather  was  de- 
lightful throughout  the  voyage  to  Rio.  The  passengers 
found  upon  closer  acquaintance  that  they  all  got  on  well 
together,  and  the  days  passed  away  pleasantly.  In  the 
evenings  the  piano  was  brought  up  from  the  cabin  on  to 
the  deck,  and  for  two  or  three  hours  there  was  singing, 
varied  by  an  occasional  dance  among  the  young  people. 

From  the  day  of  their  leaving  England  Mr.  Atherton 
had  been  the  leading  spirit  on  board  the  ship.  If  a  mis- 
understanding arose  he  acted  as  mediator.  He  was  ever 
ready  to  propose  pastimes  and  amusements  to  lighten  the 
monotony  of  the  voyage,  took  the  leading  part  in  the 
concerts  held  on  deck  when  the  evenings  were  calm  and 
clear,  and  was  full  of  resource  and  invention.  With  the 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  41 

four  or  five  children  on  board  he  was  a  prime  favorite, 
and  Mr.  Renshaw  often  wondered  at  the  patience  and 
good  temper  with  which  he  submitted  to  all  their  whims, 
and  was  ready  to  give  up  whatever  he  was  doing  to  sub- 
mit himself  to  their  orders.  He  had,  before  they  had 
been  ten  days  at  sea,  talked  over  with  Mr.  Renshaw  the 
latter's  plans,  and  advised  him  upon  no  account  to  be  in 
a  hurry  to  snap  up  the  first  land  offered  to  him. 

"Half  the  people  who  come  out  to  the  colonies,"  he 
said,  "get  heavily  bit  at  first  by  listening  to  the  land 
agents,  and  allowing  themselves  to  be  persuaded  into 
buying  property  which,  when  they  come  to  take  posses- 
sion of  it,  is  in  a  majority  of  the  cases  almost  worthless. 
I  should  advise  you  when  you  get  there  to  hire  a  house 
in  Wellington,  where  you  can  leave  your  wife  and  daugh- 
ter while  you  examine  the  various  districts  and  see  which 
offer  the  greatest  advantages.  If  you  do  not  feel  equal 
to  it  yourself,  let  your  son  go  in  your  place.  He  is,  I 
think,  a  sharp  young  fellow,  and  not  likely  to  be  easily 
taken  in.  At  any  rate,  when  he  has  made  his  report  as 
to  the  places  that  seem  most  suitable,  you  can  go  and  see 
their  relative  advantages  before  purchasing. 

"There  is  no  greater  mistake  than  buying  land  in  a 
locality  of  which  you  know  nothing.  You  may  find  that 
the  roads  are  impracticable,  and  that  you  have  no  means 
of  getting  your  produce  to  market,  and  after  awhile  you 
will  be  glad  to  sell  your  place  for  a  mere  song,  and  shift 
to  another,  which  you  might  at  first  have  obtained  at  a 
price  much  lower  than  you  gave  for  your  worthless  farm. 
1  have  knocked  about  in  the  States  a  good  deal,  and  have 
known  scores  of  men  ruined  by  being  too  hasty  in  mak- 
ing a  choice.  You  want  to  be  in  a  colony  six  months  at 
least  before  investing  your  money  in  land,  so  as  to  know 
something  of  the  capabilities  and  advantages  of  each 


42  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

district.  To  a  young  man  I  should  say — travel  about  in 
the  colony,  working  your  way,  and  making  a  stay  of  a 
month  here  and  a  month  there.  Of  course  in  your  case 
this  is  out  of  the  question ;  but  a  personal  examination 
of  the  places  offered  to  you,  which  in  nine  cases  out  of 
ten  men  are  ready  to  sell  for  less  than  they  have  cost 
them,  will  insure  you  against  absolute  swindling." 
"What  are  you  going  to  do  yourself,  Mr.  Atherton?" 
"I  have  come  out  simply  to  study  the  botany  of  the 
island.  I  may  stay  in  the  colony  for  a  month  or  for  a 
year.  At  any  rate,  if  you  depute  "Wilfrid  to  travel  about 
to  examine  the  various  districts  where  land  can  be 
bought,  I  shall  be  glad  to  accompany  him,  as  I  myself 
shall  also  be  on  the  lookout. " 

"You  are  not  thinking  of  farming,  Mr.  Atherton?" 
"No.  My  own  idea  is  to  take  a  bit  of  land  on  one  of 
the  rivers,  to  get  up  a  hut  to  serve  as  my  headquarters, 
and  to  spend  much  of  my  time  in  traveling  about.  I  am 
very  fortunately  placed.  I  have  ample  funds  to  enable 
me  to  live  in  comfort,  and  I  am  free  to  indulge  my  fancy 
for  wandering  as  I  please.  I  consider  that  I  have  been 
spoiled  by  being  my  own  master  too  young.  I  think  it 
is  bad  for  a  young  man  to  start  in  life  with  a  competence ; 
but  when  it  comes  to  one  in  middle  age,  when  one  has 
learned  to  spend  it  rationally,  it  is  undoubtedly  a  very 
great  comfort  and  advantage.  I  suppose,  however,  that 
the  time  will  come  when  I  shall  settle  down.  I  am 
thirty-five,  and  I  ought  to  'range  myself,'  as  the  French 
say." 

Mr.  Atherton  had  not  been  long  upon  the  voyage  when 
he  discovered  that  the  chances  of  success  of  the  Renshaw 
party  as  settlers  would  be  small  indeed  if  they  depended 
upon  the  exertions  of  the  head  of  the  family.  He  had 
not  been  more  than  a  day  or  two  on  board  before  Mr. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  43 

Benshaw  began  to  discuss  his  favorite  hobby  with  him, 
a"nd  confided  to  him  that  he  intended  thoroughly  to  in- 
vestigate the  history,  customs,  and  religion  of  the  Maoris, 
and  to  produce  an  exhaustive  work  on  the  subject.  "An 
excellent  idea,  very,"  the  stout  man  said  encouragingly, 
"but  one  demanding  great  time  and  investigation;  and 
perhaps, "  he  added  doubtfully,  "one  more  suited  to  a 
single  man,  who  can  go  and  live  among  the  natives  and 
speak  their  language,  than  for  a  married  man  with  a 
family  to  look  after." 

Mr.  Kenshaw  waved  the  remark  aside  lightly.  "I 
shall,  of  course,  set  to  work  immediately  I  arrive  to  ac- 
quire a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  language,  and  indeed 
have  already  begun  with  a  small  dictionary  and  a  New 
Testament  in  the  Maori  language,  brought  out  by  the 
Missionary  Society.  As  to  my  family,  my  exertions  in 
the  farming  way  will  be  of  no  use  whatever  to  them. 
My  wife  and  daughter  will  look  after  the  house,  and  Wil- 
frid will  undertake  the  management  of  the  men  out  of 
doors.  The  whole  scheme  is  theirs,  and  I  should  be  of 
no  assistance  to  them  whatever.  My  bent  lies  entirely 
in  the  direction  of  archaeology,  and  there  can  be  little 
doubt  that  my  thorough  acquaintance  with  all  relating 
to  the  habits,  and,  so  far  as  is  known,  of  the  language  of 
the  ancient  Britons,  Saxons,  Danes  and  the  natives  of 
the  northern  part  of  the  island,  will  be  of  inestimable 
advantage  in  enabling  me  to  carry  out  the  subject  I  have 
resolved  to  take  up.  There  are  analogies  and  similarities 
between  the  habits  of  all  primitive  peoples,  and  one 
accustomed  to  the  study  of  the  early  races  of  Europe  can 
from  a  general  opinion  of  the  habits  and  mode  of  living 
of  a  tribe  merely  from  the  inspection  of  an  ancient 
weapon  or  two,  a  bracelet,  and  a  potsherd." 

Mr.  Atherton  looked  down  upon  his  companion  with 


44  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

half-closed  eyes,  and  seemed  to  be  summing  him  up 
mentally ;  after  a  short  conversation  he  turned  away,  and 
as  he  filled  his  pipe  muttered  to  himself:  "It  is  well  for 
the  family  that  the  mother  seems  a  capable  and  sensible 
woman,  and  that  the  lad,  unless  I  am  mistaken,  has  a 
dogged  resolution  about  him  as  well  as  spirit  and  cour- 
age. The  girl,  too,  is  a  bright,  sensible  lass,  and  they 
may  get  on  in  spite  of  this  idiot  of  a  father.  However, 
the  man  shows  that  he  possesses  a  certain  amount  of 
sense  by  the  confidence  with  which  he  throws  the  burden 
of  the  whole  business  of  providing  a  living  for  the  family 
on  their  shoulders. 

"Of  course  they  would  be  much  better  without  him, 
for  I  can  foresee  he  will  give  them  an  awful  lot  of  trouble. 
He  will  go  mooniug  away  among  the  natives,  and  will  be 
getting  lost  and  not  heard  of  for  a  tremendous  time. 
Still,  I  don't  know  that  he  will  come  to  much  harm. 
The  Maoris  have  fine  traits  of  character,  and  though 
they  have  been  fighting  about  what  they  call  the  king 
question,  they  have  seldom  been  guilty  of  any  acts  of 
hostility  to  isolated  settlers,  and  a  single  white  man 
going  among  them  has  always  been  received  hospitably ; 
beside,  they  will  probably  think  him  mad,  and  savages 
have  always  a  sort  of  respect  for  madmen.  Still,  he  will 
be  a  terrible  worry  to  his  family.  I  have  taken  a  fancy 
to  the  others,  and  if  I  can  do  them  a  good  turn  out  there 
in  any  way  I  will. " 

As  the  voyage  went  on  Mr.  Atherton's  liking  for  Mrs. 
Eenshaw,  her  son  and  daughter,  increased  greatly,  while 
his  contempt  for  Mr.  Renshaw  became  modified  as  he 
came  to  know  him  better.  He  found  that  he  was  really  a 
capable  man  in  his  own  particular  hobby,  and  that 
although  weak  and  indecisive  he  was  very  kind  and  affec- 
tionate with  his  wife  and  children,  and  reposed  an  almost 
childlike  confidence  in  his  wife's  good  sense. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER  45 

Madeira  had  been  sighted,  lying  like  a  great  cloud  on 
the  horizon,  and  indeed  the  young  Renshaws  had  diffi- 
culty when  they  came  up  on  deck  in  the  morning  in  be- 
lieving that  it  was  really  land  they  saw.  No  stay  was 
made  here,  nor  did  they  catch  a  glimpse  of  the  Canary 
Islands,  being  too  far  to  the  west  to  see  even  the  lofty 
peak  of  Teneriffe.  -  The  first  time  the  ship  dropped 
anchor  was  at  St.  Jago,one  of  the  Cape  de  Verde  Islands; 
here  they  took  in  a  supply  of  fresh  water,  meat,  and 
vegetables.  The  passengers  all  landed,  but  were  much 
disappointed  with  the  sandy  and  uninteresting  island, 
and  it  was  no  consolation  for  them  to  learn  from  the  cap- 
tain that  parts  of  the  island  were  much  more  fertile, 
although  the  vegetables  and  fruit  came  for  the  most  part 
from  the  other  islands.  "Now,"  he  said,  "if  all  goes 
well  you  Will  see  no  land  again  till  you  get  to  Bio.  We 
shall  keep  to  the  east  of  St.  Paul,  and  unless  we  get 
blown  out  of  our  course  we  shall  not  go  near  Ascension. " 

As  the  wind  continued  favorable  the  ship  kept  her 
course,  and  at  twelve  o'clock  one  day  the  captain,  after 
taking  his  observations,  told  them  that  he  expected  to  be 
in  Rio  on  the  following  evening.  The  next  morning 
•when  they  came  up  on  deck  land  was  in  sight,  and  in  the 
evening  they  dropped  anchor  in  the  harbor  of  Rio,  one 
of  the  finest  ports  in  the  world. 

"Yes,  it  is  a  splendid  harbor,"  Mr.  Atherton  agreed, 
as  he  listened  to  the  exclamations  of  delight  of  the  Ren- 
shaws. "I  do  not  know  that  it  is  the  finest,  but  it  is 
certainly  equal  to  any  I  have  ever  seen.  As  a  harbor 
New  York  is  better,  because  even  more  landlocked.  San 
Francisco  is,  both  in  that  respect  and  in  point  of  scenery, 
superb.  Bombay  is  a  grand  harbor,  but  exposed  to  cer- 
tain winds.  Taken  altogether,  I  think  I  should  give 
palm  to  Safi  Francisco." 


46  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

A  few  minutes  after  the  anchor  had  dropped  a  number 
of  shore  boats  came  alongside,  filled  with  luscious  fruit, 
and  rowed  for  the  most  part  by  negroes,  who  chatted  and 
shouted  and  gesticulated,  making  such  a  din  that  it  was 
impossible  to  distinguish  a  single  word  amid  the  uproar. 
Wilfrid,  the  Aliens,  and  others  quickly   ran    down   the 
ladders,    and    without    troubling  themselves    to  bargain 
returned  with  quantities  of  fruit.     Several  negresses  soon 
followed  them  on  to  the  deck,  and  going  up  to  the  ladies 
produced  cards  and  letters  testifying  that  they  were  good 
washerwomen  and  their  terms  reasonable.     The  captain 
had  the  evening  before  told  them  it  would  take  him  three 
or  four  days  to  discharge  his  cargo  for   Eio,  and   that 
they  had  better  take  advantage  of  the  opportunity  if  they 
wanted   any   washing   done.     They  had,   therefore,  got 
everything  in  readiness,  and  in  a  few  minutes  numerous 
canvas  bags  filled  with  linen  were  deposited  in  the  boats. 
In  addition  to  the  fruit  several  great  bouquets  of  gor- 
geous flowers  had  been  purchased,  and  the  cabin  that 
evening  presented  quite  a  festive  appearance.     After  it 
became  dark   and   the   lights   of  Kio   sparkled   out,  all 
agreed  that  the  scene  was  even  more  beautiful  than  by 
daylight.     The  air  was  deliciously  balmy  and  soft,  the 
sea  as  smooth  as  glass.     The  moon  was  nearly  full,  and 
the  whole  line   of   the  shore  could    be    distinctly    seen. 
Boats  flitted  about  between  the  vessels  and  the  strand  ;- 
fishing-boats,  with  their  sails  hanging  motionless,  slowly  " 
made  their  way  in  by  the  aid  of  oars.     The  sounds  of 
distant  music  in  the  city  came  across  the  water. 

There  was  no  singing  or  dancing  on  board  the  Flying 
Scud  that  evening.  All  were  content  to  sit  quiet  and 
enjoy  the  scene,  and  such  conversation  as  there  was  was 
carried  on  in  low  tones,  as  if  they  were  under  a  spell 
vhich  they  feared  to  break.  The  next  morning  all  went 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER  47 

ashore  soon  after  breakfast ;  but  upon  their  assembling  at 
dinner  it  was  found  that  the  general  impression  was  one 
of  disappointment.  It  was  a  fine  city,  but  not  so  fine  as 
it  looked  from  the  water.  Except  the  main  thorough- 
fares the  streets  were  narrow,  and, as  the  ladies  declared, 
dirty.  The  young  people,  however,  were  not  so  critical; 
.they  had  been  delighted  with  the  stir  and  movement,  the 
bright  costumes,  the  variety  of  race  and  color,  and  the 
novelty  of  everything  they  saw. 

"The  negroes  amuse  me  most,"  Marion  said.  "They 
seem  to  be  always  laughing.  I  never  saw  such  merry 
people. ' ' 

"They  are  like  children,"  her  father  said.  "The 
slightest  thing  causes  them  amusement.  It  is  one  of  the 
signs  of  a  low  type  of  intellect  when  people  are  given  to 
laugh  at  trifles." 

"Then  the  natives  ought  to  be  very  intelligent,"  Marion 
said, "for  as  a  whole  they  appeared  to  me  to  be  a  serious 
race.  Of  course  I  saw  many  of  them  laughing  and  chat- 
tering, but  most  of  them  are  very  quiet  in  manner.  The 
old  people  seem  to  be  wrinkled  in  a  wonderful  way.  I 
never- saw  English  people  so  wrinkled." 

"All  southern  races  show  age  in  that  way,"  Mr. 
Atherton  said.  "You  see  marvelous  old  men  and  women 
in  Spain  and  Italy.  People  who,  as  far  as  looks  go, 
might  be  a  hundred  and  fifty — little  dried-up  specimens  of 
humanity,  with  faces  more  like  those  of  monkeys  than 
men." 

"Are  the  negroes  slaves,  Mr.  Atherton?  They  still 
have  slavery  in  Brazil,  do  they  not?  They  certainly  are 
not  at  all  according  to  my  idea  of  slaves." 

"The  estates  are  mostly  worked  by  negro  slaves,"  Mr. 
Atherton  said,  "and  no  doubt  man}'  of  those  you  saw 
to-day  are  also  slaves.  Household  slavery  is  seldom 


*0  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

severe,  ana  Believe  the  Brazilians  are  generally  kind 
masters.  But  ^robably  the  greater  portion  of  the  negroes 
you  saw  are  free.  They  may  have  purchased  their  free- 
dom with  their  savings,  or  may  have  been  freed  by  kind 
masters.  It  is  no  very  unusual  thing  for  a  Brazilian  at 
his  death  to  leave  a  will  giving  freedom  to  all  his  slaves. 
Government  is  doing  its  best  to  bring  about  the  entire 
extinction  of  slavery.  I  believe  that  all  children  born 
after  a  certain  date  have  been  declared  free,  and  have  no 
doubt  that  in  time  slavery  will  be  abolished.  Great 
changes  like  this  take  some  time  to  carrj'  out,  and  even 
for  the  sake  of  the  slaves  themselves  it  is  better  to  pro- 
ceed quietly  and  gradually.  I  suppose  nobody  inclines 
to  go  on  shore  again  to-night?" 

There  was  a  general  negative.  The  day  had  been  very 
warm,  and  having  been  walking  about  for  hours,  no  one 
felt  any  inclination  to  make  a  fresh  start.  The  following 
morning  the  vessel  began  to  unload  her  cargo.  Some  of 
the  older  passengers  declared  that  they  had  had  enough 
of  shore,  and  should  not  land — at  any  rate  until  the  after- 
noon. The  rest  went  ashore;  but  the  greater  part  of 
them  returned  at  lunch  time,  and  the  heat  in  the  after- 
noon was  so  great  that  none  cared  to  land  again. 

In  the  evening  the  two  Aliens  and  Wilfrid  agreed  to  go 
ashore  to  visit  a  theater.  Mr.  Atherton  said  that  as  he 
had  no  inclination  to  melt  away  all  at  once  he  would  not 
join  them,  but  would  land  with  them  and  stroll  about  for 
a  time,  and  see  the  town  in  its  evening  aspect.  Several 
other  parties  were  made  up  among  the  male  passengers, 
and  one  or  two  of  the  ladies  accompanied  their  husbands. 

Wilfrid  and  the  Aliens  did  not  stay  out  the  perform- 
ance. The  heat  was  very  great,  and  as  they  did  not 
understand  a  word  of  the  dialogue  they  soon  agreed  that 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  49 

it  would  be  more  pleasant  to  stroll  about,  or  to  sit  down 
in  the  open  air  before  a  cafe  and  sip  iced  drinks. 

Accordingly,  after  walking  about  for  awhile  they  sat 
down  before  a  cafe  in  the  Grand  Square,  and  as  they 
sipped  iced  lemonade  looked  on  with  much  amusement  at 
the  throng  walking  up  and  down. 

"It  is  later  than  I  thought,"  James  Allen  said,  looking 
at  his  watch.  "It  is  nearly  twelve  o'clock,  and  high 
time  for  us  to  be  on  board." 

they  started  to  make  what  they  thought  would  prove  a 
short  cut  down  to  the  landing  place;  but  as  usual  the 
short  cut  proved  delusive,  and  they  soon  found  them- 
selves wandering  in  unknown  streets.  They  asked 
several  persons  they  met  the  way  down  to  the  water,  but 
none  of  them  understood  English,  and  it  was  a  consider- 
able time  before  they  emerged  from  the  streets  on  to  the 
line  of  quays. 

"We  are  erer  so  much  too  far  to  the  right, "  James 
Allen  said  as  they  looked  round.  "I  fancy  that  is  the 
ship's  light  not  far  from  the  shore  half  a  mile  away  on 
the  left.  I  hope  we  shall  find  some  boatmen  to  take  us 
off;  it  would  be  rather  awkward  finding  ourselves  here  for 
the  night  in  a  place  where  no  one  understands  the  lan- 
guage." 

"I  think  we  should  manage  all  right,"  Wilfrid  said. 
"We  know  the  way  from  the  place  where  we  landed  up 
into  the  part  where  the  hotels  are,  and  are  sure  to  find 
people  there  who  understand  English.  Still  I  hope  it 
will  not  come  to  that.  They  would  be  in  a  great  fidget 
on  board  if  we  were  not  to  turn  up  to-night. ' ' 

"I  do  not  think  they  would  be  alarmed,"  James  Allen 
replied.  "Every  one  is  in  bed  and  asleep  long  ago,  and 
we  should  be  on  board  in  the  morning  before  the  steward 
went  to  our  cabin  and  found  that  we  were  missing.  I 


50  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

consider  we  are  quite  safe  in  that  respect,  but  Atherton 
might  be  doing  something  if  he  found  we  did  not  come 
back." 

"He  might  do  something,  perhaps,"  "Wilfrid  said; 
"but  I  am  quite  sure  he  would  not  alarm  my  father  and 
mother  about  it.  He  is  the  last  sort  of  fellow  to  do  that. " 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  51 


CHAPTER    IV. 

A    EOW    ON    SHORE. 

WHILE  Wilfrid  and  the  Aliens  were  talking  they  were 
walking  briskly  in  the  direction  of  their  landing-place. 
They  had  arrived  within  a  hundred  yards  of  it  when  a 
party  of  four  men  who  were  lying  among  a  pile  of  timber 
got  up  and  came  across  toward  them.  They  were  rough- 
looking  fellows,  and  James  Allen  said,  "I  do  not  like  the 
look  of  these  chaps.  I  think  they  mean  mischief.  Look 
out!"  As  he  spoke  the  men  rushed  at  them.  James 
Allen  gave  a  loud  shout  for  help,  and  then  struck  a  blow 
at  a  man  who  rushed  at  him.  The  fellow  staggered 
backward,  and  with  a  fierce  exclamation  in  Portuguese 
drew  a  knife.  A  moment  later  Allen  received  a  sharp  stab 
on  the  shoulder,  and  was  knocked  to  the  ground.  The 
other  two  after  a  short  struggle  had  also  been  over- 
powered and  borne  down,but  in  their  case  the  robbers 
had  not  used  their  knives. 

They  were  feeling  in  their  pockets  when  the  step  of  a 
man  approaching  at  full  speed  was  heard.  One  of  the 
robbers  was  about  to  run  off,  when  another  exclaimed : 
"You  coward!  It  is  but  one  man,  which  means  more 
booty.  Out  with  your  knives  and  give  him  a  taste  of 
them  as  he  comes  up!"  A  moment  later  the  man  ran  up. 
The  leader  stepped  forward  to  meet  him,  knife  in  hand; 
but  as  he  struck  his  wrist  was  grasped,  and  a  tremendous 


5?  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

blow  was  delivered  in  his  face,  hurling  him  stunned  and 
bleeding  to.  the  ground.  With  a  bound  the  newcomer 
threw  himself  upon  two  of  the  other  men.  Grasping 
them  by  their  throats  he  shook  them  as  if  they  had  been 
chldren,  and  then  dashed  their  heads  together  with  such 
tremendous  force  that  when  he  loosened  his  grasp  both 
fell  insensible  on  the  ground.  The  other  robber  took  to 
his  heels  at  the  top  of  his  speed.  All  this  had  passed  so 
quickly  that  the  struggle  was  over  before  Wilfrid  and  the 
Aliens  could  get  to  their  feet. 

"Not  hurt,  I  hope?"  their  rescuer  asked  anxiously. 

"Why,  Mr.  Atherton,  is  it  you?"  Wilfrid  exclaimed. 
"You  arrived  at  a  lucky  moment  indeed.  No,  I  am  not 
hurt  that  I  know  of,  beyond  a  shake." 

"Nor  I,"  Bob  Allen  said. 

"I  have  got  a  stab  in  my  shoulder,"  James  Allen  an- 
swered. "I  don't  know  that  it  is  very  deep,  but  I  think 
it  is  bleeding  a  good  deal,  for  I  feel  very  shaky.  That 
fellow  has  got  my  watch, ' '  and  he  pointed  to  the  man 
who  had  been  first  knocked  down. 

"Look  in  his  hand,  Wilfrid.  He  won't  have  had  time 
to  put  it  in  his  pocket.  If  you  have  lost  anything  else 
look  in  the  other  fellows'  hands  or  on  the  ground  close 
to  them." 

He  lifted  James  Allen,  who  was  now  scarcely  able  to 
stand,  carried  him  to  the  wood  pile,  and  seated  him  on  a 
log  with  his  back  against  another.  Then  he  took  off  his 
coat  and  waistcoat  and  tore  open  his  shirt.  "It  is  nothing 
serious, "  he  said.  "It  is  a  nasty  gash  and  is  bleeding 
freely,  but  I  dare  say  we  can  stop  that ;  I  have  bandaged 
up  plenty  of  worse  wounds  in  my  time."  He  drew  the 
edge  of  the  wound  together,  and  tied  his  handkerchief 
and  that  of  Wilfrid  tightly  round  it.  "That  will  do  for 
the  present,"  he  said.  "Now  I  will  carry  you  down  to 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  53 

the  boat,"  and  lifting  the  young  fellow  up  as  though  he 
were  a  feather  he  started  with  him. 

"Shall  we  do  anything  with  these  fellows,  Mr.  Ather- 
tou?"  Wilfrid  asked. 

"No,  leave  them  as  they  are;  what  they  deserve  is  to 
be  thrown  into  the  sea.  I  dare  say  their  friend  will 
come  back  to  look  after  them  presently." 

In  a  couple  of  minutes  they  arrived  at  the  landing- 
place,  where  two  men  were  sitting  in  a  boat. 

"But  how  did  you  come  to  be  here,  Mr.  Atherton?" 
Wilfrid  asked  when  they  had  taken  their  seats. 

"I  came  to  look  after  you  boys,  Wilfrid.  I  got  on 
board  about  eleven,  and  on  going  down  to  the  cabin 
found  you  had  not  returned,  so  I  thought  I  would  smoke 
another  cigar  and  wait  up  for  you.  At  twelve  o'clock 
the  last  party  returned,  and  as  I  thought  you  might  have 
some  difficulty  in  getting  on  board  after  that,  I  got  into 
the  boat  and  rowed  ashore,  and  engaged  the  men  to  wait 
as  long  as  I  wanted  them.  I  thought  perhaps  you  had 
missed  your  way,  and  did  not  feel  uneasy  about  you,  for 
there  being  three  of  you  together  it  was  scarcely  likely 
you  had  got  into  any  bad  scrape.  I  was  beginning  at 
last  to  think  you  had  perhaps  gone  to  an  hotel  for  the 
night,  and  that  it  was  no  use  waiting  any  longer,  when  I 
heard  your  voices  coming  along  the  quays.  The  night 
is  so  quiet  that  I  heard  your  laugh  some  distance  away, 
and  recognized  it.  I  then  strolled  along  to  meet  you, 
when  I  saw  those  four  fellows  come  out  into  the  moon- 
light from  a  shadow  in  the  wood.  I  guessed  that  they 
were  up  to  mischief,  and  started  to  run  at  once,  and  was 
within  fifty  yards  of  you  when  I  saw  the  scuffle  and 
caught  the  glint  of  the  moon  on  the  blade  of  a  knife. 
Another  five  or  six  seconds  I  was  up,  and  then  there  wai 
an  end  of  it.  Now  we  are  close  to  the  ship.  Go  up  as 


54  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

quietly  as  you  can,  and  do  not  make  a  noise  as  you  go 
into  your  cabins.  It  is  no  use  alarming  people.  I  will 
carry  Jim  down." 

"I  can  walk  now,  I  think,  Mr.  Athertou." 
"You  might  do  so,  but  you  won't,  my  lad;  for   if  you 
did    you  would    probably    start   your    wound   bleeding 
afresh.     You  two  had  best  take  your  shoes  off  directly 
you  get  on  deck." 

James  Allen  was  carried  down  and  laid  on  his  berth. 
Mr.  Atherton  went  and  roused  the  ship's  doctor,  and 
then  lighted  the  lamp  in  the  cabin. 

''What  is  all  this  about?"  the  surgeon  asked  as  he 
came  in. 

"There  has  been  a  bit  of  a  scrimmage  on  shore,"  Mr. 
Atherton  replied;  "and,  as  you  see,  Allen  has  got  a  deep- 
ish  slash  from  the  shoulder  down  to  the  elbow.  It  has 
been  bleeding  very  freely,  and  he  is  faint  from  loss  of 
blood;  but  I  do  not  think  it  is  serious  at  all." 

"No,  it  is  a  deep  flesh  wound, "  the  doctor  said,  examin- 
ing him;  "but  there  is  nothing  to  be  in  the  slightest 
degree  uneasy  about.  I  will  get  a  bandage  from  my 
cabin,  and  some  lint,  and  set  it  all  right  in  five  minutes." 
When  the  arm  was  bandaged  Mr  Atherton  said: 
"Now  I  must  get  you  to  do  a  little  plastering  for  me, 
doctor." 

"What  !  are  you  wounded,  Mr.  Atherton?"  the  others 
exclaimed  in  surprise. 

"Nothing  to  speak  of,  lads;  but  both  those  fellows 
made  a  slash  at  me  as  I  closed  with  them.  I  had  but 
just  finished  their  leader,  and  could  do  no  more  than 
strike  wildly  as  I  turned  upon  them."  As  he  spoke  he 
was  taking  off  his  waistcoat  and  shirt. 

"By  Jove,  you  have  had  a  narrow  escape!"  the  doctor 
said;  "and  how  you  take  it  so  coolly  I  cannot  make  out. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  55 

Except  as  to  the  bleeding,  they  are  both  far  more  serious 
than  Allen's." 

One  of  the  wounds  was  in  the  left  side,  about  three 
inches  below  the  arm.  The  man  had  evidently  struck  at 
the  heart,  but  the  quickness  with  which  Mr.  Atherton 
had  closed  with  him  had  disconcerted  his  aim ;  the 
knife  had  struck  rather  far  back,  and  glancing  behind 
the  ribs  had  cut  a  deep  gash  under  the  shoulder-blade. 
The  other  wound  had  been  given  by  a  downright  blow  at 
the  right  side,  and  had  laid  open  the  flesh  from  below  the 
breast  down  to  the  hip. 

"It  is  only  a  case  for  plaster,"  Mr.  Atherton  said. 
"It  is  useful  to  have  a  casing  of  fat  sometimes.  It  is 
the  same  thing  with  a  whale — you  have  got  to  drive  a 
harpoon  in  very  deep  to  get  at  the  vitals.  You  see  this 
wound  in  front  has  bled  very  little. ' ' 

"You  have  lost  a  good  deal  of  blood  from  the  other 
cut,"  the  surgeon  said.  "I  will  draw  the  edges  of  the 
wounds  together  with  a  needle  and  thread,  and  will  then 
put  some  bandages  on.  You  will  have  to  keep  quiet  for 
some  days.  Your  wounds  are  much  too  serious  to  think 
of  putting  plaster  on  at  present. ' ' 

'(I  have  had  a  good  deal  more  serious  wounds  than 
these,"  Mr.  Afcherton  said  cheerfully,  "and  have  had  to 
ride  seventy  or  eighty  miles  on  the  following  day.  How 
ever,  I  will  promise  you  not  to  go  ashore  to-morrow ;  and 
as  the  captain  says  he  expects  to  be  off  the  next  morning, 
I  shall  be  able  to  submit  myself  to  your  orders  without 
any  great  privation. " 

"Why  did  you  not  say  that  you  were  wounded,  Mr. 
Atherton?"  Wilfrid  said  reproachfully  as  they  went  to 
their  own  cabin  and  prepared  to  turn  in. 

"To  tell  you  the  truth,  Wilfrid,  I  hardly  thought  the 
wounds  were  as  deep  as  they  are.  My  blood  was  up,  you 


56  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

see,  and  when  that  is  the  case  you  are  scarcely  conscious 
of  pain.  I  felt  a  sharp  shooting  sensation  on  both  sides 
as  I  grasped  those  fellows  by  the  throat,  and  afterward  I 
knew  I  was  bleeding  a  bit  at  the  back,  for  I  felt  the 
warmth  of  the  blood  down  in  my  shoe ;  but  there  was 
nothing  to  prevent  my  carrying  young  Allen,  and  one 
person  can  carry  a  wounded  man  with  much  more  ease  to 
him  than  two  can  do,  unless  of  course  they  have  got  a 
stretcher. ' ' 

The  next  morning  there  was  quite  a  stir  in  the  ship 
when  it  was  known  that  two  of  the  passengers  were 
wounded,  and  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Renshaw  were  greatly 
alarmed  when  they  heard  of  the  risk  Wilfrid  had  run. 
Neither  of  the  wounded  men  appeared  at  breakfast,  as 
the  surgeon  insisted  that  both  should  lie  quiet  for  at 
least  one  day.  Mr.  Eensahw  had  paid  a  visit  to  Mr. 
Atherton  directly  he  had  heard  from  Wilfrid  his  story 
of  the  fray,  and  thanked  him  most  warmly  for  his  inter- 
vention on  behalf  of  his  son.  "Wilfrid  said  he  has  very 
little  doubt  that  they  all  three  would  have  been  stabbed 
if  you  had  not  come  up." 

"I  do  not  say  they  might  not,"  Mr.  Atherton  said, 
"because  their  resistance  had  raised  the  men's  anger; 
and  in  this  country  when  a  man  is  angry  he  generally 
uses  his  knife.  Besides,  dead  men  raise  no  alarm.  Still 
they  might  have  contented  themselves  with  robbing 
them.  However,  I  own  that  it  was  lucky  I  was  on  the 
spot." 

"But  it  was  not  a  question  of  luck  at  all,"  Mr.  Een- 
shaw  insisted.  "You  were  there  because  you  had 
specially  gone  ashore  to  look  after  these  foolish  young 
fellows,  and  your  being  there  was  the  result  of  your  own 
though tfulness  for  them,  and  not  in  any  way  of  chance." 

"There  is  quite  a  crowd  on  the  quay,  Mr.  Renshaw," 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  57 

the  captain  said  when  that  gentleman  went  on  deck. 
"I  suppose  they  have  found  stains  of  blood  in  the  road, 
and  conclude  that  a  crime  has  been  committed.  Oh, 
here  is  our  boat  putting  out  from  the  landing-place. 
The  steward  has  been  on  shore  to  get  fresh  fruit  for 
breakfast;  he  will  tell  us  what  is  going  on." 

The  steward  had  gone  ashore  before  the  news  of  the 
encounter  had  been  spread  by  the  surgeon. 

"What  is  the  excitement  about  on  shore?"  the  captain 
asked  him  as  he  stepped  on  deck. 

"Well,  sir,  as  far  as  I  could  learn  from  a  chap  who 
spoke  a  little  English,  there  have  been  bad  doings  on 
shore  in  the  night.  Two  men  were  found  this  morning 
lying  dead  there.  There  is  nothing  uncommon  about 
that ;  but  they  say  there  are  no  wounds  on  them  except 
that  their  skulls  are  stove  in,  as  if  they  had  both  been 
struck  by  a  beam  of  wood  at  the  back  of  the  head.  But 
besides  that  there  were  two  or  three  pools  of  blood  in 
the  road.  It  seems  one  man  walked  back  into  the  town, 
for  there  are  marks  of  his  feet  as  if  he  stepped  in  the 
blood  before  starting  in  that  direction.  Then  there  is  a 
line  of  blood  spots  down  to  the  landing-place  and  down 
the  steps,  as  if  somebody  had  got  into  a  boat.  Nobody 
seems  to  make  head  or  tail  of  the  business." 

"Well,  we  must  keep  this  quiet  if  we  can,"  the  captain 
said,  turning  to  Mr.  Kenshaw.  "If  it  were  known  that 
any  of  our  people  were  concerned  in  this  affair  they 
might  keep  us  here  for  three  weeks  or  a  month  while  it 
is  being  investigated,  or  insist  upon  Mr.  Atherton  and 
your  son  and  the  Aliens  remaining  behind  as  witnesses. 
Mr.  Byan, "  he  called  to  the  first  mate,  "just  come  here 
a  moment.  This  matter  is  more  serious  than  we  thought. 
It  seems  that  Mr.  Atherton,  who,  as  we  have  heard, 
dashed  the  heads  of  two  of  these  fellows  together,  killed 
them  on  the  spot. ' ' 


58  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"Sure  and  I  thought  as  much  when  young  Allen  was 
telling  me  about  it,"  the  mate  said.  "I  have  seen  Mr. 
Atherton  at  work  before  this,  and  I  thought  to  myself 
that  unless  those  fellows'  skulls  were  made  of  iron,  and 
thick  at  that,  they  must  have  gone  in  when  he  brought 
them  together." 

"The  worst  of  it  is,"  the  captain  went  on,  "they  have 
traced  marks  of  blood  down  to  the  landing-stage,  and  of 
course  have  suspicion  that  some  one  concerned  in  the 
affair  took  a  boat,  and  either  came  off  to  one  of  the  ships 
or  went  away  in  one  of  the  fishing  craft.  You  know 
what  these  fellows  are ;  if  they  find  out  that  any  one  on 
board  is  mixed  up  in  the  matter  they  will  keep  the  ship 
here  for  a  month." 

"That  is  true  enough,  sir.  It  is  mighty  lucky  we 
would  be  if  we  got  away  in  a  month." 

"The  first  thing  is  to  see  about  the  boatmen,"  the 
captain  said.  "Of  course  if  they  tell  the  authorities  they 
brought  a  wounded  man  on  board  here  late  last  night 
there  is  an  end  of  it;  but  if  they  hold  their  tongues,  and 
•we  all  keep  our  own  counsel,  the  thing  may  not  leak  out 
to-day,  and  we  will  have  our  anchor  up  and  get  out  this 
evening  if  we  can.  You  had  better  tell  all  the  crew  that 
not  a  word  is  to  be  said  about  the  matter,  and  I  will  im- 
press the  same  on  the  passengers.  When  they  know  that 
a  careless  word  may  lead  to  a  month's  detention,  you 
may  be  sure  there  will  be  no  talking.  But  before  you 
speak  to  them  I  will  go  down  and  see  Mr.  Athertou,  and 
hear  what  he  says  about  the  boatmen."  He  returned  in 
two  or  three  minutes.  "I  hope  it  will  be  all  right,"  he 
said.  "Atherton  gave  them  a  pound  apiece,  and  told 
them  to  hold  their  tongues.  He  thinks  it  is  probable 
they  will  do  so,  for  they  would  know  well  enough  that 
they  would,  as  likely  as  not,  be  clapped  into  prison  and 


M :  1 ORI  AND  SETTLER.  59 

kept  there  while  the  investigation  was  going  on.  So 
there  is  a  strong  hope  that  it  "may  not  leak  out  through 
them.  You  must  stop  all  leave  ashore,  Mr.  Eyan.  Tell 
the  men  whose  turn  it  is  to  go  they  shall  have  their 
spree  at  Buenos  Ayres.  If  they  were  to  get  drunk,  it 
would  be  as  likely  as  not  to  slip  out." 

"I  will  see  to  it,  sir." 

Directly  breakfast  was  over  the  captain  took  a  boat 
and  went  ashore.  He  had  duly  impressed  upon  all  the 
passengers  the  absolute  necessity  for  silence,  and  several 
of  these  went  ashore  with  him.  He  returned  half  an 
hour  later,  having  been  up  to  the  British  Consulate. 

"The  affair  is  making  quite  a  stir  in  the  town.  Not  on 
account  of  two  men  being  found  dead,  there  is  nothing 
uncommon  in  thtit,  especially  as  they  have  been  recog- 
nized as  two  notorious  ruffians;  but  the  whole  circum- 
stances of  the  affair  puzzle  them. 

"The  doctors  who  have  examined  the  bodies  have 
arrived  pretty  well  at  the  truth,  and  say  that  both  men 
have  been  gripped  by  the  throat,  for  the  marks  of  the 
fingers  .are  plainly  visible,  and  their  heads  dashed  to- 
gether. But  although  this  is,  as  we  know,  perfectly 
true,  no  one  believes  it;  for  the  doctors  themselves  admit 
that  it  does  not  appear  to  them  possible  that  any  man 
would  have  had  the  strength  requisite  to  completely  batter 
in  the  skulls  of  two  others,  as  has  been  done  in  this  case. 
The  police  are  searching  the  town  for  the  man  whose 
footsteps  led  in  that  direction,  and  as  they  know  all  the 
haunts  of  these  ruffians  and  their  associates  it  is  likely 
enough  that  they  will  find  him,  especially  as  his  face  is 
sure  to  bear  marks  of  Atherton's  handiwork.  Still,  if 
they  do  find  him,  and  he  tells  all  he  knows  of  the  busi- 
ness, they  Vv'ill  not  be  much  nearer  to  tracing  the  actors 
in  it  to  this  ship.  It  is  not  probable  that  he  recovered  his 


60  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

senses  until  long  after  they  were  on  board  the  boat,  and 
can  only  say  that  while  engaged  in  attempting  to  rob 
some  passers-by  he  was  suddenly  knocked  down.  But 
even  this  they  are  not  likely  to  get  out  of  him  first,  for 
he  will  know  that  he  used  a  knife,  and  is  not  likely  to  put 
himself  in  the  way  of  punishment  if  he  can  help  it.  I 
came  off  at  once,  because  I  heard  at  the  consulate  that 
the  police  are  going  to  search  every  ship  in  the  harbor  to 
see  if  they  can  find  some  wounded  man,  or  get  some  clew 
to  the  mystery,  so  I  must  ask  the  doctor  if  his  two 
patients  are  fit  to  be  dressed  and  go  up  on  deck. ' ' 

The  doctor  on  being  consulted  said  that  he  should 
certainly  have  preferred  that  they  should  have  remained 
quiet  all  day,  but  he  did  not  know  that  it  would  do  them 
any  harm  to  get  on  deck  for  a  bit.  And  accordingly  in 
half  an  hour  Mr.  Atherton  and  James  Allen  came  up.  The 
doctor,  who  had  assisted  them  to  dress,  accompanied 
them. 

"Now,  Mr.  Atherton,  you  had  better  seat  yourself  in 
that  great  deck  chair  of  yours  with  the  leg  rest.  If  you 
sit  there  quietly  reading  when  they  come  on  board  they 
are  not  likely  to  suspect  you  of  being  a  desperate  char- 
acter, or  to  appreciate  your  inches  and  width  of  shoul- 
der. Allen  had  better  sit  quiet  till  they  get  alongside, 
and  then  slip  that  sling  into  his  pocket  and  walk  up  and 
down  talking  to  one  of  the  ladies,  with  his  thumb  in  his 
waistcoat  so  as  to  support  his  arm.  He  looks  pale  and 
shaky ;  but  they  are  not  accustomed  to  much  color  here, 
and  he  will  pass  well  enough." 

As  soon  as  Mr.  Atherton  had  taken  his  seat  Mrs.  Een- 
shaw  and  Marion  came  up  to  him.  "How  can  we  thank 
you  enough,  Mr.  Atherton,  for  the  risks  you  have  run  to 
succor  Wilfrid,  and  for  your  kind  consideration  in  going 
on  shore  to  wait  .for  him?" 


MAORI  ASD  SETTLKR.  (51 

"It  was  nothing,  Mrs.  Renshaw.  I  own  to  enjoying  a 
scrimmage  when  I  can  go  into  one  with  the  feeling  of 
being  in  the  riglit.  You  know  that  I  ana  a  very  lazy 
man,  but  it  is  just  your  lazy  men  who  do  enjoy  exerting 
themselves  occasionally." 

"It  was  grand!"  Marion  broke  in;  "and  you  ought  not 
to  talk  as  if  it  was  nothing,  Mr.  Atherton.  Wilfrid  said 
that  he  thought  it  was  all  over  with  him  till  he  saw  a  big 
man  flying  down  the  road." 

"A  perfect  colossus  of  Rhodes!"  Mr.  Atherton  laughed. 

"It  is  not  a  thing  to  joke  about, "  Marion  went  on 
earnestly.  "It  may  seem  very  little  to  you,  Mr.  Ather- 
ton, but  it  is  everything  to  us." 

"Don't  you  know  that  one  always  jokes  when  one  is 
serious,  Miss  Reushaw  ?  You  know  that  in  church  any 
little  thing  that  you  would  scarcely  notice  at  any  other 
time  makes  you  inclined  to  laugh.  Some  day  in  the  far 
distance,  when  you  become  a  woman,  you  will  know  the 
truth  of  the  saying,  that  smiles  and  tears  are  very  close 
to  each  other. " 

"I  am  getting  to  be  a  woman  now,"  Marion  said  with 
some  dignity ;  for  Mr.  Atherton  always  persisted  in 
treating  her  as  if  she  were'  a  child,  which,  as  she  was 
nearly  seventeen,  was  a  standing  grievance  to  h«r. 

"Age  does  not  make  a  woman,  Miss  Renshaw.  I  saw 
you  skipping  three  days  ago  with  little  Kate  Mitford 
and  your  brother  and  young  Allen,  and  you  enjoyed  it  as 
much  as  any  of  them." 

"We  were  trying  which  could  keep  up  the  longest," 
Marion  said;  "Wilfred  and  I  against  the  other  two. 
You  were  looking  on,  and  I  believe  you  would  have  liked 
to  have  skipped  too." 

"I  think  I  should,"  Mr.  Atherton  agreed.  "You 
young  people  do  not  skip  half  as  well  as  we  used  to  when 


62  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

I  was  a  boy ;  and  I  should  have  given  you  a  lesson  if  I 
had  not  been  afraid  of  shaking  the  ship's  timbers  to 
pieces." 

"How  absurd  you  are,  Mr.  Atherton!"  Marion  said 
pettishly.  "Of  course  you  are  not  thin,  but  you  always 
talk  of  yourself  as  if  you  were  something  monstrous." 

Mr.  Atherton  laughed.  His  diversion  had  had  the 
desired  effect,  and  had  led  them  away  from  the  subject 
of  the  fight  on  shore. 

"There  is  a  galley  putting  off  from  shore  with  a  lot  of 
officials  on  board,"  the  captain  said,  coming  up  at  this 
moment.  "They  are  rowing  to  the  next  ship,  and  I  sup- 
pose they  will  visit  us  next." 

A  quarter  of  an  hour  later  the  galley  came  alongside, 
and  three  officials  mounted  the  gangway.  The  captain 
went  forward  to  meet  them.  "Is  there  anything  I  can 
do  for  you,  gentlemen?" 

"There  has  been  a  crime  committed  on  shore,"  the 
leader  of  the  party  said,  "and  it  is  suspected  that  some 
of  those  concerned  in  the  matter  are  on  board  one  of  the 
ships  in  the  harbor.  I  have  authority  to  make  a  strict 
search  on  board  each." 

"You  are  perfectly  welcome  to  do  so,  sir,"  the  captain 
said.  "One  of  our  officers  will  show  you  over  the  ship." 

"I  must  trouble  you  to  show  me  your  list  of  passengers 
and  crew,  and  to  muster  the  men  on  deck.  But  first  I 
must  ask  you,  Did  any  of  your  boats  return  on  board 
late?" 

"No,"  the  captain  replied.  "Our  last  boat  was  hauled 
up  to  the  davits  at  half-past  nine.  There  was  a  heavy 
day 's  work  before  the  men  to-day,  and  I  therefore  refused 
leave  on  shore. " 

The  men  were  ordered  to  be  mustered,  and  while  they 
Were  collecting  the  second  mate  went  round  the  ship 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  63 

with  the  officials,  and  they  saw  that  no  one  was  below  in 
his  berth.  The  men's  names  were  called  over  from  the 
list,  and  the  officials  satisfied  that  all  were  present  and  in 
good  health. 

"Now  for  the  passengers,"  he  said. 
"I  cannot  ask  them  to  muster,"  the  captain  observed, 
"but  I  will  walk  round  with  you  and  point  out  those  on 
the  list.  There  are  some  eight  or  ten  on  shore.  Ihey 
will  doubtless  be  off  to  lunch ;  and  if  you  leave  an  officer 
on  board  he  will  see  that  they  are  by  no  means  the  sort 
of  people  to  take  part  in  such  an  affair  as  that  which  has 
happened  on  shore." 

The  officials  went  round  the  deck,  but  saw  nothing 
whatever  to  excite  their  suspicion.  Marion  Kenshaw  was 
laughing  and  talking  with  Mr.  Atherton,  Miss  Mitford 
walking  up  and  down  the  poop  in  conversation  with 
James  Allen.  After  they  had  finished  their  investiga- 
tions, the  officials  left  one  of  their  party  to  inspect  the 
remaining  passengers  as  they  came  on  board,  and  to 
check  them  off  the  list.  They  then  again  took  their  seats 
in  the  galley  and  were  rowed  to  the  next  ship. 

By  dint  of  great  exertions  the  cargo  was  got  out  by 
sunset,  the  sails  were  at  once  loosened  and  the  anchor 
weighed,  and  before  the  short  twilight  had  faded  away 
the  Flying  Scud  was  making  her  way  with  a  gentle 
breeze  toward  the  mouth  of  the  harbor. 

"We  are  well  out  of  that, "Mr.  Atherton  said  as  he 
looked  back  at  the  lights  of  the  city. 

"I  think  you  are  very  well  out  of  it  indeed,  in  more 
senses  than  one,"  said  the  surgeon,  who  was  standing 
next  to  him;  "but  you  have  had  a  wonderfully  close 
ahave  of  it,  Mr.  Atherton.  Another  inch  and  either  of 
those  blows  might  have  been  fatal.  Besides,  had  you 
been  detained  for  a  month  or  six  weeks,  it  is  as  likely  as 


64  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

not  that,  what  with  the  heat  and  what  with  the  annoy- 
ance, your  wound  would  have  taken  a  bad  turn.  Now, 
you  must  let  me  exercise  my  authority  and  order  you  to 
your  berth  immediately.  You  ought  not  to  have  been 
out  of  it.  Of  the  two  evils,  getting  up  and  detention,  I 
chose  the  least;  but  I  should  be  glad  now  if  you  would 
go  off  at  once.  If  you  do  not,  I  can  assure  you  I  may 
have  you  on  my  hands  all  the  rest  of  the  voyage." 

"I  will  obey  orders,  doctor.  The  more  willingly 
because  for  the  last  hour  or  two  my  back  has  been  smart- 
ing unmercifully.  I  do  not  feel  the  other  wound  much. " 
"That  is  because  you  have  been  sitting  still.  You 
will  find  it  hurt  you  wken  you  come  to  walk.  Please  go 
down  carefully ;  a  sudden  movement  might  start  your 
wounds  again." 

It  was  two  or  three  days  before  Mr.  Atherton  again 
appeared  on  deck.  His  left  arnc  was  bandaged  tightly  to 
his  body  so  as  to  prevent  any  movement  of  the  shoulder- 
blade,  and  he  walked  stiffly  to  the  deck-chair,  which  had 
been  piled  with  cushions  in  readiness. 

"I  am  glad  to  be  out  again,  Mrs.  Eenshaw, "  Mr.  Ather- 
ton said  as  she  arranged  the  cushions  to  suit  him. 
"Your  husband,  with  Wilfrid  and  the  two  Aliens,  have 
kept  me  company,  one  or  other  of  them,  all  the  time,  so 
I  cannot  say  I  have  been  dull.  But  it  was  much  hotter 
below  than  it  is  here.  However,  I  know  the  doctor  was 
right  in  keeping  me  below,  for  the  slightest  movement 
gave  me  a  great  deal  of  pain.  However,  the  wounds  are 
going  on  nicely,  and  I  hope  by  the  time  we  get  to  Buenos 
Ayres  I  shall  be  fit  for  a  trip  on  shore  again." 

"I  hardly  think  so,  Mr.  Atherton;  for  if  the  weather 
continues  as  it  is  now— it  is  a  nice  steady  breeze,  and  we 
have  been  running  ever  since  we  left  Rio— I  think  we 
shall  be  there  long  before  you  are  fit  to  go  ashore." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  65 

"I  do  not  particularly  care  about  it,  "Mr.  Atberton 
said  "Buenos  Ayres  is  not  like  Rio,  but  it  is  for  the 
most  part  quite  a  modern  town,  and  even  in  situation  has 
little  to  recommend  it.  Besides,  we  shall  be  so  far  off 
that  there  will  be  no  running  backward  and  forward  be- 
tween the  ship  and  the  shore  as  there  was  at  Rio.  Of 
course,  it  depends  a  good  deal  on  the  amount  of  water 
coming  down  the  river,  but  vessels  sometimes  have  to 
anchor  twelve  miles  above  the  town." 

"I  am  sure  I  have  no  desire  to  go  ashore,"  Mrs.  Ren- 
shaw  said,  "and  after  the  narrow  escape  Wilfrid  had  at 
Rio  I  should  be  glad  if  he  did  not  set  foot  there  again 
until  we  arrive  at  the  end  of  the  voyage." 

"He  is  not  likely  to  get  into  a  scrape  again,"  Mr. 
Atherton  said.  "Of  course,  it  would  have  been  wiser  not 
to  have  stopped  so  late  as  they  did  in  a  town  of  whose 
ways  they  knew  nothing;  but  you  may  be  sure  he  will 
be  careful  another  time.  Besides,  I  fancy  from  what  I 
have  heard  things  are  better  managed  there,  and  the 
population  are  more  peaceable  and  orderly  than  at  Rio. 
But,  indeed,  such  an  adventure  as  that  which  befell  them 
might  very  well  have  happened  to  any  stranger  wander- 
ing late  at  night  in  the  slums  of  any  of  our  English 
seaports. " 

There  was  a  general  feeling  of  disappointment  among 
the  passengers  when  the  Flying  Scud  dropped  anchor  in 
the  turbid  waters  of  the  La  Plata.  The  shore  was  some 
five  or  six  miles  away,  and  was  low  and  uninteresting. 
The  towers  and  spires  of  the  churches  of  Buenos  Ayres 
were  plainly  visible,  but  of  the  town  itself  little  could  be 
seen.  As  soon  as  the  anchor  was  dropped  the  captain's 
gig  was  lowered,  and  he  started  for  shore  to  make  ar- 
rangements for  landing  the  cargo. 

The  next  morning  a  steam  tug  brought  out  several  flats. 


66  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

and  the  work  of  unloading  commenced.  A  few  pas- 
sengers went  ashore  in  the  tug,  but  none  of  the  Ren- 
ehaws  left  the  ship.  Two  days  sufficed  for  getting  out  the 
goods  for  Buenos  Ayres.  The  passengers  who  had  been 
staying  at  hotels  on  shore  came  off  with  the  last  tug  to 
the  ship.  Their  stay  ashore  had  been  a  pleasant  one,  and 
they  liked  the  town,  which,  in  point  of  cleanliness  and 
order,  they  considered  to  be  in  advance  of  Eio. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  67 


CHAPTER   V. 

A    BOAT     EXPEDITION. 

"WELL,  I  am  not  sorry  we  are  off  again,"  Marion  Ren- 
shaw  said,  as  the  men  ran  round  with  the  capstan  bars 
and  the  anchor  came  up  from  the  shallow  water.  "What 
a  contrast  between  this  and  Rio!" 

"It  is,  indeed,"  Mr.  Atherton,  who  was  standing 
beside  her,  replied,  "I  own  I  should  have  liked  to  spend 
six  months  in  a  snug  little  craft  going  up  the  La  Plata 
and  Parana,  especially  the  latter.  The  La  Plata  runa 
through  a  comparatively  flat  and — I  will  not  say  unfertile 
country,  because  it  is  fertile  enough,  but — a  country 
deficient  in  trees,  and  offering  but  small  attraction  to  a 
botanist;  but  the  Parana  flows  north.  Paraguay  is  a 
.country  but  little  visited  by  Europeans,  and  ought  to  be 
well  worth  investigation;  but,  as  you  say,  I  am  glad 
enough  to  be  out  of  this  shallow  water.  In  a  short  time 
we  shall  be  looking  out  our  wraps  again.  Wre  shall  want 
our  warmest  things  for  doubling  Cape  Horn,  or  rather 
what  is  called  doubling  Cape  Horn,  because  in  point  of 
fact  we  do  not  double  it  at  all." 

"Do  you  mean  we  do  not  go  round  it?"  Marion  asked 
in  surprise. 

"We  may,  and  we  may  not,  Miss  Renshaw.  It  will 
depend  upon  the  weather,  I  suppose ;  but  most  vessels 
now  go  through  the  strait  which  separates  Cape  Horn 
itself  from  Tierra  del  Fuego. " 


66  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"That  is  the  Strait  of  Magellan,  is  it  not?" 

"Oh,  no!"  Mr.  Atherton  replied.  "The  Strait  of 
Magellan  lies  still  further  to  the  north,  and  separates  Tierra 
del  Fuego  from  the  mainland.  I  wish  that  we  were  going 
through  it,  for  I  believe  the  scenery  is  magnificent." 

"But  if  it  lies  further  north  that  must  surely  be  our 
shortest  Avay,  so  why  should  we  not  go  through  it?" 

"If  we  were  in  a  steamer  we  might  do  so,  Miss  Ren- 
shaw;  but  the  channel  is  so  narrow  and  intricate,  and 
the  tides  and  currents  run  with  such  violence  that  sailing 
vessels  hardly  ever  attempt  the  passage.  The  strait  we 
shall  go  through  lies  between  Tierra  del  Fuego  and  the 
group  of  islands  of  which  the  Horn  is  the  most  south- 
erly." 

"Is  the  country  inhabited?" 

"Yes,  by  races  of  the  most  debased  savages,  with 
whom,  I  can  assure  you,  I  have  no  desire  whatever  to 
make  any  personal  acquaintance." 

"Not  even  to  collect  botanical  specimens,  Mr.  Ather- 
ton?" the  girl  asked,  smiling. 

"Not  even  for  that  purpose,  Miss  Renshaw.  I  will  do 
a  good  deal  in  pursuance  of  my  favorite  hobby,  but  I 
draw  the  line  at  the  savages  of  Tierra  del  Fuego.  Very 
few  white  men  have  ever  fallen  into  their  hands  and  lived 
to  tell  the  tale,  and  certainly  I  should  have  no  chance 
whatever. ' ' 

"Whj'  would  you  have  less  chance  than  other  people, 
Mr.  Atherton?" 

"My  attractions  would  be  irresistible,"  Mr.  Atherton 
replied  gravely.  "I  should  furnish  meat  for  a  whole 
tribe." 

"How  horrible!"  Marion  exclaimed.  "What!  are 
they  cannibals?" 

"Very  much  so   indeed;  and   one   can   hardly    blame 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  69 

them,  for  it  is  the  only  chance  they  have  of  getting  flesh. 
Their  existence  is  one  long  struggle  with  famine  and  cold. 
They  are  not  hunters,  and  are  but  pooi  fishermen.  I 
firmly  believe  that  if  I  were  in  their  place  I  should  be  a 
cannibal  myself." 

"How  can  you  say  such  things?"  Marion  asked  indig- 
nantly. "I  never  know  whether  you  are  in  earnest,  Mr. 
Atherton.  I  am  sure  you  would  never  be  a  cannibal." 

"There  is  no  saying  what  one  might  be  if  one  were 
driven  to  it,"  he  replied  placidly.  "Anyhow,  I  trust 
that  I  shall  never  be  driven  to  it.  In  my  various  journey- 
ings  and  adventures  I  am  happy  to  say  that  I  have  never 
been  forced  to  experience  a  prolonged  fast,  and  it  is  one  of 
the  things  I  have  no  inclination  to  try.  This  weather  is 
perfection,  is  it  not?"  he  went  on,  changing  the  subject. 
"The  Flying  Scud  is  making  capital  way.  I  only  hope 
it  may  last.  It  is  sad  to  think  that  we  shall  soon  ex- 
change these  balmy  breezes  for  a  biting  wind.  We  are 
just  saying,  "Wilfrid,"  he  went  on  as  the  lad  strolled  up 
to  them,  "that  you  will  soon  have  to  lay  aside  your  white 
flannels  and  put  on  a  great  coat  and  muffler." 

"I  shall  not  be  sorry,"  "Wilfrid  replied.  "After  a 
month  of  hot  weather  one  wants  bracing  up  a  bit,  and  I 
always  enjoy  cold." 

"Then  you  should  have  gone  out  and  setted  in  Iceland 
instead  of  New  Zealand." 

"I  should  not  have  minded  that,  Mr.  Atherton.  There 
is  splendid  fishing,  I  believe,  and  sealing,  and  all  that  sort 
of  thing.  But  I  do  not  suppose  the  others  would  have 
liked  it.  I  am  sure  father  would  not.  He  cannot  bear 
cold,  and  his  study  at  home  used  aways  to  be  kept  up  at 
almost  the  temperature  of  an  oven  all  the  winter.  I 
should  think  New  Zealand  would  exactly  suit  him." 

Before  the  sun  set  they  had  the  satisfaction  of  sailing 


70  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

out  of  the  muddy  water  of  the  La  Plata,  and  of  being 
once  more  in  the  bright  blue  sea.  For  the  next  week  the 
Flying  Scud  sailed  merrily  southward  without  adventure. 
The  air  grew  sensibly  cooler  each  day,  and  the  light  gar- 
ments of  the  tropics  were  already  exchanged  for  warmer 
covering. 

"Do  you  always  get  this  sort  of  weather  down  here, 
captain?"  Mrs.  Renshaw  asked. 

"Not  always,  Mrs.  Renshaw.  The  weather  is  gen- 
erally fine,  I  admit,  but  occasionally  short  but  very 
violent  gales  sweep  down  from  off  the  land.  They  are 
known  as  pamperos;  because,  I  suppose,  they  come  from 
the  pampas.  They  are  very  dangerous  from  the  extreme 
suddenness  with  which  they  sweep  down.  If  they  are 
seen  coming,  and  the  vessel  can  be  stripped  of  her  canvas 
in  time,  there  is  little  danger  to  be  apprehended,  for 
they  are  as  short  as  they  are  violent." 

"We  have  been  wonderfully  fortunate  altogether  so 
far,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said.  "We  have  not  had  a  single 
gale  since  we  left  England.  I  trust  that  our  good  luck 
will  continue  to  the  end. ' ' 

"I  hope  so  too,"  the  captain  said.  "I  grant  that  a 
epell  of  such  weather  as  we  have  been  favored  with  is  apt 
to  become  a  little  monotonous,  and  I  generally  find  my 
passengers  have  a  tendency  after  a  time  to  became  snap- 
pish and  quarrelsome  from  sheer  want  of  anything  to 
occupy  their  minds.  Still  I  would  very  much  rather  put 
up  with  that  than  with  the  chances  of  a  storm." 

"People  must  be  very  foolish  to  get  out  of  temper  be- 
cause everything  is  going  on  well,"  Mrs.  Eenshaw  said. 
"I  am  sure  I  find  it  perfectly  delightful  sailing  on  as  we 
do." 

"Then  you  see,  madam,  you  are  an  indefatigable 
worker.  I  never  see  your  hands  idle ;  but  to  people  who 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  71 

do  not  work,  a  long  voyage  of  unbroken  weather  must, 
I  can  very  well  understand,  be  monotonous.  Of  course 
with  us  who  have  duties  to  perform  it  is  different.  I 
have  often  heard  passengers  wish  for  what  they  call  a 
good  gale,  but  I  have  never  heard  a  sailor  who  has  once 
experienced  one  express  such  a  wish.  However  stanch 
the  ship,  a  great  gale  is  a  most  anxious  time  for  all  con- 
cerned in  the  navigation  of  a  vessel.  It  is,  too,  a  time  of 
unremitting  hardship.  There  is  but  little  sleep  to  be 
had;  all  hands  are  constantly  on  deck,  and  are  contin- 
ually wet  to  the  skin.  Great  seas  sweep  over  a  ship,  and 
each  man  has  literally  his  life  in  his  hand,  for  he  may  at 
any  moment  be  torn  from  his  hold  and  washed  over- 
board, or  have  his  limbs  broken  by  some  spar  or  hen-coop 
or  other  object  swept  along  by  the  sea.  It  always  makes 
me  angry  when  I  hear  a  passenger  express  a  wish  for  a 
gale,  in  thoughtless  ignorance  of  what  he  is  desiring. 
If  a  storm  comes  we  must  face  it  like  men;  and  in  a  good 
ship  like  the  Flying  Scud,  well  trimmed  and  not  over- 
laden, and  with  plenty  of  sea-room,  we  may  feel  pretty 
confident /as  to  the  result;  but  that  is  a  very  different 
thing  from  wishing  to  have  one." 

By  the  time  they  were  a  fortnight  out  from  Buenos 
Ayres,  Mr.  Atherton  and  James  Allen  were  both  off  the 
sick  list;  indeed  the  latter  had  been  but  a  week  in  the 
doctor's  hands.  The  adventure  had  bound  the  little 
party  more  closely  together  than  before.  The  Aliens  had 
quite  settled  that  when  their  friends  once  established 
themselves  on  a  holding,  they  would,  if  possible,  take 
one  up  in  the  neighborhood ;  and  they  and  the  young 
Benshaws  often  regretted  that  Mr.  Atherton  was  only  a 
bird  of  passage,  and  had  no  intention  of  fixing  himself 
permanently  in  the  colony.  The  air  had  grown  very  much 
colder  of  late,  and  the  light  clothes  they  had  worn  in  the 


72  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

tropics  had  already  been  discarded,  and  in  the  evening 
all  -were  glad  to  put  on  -warm  wraps  when  they  came  on 
deck. 

"I  think, "  the  captain  said  as  Mr.  Renshaw  came  up 
for  his  customary  walk  before  breakfast,  "we  are  going 
to  have  a  change.  The  glass  has  fallen  a  good  deal,  and 
I  did  not  like  the  look  of  the  sun  when  it  rose  this  morn- 
ing. " 

"It  looks  to  me  very  much  as  usual,"  Mr.  Renshaw 
replied,  shading  his  eyes  and  looking  at  the  sun,  "except 
perhaps  that  it  is  not  quite  so  bright." 

"Not  so  bright  by  a  good  deal,"  the  captain  said. 
"There  is  a  change  in  the  color  of  the  sky — it  is  not  so 
blue.  The  wind  has  fallen  too,  and  I  fancy  by  twelve 
o'clock  there  will  be  a  calm.  Of  course  we  cannot  be 
surprised  if  we  do  have  a  change.  We  have  had  a  splen- 
did spell  of  weather,  and  we  are  getting  into  stormy 
latitudes  now." 

"When  the  passengers  went  up  after  breakfast  they 
found  that  the  Flying  Scud  was  scarcely  moving  through 
the  water.  The  sails  hung  idly  against  the  masts,  and 
the  yards  creaked  as  the  vessel  rose  and  fell  slightly  on 
an  almost  invisible  swell. 

"This  would  be  a  good  opportunity,"  the  captain  said 
cheerfully,  "to  get  down  our  light  spars;  the  snugger  we 
are  the  better  for  rounding  the  Horn.  Mr.  Ryan,  send 
all  hands  aloft,  and  send  down  all  spars  over  the  top- 
mast. ' ' 

The  crew  swarmed  up  the  rigging,  and  in  two  hours 
the  Flying  Scud  was  stripped  of  the  upper  yards  and 
lofty  spars. 

"She  looks  very  ugly,"  Marion  Renshaw  said.  "Do 
you  not  think  so,  Mary?" 

"Hideous,"  Mary  Mitford  agreed. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  73 

"She  is  in  fighting  trim  now, "  Mr.  Atherton  said. 

"Yes,  but  who  are  we  going  to  fight."  '  Marion 
asked. 

''We  are  going  to  have  a  skirmish  with  the  weather,  I 
fancy,  Miss  Renshaw.  I  don't  say  we  are  going  to  have 
a  storm,"  he  went  on  as  the  girls  looked  anxiously  up  at 
the  sky,  "but  you  can  see  for  yourselves  that  there  is  a 
change  since  yesterday.  The  wind  has  dropped  and  the 
sky  is  dull  and  hazy,  the  sea  looks  sullen,  the  bright 
little  waves  we  were  accustomed  to  are  all  gone,  and  as 
you  see  by  the  motion  of  the  vessel  there  is  an  under- 
ground swell,  though  we  can  scarcely  notice  it  on  the 
water. ' ' 

"Which  way  do  you  think  the  wind  will  come  from, 
Mr.  Atherton?"  Mary  Mitford  asked. 

"I  fancy  it  will  come  from  the  west,  or  perhaps  north- 
west. Look  at  those  light  streaks  of  cloud  high  up  in 
the  air;  they  are  traveling  to  the  southeast." 

"Look  how  fast  they  are  going,"  Mary  Mitford  said 
as  she  looked  up,  "and  we  have  not  a  breath  of  wind 
here. '.' 

"We  shall  have  it  soon,"  Mr.  Atherton  said.  "You 
see  that  dark  line  on  the  water  coming  up  from  the  west. 
I  am  glad  to  see  it.  It  is  very  much  better  to  have  the 
wind  freshen  up  gradually  to  a  gale  than  to  lie  becalmed 
until  it  strikes  you  suddenly." 

The  girls  stood  at  the  poop-rail  watching  the  sailors 
engaged  in  putting  lashings  on  to  every  movable  object 
on  deck.  In  ten  minutes  the  dark  line  came  up  to  them, 
and  the  Flying  Scud  began  to  move  through  the  water. 
The  courses  were  brailed  up  and  stowed.  The  wind 
rapidly  increased  in  strength,  and  the  captain  presently 
requested  the  passengers  to  go  below,  or  at  any  rate  to 
give  up  their  seats. 


74:  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"There  is  nothing  like  having  the  deck  cleared,"  he 
said.  "If  it  comes  on  to  blow  a  bit  and  there  is  any 
movement,  the  chairs  would  be  charging  about  from  side 
to  side,  and  will  not  only  break  themselves  up,  but  per- 
haps break  some  one's  leg." 

Four  sailors  folded  up  the  chairs,  piled  them  together, 
and  passing  cords  over  them  lashed  them  to  two  ringbolts. 

"Now,  Mr.  By  an,  we  will  get  the  topsails  reefed  at 
once.  There  is  a  heavy  bank  there  to  windward,  and  we 
had  best  get  everything  as  snug  as  possible  before  that 
comes  up  to  us." 

The  dark  bank  of  mist  rose  rapidly,  and  the  sailors  had 
but  just  reached  the  deck  after  closely  reefing  the  topsails 
before  it  was  close  upon  them. 

"Now,  ladies,  please  go  below,"  the  captain  said 
sharply.  "There  is  rain  as  well  as  wind  in  the  clouds;  it 
will  come  down  in  bucketfuls  when  it  does  come." 

This  had  the  desired  effect  of  sending  most  of  the  male 
passengers  down  as  well  as  the  ladies.  A  few  remained 
near  the  companion  ready  to  make  a  dive  below  when 
the  squall  struck  them.  Suddenly  the  wind  ceased  and 
the  topsails  flapped  against  the  masts.  There  was  a  con- 
fused roaring  sound  astern,  and  a  broad  white  line  came 
along  at  race-horse  speed  toward  the  vessel. 

"Get  below,  lads,"  Mr.  Athertonsaid  as  he  led  the  way 
"or  you  will  be  drenched  in  a  moment." 

They  had  but  just  reached  the  cabin  when  there  was  a 
deafening  roar  overhead,  and  almost  at  the  same  moment 
the  vessel  started  as  if  struck  by  a  heavy  blow. 

"Kain  and  wind  together!"  Mr.  Atherton  shouted  in 
reply  to  the  chorus  of  questions  from  those  below. 
"Now,  all  you  have  got  to  do  is  to  make  yourselves  com- 
fortable, for  there  will  be  no  going  up  again  for  some 
time." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  75 

For  five  minutes  the  tremendous  downpour  continued, 
and  then  ceased  as  suddenly  as  it  commenced.  The  wind 
had  dropped  too ;  and  the  silence  after  the  uproar  was 
startling.  It  lasted  but  a  few  seconds ;  then  the  wind 
again  struck  the  ship  with  even  greater  force  than  before, 
although,  as  she  had  not  lost  her  way,  the  blow  was  less 
felt  by  those  below.  In  five  minutes  the  captain  came 
below  with  his  oilskin  coat  and  sou'wester  streaming  with 
wet. 

"I  have  just  looked  down  to  tell  you,"  he  said  cheer- 
fully, "that  everything  is  going  on  well.  The  first  burst 
of  these  gales  is  always  the  critical  point,  and  we  can  con- 
gratulate ourselves  that  we  have  got  through  it  without 
losing  a  spar  or  sail — thanks  to  our  having  had  sufficient 
warning  to  get  all  snug,  and  to  the  gale  striking  us 
gradually.  I  am  afraid  you  won't  have  a  very  comfort- 
able time  of  it  for  the  next  day  or  two ;  but  there  is 
nothing  to  be  at  all  uneasy  about.  The  gale  is  off  the 
land,  and  we  have  sea-room  enough  for  anything.  Now 
we  have  got  rid  of  half  our  cargo  the  ship  is  in  her  very 
best  trim,  and  though  we  may  get  her  decks  washed  a 
bit  by  and  by,  she  will  be  none  the  worse  for  that." 

So  saying  he  again  went  up  on  deck.  For  the  next 
three  days  the  gale  blew  with  fury.  There  were  no  reg- 
ular meals  taken  below,  for  the  vessel  rolled  so  tremen- 
dously that  nothing  would  have  remained  on  the  plates 
and  dishes;  and  the  passengers  were  forced  to  content 
^themselves  with  biscuit,  with  an  occasional  cup  of  coffee 
or  basin  of  soup  that  the  cook  managed  to  warm  up  for 
them.  The  ladies  for  the  most  part  kept  their  cabins,  as 
did  many  of  the  male  passengers,  and  the  absence  of 
regular  meals  was  the  less  felt  as  the  majority  were  suf- 
ering  from  seasickness.  Wilfrid  was  occasionally  ill,  but 
managed  to  keep  up,  and  from  time  to  time  went  on 


76  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

deck  for  a  few  minutes,  while  Marion  spent  most  of  her 
time  on  a  seat  at  the  top  of  the  companion,  looking  out 
on  the  sea. 

It  was  a  magnificent  sight.  Tremendous  waves  were 
following  the  ship,  each  as  it  approached  lifting  her 
stern  high  in  the  air  and  driving  her  along  at  a  speed 
that  seemed  terrific,' then  passing  on  and  leaving  her  to 
sink  down  into  the  valley  behind  it.  The  air  was  thick 
with  flying  spray  torn  from  the  crest  of  the  waves.  At 
first  it  seemed  as  if  each  sea  that  came  up  behind  the  ves- 
sel would  break  over  her  stern  and  drive  her  headforemost 
down;  but  as  wave  after  wave  passed  without  damage 
the  sense  of  anxiety  passed  off,  and  Marion  was  able  to 
enjoy  the  grandeur  of  the  sea.  "Wilfrid,  Mr.  Atherton, 
and  the  Aliens  often  came  in  to  sit  with  her,  and  to  take 
shelter  for  a  time  from  the  fury  of  the  wind.  But  talk- 
ing was  almost  impossible;  the  roar  of  the  wind  in  the 
rigging,  the  noise  of  the  waves  as  they  struck  the  ship, 
and  the  confused  sound  of  the  battle  of  the  elements 
being  too  great  to  allow  a  voice  to  be  heard,  except  when 
raised  almost  to  shouting  point.  ' 

But  Marion  had  no  inclination  for  talking.  Snugly  as 
Mr.  Atherton  had  wedged  her  in  with  pillows  and  cush- 
ions, it  was  as  much  as  she  could  do  to  retain  her  seat, 
as  the  vessel  rolled  till  the  lower  yards  almost  touched 
the  water,  and  she  was  too  absorbed  in  the  wild  grandeur 
of  the  scene  to  want  companionship. 

"The  captain  says  the  glass  is  beginning  to  rise,"  Mr. 
Athertou  said  as  he  met  her  the  fourth  morning  of  the 
gale;  "and  that  he  thinks  the  worst  is  over." 

"I  shall  be  glad  for  the  sake  of  the  others,"  Marion 
replied,  "for  the  sea  to  go  down.  Father  and  mother  are 
both  quite  worn  out;  for  it  is  almost  impossible  for  them 
to  sleep,  as  they  might  be  thrown  out  of  their  berths  if 


MAORI  AND  SETTLES.  77 

they  did  not  hold  on.  For  myself,  I  am  in  no  hurry  for 
the  gale  to  be  over,  it  is  so  magnificently  grand.  Don't 
you  think  so,  Mr.  Atherton?" 

"It  is  grand,  lassie,  no  donbt, "  Mr.  Atherton  said; 
"but  I  have  rather  a  weakness  for  dry  clothes  and  com- 
fortable meals — to  say  nothing  of  being  able  to  -walk  or 
Bit  perpendicularly,  and  not  being  obliged  constantly  to 
hold  on  for  bare  life.  This  morning  I  feel  that  under 
happier  circumstances  I  could  enjoy  a  steak,  an  Irish 
stew,  and  a  couple  of  eggs,  but  a  biscuit  and  a  cup  of 
coffee  are  all  I  can  hope  for. ' ' 

"I  believe  you  enjoy  it  as  much  as  I  do,  Mr.  Atherton," 
the  girl  said  indignantly;  "else  why  do  you  stay  upon 
deck  all  the  time  in  spite  of  the  wind  and  spray?" 

"Well,  you  see,  Miss  Renshaw,  you  ladies  have  an 
objection  to  my  smoking  my  pipe  below;  and  beside, 
what  with  the  groans  and  moans  from  the  cabins,  and 
the  clatter  of  the  swinging  trays,  and  the  noise  of  the 
waves,  and  one  thing  and  another,  there  is  little  to  tempt 
me  to  stay  below.  But  really  I  shall  be  very  glad  when 
it  is  over.  The  ship  has  been  doing  splendidly;  and  as 
the  wind  has  blown  from  the  same  quarter  the  whole 
time,  .the  sea  though  very  high  is  regular,  and  every- 
thing is  going  on  well.  Still  a  gale  is  a  gale,  and  you 
can  never  answer  for  the  vagaries  of  the  wind.  If  it 
were  to  veer  round  to  another  quarter,  for  instance,  you 
would  in  a  few  hours  get  a  broken  sea  here  that  would 
astonish  you,  and  would  try  all  the  qualities  of  the  Fly- 
ing Scud.  Then  again  we  have  been  running  south  with 
tremendous  speed  for  the  last  three  days,  and  if  it  were 
to  go  on  for  a  few  days  longer  we  might  find  ourselves 
down  among  the  ice.  Therefore,  I  say,  the  sooner  the 
gale  is  over  the  better  I  shall  be  pleased." 

Toward  evening  there  was  a  sensible  abatement  in  the 


78  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

force  of  the  wind,  and  the  following  morning  the  gale 
had  so  far  abated  that  the  captain  prepared  to  haul  his 
course  for  the  west. 

"We  have  been  runningf  south  at  the  rate  of  fully  three 
hundred  miles  a  day,"  he  said,  "and  are  now  very  far 
down.  The  moment  this  warm  wind  drops  and  we  get 
it  from  the  south  you  will  find  that  you  will  need  every 
wrap  you  have  to  keep  you  warm.  If  the  gale  had  lasted 
I  had  made  up  my  mind  to  try  to  get  her  head  to  it,  and 
to  lie  to.  We  are  a  great  deal  too  close  to  the  region  of 
ice  to  be  pleasant." 

The  change  in  the  course  of  the  vessel  was  by  no  means 
appreciated  by  the  passengers,  for  the  motion  was  very 
much  rougher  and  more  unpleasant  than  that  to  which 
they  had  now  become  accustomed.  However,  by  the  fol- 
lowing morning  the  wind  had  died  awajr  to  a  moderate 
breeze,  and  the  sea  had  very  sensibly  abated.  The 
topsails  were  shaken  out  of  their  reefs;  and  although  the 
motion  was  still  violent  most  of  the  passengers  emerged 
from  their  cabins  and  came  on  deck  to  enjoy  the  sun, 
which  was  now  streaming  brightly  through  the  broken 
clouds.  The  captain  was  in  high  glee;  the  ship  had 
weathered  the  gale  without  the  slightest  damage.  Not  a 
rope  had  parted,  not  a  sail  been  blown  away,  and  the 
result  fully  justified  the  confidence  he  felt  in  his  ship  and 
her  gear. 

"It  is  a  comfort,"  he  remarked,  "to  sail  under  liberal 
owners.  Now,  my  people  insist  on  having  their  ships  as 
well  found  as  possible,  and  if  I  condemn  spars,  sails,  ropes 
or  stays,  they  are  replaced  without  a  question.  And  it  ia 
the  cheapest  policy  in  the  long  run.  There  is  nothing  so 
costly  as  stinginess  on  board  a  ship.  The  giving  way  of 
a  stay  may  mean  the  loss  of  the  mast  and  all  its  gear, 
and  that  may  mean  the  loss  of  a  ship.  The  blowing  away 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER  t9 

of  a  sail  at  a  critical  moment  may  mean  certain  disaster ; 
and  yet  there  are  many  owners  who  grudge  a  fathom  of 
new  rope  or  a  bolt  of  canvas,  and  who  will  risk  the  safety 
of  their  vessels  for  the  petty  economy  of  a  few  pounds." 
The  next  day  the  wind   had   dropped   entirely.     The 
topgallant  masts  were  sent  up  with  their  yards  and  sails, 
and  by  dinner-time  the  Flying  Scud  looked  more  like 
herself.     As  soon  as  the  wind  lulled  all  on  board  were 
conscious  of  a  sudden  fall  of  temperature.     Bundles  of 
wraps  were  undone  and  greatcoats  and  cloaks  got  out,  and 
although  the  sun  was  still  shining  brightly  the  poop  of 
the  Flying   Scud   soon   presented  a  wintry  appearance. 
There  was  no  sitting  about  now.     Even  the  ladies  had 
abandoned  their  usual  work,  and  by  the  sharp  walking  up 
and  down  on  deck  it  was  evident  that  even  the  warm 
wraps  were  insufficient  in  themselves,  and  that  brisk  exer- 
cise was  necessary  to  keep  up  the  circulation. 

"Well,  what  do  you  think  of  this,  Mrs.  Renshaw?"  Mr. 
Atherton  asked. 

"I  like  it,"  she  said  decidedly;  "but  it  is  certainly  a 
wonderfully  sudden  change  from  summer  to  winter.  My 
husband  does  not  like  it  at  all.  We  never  agreed  on  the 
subject  of  temperature.  He  liked  what  I  call  a  close 
study,  while  I  enjoy  a  sharp  walk  well  wrapped  up  on  a 
winter's  day." 

"I  agree  with  you,"  Mr.  Atherton  said.  "I  can  bear 
any  amount  of  cold,  but  heat  completely  knocks  me  up. 
But  then,  you  see,  the  cold  never  has  a  chance  of  pene- 
trating to  my  bones." 

"Which  course  shall  we  take  now,  do  you  suppose? 
South  of  Cape  Horn  or  through  the  Strait?" 

"It  will  depend  upon  the  winds  we  meet  with,  I  imag- 
ine," Mr.  Atherton  replied.  "If  the  wind  continues 
from  the  south,  I  should  say  the  captain  would  keep  well 


80  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

south  of  the  Horn ;  but  if  it  heads  us  from  the  west  at 
all,  we  may  have  to  go  through  the  Strait,  which,  per- 
sonally, I  own  that  I  should  prefer.  It  has  gone  round 
nearly  a  point  since  I  came  on  deck  this  morning.  If  it 
goes  round  a  bit  more  we  certainly  shall  not  be  able  to 
lay  our  course  round  the  Horn,  for  I  do  not  think  we  are 
far  to  the  south  of  it  now. " 

By  evening  the  wind  had  hauled  further  to  the  west, 
and  the  ship's  head  pointed  more  to  the  north  than  it 
had  done  in  the  morning.  The  passengers  enjoyed  the 
change,  for  the  temperature  had  risen  rapidly,  and  many 
of  the  warm  wraps  that  had  been  got  up  were  laid  aside. 
At  twelve  o'clock  the  captain  had  taken  observations,  and 
found  that  the  ship's  position  was  nearly  due  south  of 
the  Falkland  Isles. 

"We  had  a  narrow  squeak  of  it,  Mr.  Ryan,"  he  said  to 
the  first  mate.  "All  the  time  we  were  running  before 
that  gale  I  had  that  group  of  islands  on  my  mind. " 

"So  had  I,  sir,"  the  mate  replied.  "I  was  praying  all 
the  time  that  the  wind  would  keep  a  bit  to  the  west  of 
north,  for  I  knew  that  when  it  began  our  position  was, 
as  near  as  may  be,  due  north  of  them.  I  guessed  what 
you  were  thinking  of  when  you  told  the  man  at  the  wheel 
to  edge  away  to  the  east  as  much  as  he  dared,  though 
that  was  mighty  little." 

"By  my  reckoning,"  the  captain  said,  "we  could  not 
have  passed  more  than  thirty  miles  to  the  east  of  them. 
We  have  made  about  eighty  miles  of  westing  since  we 
got  on  our  course,  and  we  are  now  just  on  the  longitude 
of  the  westernmost  point  of  the  islands.  They  are  about 
a  hundred  miles  to  the  north  of  us." 

The  wind  continued  from  the  same  quarter,  and  on 
taking  his  observation  on  the  following  day  the  captain 
announced  that  if  there  were  no  change  he  reckoned  upon 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  81 

just  making  the  mouth  of  the  Strait  between  Tierra  del 
Fuego  and  the  islands.  On  going  on  deck  two  mornings 
later  land  was  seen  on  the  port  bow. 

"There  is  Cape  Horn,"  the  captain  said;  "that  lofty 
peak  covered  with  snow.  The  island  nearest  to  us  is 
Herschel  Island.  The  large  island  not  far  from  the  Horn 
is  Wollaston  Island.  As  you  see,  there  are  several  others. 
It  is  not  the  sort  of  place  one  would  like  to  come  down 
upon  in  a  gale,  and  if  I  had  had  my  choice  I  would  rather 
have  gone  a  hundred  miles  south  of  the  Horn.  But  the 
wind  would  not  allow  us  to  lie  that  course,  and  after  the 
gale  we  had  the  other  day  we  have  a  right  to  reckon  upon 
finer  weather,  and  in  light  winds  it  might  have  taken  us 
another  two  or  three  days  beating  round." 

"The  wind  is  very  light  now,"  Mr.  Kenshaw  remarked. 

"Yes,  and  lam  afraid  it  will  be  lighter  still  presently," 
the  captain  said. 

The  vessel  made  but  slow  way,  and  in  the  afternoon 
the  wind  dropped  altogether.  The  Flying  Scud  was  now 
two  or  three  miles  from  the  coast  of  Tierra  del  Fuego, 
and  the  passengers  examined  the  inhospitable-looking 
coast  through  their  glasses.  At  one  or  two  points  light 
wreaths  of  smoke  were  seen  curling  up,  telling  of  en- 
campments of  the  natives. 

"I  think,  Mr.  Eyan,"  the  captain  said,  "I  will  take 
her  in  and  anchor  in  one  of  the  bays.  This  breath  of  air 
might  be  enough  to  move  her  through  the  water  if  she 
were  going  free,  but  it  is  nearly  dead  ahead  of  us  now. 
I  do  n'ot  like  the  idea  of  drifting  all  night  along  this 
coast.  Beside,  we  may  be  able  to  get  some  fish  from  the 
natives,  which  will  be  a  change  for  the  passengers." 

The  vessel's  head  was  turned  toward  the  shore,  and 
now  that  the  light  air  was  well  on  the  beam  it  sufficed  to 
enable  the  vessel  to  steal  through  the  water  at  the  rate 


82  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

of  about  a  knot  an  hour.  At  about  four  o'clock  the 
anchor  was  dropped  in  a  bay  at  a  distance  of  half  a  mile 
from  land,  the  sails  were  furled,  and  the  passengers 
watched  the  shores  in  hopes  that  some  native  craft  might 
make  its  appearance;  but  there  was  no  sign  of  life. 

"Either  the. natives  have  no  fish  to  sell,  or  rather  ex- 
change," the  captain  said,  "for,  of  course,  money  is  of 
no  use  to  them,  or  they  are  afraid  of  us.  Maybe  they 
have  been  massacring  some  shipwrecked  crew,  and 
believe  we  are  a  ship-of-war  come  down  to  punish  them. 
At  any  rate  they  seem  determined  not  to  show." 

The  next  morning  the  sea  was  as  smooth  as  glass,  and 
there  was  not  a  breath  of  air. 

"Would  you  let  us  have  a  boat,  captain?"  Mr.  Ather- 
ton  asked.  "It  will  make  a  pleasant  change,  and  per- 
haps some  of  the  natives  might  come  off  and  sell  us  fish, 
as  they  would  not  be  afraid  of  us  as  they  might  be  of  the 
ship." 

"Yes,  if  you  like  to  make  up  a  party,  Mr.  Atherton, 
you  can  have  a  boat;  but  you  must  not  land.  The 
natives  are  very  treacherous,  and  it  would  not  be  safe  to 
set  foot  on  shore.  Mr.  Ryan,  will  you  get  the  cutter 
into  the  water  after  breakfast?  You  had  better  take 
with  you  two  or  three  muskets.  I  do  not  think  there  is  any 
fear  of  an  attack,  and  besides  you  could  out-row  the 
native  craft,  still  it  is  always  as  well  to  be  prepared." 

Mr.  Atherton  soon  made  up  his  party.  Wilfrid  and 
the  two  Aliens  were  delighted  at  the  offer,  and  Marion 
and  the  Miss  Mitfords  also  petitioned  to  be  allowed  to 
go,  although  Mr.  Atherton  had  not  intended  to  take 
ladies  with  him.  Two  other  young  men  named  Hardy 
and  Wilson  were  also  invited  to  join,  and  this  made  up 
the  complement  that  the  cutter  could  carry  in  comfort. 
The  crew  consisted  of  six  sailors  at  the  oars,  and  Mr. 
Ryan  himself  took  the  helm. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  83 

"You  had  better  wrap  up  well,"  Mr.  Atherton  said  to 
the  girls,  "for  you  will  find  it  cold  sitting  in  a  boat. 
The  thermometer  must  be  down  near  freezing  point." 

Mr.  Atherton  was  the  last  to  take  his  seat,  and  he 
brought  with  him  his  rifle. 

"Why,  what  are  you  going  to  shoot,  Mr.  Atherton?" 
Marion  asked. 

"I  do  not  know  that  I  am  going  to  shoot  anything," 
he  replied;  "but  it  is  always  well  to  be  prepared.  You 
see  I  have  made  preparations  in  other  ways,"  he  added, 
as  the  steward  handed  him  down  a  large  basket,  which 
he  placed  in  the  stern  sheets. 

"But  we  are  only  going  for  an  hour  or  two,  Mr. 
Atherton,"  Wilfrid  remarked.  "We  cannot  want  any- 
thing to  eat  when  we  have  only  just  finished  breakfast." 

"I  do  not  think  it  at  all  likely  we  shall  want  to  open 
the  hamper,  Wilfrid ;  but  you  see  it  is  always  best  to  be 
prepared.  The  weather  looks  perfectly  settled,  but,  like 
the  natives  of  these  parts,  it  is  treacherous.  As  I  pro- 
posed this  expedition  I  feel  a  sort  ..of  responsibility,  and 
have  therefore,  you  see,  taken  precautions  against  every 
contingency." 

"I  do  not  think  there  is  any  chance  of  a  change,"  Mr. 
Ryan  said.  "It  looks  as  if  the  calm  might  last  for  a 
week.  Still,  one  can  never  be  wrong  in  preparing  for  the 
worst.  Beside,  this  cold  weather  gives  one  a  wonderful 
appetite,  and  a  drop  of  the  cratur  never  comes  amiss." 

By  this  time  the  boat  was  fairly  away  from  the  ship, 
and  the  sailors,  who  like  the  passengers  regarded  the 
expedition  as  a  pleasant  change,  stretched  out  to  their 
oars.  The  mate  steered  for  the  headland  to  the  west,  and 
after  passing  it  kept  the  boat  at  a  distance  of  a  few  hun- 
dred y  ards  from  the  shore. 

"Is  there  any  current  here,  Mr.  Ryan?"  Wilfrid  asked 
as  he  watched  the  rocks  and  low  stunted  trees. 


84  JAORl  AND  SETTLER. 

"Very  little, "  the  mate  replied.  "Sometimes  it  iuns 
very  strongly  here,  but  at  present  it  is  not  much  to 
speak  of.  I  do  not  think  it  was  running  more  than  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  an  hour  past  the  ship,  but  no  doubt 
there  is  a  good  deal  more  further  out. ' ' 

To  the  disappointment  of  those  on  board  there  were 
no  signs  of  natives. 

"It  will  be  very  tiresome  if  they  do  not  come  out," 
Marion  said.  "I  want  to  see  a  real  cannibal." 

"I  do  not  so  much  care  about  the  cannibals,  Miss 
Renshaw,  but  I  want  to  see  their  fish.  I  have  not  tasted 
a  really  decent  fish  since  I  left  England ;  but  in  these 
cold  waters  they  ought  to  be  as  good  as  they  are  at  home. 
I  believe  the  natives  catch  them  by  spearing  them  by 
torchlight,  and  in  that  case  they  ought  to  be  good-sized 
fellows. ' '  The  men  after  the  first  start  had  dropped  into 
a  long,  steady  stroke,  and  as  the  boat  glided  along  past 
bay  and  headland  no  one  paid  any  attention  to  time, 
until  the  mate,  looking  at  his  watch,  said : 

"Faith,  we  have  been  gone  an  hour  and  a  half;  I  clean 
forgot  all  about  time.  I  think  we  had  better  be  turning. 
It  will  be  dinner-time  before  we  reach  the  ship  as  it  is." 
The  boat's  head  was  turned.  "I  think,"  the  mate  went 
on,  "we  may  as  well  steer  from  headland  to  headland, 
instead  of  keeping  round  the  bays.  It  will  save  a  good 
bit  of  distance,  and  the  natives  evidently  do  not  mean 
to  show  themselves." 

"They  are  very  provoking,"  Miss  Mitford  said.  "I 
can  see  smoke  among  the  trees  over  there,  and  I  have  no 
doubt  that  they  are  watching  us,  although  we  cannot  see 
them." 

"You  ought  to  have  waved  your  handkerchief  as  we 
came  along,  Miss  Mitford,"  James  Allen  remarked;  "or 
to  have  stood  up  and  showed  yourselves.  They  would  no 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  85 

doubt  have  come  off  then  and  offered  presents  in  token 
of  admiration." 

The  girls  laughed.  "I  do  not  suppose  they  would 
appreciate  our  charms,"  Miss  Mitford  said.  "They  are 
not  in  their  line,  you  see." 

"That  they  certainly  are  not,  Miss  Mitford/'  the  mate 
laughed.  "I  saw  some  of  them  the  last  time  I  came 
through  here,  and  hideous-looking  creatures  they  are, 
and  wear  no  clothes  to  speak  of." 

So  laughing  and  chatting  with  their  eyea  fixed  on  the 
shore  the  party  never  looked  seaward,  until  a  sudden 
exclamation  from  the  mate  called  their  attention  to  that 
direction. 

"Be  Jabers!"  he  exclaimed,  "here  is  a  sea-fog  rolling 
down  on  us  from  the  south ! ' ' 

They  looked  and  saw  what  seemed  like  a  wall  of  white 
smoke  rolling  along  the  water  toward  them.  At  this 
moment  the  boat  was  about  halfway  between  two  head- 
lands, which  were  a  mile  and  a  half  apart,  and  the  shore 
abreast  of  it  was  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant.  The 
sun  was  shining  brightly  upon  the  rolling  mist,  and  the 
girls  uttered  an  exclamation  of  admiration. 

"How  fast  it  comes!"  Marion  said.  "Why,  it  will  be 
here  directly!" 

The  mate  put  the  tiller  a-starboard.  "Row,  men!"  he 
said  in  a  sharp  voice ;  for  they  had  for  a  moment  ceased 
to  pull. 

"Have  you  a  compass?"    Mr.  Atherton  asked. 

The  mate  shook  his  head.  "I  am  no  better  than  an 
idiot  to  have  come  without  one,"  he  said.  "But  who 
could  have  dreamed  we  should  want  it!" 

A  minute  later  a  light  wreath  of  mist  crossed  the  boat, 
and  almost  immediately  the  great  fog  bank  rolled  over  it. 
An  exclamation  broke  from  several  of  those  on  board. 


<j-  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

So  sudden  was  the  change  of  temperature  that  it  seemed 
as  if  an  icy  hand  had  been  laid  upon  them. 

"It  is  fortunate  that  we  are  not  far  from  shore,"  Mr. 
Atherton  said  to  the  mate.  "There  is  nothing  for  it  but 
to  coast  along  close  in." 

"That  is  the  only  thing  to  do,"  Mr.  Eyan  replied. 
"But  it  will  be  an  awkward  business;  for,  as  we  noticed 
when  we  came  along,  the  shore  is  in  many  places  studded 
with  rocks.  However,  we  must  risk  that,  and  by  going 
on  slowly  and  carefully  we  may  get  off  with  slight  damage 
even  if  we  hit  one.  It  is  not  as  if  the  water  was  rough." 

The  fog  was  so  thick  that  they  could  scarcely  see  the 
ends  of  the  oar-blades. 

"How  are  we  to  find  the  ship?"  Marion  asked. 

"There  will  be  no  difficulty  about  that,  Miss  Benshaw. 
They  will  be  sure  to  be  firing  guns  as  signals  for  us. 
There!"  he  broke  off  as  the  boom  of  a  cannon  came 
across  the  water.  "Beside,  with  the  land  on  our  right 
hand  and  this  icy  breeze  from  the  south,  we  cannot  go 
far  out  of  our  way.'* 

"Row  easy,  men, "the  mate  commanded.  "We cannot 
be  far  from  shore  now,  and  we  must  begin  to  look  out 
sharp  for  rocks.  Row  light  and  aisy,  and  do  not  make 
more  noise  with  your  oars  than  you  can  help.  The 
natives  may  be  listening  for  us;  and  we  do  not  want  a 
shower  of  spears  in  the  boat.  Mr.  Allen,  will  you  go 
forward  into  the  bows,  and  keep  a  sharp  lookout  for 
rocks?" 

James  Allen  went  forward,  and  two  or  three  minutes 
later  cried,  "Easy  all!  Hold  her  up!"  Quickly  as  the 
order  was  obeyed  the  boat's  stem  grated  on  the  shore 
before  her  way  was  lost. 

"Back  her  off,  lads!"  the  mate  cried.  As  the  boat 
glided  off  into  deep  waiter  again  there  was  a  yell  from  the 


Maori  JEN  SPEARS  STRUCK  THE  WATER  ROUND  HER.— Pages? 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  87 

shore,  and  a  dozen  spears  struck  the  water  round  her. 
Fortunately  none  of  them  struck  her,  for  she  was  invisi- 
ble to  the  natives,  who  had  been  guided  to  the  spot  by 
the  sound  of  the  oars. 

"Not  an  encouraging  reception,"  Mr.  Atherton  re- 
marked quietly.  "Well,  ladies,  you  have  not  seen  the 
cannibals  as  yet,  but  you  have  heard  them.  I  think  the 
best  plan,  Mr.  Eyan,  will  be  to  tear  up  one  of  these  rugs 
and  muffle  the  oars." 

"I  think  we  may  as  well  do  so, "  the  mate  replied. 
"However,  their  sharp  ears  are  sure  to  hear  us  if  we  are 
close  in  shore,  and  we  dare  not  go  far  out  or  we  might 
lose  our  bearings  altogether." 

"I  do  not  think  we  can  do  that.  In  the  first  place, 
you  see,  there  is  the  breeze  that  brought  down  the  fog 
to  guide  us,  and  in  the  second  the  guns  of  the  ship.  We 
cannot  go  far  wrong  with  them ;  and  I  should  say  that 
when  we  once  get  out  as  far  as  we  believe  the  headland 
to  lie,  the  best  thing  will  be  to  steer  direct  for  the  ship. 
The  danger  in  that  way  would  certainly  be  far  less  than 
it  is  from  rocks  and  savages  if  we  keep  near  the  shore." 

"I  think  you  are  right.  We  will  row  straight  out 
against  the  wind  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour,  that  will  take 
us  clear  of  the  headland,  and  we  will  then  shape  our 
course  direct  for  the  guns. ' ' 


gg  MAORI  AMD  SETTLER. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

PUTTING    IN    THE    REFIT. 

THE  boat  rowed  steadily  in  the  course  that  was  believed 
would  i:ake  them  straight  out  to  sea,  the  mate  listening 
attentively  for  the  sound  of  the  distant  guns.  The  re- 
ports came  up  every  two  or  three  minutes,  their  sound 
muffled  by  the  fog.  "Sure  it's  mighty  difficult  to  tell 
where  the  sound  comes  from,  but  I  think  it  is  well  over 
there  on  our  beam.  Do  you  not  think  so?"  the  mate 
asked  Mr.  Atherton. 

"I  think  so;  yes,  I  feel  sure  that  we  are  rowing  nearly 
due  south.  Even  without  the  sound  of  the  guns  J  should 
feel  sure  that  we  cannot  at  present  be  far  out  of  that 
course.  I  noticed  that  as  we  came  along  you  hardly  had 
to  use  any  helm,  and  that  the  strength  on  both  sides  was 
very  evenly  balanced.  So  that  starting  out  as  we  did 
from  the  shore,  we  must  be  traveling  pretty  straight. 
Of  course  in  the  long  run  we  should  be  sure  to  sweep 
round  one  way  or  the  other  and  lose  our  bearings  alto- 
gether were  it  not  for  the  guns.  Wilfrid,  we  will  appoint 
you  timekeeper." 

"What  am  I  to  keep  time  of,  Mr.  Atherton?" 
"You  are  to  keep  time  of  the  guns.  I  think  they  are  fir- 
ing about  every  three  minutes, but  you  had  better  time  the 
first  two  or  three.  If  you  find  them  three  minutes  apart, 
it  will  be  your  duty  a  quarter  of  a  minute  before  the  gun 
is  due  to  say  in  a  loud  voice  'Stop,'  then  all  conversation 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  89 

is  to  cease  till  we  hear  the  report.  Unless  we -are  all 
silent  and  listening,  it  is  very  difficult  to  judge  the 
exact  direction  from  which  the  sound  comes,  and  it  is 
important  to  keep  as  straight  a  line  as  we  can.  There  is 
the  gun  now,  begin  to  count." 

"I  think  we  can  turn  our  head  in  that  direction  now," 
the  mate  said.  "It  is  just  twenty  minutes  since  we  left 
the  shore,  and  we  ought  to  be  fully  a  mile  out  beyond 
the  headland." 

"I  quite  agree  with  you.  We  have  certainly  a  clear 
course  now  to  the  ship  if  we  do  not  make  any  blunder  in 
keeping  it." 

The  mate  put  the  tiller  a-starboard. 

"I  wonder  how  long  I  am  to  keep  it  over?"  he  said. 
"It  is  a  queer  sensation  steering  without  having  an  idea 
which  way  you  are  going. " 

"The  next  gun  will  tell  us  whether  we  have  gone  too 
far  round  or  not  far  enough,"  Mr.  Atherton  observed. 

"Well,  we  will  try  that,"  the  mate  said  after  a  short 
pause.  "I  should  think  we  ought  to  have  made  half  a 
turn  now." 

"Stop!"  Wilfrid  exclaimed  a  minute  later.  "Easy 
rowing,  lads,  and  listen  for  the  gun." 

The  mate  ordered  silence  in  the  boat.  Half  a  minute 
later  the  report  of  the  gun  was  again  heard.  There  was 
a  general  exclamation  of  surprise,  for  instead  of  coming, 
as  they  expected,  from  a  point  somewhere  ahead,  it 
seemed  to  them  all  that  the  sound  was  almost  astern  of 
them. 

"Now,  who  would  have  thought  that?"  the  mate  said. 
"I  had  no  idea  she  had  gone  round  so  far.  Well,  we 
must  try  again,  and  go  to  work  more  gently  this  time. 
Bow  on,  men!" 

The  tiller  was   put   slightly  a-port,  and  the  boat   con- 


90  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

tinued  her  way.  The  talk  that  had  gone  on  among  the 
passengers  was  now  hushed.  Mr.  Atherton  had  been 
chatting  gayly  with  the  girls  from  the  time  the  fog  came 
on,  and  except  at  the  moment  when  they  went  ashore  and 
were  attacked  by  the  natives,  no  uneasiness  had  been 
felt,  for  the  sound  of  the  guns  had  seemed  to  all  an  as- 
surance that  there  could  be  no  difficulty  in  rejoining  the 
ship.  The  discovery  that  for  a  moment  they  had  been 
actually  going  away  from  the  ship  had,  for  the  first  time 
since  they  rowed  away  from  the  shore,  caused  a  feeling 
of  real  uneasiness,  and  when  Wilfrid  again  gave  notice 
that  the  report  would  soon  be  heard,  all  listened  intently, 
and  there  was  a  general  exclamation  of  satisfaction  Avhen 
the  sound  was  heard  -nearly  ahead: 

"We  have  got  it  now,"  the  mate  said.  "Row  on, 
lads ;  a  long,  steady  stroke  and  we  shall  be  in  before 
dinner  is  cold  yet." 

The  conversation  now  recommenced. 

"Is  it  any  use  my  stopping  here  any  longer?"  Jim 
Allen  cried  from  the  bow ;  "because  if  not  I  will  come  aft 
to  you.  It  is  a  good  deal  warmer  sitting  together  than 
it  is  out  here  by  myself." 

"Yes,  you  may  as  well  come  aft, "  the  mate  replied. 
"As  long  as  we  keep  the  guns  ahead  we  know  that  we 
are  clear  of  rocks.  It  certainly  has  come  on  bitterly 
cold." 

There  was  a  general  chorus  of  assent. 

"I  should  think  it  would  be  a  good  thing,  Kyan,  to  get 
the  sail  aft  and  unlash  it  from  the  gaff  and  put  it  over 
our  legs;  it  will  make  a  lot  of  difference  in  the  warmth." 

"I  think  that  that  is  a  very  good  idea,"  the  mate  as- 
sented. "Lay  in  your  oar  for  a  minute,  Johnson,  and 
get  that  sail  aft." 

The  sail  was  passed  aft,  unlashed  from  the  yard,  and 


MA ORI  AND  SETTLER.  91 

spread  out,  adding  considerably  to  the  comfort  of  all 
those  sitting  astern;  and  now  that'  the  ship's  guns  were 
booming  ahead,  and  they  had  become  accustomed  to  the 
thick  curtain  of  cloud  hanging  round  them,  the  feeling 
of  uneasiness  that  the  girls  had  felt  was  entirely  dissi- 
pated, and  Mr.  Atherton  had  no  longer  any  occasion  to 
use  his  best  efforts  to  keep  up  their  spirits.  All  laughed 
and  chatted  over  their  adventure,  which,  as  they  said, 
far  exceeded  in  interest  anything  they  had  been  promise*}, 
when  they  started  from  the  ship.  The  only  drawback,  as 
they  all  agreed,  was  the  cold,  which  was  really  severe. 

''We  do  not  seem  to  come  up  to  the  guns  as  we  ought 
to,"  Mr.  Atherton  said  to  the  mate  after  the  boat  had 
been  rowing  for  some.  time. 

"That  is  just  what  I  was  thinking,"  Mr.  Ryan  replied. 
"I  fancy  we  must  have  got  a  strong  current  out  here 
against  us." 

"I  expect  we  have.  By  an,  I  tell  you  what.  The  men 
have  been  rowing  for  some  hours  now  since  they  left  the 
ship,  I  think  it  would  be  a  good  thing  if  our  youngsters 
were  to  relieve  some  of  them  for  a  spell.  What  do  you 
say,  lads?" 

Wilfrid,  the  Aliens,  Hardy,  and  Wilson  all  exclaimed 
that  they  should  be  delighted  to  take  a  turn,  as  it  would 
warm  their  blood.  "We  shall  be  able  to  give  them  all  a 
spell,"  Mr.  Atherton  said,  "for  there  are  just  six  of  us." 

"I  am  certainly  not  going  to  let  you  pull,  and  you 
scarcely  out  of  the  doctor's  hands, "  the  mate  said  bluntly. 
"Why,  you  must  be  mad  to  think  of  such  a  thing!  Here, 
do  you  take  the  tiller  and  I  will  row  the  stroke-oar.  Easy 
all,  lads;  put  on  your  jackets.  Four  of  you  come  aft,  and 
the  other  two  go  into  the  bows." 

"I  wish  we  could  row, "  Marion  said  regretfully,  as  the 
new  crew  bent  to  their  oars.  "I  have  done  a  lot  of  row- 


92  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

ing  at  home,  Mr.  Atherton,  and  they  say  I  row  very 
fairly." 

"lam  afraid  you  would  not  be  of  much  assistance  here, 
young  lady, "Mr.  Atherton  said.  "It's one  thing  to  work 
a  light,  well-balanced  oar,  such  as  you  use  in  a  gig  up 
the  river,  but  it  is  a  very  different  one  to  tug  away  at  one 
of  these  heavy  oars  in  a  sea-going  boat  like  this  with  ten 
sitters  in  her.  We  shall  want  all  our  strength  to  get 
back,  you  may  be  sure.  There  must  be  a  strong  current 
against  us,  and  there  is  little  chance  of  our  being  back,  as 
we  hoped,  by  dinner-time." 

After  the  men  had  had  half  an  hour's  rest  Mr.  Ryan 
told  them  to  take  their  seats  and  double  bank  the  oars. 

"We  shall  travel  all  the  faster,"  he  said  to  Mr.  Ather- 
ton, "and  now  that  they  have  got  their  wind  again  it  is 
far  better  that  they  should  be  rowing  than  sitting  still. 
The  guns  are  a  good  deal  nearer  now.  I  do  not  think 
that  the  ship  can  be  more  than  a  mile  or  a  mile  and  a 
half  away." 

"I  do  not  suppose  she  is,"  Mr.  Atherton  replied.  "I 
think  I  will  fire  off  my  rifle  two  or  three  times.  They 
ought  to  be  able  to  hear  it  now,  and  it  will  relieve  their 
minds." 

He  discharged  his  rifle  four  or  five  times,  and  they 
fancied  that  they  heard  shots  in  return. 

"Hullo!"  Mr.  Atherton  exclaimed  suddenly.  "Easy 
all!  Hold  her  up  hard  all!"  Although  the  order  was 
entirely  unexpected  it  was  given  so  sharply  that  it  was 
instantly  obeyed,  and  the  boat  was  brought  to  a  stand- 
still before  she  had  advanced  another  length.  Then  the 
rowers  looked  round  to  see  what  had  been  the  occasion 
of  the  sudden  order.  In  front  of  them,  scarce  ten  feet 
away,  towered  up  a  dark  mass  of  rock.  They  could  only 
see  it  ahead  of  the  boat,  and  how  high  it  was  or  how  far 
it  extended  on  either  side  they  knew  not. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLES.  93 

"Why,  what  is  this?"  the  mate  said  in  astonishment. 
;'We  did  not  notice  any  islands  as  we  came  along.  It 
has  been  a  narrow  escape,  for  at  the  rate  at  which  we 
were  going  through  the  water  we  should  have  stove  in 
our  bow  had  we  run  on  it." 

"We  have  had  a  narrower  escape  than  we  deserve," 
Mr.  Atherton  said.  "I  cannot  think  how  we  can  have 
been  so  foolish." 

"What  do  you  mean?"  the  mate  asked. 
"Why,  we  have  been  steering  straight  for  the  guns, 
have  we  not?" 

"Of  course  we  have." 

"Well,  we  ought  not  to  have  done  so.  If  the  ship  had 
been  lying  well  out  from  the  land  it  would  have  been  all 
right ;  but  she  is  lying  in  a  deep  bay,  and  of  course  a 
straight  course  to  her  from  the  point  we  started  from 
would  take  us  just  where  we  are,  that  is  ashore,  on  the 
other  side  of  the  headland." 

"Of  course  it  would.  We  ought  to  have  kept  well  to 
seaward  of  the  guns  till  they  bore  right  on  our  beam, 
and  then  headed  in  to  her.  Well,  fortunately  no  harm 
has  been  done,  but  we  have  had  a  mighty  narrow  escape. 
If  the  fog  had  been  as  thick  as  it  was  when  it  first  came 
down  upon  us  we  should  have  gone  right  into  it  before 
we  saw  it. ' ' 

The  boat  was  turned  and  rowed  out  to  sea  for  some 
distance,  then  they  again  headed  her  in  the  direction  in 
which  they  wished  to  go,  but  keeping,  the  guns  well  in- 
shore of  them  until  they  judged  by  the  sound  that  they 
were  nearly  opposite  to  her,  then  they  rowed  straight 
toward  her.  The  sound  of  their  oars  was  heard,  and 
a  loud  hail  informed  them  of  the  exact  position  of  the 
ship,  and  two  or  three  minutes  later  a  dark  image  loomed 
up  in  front  of  the  boat. 


94  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"All  well,  Mr.  Ryan?"  the  captain  shouted. 

"All  well,  sir." 

"You  have  given  us  a  great  fright,"  the  captain  went 
on.  "We  expected  you  back  at  least  two  hours  ago, 
thinking  of  course  you  would  have  returned  when  the 
fog  set  in,  even  if  you  had  not  done  so  before." 

"We  had  turned,  sir,  before  the  fog  rolled  in;  but  what 
with  losing  our  way,  and  the  difficulty  of  keeping  our 
course  in  the  fog,  and  the  fact  that  there  is,  we  think,  a 
strong  current  that  was  running  against  us  further  out, 
we  have  been  a  long  time  coming  back.  So  you  see,  we 
have  double  banked  all  the  oars." 

By  this  time  they  were  lying  by  the  gangway.  It  was 
found  that  the  girls  in  spite  of  their  wraps  were  so  stiff 
with  the  cold  that  they  had  to  be  assisted  up  the  gang- 
way to  the  deck.  Exercise  warmed  the  blood  of  the  rest, 
and  they  were  soon  on  deck.  Mr.  Atherton,  who  alone 
of  the  men  had  not  been  rowing,  had  some  little  difficulty 
in  getting  up,  although,  as  he  said,  he  had  no  more  right 
to  feel  cold  than  a  walrus,  protected  as  he  was  by  nature. 

There  had  been  much  anxiety  on  board  until  the  shots 
fired  by  Mr.  Atherton  were  heard.  The  captain  had 
ordered  plenty  of  hot  soup  to  be  got  ready,  and  the  girls 
soon  felt  in  a  comfortable  glow.  Mr.  Atherton  gave  a 
comical  account  of  their  adventures,  but  he  did  not 
conceal  the  fact  that  at  one  time  their  position  had  been 
really  a  perilous  one,  and  that  if  they  had  not  been 
pretty  vigilant  they  might  have  fallen  into  the  hands  of 
the  natives. 

"Well,  all  is  well  that  ends  well,"  Mr.  Renshaw  said, 
"but  I  think  we  will  have  no  more  boat  excursions  as 
long  as  we  are  in  the  neighborhood  of  cannibals.  Of 
course  no  one  could  have  foreseen  the  fog  coming  on  so 
suddenly,  but  you  have  evidently  all  had  a  narrow 
escape." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  95 

Those  who  had  taken  part  in  the  adventure,  however, 
were  highly  pleased  with  their  share  in  it,  and  agreed 
that  although  perhaps  at  the  time  it  was  unpleasant  it 
was  very  exciting,  and  was  an  incident  that  they  should 
never  forget  all  their  lives. 

The  fog  continued  for  three  days,  at  the  end  of  which 
time  an  easterly  wind  set  in  and  the  air  cleared,  and  the 
Flying  Scud  weighed  her  anchor  and  proceeded  on  her 
voyage.  Ten  days  later  a  gale  set  in  from  the  south. 
The  cold  was  intense,  and  the  spray  as  it  flew  from  her 
bows  cased  her  fore-rigging  and  deck  with  ice.  The 
wind  increased  hourly  in  fury,  and  the  captain  decided 
to  run  before  it.  "We  have  plenty  of  sea-room,"  he 
said,  "and  shall  get  out  of  this  bitter  cold  as  we  get 
further  north.  It  will  not  last  long,  I  dare  say." 

Day  after  day,  however,  the  gale  continued,  seeming 
to  increase  rather  than  diminish  in  force.  On  the  morn- 
ing of  the  sixth  day  after  it  had  begun  the  passengers 
heard  a  tremendous  crash  on  deck.  Wilfrid  ran  up  the 
companion  and  looked  out,  and  reported  that  th*  main- 
mast and  the  fore-topmast  had  gone  overboard.  For- 
tunately the  gust  that  had  done  this  damage  proved  to 
be  the  climax  of  the  gale ;  by  nightfall  it«j  force  had 
sensibly  abated,  and  two  days  later  it  feU  tc  a  calm,  and 
all  hands  set  to  work  to  repair  damages. 

"I  have  no  spar  that  will  be  of  any  use  for  a  main- 
mast, "  the  captain  said.  "We  must  content  ourselves 
with  getting  up  a  fore-topmast  and  then  under  what  sail 
we  can  set  upon  that  and  the  mizzen  make  for  one  of  the 
islands  and  try  to  get  a  good-sized  spar  for  the  main- 
mast. I  reckon  that  we  are  not  more  than  two  hundred 
and  fifty  miles  from  the  Austral  Group.  We  have  been 
blown  nearly  twenty  degrees  north." 

Three  days  later  land  was  seen  ahead,  and  this  the 


96  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

captain,  after  taking  an  observation,  declared  to  be 
Malayta,  one  of  the  largest  islands  of  the  group. 

"I  would  rather  have  gone  on  under  this  reduced  sail," 
he  said  to  Mr.  Atherton,  in  whom  he  had  great  confi- 
dence, "if  we  had  been  sure  of  fine  weather;  but  that  we 
cannot  reckon  upon  at  this  time  of  year,  and  I  should 
not  like  to  be  caught  in  another  gale  in  this  crippled  state 
so  near  the  islands.  So  of  the  two  evils  I  consider  it  the 
least  td  go  in  and  try  and  get  a  spar  that  will  do  for  our 
purpose. " 

"What  is  the  evil  of  going  in?"  Mr,  Atherton  asked. 

"The  natives,"  the  captain  replied  shortly.  "They 
are  a  treacherous  lot  in  all  these  islands;  but  the  Australs 
bear  a  particularly  bad  reputation,  and  we  shall  have  to 
be  very  careful  in  our  dealings  with  them." 

"Well,  as  we  are  forewarned  they  are  not  likely  to 
take  us  by  surprise,  captain ;  and  as,  with  the  crew  and 
passengers,  we  can  muster  a  pretty  strong  force,  we 
ought  to  be  able  to  beat  off  any  open  attack." 

"Yes,  I  think  we  could  do  that,"  the  captain  agreed. 
"If  I  did  not  think  so  I  would  not  put  in,  but  would 
take  the  chance  of  our  making  our  way,  crippled  as  we 
are,  to  New  Zealand.  The  thing  we  shall  have  to  guard 
against  is  a  sudden  and  treacherous  onslaught;  the  crews 
of  many  ships  have  been  massacred  owing  to  carelessness 
and  overconfldence.  However,  we  will  not  be  caught 
napping,  and  I  therefore  hope  to  get  off  unscathed." 

As  they  neared  the  land  the  passengers  were  delighted 
•with  the  aspect  of  the  shore.  Groves  of  trees  came  down 
to  the  very  edge  of  the  water;  in  the  interior  the  land 
was  high,  but  was  covered  to  the  summit  of  the  hills  with 
foliage.  As  they  approached,  and  the  captain  gave 
orders  to  prepare  for  anchoring,  they  could  see  a  number 
of  natives  gathered  on  the  narrow  strip  of  sand  close  to 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  97 

the  water.  They  were  waving  boughs  of  trees  in  token 
of  friendship,  and  were,  as  far  as  could  be  seen  by  the 
aid  of  a  telescope,  unarmed. 

"They  look  friendly,  mother,"  Marion  said,  after 
watching  them  through  the  glass.  "Won't  it  be  nice  to 
land  and  take  a  walk  among  those  feathery -looking  trees! 
There  will  be  no  fear  of  fogs  or  cold  here;  the  tempera- 
ture is  quite  perfect  " 

"Yon  will  not  land,  I  can  assure  you,  young  lady," 
the  captain,  who  was  passing  by  and  overheard  her,  said. 
"Those  fellows  look  friendly  enough,  I  agree,  but  there 
are  no  more  treacherous  rascals  among  the  islanders  of 
the  Pacific.  I  shall  give  them  as  wide  a  berth  as  I  can, 
and  get  them  if  possible  to  cut  a  spar  and  tow  it  out  to 
us,  instead  of  sending  a  party  on  shore  to  fetch  it.  No 
one  will  leave  this  ship  with  my  permission,  unless  it  be 
a  boat's  party  armed  to  the  teeth  to  fetch  water.  These 
fellows  are  as  treacherous  as  the  natives  of  Tierra  del 
Fuego,  and  vastly  more  warlike  and  dangerous." 

"Are  they  cannibals,  captain?"  Mrs.  Eenshaw  asked. 

"That  I  cannot  tell  you  for  certain,  Mrs.  Kenshaw. 
They  are  thieves  and  murderers,  but  whether  they  eat 
human  flesh  is  more  than  I  can  tell.  It  does  not  concern 
me  greatly  whether  if  they  kill  me  they  eat  me  afterward 
or  not;  but  I  do  not  mean  to  give  them  the  chance  of 
killing  me  or  any  of  us,  I  can  assure  you." 

"After  the  character  you  have  given  me  of  them  I 
haveno  longer  the  slightest  inclination  to  land,  captain." 

As  soon  as  the  vessel  came  to  an  anchor  a  number  of 
canoes  put  out,  laden  with  yams,  cocoanuts,  and  other 
vegetables  and  fruits  for  exchange.  Had  the3r  been 
allowed  they  would  have  come  alongside  and  climbed  up 
to  the  deck,  but  the  captain  would  not  permit  them  to 
come  within  thirty  or  forty  yards.  Although  there  was 


98  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

no  one  on  board  who  could  speak  their  language,  his 
emphatic  gestures  were  understood  by  the  natives,  and 
were  sufficient  to  show  them  that  he  was  not  to  be  trifled 
with.  Two  boats  only  were  allowed  to  approach  at  a 
time,  and  a  guard  of  six  sailors  with  muskets  were  placed 
on  deck,  with  orders  to  prevent  any  one  coming  up,  and 
to  cover  those  who  descended  the  gangway.  The 
younger  passengers  thought  that  the  captain  was  unnec- 
essarily timid;  but,  ready  as  he  was  to  oblige  them  on 
ordinary  occasions,  they  saw  that  this  time  it  would  be 
no  use  to  try  to  change  his  determination  that  none 
should  go  on  shore.  Going  down  the  gangway  they  bar- 
gained with  the  natives,  giving  little  articles  in  exchange 
for  fruit. 

Mr.  Atherton  was  evidently  of  the  captain's  opinion  as 
to  the  necessity  for  prudence,  and  had  stationed  himself 
with  his  rifle  near  the  gangway.  "They  look  quite 
peaceful  and  cheerful,"  Marion  Renshaw  said  to  him. 
'•'Do  you  think  there  is  really  any  use  in  all  these  pre- 
cautions, Mr.  Atherton?" 

"I  do  indeed,  Miss  Renshaw.  I  do  not  think  one  can 
be  too  careful  when  dealing  with  people  who  are  notori- 
ously so  treacherous." 

"Are  you  a  good  shot  with  a  rifle,  Mr.  Atherton?" 

"Yes;  although  I  say  it  myself,  I  am  an  exceptionally 
good  shot.  I  have  practiced  a  great  deal  with  the  rifle, 
and  have,  I  suppose,  a  natural  aptitude  for  it ;  for  when 
I  fire  I  am  morally  certain  of  hitting  my  mark,  though  I 
am  hardly  conscious  of  taking  aim." 

When  the  contents  of  a  few  boats  had  been  taken  on 
board  the  captain  made  signs  that  he  required  no  more, 
and  the  natives,  with  looks  of  evident  discontent,  pad- 
dled back  to  the  shore. 

"Wq  shall  have  some  chiefs  off  in  the  morning,"  the 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  9$ 

captain  said.  "To-day  they  have  kept  in  the  back- 
ground, but  seeing  that  we  are  wary  and  on  our  guard 
they  will  probably  come  off  to-morrow  to  view  matters 
for  themselves.  I  shall  let  them  perceive  that  I  am  well 
prepared,  and  it  may  be  when  they  see  this  they  will  be 
inclined  to  do  a  little  honest  trading,  and  to  bring  off  a 
strong  spar  with  which  we  can  at  any  rate  make  a  shift 
for  our  mainmast.  We  will  keep  watch  and  watch  as  if 
we  were  at  sea.  It  is  as  likely  as  not  some  of  their  canoes 
may  be  coming  out  in  the  night  to  see  if  we  are  to  be 
caught  napping." 

"It  is  horrid,"  Kate  Mitford  said,  as  she  with  her 
sister,  Marion,  and  several  of  the  younger  passengers 
stood  together  that  evening  on  the  poop  looking  toward 
the  shore.  The  young  moon  was  sinking  in  the  west, 
the  stars  shone  with  great  brilliancy,  and  the  water  was 
as  smooth  as  glass.  The  outline  of  the  palms  could  be 
made  out  against  the  sky,  and  in  several  places  the  light 
of  fires  could  be  perceived,  and  the  stillness  of  the  even- 
ing was  broken  by  the  hum  of  distant  voices.  "It  is 
really  a  shame  that  we  cannot  go  ashore.  I  am  sure  the 
savages  looked  civil  and  friendly,  and  it  would  be  de- 
lightful to  wander  about  in  such  a  wood  as  that." 
.  Two  or  three  voices  were  raised  in  assent. 

"Have  you  heard  the  little  story  of  the  spider  and  the 
fly,  Miss  Kate?"  Mr.  Atherton  said,  moving  across  from 
the  other  side  of  the  deck,  where  he  was  smoking  a  cigar. 
"In  that  case,  you  know,  it  was  the  prettiest  little  bower 
that  ever  you  did  espy,  and  perhaps  the  fly  admired  it 
just  as  much  as  you  admire  that  grove  ashore.  The  re- 
sult of  a  visit  would  be  identical  in  both  cases.  Those 
on  board  other  ships  have  been  taken  in  by  the  peaceful 
appearance  of  the  natives,  and  the  loveliness  of  the 
islands,  and  the  result  was  fatal  to  them.  Personally,  I 


100  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

should  feel  much  more  comfortable  if  I  saw  those  savages 
putting  out  in  a  body  in  their  canoes  to  attack  the  ship 
than  I  do  now  while  they  are  keeping  up  this  pretense  of 
friendliness.  An  open  danger  one  can  meet,  but  when 
you  know  that  treachery  is  intended,  but  no  idea  what 
form  it  will  take  or  \vhen  the  mask  of  friendship  will  be 
thrown  off,  it  is  trying  to  the  nerves.  Fortunately  we 
know  their  character,  and  may  hope  to  be  ready  when 
the  danger  comes.  Still  the  waiting  is  trying." 

"And  you  really  feel  that,  Mr.  Atherton?"  Marion 
Eenshaw  asked. 

"I  do  indeed,  Miss  Renshaw.  We  may  get  away  with- 
out trouble;  but  if  so  it  will  be  solely  because  the  natives 
see  that  we  are  prepared  for  them  and  are  not  be  taken 
by  surprise.  Seeing  our  crippled  state,  my  own  opinion 
is,  that  the  natives  will  not  let  us  go  off  without  making 
at  least  one  attempt  to  surprise  us." 

Mr.  Atherton  spoke  strongly,  for  he  thought  that  it 
•was  possible  that  some  of  the  youngsters  might,  unless 
thoroughly  roused  to  a  sense  of  danger,  do  something 
foolish  and  rash.  His  words  had  the  effect  desired.  His 
share  in  the  affair  at  Rio  had  caused  him  to  be  regarded 
with  respect  and  admiration  by  the  young  men  on  board, 
and  they  felt  that  if  in  his  opinion  the  danger  was  grave 
it  was  not  for  them  to  doubt  its  reality.  A  vigilant 
watch  was  kept  all  night,  and  loaded  muskets  were  served 
out  to  the  watch  on  deck.  The  guns  had  been  loaded 
before  they  anchored,  and  the  spare  muskets  were  placed 
so  as  to  be  handy  for  the  watch  below  should  they  be 
suddenly  called  up.  After  the  moon  went  down  a  light 
mist  rose  on  the  surface  of  the  sea.  Several  times  dur- 
ing the  night  faint  sounds  were  heard  near  the  ship,  but 
immediately  the  officer  of  the  watch  challenged,  silence 
reigned  for  a  considerable  time. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLES.  101 

"How  has  the  night  passed,  Ryan?"  Mr.  Atherton 
asked  the  first  officer  as  soon  as  he  came  on  deck,  just  as 
daylight  was  breaking. 

"There  have  been  some  of  them  near  us  all  night," 
Mr.  Eyan  replied.  "I  do  not  think  they  were  in  force, 
but  they  wanted  to  see  whether  we  kept  a  sharp  watch; 
and  I  think  we  have  satisfied  them  as  to  that,  for  every 
time  the  slightest  noise  was  heard  we  hailed  at  once, 
should  like  to  have  sent  a  musket-ball  in  the  direction  of 
the  sound,  but  as  we  must  get  a  spar,  if  possible,  and 
shall  be  all  the  better  for  a  score  or  two  casks  of  fresh 
water,  it  won't  do  to  begin  to  quarrel  with  them.  Once 
we  get  what  we  want  on  board  the  beggars  may  attack  us 
as  soon  as  they  like.  It  would  do  them  a  world  of  good 
to  get  handsomely  thrashed,  and  to  be  taught  that  vessels 
are  not  to  be  .plundered  with  impunity. " «,, 

"As  you  say,  it  might  do  them  good,  but  I  hope  there 
will  be  no  trouble.  I  have  no  doubt  whatever  that  we 
should  beat  them  off,  but  we  might  lose  some  lives  in 
doing  it;  besides,  we  have  ladies  on  board." 

"I  hope  so  too;  and,  prepared  as  we  are,  I  should  feel 
quite  safe  if  it  was  not  for  that  mast  being  gone.  They 
know  that  we  are  comparative  cripples,  and  no  doubt 
looked  upon  us  as  lawful  booty  when  they  saw  us  making 
in;  and  I  do  not  think  they  will  let  themselves  be  balked 
of  their  prey  without  an  effort." 

"That  is  just  my  view  of  the  matter,  and  I  mean  to 
keep  a  sharp  lookout  while  we  are  here.  You  will  all 
have  your  bands  full,  and  I  will  get  two  or  three  of  the 
young  fellows  to  join  with  me  in  keeping  a  sharp  watch 
over  their  doings." 

"That  is  a  good  plan,"  the  mate  agreed.  "There  will, 
as  you  say,  be  plenty  for  us  to  do,  and  it  worries  one  to 
have  to  attend  to  work  and  to  keep  one's  eyes  at  the  back 


102  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

of  one's  head  at  the  same  time.  Of  course  we  shall  al- 
Vfays  have  a  watch  set  whatever  we  are  doing,  still  I  have 
more  faith  in  your  lookout  than  in  that  of  half  a  dozen 
fo'castle  hands." 

"When  the  two  Aliens  and  Wilfrid  camfc  on  deck  Mr. 
Atherton  drew  them  aside.  "Look  here,  lads,"  he  be- 
gan. "You  heard  what  I  said  last  night.  I  meant  it, 
and  I  am  sure  I  was  not  wrong,  for  there  have  been 
canoes  hovering  about  us  all  night.  Now,  in  a  short 
time  the  officers  and  crew  will  be  seeing  about  getting 
•water  on  board,  and  if  the  natives  bring  out  a  spar  that 
will  do  as  a  jury  mainmast  there  will  be  the  work  of 
trimming  it,  getting  it  into  its  place,  and  rigging  it. 
My  own  opinion  is,  that  now  the  natives  see  we  are  sus- 
picious and  on  the  watch  they  will  for  sometime  make  a 
show  of  being  extremely  friendly  so  as  to  throw  us  off 
our  guard,  and  as  the  officers  and  sailors  will  be  busy 
they  may  possibly  relax  their  precautions  a  little.  Now 
I  propose  that  you  and  I  shall  constitute  an  amateur 
watch  from  sunrise  to  dark.  After  that  the  men's  work 
will  be  done,  and  there  will  be  no  fear  of  their  being 
taken  by  surprise.  The  real  danger  is,  I  think,  in  the 
daytime.  Wilfrid  and  I  will  take  the  second  mate's 
watch,  and  do  you  two  take  the  first  mate's — that  is,  if 
you  agree  to  my  proposal." 

The  three  young  fellows  at  once  expressed  their  will- 
ingness to  do  as  he  directed  them. 

"During  our  respective  watches,"  Mr.  Atherton  went 
on,  "we  must  keep  our  attention  directed  solely  to  the 
natives.  There  must  be  no  watching  what  is  going  on 
on  board,  no  talking  and  laughing  with  the  other  passen- 
gers ;  we  must  consider  ourselves  as  if  on  duty.  One  of 
us  must  take  his  place  on  the  fo'castle,  the  other  in  the 
•waist.  The  natives  are  sure  to  hang  round  the  ship  in. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  103 

their  canoes  watching  what  we  are  doing,  and  offering 
things  for  sale.  It  will  be  our  duty  to  keep  a  vigilant 
eye  upon  them,  to  watch  every  movement,  to  give  instant 
warning  if  their  number  is  at  anytime  larger  than  usual, 
and,  in  fact,  to  prevent  the  possibility  of  their  closing 
suddenly  in  upon  us  and  taking  us  by  surprise.  Remem- 
ber, it  is  a  case  of  absolute  duty ;  I  have  volunteered  to 
the  first  officer  to  undertake  it,  and  he  will,  relying  upon 
our  vigilance,  give  his  attention  to  h.is  work." 

"Shall  we  be  armed,  Mr.  Atherton?"  James  Allen 
asked. 

"Yes,  James,  I  think  that  it  will  be  as  well  to  have  our 
guns  beside  us  while  on  duty.  Of  course  there  is  no 
occasion  to  have  them  on  our  shoulders  like  sentries,  but 
it  will  be  well  to  have  them  always  within  reach  of  the 
hand  in  case  of  sudden  danger.  The  report  of  a  musket 
would  give  the  alarm  far  quicker  and  more  effectually 
than  a  shout  would  do,  especially  if  men  are  at  work  on 
deck  and  making  a  noise.  Well,  as  you  agree,  we  will 
begin  after  breakfast. ' ' 

"How  ) about  meals,  sir?"  Tom  Allen  asked.  "If  they 
mean  to  make  an  attack  I  should  think  they  would  be 
likely  to  choose  meal-tinie,  when  the  passengers  are  all 
below  and  the  deck  will  be  comparatively  deserted." 

"We  must  keep  watch  then  also,"  Mr.  Atherton  said 
decidedly.  "I  will  speak  to  Mr.  Ryan  and  ask  him  to 
tell  the  steward  that  two  of  us  will  require  something  put 
on  the  table  for  them  after  the  others  have  done.  I  do 
not  think  that  he  himself  is  likely  to  leave  the  deck  when 
the  captain  is  below,  and  the  two  of  us  who  happen  to  be 
on  duty  can  have  our  meals  when  he  does.  Of  course  when- 
ever those  on  duty  come  down  for  this  purpose  the  others 
will  take  their  places  until  they  return.  "We  will  change 
about  each  day.  This  is  supposed  to  be  your  watch, 


104  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Allen,  from  four  to  eight.  Wilfrid  and  I  will  begin  the 
work  at  that  hour.  You  will  relieve  us  at  twelve,  and 
we  shall  take  the  watch  from  four  to  eight.  To-morrow 
we  will  take  the  early  watch,  and  so  on." 

"I  will  tell  the  Grimstones, "  Wilfrid,  who  had  always 
gone  for  a  daily  chat  with  the  men  forward,  said;  "they 
will  be  glad  to  join  us  in  the  watch,  and  I  should  think 
the  other  men  forward  would  do  so  too.  I  know  they 
all  find  it  very  hard  work  to  get  through  the  day." 

The  Grimstones  at  once  agreed  to  keep  watch,  as  did 
the  other  three  men  who  occupied  the  fore  cabin  with 
them.  Mr.  Atherton  got  muskets  and  ammunition  for 
them  from  Mr.  Ryan,  and  the  two  Grimstones  were  ap- 
pointed to  his  watch,  the  other  men  to  that  of  the  Allen's. 

At  seven  bells  most  of  the  passengers  came  on  deck  to 
enjoy  the  fresh  morning  air  for  an  hour  before  breakfast; 

"You  are  not  going  to  enjoy  the  pleasure  of  Wilfrid's 
or  my  company  at  breakfast,  Mrs.  Renshaw, "'  Mr.  Ather- 
ton said,  smiling,  to  that  lady  as  she  stood  with  the  three 
girls  round  her  on  the  poop. 

"Why  not,  Mr.  Atherton?"  she  asked  in  surprise. 

"He  and  the  Aliens  and  myself  are  going  to  do  amateur 
sentry  work  as  long  as  we  lie  here,  Mrs.  Renshaw.  The 
crew  will  be  all  busy  refitting  the  ship,  and  so  I  have 
volunteered  to  undertake,  with  their  assistance,  the  duty 
of  keeping  a  sharp  eye  on  those  tricky  gentlemen 
ashore." 

"Are  you  in  earnest,  Mr.  Atherton?" 

"Quite  in  earnest  that  we  are  going  to  do  so,  Mrs. 
Renshaw.  There  may  be  no  absolute  occasion  for  it,  but 
there  is  nothing  like  keeping  on  the  safe  side;  and  as  we 
cannot  go  ashore,  and  one  cannot  talk  continuously  for 
fifteen  or  sixteen  hours,  we  may  just  as  well  pass  a  por- 
tion of  our  time  in  playing  at  sentinels." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  105 

"But  when  will  you  get  breakfast?"  Marion  asked. 
"Shall  I  bring  it  up  to  you,  Mr.  Atherton?'/ 

"No,  thank  you,  Miss  Renshaw.  We  have  arranged 
to  have  it  with  Mr.  Ryan  afterward.  I  am  much  obliged 
to  you  for  your  offer  just  the  same.  It  is  a  very  kind  one, 
especially  since  you  will,  for  once,  particularly  enjoy 
your  breakfast,  as  you  will  have  room  for  your  elbows." 

"You  are  laughing  at  me  again,  Mr.  Atherton.  One 
would  really  think  that  you  take  me  to  be  about  ten  yeara 
old." 

"I  think  a  little  teasing  does  you  good,  Miss  Renshaw. 
It  is  one  of  the  privileges  of  us  old  fellows  to  try  to  do 
good  to  our  young  friends :  and  girls  of  your  age  lord  it 
BO  over  their  brothers  and  their  brother's  friends  that  it 
is  good  for  them  to  be  teased  a  little  by  their  elders." 

"Would  not  you  think,  mother,"  Marion  appealed, 
"that  Mr.  Atherton  by  his  talk  was  somewhere  about 
eighty  and  that  I  was  quite  a  child?' 

"I  agree  with  him  that  it  is  rather  a  good  thing  for 
girls  of  your  age,  Marion,  to  be  snubbed  a  little  occa- 
sionally ;  especially  on  a  voyage  like  this,  when  there  are 
several  young  fellows  on  board  who  have  nothing  better 
to  do  than  to  wait  upon  you  and  humor  your  whims." 

There  was  a  general  laugh.  Before  a  fresh  subject  was 
started  the  breakfast-bell  rang  and  the  passengers  went 
below.  Mr,  Atherton  fetched  his  rifle  from  his  cabin, 
and  Wilfrid  was  going  to  unpack  his  double-barreled 
gun  when  his  friend  said:  "I  should  not  brother  about 
that  now,  Wilfrd;  take  one  of  the  ship's  muskets.  It 
will  make  just  as  much  noise  if  you  have  to  fire  it,  and 
you  will  not  be  alarming  the  passengers  by  bringing 
your  gun  backward  and  forward  from  your  cabin.  I  am 
going  to  hang  up  my  rifle  when  I  come  off  guard  in 
Byan's  cabin  on  deck,  where  it  will  be  handy.  You  take 


106  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

the  fo'oastle,  your  two  men  can  be  in  the  waist,  one  on 
each  side,  and  I  will  take  the  poop.  Just  at  present  our 
duty  will  be  a  nominal  one,  as  the  canoes  have  not  put 
out,  but  I  expect  they  will  be  here  before  long." 

Before  breakfast  was  over,  indeed,  a  large  canoe  was 
brought  down  from  the  woods  and  placed  in  the  water, 
and  a  number  of  natives  appeared  on  the  shore.  The 
first  officer  at  once  summoned  the  captain  on  deck. 

"Tell  all  the  men  to  have  their  arms  handy,  Mr. 
By  an,"  the  captain  said  as  he  looked  at  the  gathering 
on  shore.  "I  do  not  suppose  they  mean  to  attack  us  in, 
this  open  way,  still  we  may  as  well  be  upon  our  guard. 
Order  the  men  not  to  show  their  arms,  but  to  go  about 
their  work  as  usual.  We  do  not  wish  to  appear  afraid 
of  them,  or  to  take  up  a  position  of  hostility.  I  hopa 
the  chiefs  are  coming  off  for  a  friendly  palaver." 

In  a  few  minutes  the  canoes  put  off  from  the  shore. 
First  came  the  great  canoe,  which  was  paddled  by  thirty 
men.  In  the  bow  and  stern  were  hideous  images.  Four 
natives,  evidently  of  superior  rank  were  seated  near  the 
stern,  and  in  the  bow  stood  a  man  beating  his  hands  iu 
time  to  the  stroke  of  the  paddles  and  singing  a  song, 
which  was  responded  to  by  a  deep  exclamation  from  the 
rowers  at  every  stroke.  Another  man  stood  by  the  side 
of  the  singer  waving  a  green  bough.  Behind  this  great 
canoe  followed  a  score  of  smaller  ones. 

"We  will  receive  them  in  state,  Mr.  Ryan.  Evidently 
they  intend  to  keep  up  an  appearance  of  friendliness  at 
present.  We  will  meet  them  in  the  same  spirit.  Fasten 
the  signal  flags  on  to  the  halyards  and  run  them  up  to 
the  masthead,  let  half  a  dozen  men  with  cutlasses  take 
their  place  at  thb  gangway  as  a  sort  of  guard  of  honor, 
let  the  rest  go  on  with  their  work  but  keep  their  arms 
handy  for  action." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  107 

When  the  great  canoe  approached  the  vessel  the  men 
(stopped  paddling,  and  one  of  the  chiefs  standing  up 
made  an  address  to  the  captain,  who  was  standing  at  the 
top  of  the  gangway.  Not  a  word  that  he  said  was  under- 
stood, but  the  address  seemed  to  be  of  a  friendly  nature, 
and  the  chief  held  up  some  cocoanuts  and  yams  as  if  to 
show  his  desire  to  trade.  When  he  had  finished  the  cap- 
tain took  off  his  hat  and  also  spoke,  and  by  gestures 
invited  the  chiefs  to  come  on  board.  By  this  time  all 
the  passengers  had  come  on  deck,  and  were  watching  the 
proceedings  with  great  interest. 

"Do  you  think  it  safe  to  let  them  on  board?"  the  first 
officer  asked  Mr.  Atherton,  who  was  intently  watching 
the  natives  in  the  smaller  canoes. 

"Quite  safe,"  he  replied.  "So  long  as  only  a  few  of 
their  followers  come  with  them  there  is  no  fear  of  their 
-attempting  anything.  While  the  chiefs  are  in  our  hands 
they  act,  as  it  were,  as  hostages  for  the  good  conduct  of 
their  people.  So  far  their  intentions  are  clearly  peace- 
ful. Whether  that  will  last  will  depend  upon  whether 
they  think  there  is  a  chance  of  success  or  not.  At  pres- 
ent all  we  have  to  do  is  to  take  advantage  of  it,  and  to 
get  what  we  want  on  board." 

By  this  time  the  canoe  was  approaching  the  side  of  the 
ship.  The  four  chiefs  ascended  the  ladder,  followed  by 
four  or  five  of  lower  rank  who  had  been  seated  near  them. 
As  they  reached  the  deck  the  principal  chief  turned 
round  and  shouted  an  order  in  a  loud  voice.  Its  effect 
was  immediate.  The  canoe  in  which  they  had  arrived 
at  once  paddled  away  to  a  short  distance,  while  the 
smaller  craft,  which  had  before  been  drifting  slowly 
toward  the  vessel,  also  retired  and  lay  huddled  behind 
the  large  canoe. 


108  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 


CHAPTER  TO. 

A     SAVAGE     SUKPRISE. 

THE  captain  led  the  way  on  to  the  poop,  the  chiefs  and 
the  natives  with  them  following,  while  the  first  officer 
with  the  six  sailors  with  sabers  kept  in  their  rear.  Once 
on  the  quarter-deck  Mr.  Ryan  ranged  three  of  the  men  by 
the  bulwark  on  either  side,  telling  them  to  sheath  their 
cutlasses,  but  to  be  prepared  for  instant  action  in  case  of 
treachery.  The  chiefs  preserved  a  stolid  demeanor, 
scarce  glancing  at  the  passengers,  who  were  gathered  on 
the  poop.  At  the  captain's  orders  the  steward  brought 
up  a  number  of  cushions  and  placed  them  on  the  deck  in 
a  circle.  The  captain  seated  himself  on  one  and  motioned 
to  the  chiefs  to  follow  his  example,  which  they  did  with- 
out hesitation.  Mr.  Ryan  now  brought  up  a  number  of 
.  things  as  presents  for  the  chiefs,  and  each  was  presented 
with  a  hand  mirror,  a  roll  of  scarlet  cloth,  and  some 
trinkets,  as  a  small  supply  of  these  had  been  brought  on 
board  for  trade  with  the  natives  in  case  of  the  necessity 
arising. 

The  head  chief  was  in  addition  presented  with  an  ax, 
and  rolls  of  colored  cotton  strings  of  glass  beads,  and 
some  brass  rings  were  given  to  the  inferior  chiefs.  The 
natives  appeared  pleased  with  their  presents.  The  cap- 
tain then  addressed  them,  and  endeavored  to  explain 
that  he  wanted  a  supply  of  water.  An  empty  barrel  was 
brought  up  and  soine  water  poured  into  this,  and  the 
captain  then  pointed  to  the  shore,  and  by  gestures  inti- 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  109 

mated  that  he  wished  the  barrels  to  be  taken  ashore  and 
filled.  The  chiefs  evidently  understood  the  explanation, 
and  nodded  their  assent.  '  The  captain  then  led  them  to 
the  stump  of  the  mainmast,  pointed  to  the  shore,  and 
taking  an  ax  imitated  the  action  of  chopping,  and 
showed  that  he  wanted  them  to  fell  a  tree  and  bring  it 
off  to  the  vessel.  The  chief  pointed  to  the  boats  hang- 
ing on  the  davits,  placed  the  ax  in  the  hands  of  one  of 
the  men,  and  clearly  signified  that  the  crew  could  go 
ashore  and  cut  down  a  tree  if  they  chose.  The  captain 
shook  his  head  and  placed  the  ax  in  the  hands  of  one  of 
the  chiefs.  Their  leader,  however,  went  up  to  the  fore- 
mast, and  by  spreading  out  his  arms  signified  that  it  was 
a  great  size,  and  then  held  out  the  small  ax  the  captain 
had  presented  to  him  with  an  action  of  disdain. 

"The  beggar  means  that  with  one  ax  they  would  never 
cut  down  a  tree  of  that  size,"  the  first  officer  said. 

"That  is  all  humbug,  Kyan;  they  can  bring  down  the 
biggest  trees  for  the  construction  of  their  canoes.  I  be- 
lieve they  bring  them  down  by  fire.  However,  it  is  as 
well  to  humor  them.  Tell  the  carpenter  to  bring  half  a 
dozen  axes. ' ' 

This  was  done  and  the  axes  laid  down  on  the  deck, 
There  was  now  a  consultation  between  the  natives.  After 
awhile  they  nodded,  and  then  made  signs  that  some  one 
must  go  ashore  with  them  to  choose  the  tree. 

"What  do  you  say,  Eyan?"  the  captain  asked.  "It  is 
of  importance  that  we  should  get  a  stick  that  will  suit  us. 
The  question  is  whe.ther  it  will  be  safe  to  trust  a  man  on 
shore  with  these  scoundrels?" 

"I  will  go  ashore  if  you  like,  captain,"  Mr.  Eyan 
replied. 

"I  do  not  like  it,  Eyan,"  the  captain  said.  "You  see, 
they  would  make  mincemeat  of  an  armed  crew  in  no 
time." 


HO  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"I  should  not  propose  to  take  a  crew,  sir;  they  could 
afford  no  protection  against  a  number  of  natives.  I  do  not 
think  the  beggars  would  assault  a  single  man.  You  see, 
there  would  be  nothing  to  gain  by  it;  and  if  they  did  it 
•would  put  the  ship  on  its  guard,  and  their  game  at  pres- 
ent is  evidently  to  be  friendly.  I  do  not  think  there  is 
any  danger  in  the  affair.  If  I  did  not  go  they  might 
send  off  some  stick  that  would  be  no  use  at  all  to  us,  and 
as  we  came  in  on  purpose  to  get  a  mast  it  is  worth  while 
risking  something." 

"Well,  Eyan,"  the  captain  said  after  a  moment's  de- 
liberation, "I  think  perhaps  you  are  right,  and  that  one 
man  would  be  safe  with  them.  It  is  certainly  of  great 
importance  for  us  to  get  the  sort  of  stick  we  want,  so  as 
you  are  ready  to  volunteer  I  do  not  think  myself  justified 
in  refusing  your  offer."  The  captain  then  put  his  hand 
on  the  chief  officer's  shoulder  and  intimated  to  the  natives 
that  he  would  accompany  them  on  shore.  The  party 
then  returned  to  the  poop,  and  the  steward  brought  up 
some  tumblers  and  two  or  three  bottles  of  rum.  The 
chief's  eyes  glistened  as  the  liquor  was  poured  out,  and 
each  swallowed  a  half  tumbler  of  the  spirit  with  an  air  of 
the  deepest  satisfaction. 

"That  is  the  present  they  like  best,"  the  captain  said; 
"and  I  suppose  I  had  better  give  them  some  for  con- 
sumption on  shore.  At  any  rate  it  will  keep  them  in  a 
good  temper  until  Eyan  is  back  again."  Accordingly 
two  bottles  of  rum  were  presented  to  the  leading  chief,  a 
bottle  to  the  next  three  in  rank,  and  two  or  three  bottles 
among  the  others.  The  great  canoe  was  hailed,  the 
natives  again  took  their  places  in  it,  accompanied  by  the 
first  officer,  and  the  boat  then  started  for  the  shore. 
Some  of  the  smaller  craft  now  came  alongside,  and  the 
process  of  barter  was  again  commenced.  Yams,  bread- 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  Ill 

fruit,  and  other  products  of  the  island  were  obtained  for 
the  use  of  the  ship  in  exchange  for  beads,  empty  bottles, 
and  small  mirrors,  while  the  passengers  succeeded  in 
obtaining  many  curiously  carved  weapons,  calabashes, 
woven  cloths,  and  other  mementos  of  their  visit  Only 
two  or  three  of  the  canoes  were  allowed  alongside  at  a 
time,  and  a  vigilant  lookout  was  maintained  to  see  that 
others  did  not  approach  the  ship.  The  captain  walked 
restlessly  up  and  down  the  poop,  constantly  turning  his 
glass  upon  the  shore. 

An  hour  after  the  great  canoe  had  reached  it  he  ex- 
claimed in  a  tone  of  intense  satisfaction,  "There  is  By  an 
coming  down  to  the  beach.  Thank  heaven  he  is  safe!" 
The  first  mate  was  seen  to  take  his  place  in  a  small 
canoe,  which  at  once  rowed  off  to  the  ship.  The  captain 
shook  him  heartily  by  the  hand  as  he  stepped  on  deck. 
"Thank  heaven  you  have  got  back  safely,  Ryan!  it  has 
been  a  hazardous  business,  and  I  shall  take  care  to  let 
the  owners  know  how  you  have  risked  your  life  by  going 
ashore  in  their  service.  Well,  how  have  you  succeeded?" 

"I  found  a  grand  pine  growing  within  thirty  or  forty 
yards  of  the  water,  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  beyond  that 
point  to  the  left.  As  I  expected,  the  natives  had  no  idea 
of  using  the  axes  for  such  a  purpose.  When  I  left  them 
a  party  were  piling  wood  round  the  foot  of  the  tree,  and 
I  have  no  doubt  they  will  soon  get  it  down  in  their  own 
way.  I  suppose  they  will  waste  ten  or  twelve  feet  at  the 
base,  but  that  is  of  no  consequence,  for  the  tree  is  long 
enough  and  to  spare  to  make  us  a  fair-sized  mainmast." 

"That  is  right;  and  as  it  is  so  close  to  the  water  we 
can  send  a  boat  to  see  how  they  are  getting  on.'  How 
about  water?" 

"They  showed  me  a  spring  about  fifty  yards  from  the 
beach,  nearly  facing  us.  There  is  plenty  of  water  there, 


112  MA  OKI  AND  SETTLER, 

and  it  is  perfectly  fresh  and  'sweet,  for  I  tasted  it.  H 
they  make  any  bother  about  bringing  it  off,  a  couple  of 
boats  with  well-armed  parties  could  fetch  it  without  diffi- 
culty as  the  distance  is  so  short." 

''That  is  capital,  Kyan.  I  hope  our  difficulties  are 
pretty  well  over,  and  that  we  shall  get  off  without  any 
trouble  with  these  fellows." 

"I  hope  so,  sir.  They  certainly  seemed  friendly 
enough  with  me  on  shore." 

In  the  evening  Mr.  Kyan,  with  a  crew  of  six  men,  went 
in  the  captain's  gig  to  see  how  the  natives  were  getting 
on  with  the  tree.  The  men  had  their  muskets  and  cut- 
lasses laid  under  the  thwarts  in  readiness  for  action. 
The  natives,  however,  appeared  perfectly  friendly.  The 
crews  of  several  of  the  canoes  near  which  ^they  passed 
shouted  some  sort  of  greeting,  but  paid  no  other  atten- 
tion to  them.  On  rounding  the  point  the  first  officer 
steered  straight  for  the  tree  he  had  chosen.  A  light 
smoke,  was  ascending  from  its  footj  and  half  a  dozen 
natives  were  gathered  there.  When  close  to  the  spot  he 
ordered  the  men  to  turn  the  boat  round  and  back  her 
ashore. 

"lam  going  to  land,  lads, "  he  said,  "and  see  how 
they  are  getting  on.  I  do  not  think  that  there  is  the 
least  danger,  but  you  had  best  keep  in  readiness  to  row 
off  the  instant  I  jump  on  board." 

Mr.  Ryan  then  proceeded  to  the  tree.  He  found  that 
a  circle  of  small  fires  had  been  built  against  it.  These 
were  fed  with  dry  wood,  and  were  slowly  but  steadily 
eating  their  way  into  the  tree,  and  he  saw  that  only  two 
or  three  feet  of  the  base  would  be  injured  by  their  action. 
He  no  ded  approvingly  to  the  natives,  but  muttered  to 
himself:  "It's  a  mighty  slow  way  of  bringing  down  a 
tree.  It  is  not  much  above  three  and  a  half  feet  in 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  113 

diameter,  even  at  the  base,  and  a  couple  of  men  with  axes 
would  bring  it  down  in  an  hour,  while  there  is  no  saying 
how  long  they  will  be  with  these  fires  of  theirs.  How- 
ever, I  should  say  that  they  will  get  through  it  to-night 
or  some  time  to-morrow.  It  is  a  fine  stick,  and  runs  up 
as  straight  as  an  arrow,  and  is  thick  enough  for  fifty  feet 
for  our  purpose." 

He  walked  quietly  back  to  the  boat,  took  his  seat,  and 
was  rowed  back  to  the  ship,  where  he  reported  that  the 
natives  were  carrying  out  their  promise,  and  that  by 
the  next  day  the  tree  would  be  down.  On  visiting'  the 
spot  again  on  the  following  morning  it  was  found  that 
the  tree  had  fallen. 

"The  fellows  know  their  business,"  Mr.  Kyan  said  to 
the  man  who  rowed  the  stroke-oar.  "Ypu  see  that  they 
managed  so  that  it  should  fall  toward  the  water.  Now, 
lads,  you  can  take  to  the  axes  we  have  brought  with  us 
and  chop  it  through  at  the  point  where  we  want  it  cut; 
it  will  save  the  trouble  of  getting  off  the  upper  branches, 
and  render  it  much  more  handy  for  getting  afloat." 

Leaving  two  of  the  men  in  the  boat,  Mr.  Ryan  and  the 
other  four  leaped  ashore,  and  were  not  long  in  cutting 
through  the  tree.  Another  half-hour  sufficed  to  lop  off 
all  the  branches  below  this  point,  and  the  trunk  was  then 
ready  for  launching.  The  natives  stood  round  watching 
the  work  with  exclamations  of  surprise  at  the  speed  with 
which  the  keen  axes  did  their  work.  Mr.  Ryan  had 
brought  with  him  from  the  ship  a  number  of  presents, 
and  these  he  distributed  among  the  party  who  had  been 
engaged  in  felling  the  tree. 

"I  do  not  know,"  he  said  to  the  captain  when  he  re- 
turned, "whether  they  mean  to  get  the  stick  in  the  water 
and  bring  it  here,  or  whether  they  expect  we  shall  do 
that  part  of  the  business  ourselves. ' ' 


114  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"I  think  we  will  wait  until  to-morrow  morning,  Mr. 
Eyan.  If  we  hear  nothing  of  them  by  then  you  had  bet- 
ter take  two  boats — one  with  men  to  do  the  work,  the 
other  to  lie  just  off  and  protect  them  while  they  do  it." 

There  was,  however,  no  occasion  for  this,  for  early  the 
next  morning  seven  or  eight  canoes  were  seen  coming 
round  the  point  with  much  beating  of  tomtoms  and 
sounding  of  conch  horns. 

"Here  comes  the  spar!"  the  captain  exclaimed;  "the 
worst  of  our  difficulties  is  over,  thank  goodness!"  • 

"I  Avould  keep  an  eye  open,  Byan,  if  I  were  you,"  Mr. 
Atherton  said  as  the  mate  passed  him  to  give  orders  for 
preparing  to  get  the  spar  on  deck.  "There  are  a  good 
maii3r  other  canoes  coming  off  from  the  shore,  and  they 
might  take  the  opportunity  for  making  a  sudden  attack." 

"Right  you  are,"  the  mate  said.  "Let  the  starboard 
watch,"  he  shouted,  "keep  their  arms  handy!  Four 
men  with  muskets  take  their  place  at  the  top  of  the  gang- 
way, but  do  not  show  the  arms  unless  you  get  orders  to 
do  so!" 

The  trunk  was  towed  alongside  the  shi?.  Mr.  Ather- 
ton and  the  party  who  had  placed,  themselves  under  his 
orders  kept  a  vigilant  watch  on  the  canoes  to  see  if  the 
occupants  were  armed.  There  was  a  deal  of  talking  and 
gesticulating  going  on  among  them,  but  no  arms  could 
be  seen,  and  Mr.  Atherton  soon  concluded  that  if  treach- 
ery was  intended  the  present  was  not  the  time  at  which 
it  would  be  shown.  The  crew  were  all  on  deck,  and  the 
natives  must  have  known  their  arms  were  close  at  hand, 
for  each  day  a  few  of  those  who  came  to  trade  had  been 
permitted  to  come  on  deck,  partly  to  show  confidence  on 
the  part  of  those  on  board,  partly  that  the  visitors  might 
see  the  arms  lying  in  readiness  for  use,  and  be  able  to 
report  on  shore  that  the  ship  was  not  to  be  taken -by 
surprise. 


MAORI  AND  SETTL KR.  1 1 5 

No  sooner  was  the  spar  alongside  than  a  couple  of 
sailors  lowered  themselves  down  and  passed  ropes  round 
it.  These  ropes  were  then  passed  through  blocks  and 
taken  to  the  capstan.  The  bars  were  fitted  and  seized  by 
a  dozen  men.  The  boatswain's  whistle  sounded,  and 
starting  their  anchor  song  the  men  tramped  round  and 
round,  the  ropes  tightened,  and  the  heavy  spar  was  par- 
buckled up  on  to  the  deck.  No  sooner  was  it  got  on 
board  than  the  four  chiefs  who  had  before  visited  the 
ship  came  alongside.  There  was  another  talk,  and  they 
were  presented  with  a  considerable  number  of  presents 
for  themselves  and  followers  as  a  reward  for  their  service 
in  sending  off  the  spar.  Mr.  Atherton  and  Wilfrid  did 
not  approach  the  group  of  passengers  round  the  chiefs, 
keeping  their  attention  vigilantly  upon  the-  boats,  from 
which  the  danger,  if  it  existed,  would  come. 

The  Aliens,  however,  in  accordance  with  Mr.  Ather- 
ton's  instructions,  watched  the  natives  closely,  and 
noticed  as  they  came  on  deck  they  cast  quick  and  scru- 
tinizing glances  round  them  as  if  to  see  what  were  the 
chances  of  a  surprise.  Mr.  Kyan  however,  had,  when  he 
saw  the  great  canoe  approaching,  placed  ten  men  with 
muskets  on  guard,  and  the  chiefs  doubtless  perceived  that 
a  surprise  could  not  be  effected.  After  a  stay  of  about  a 
quarter  of  an  hour  the  chiefs  departed  with  their  pres- 
ents, of  which,  by  the  care  they  took  of  it,  it  was  evident 
that  they  considered  a  case  of  rum  to  be  by  far  the  most 
precious.  No  sooner  was  the  trunk  of  the  pine  fairly  on 
board  than  a  gang  of  men  provided  with  adzes  began, 
under  the  direction  of.  the  carpenter,  to  prepare  it. 
The  bark  was  chipped  off,  the  stumps  of  the  branches 
shaved  close,  and  they  then  began  to  chip  it  down  to  the 
required  thickness  from  end  to  end. 

"It  will  make  a  fine  spar,"  the  captain  said  in  a  tone 


116  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

of  great  satisfaction,  after  he  had  examined  it.  "I  think 
it  will  do  for  her  permanent  mast.  If  it  will  it  will  save 
us  a  lot  of  trouble  when  we  get  into  Wellington. " 

"I  think  it  will  be  a  little  light,  sir,"  Mr.  Kyan  said, 
"by  the  time  we  have  got  it  perfectly  smooth  and  even. 
Still,  I  have  seen  lighter  spars  in  a  ship  of  this  size,  and 
I  certainly  think  we  are  most  fortunate  in  getting  such  a 
stick.  When  do  you  think  you  will  get  it  ready, 
Watson?" 

"I  should  say  we  shall  have  it  nearly  ready  for  getting 
into  its  place  by  to-morrow  night,  Mr.  Kyan,"  the  car- 
penter replied,  "though  we  may  not  quite  finish  it  until 
next  day;  for,  you  see,  when  it  comes  to  getting  it 
smoothed,  I  and  my  mate  must  do  it  by  ourselves." 

"I  should  not  be  particular  about  smoothing  it,"  the 
captain  said,  "but  of  course  you  must  make  it  so  that  it 
will  take  the  spare  irons  we  have  got  for  the  topmast. 
We  shall  have  plenty  of  time  to  put  the  finishing  touches 
to  it  when  we  get  to  Wellington.  I  begin  to  think  these 
natives  are  not  so  black  as  they  are  painted,  Mr.  Ryan." 

"Perhaps  not,  sir;  but  maybe  if  they  had  not  seen 
that  we  were  so  ready  for  them  there  would  be  a  different 
tale  to  tell." 

"That  is  so,"  the  captain  agreed.  "There  is  no  doubt 
that  the  best  way  of  dealing  with  natives  is  never  to  give 
them  a  chance." 

The  carpenter's  gang  continued  steadily  at  their  work, 
while  the  first  officer  got  up  the  sheer-legs  and  hoisted 
the  stump  of  the  mainmast  from  its  place.  The  butt  of 
the  new  mainmast  was  cut  to  match  this,  and  on  the 
second  day  after  it  arrived  alongside  it  was  hoisted  into 
its  position.  The  whole  of  the  stays  and  rigging  of  the 
mainmast  had  been  cut  away  as  soon  as  it  went  over- 
board; but  there  was  plenty  of  spare  rope  on  board,  and 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  117 

before  evening  the  new  mast  was  firmly  stayed  in  its 
place,  and  all  was  in  readiness  for  hoisting  the  spar  that 
was  to  serve  as  topmast. 

The  natives  had  watched  the  proceedings  with  great 
interest.  Quite  a  crowd  of  canoes  gathered  round  the 
ship,  and  were  greatly  surprised  at  seeing  the  heavy  spar 
raised  by  the  sheers  and  dropped  into  its  place ;  and  they 
replied  to  the  hearty  cheers  that  rose  from  the  crew  and 
passengers  when  this  was  accomplished  by  wild  yells  and 
cries  and  the  sounding  of  their  horns. 

"I  begin  to  think,"  the  captain  said  to  Mr.  Atherton, 
"that  the  natives  have  got  a  worse  name  than  they  de- 
serve. I  do  not  mean  of  course,  that  they  have  not  per- 
petrated several  atrocious  massacres,  but  I  expect  these 
must  have  been  the  result  of  extreme  carelessness  on  the 
part  of  those  on  ships,  or  perhaps  of  rough  treatment, 
for  some  captains  treat  the  natives  of  islands  like  these 
like  dogs.  As  far  as  they  could  have  told  there  was  an 
excellent  chance  of  attacking  the  ship  to-day,  though  we 
know  that  we  kept  up  a  vigilant  watch  all  the  time,  and 
yet  nothing  could  have  been  more  friendly  than  they 
were.". 

"There  is  no  doubt  something  in  what  you  say,  cap- 
tain,"  Mr.  Atherton  agreed.  "Many  of  the  captains  of 
the  ships  who  trade  among  these  islands  are  certainly 
rough  fellows,  who  would  think  nothing  of  knocking  a 
native  down,  and  others  again  are  so  culpably  careless  as 
to  offer  almost  an  inducement  to  the  natives  to  grasp 
what  is  to  them  untold  wealth.  Still  I  think  it  is  as  well 
to  be  cautious." 

"Of  course  we  shall  be  cautious"  the  captain  replied; 
"but  I  really  do  not  think  that  you  and  the  others  need 
bother  yourselves  to  be  always  standing  on  sentry." 

"It  is  no  trouble"  Mr.  Atherton  said  "and  I  think  we 
will  keep  it  up  until  we  are  fairly  under  way. ' ' 


118  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Mr.  Atherton  \vas  not  pleased  at  seeing  that  the  cap- 
tain the  next  day  relaxed  somewhat  in  the  strictness  of 
the  rules  he  laid  down,  and  the  crew  were  allowed  to 
trade  freely  with  the  natives. 

"We  must  be  more  vigilant  than  ever/'  he  said  to 
Wilfrid  and  the  Aliens.  "The  captain  is  so  pleased  at 
having  got  his  mast  on  board  that  he  is  disposed  to  view 
the  natives  with  friendly  eyes,  which,  if  they  mean  treach- 
ery, is  just  what  they  want.  Finding  that  we  were  too 
much  on  the  watch  to  be  taken  by  surprise,  they  would 
naturally  try  to  lull  us  with  a  sense  of  false  security." 

In  the  afternoon  the  chief  again  came  off  and  formally 
invited  the  captain  to  a  feast  on  shore.  He  accepted  the 
invitation,  and  went  back  with  them,  accompanied  by 
three  or  four  of  the  passengers  who  had  scoffed  at  the 
idea  of  danger.  After  a  stay  of  two  or  three  hours  they 
returned  on  board. 

"I  think,  Mr.  Ryan,"  the  captain  said  that  evening, 
"you  had  better  take  a  couple  of  boats  in  the  morning 
and  go  ashore  for  water.  We  shall  have  everything 
ready  for  getting  up  our  anchor  after  dinner.  Of  course, 
your  crew  will  be  well  armed  and  take  every  precaution, 
but  I  do  not  Lhink  that  there  is  the  slightest  danger." 

"Verjr  well,  sir.  You  may  be  sure  I  will  keep  my 
weather-eye  open." 

Mr.  Atherton  shook  his  head  when  in  the  morning  he 
Baw  the  boats  being  lowered  and  heard  from  the  first 
officer  the  orders  he  had  received. 

"From  what  you  say  there  is  water  enough  to  last  us 
to  Wellington  if  we  are  all  put  on  somewhat  shorter 
allowance,  and  that  would  be  infinitely  better  than  run- 
ning the  risk  of  your  going  ashore." 

"The  water  might  last  if  all  goes  well,"  the  mate  said, 
"but  if  we  were  to  get  becalmed  for  some  time,  which 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  119 

is  likely  enough  in  these  latitudes,  we  should  be  in  an 
awkward  fix.  I  shall  keep  a  sharp  lookout  on  shore, 
never  fear.  The  distance  to  the  spring  is,  as  I  told  you, 
not  above  fifty  yards,  and  I  will  keep  half  the  men  filling 
and  the  other  half  on  guard.  If  they  should  mean  mis- 
chief we  will  give  it  them  hot." 

"How  many  men  will  you  take?" 

"Sixteen — ten  in  the  cutter  and  six  in  the  gig." 

"That  would  only  leave  us  ten  on  board,"  Mr.  Ather- 
ton  said.  "If  they  attack  you  they  will  attack  us  too, 
that  is  a  moral  certainty.  At  any  rate,  I  will  hint  to 
some  of  the  passengers  that  they  had  better  keep  their 
arms  in  readiness  while  you  are  away." 

Mr.  Atherton  refused  to  go  down  to  breakfast  when 
the  Aliens  came  up  to  relieve  him  after  finishing  their 
meal. 

"We  will  have  both  watches  on  deck  this  morning," 
he  said.  "We  shall  be  very  shorthanded  while  Eyan  and 
his  party  are  away.  Unfortunately  the  captain  is  con- 
vinced there  is  not  the  slightest  danger.  He  snubbed 
me  this  morning  quite  smartly  when  I  said  casually  that 
I  supposed  that  he  would  not  let  any  of  the  natives  on 
board  while  Eyan  was  away. ' ' 

As  the  rest  of  the  passengers  came  from  breakfast,  Mr. 
Atherton  spoke  to  some  of  those  with  whom  he  had  been 
most  intimate  on  the  voyage,  and  told  them  that  he 
thought  it  would  be  just  as  well  for  them  to  bring  their 
arms  on  deck  and  keep  them  close  at  hand  until  the 
watering  party  returned. 

"It  is  no  great  trouble,"  he  said,  "and  it  is  just  as 
well  to  be  ready  in  case  the  natives  mean  mischief.  I 
know  that  some  of  the  j'oungsters  consider  me  to  be  an 
alarmist,  and  I  will  give  them  free  leave  to  laugh  at  me 
when  we  are  once  safely  out  at  sea,  but  the  stake  is  too 


120  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

heavy  to  admit  of  carelessness;  there  are  not  only  our 
own  lives  but  those  of  the  ladies  to  be  thought  of." 

Three  or  four  of  the  passengers  followed  this  advice 
and  brought  their  muskets  or  double-barreled  guns  on 
deck.  They  were  a  good  deal  laughed  at  by  the  rest, 
•who  asked  them  if  they  had  joined  Atherton's  army,  as 
the  little  party  who  had  kept  watch  were  called.  How- 
ever, when  the  boats  pushed  off  with  the  empty  casks, 
and  the  passengers  saw  how  large  was  the  complement 
of  the  crew  who  had  left  them,  three  of  the  others 
Btrolled  down  to  the  cabin  and  got  their  guns.  In  half 
an  hour  the  great  canoe  with  the  chiefs  came  off,  and  as 
it  approached  the  ship  Mr.  Atherton  told  Wilfrid  to  go 
forward,  and  tell  the  five  men  there  to  come  aft  and  be 
in  readiness  to  mount  to  the  poop  the  moment  they  saw 
any  sign  of  trouble.  "If  there  is  a  row,"  he  said,  "we 
have  to  hold  the  poop.  There  are  only  the  two  ladders 
to  defend,  and  we  can  do  that;  but  it  would  be  useless 
to  try  to  hold  the  whole  of  the  ship." 

As  the  captain  left  the  poop  and  went  down  into  the 
waist  to  receive  the  chiefs,  Mr.  Atherton  went  up  to 
•where  Mrs.  Renshaw  was  sitting. 

"Will  you  take  my  advice,  Mrs.  Renshaw?" 

"Certainly,  I  will,"  she  said,  smiling;  "for  I  am  sure 
it  will  be  good,  whatever  it  is." 

"Then,  Mrs.  Renshaw,  I  advise  you  at  once  to  go  be- 
low with  your  daughter  and  the  Miss  Mitfords.  I  do 
not  say  that  we  are  going  to  have  trouble,  but  if  we  are 
this  is  the  time.  Pray  oblige  me  by  doing  as  I  ask." 

Mrs.  Renshaw  at  once  rose,  called  Marion  and  the 
other  two  girls,  who  were  gayly  chatting  with  a  group 
of  the  passengers,  and  asked  them  to  go  below  with  her. 
Wilfrid  and-the  two  Aliens  were  now  on  the  poop,  as  Mr. 
Atherton  had  told  them  that  they  had  better  remain  there 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  121 

instead  of  placing  themselves  at  other  points.  The 
Grimstones  and  the  three  other  passengers  forward  were 
gathered  near  the  ladders. 

As  usual  the  chiefs  accompanied  the  captain  on  to  the 
poop,  followed  by  half  a  dozen  of  the  minor  chiefs;  and 
Mr.  Atherton  noticed  that  several  of  the  others,  instead 
of  sitting  quietly  in  the  canoe,  slipped  up  after  them  on 
to  the  deck.  The  flotilla  of  small  -canoes,  which  had  as 
usual  put  out  in  the  train  of  the  large  one,  was  edging 
in  toward  the  vessel.  Mr.  Atherton  leaned  over  the  poop 
rail  and  spoke- to  the  second  officer,  who  was  engaged  in 
the  waist  with  the  men. 

"Mr.  Rawlins,  I  do  not  quite  like  the  look  of  things. 
I  think  that  it  would  be  as  well  if  you  were  to  gather  as 
many  of  the  hands  as  you  can  at  the  foot  of  the  ladder 
here,  without,  of  course,  alarming  the  natives,  as  it  may 
be  only  my  fancy." 

The  second  mate  nodded,  and  at  once  told  the  men 
with  him  to  knock  off  from  their  work.  "Get  hold  of 
your  cutlasses  quietly, "  he  said,  "and  gather  near  the 
foot  of  the  starboard  port  ladder."  Then  going  to  the 
gangway  he  stopped  a  native  who  was  just  climbing  up 
from  the  canoe,  and  motioned  to  them  that  no  more  were 
to  come  on  board. 

The  talk  with  the  chiefs  was  a  short  one.  The  stewards 
brought  up  two  cases  of  rum,  and-  when  these  were 
handed  over  to  them  the  natives  rose  as  if  to  go.  Sud- 
denly the  leader  drew  his  ax  from  his  girdle,  and  with  a, 
loud  yell  buried  it  deep  in  the  captain's  head. 

The  yell  was  echoed  from  some  hundred  throats,  the 
crew  of  the  canoe  leaped  to  their  feet  and  began  to  clam- 
ber up  the  side  of  the  vessel,  while  those  in  the  smaller 
craft  dashed  their  paddles  into  the  water  and  urged  their 
boats  toward  it.  At  the  same  moment  the  natives  on 


122  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

board  all  drew  concealed  weapons.  So  quick  had  been 
the  action  of  the  chief  that  Mr.  Atherton  had  not  time  t» 
prevent  it,  but  before  the  body  of  the  captain  touched 
the  deck  that  of  the  chief  was  stretched  beside  it  with  a 
bullet  through  the  brain. 

Wilfrid  and  the  Aliens  seeing  the  natives  rise  to  go 
had  thought  the  danger  over,  and  two  passengers  had 
been  struck  down  before  they  brought  their  rifles  to  their 
shoulders.  They  were  within  a  few  feet  of  the  chiefs, 
and  each  of  their  shots  told.  For  a  minute  or  two  there 
was  a  scene  of  wild  confusion.  The  natives  in  the  waist 
fell  furiously  upon  the  sailors,  but  these,  fortunately  put 
upon  their  guard,  received  the  attack  with  determina- 
tion. The  sound  of  the  lads'  rifles  was  followed  almost 
instantly  by  the  sharp  cracks  of  a  revolver  Mr.  Atherton 
produced  from  his  pocket,  and  each  shot  told  with  fatal 
effect.  When  the  revolver  was  empty  not  a  native  re- 
mained alive  on  the  poop. 

The  other  passengers  had  been  taken  so  completely  by 
surprise  that  even  those  who  had  brought  up  their  arms 
did  not  join  in  the  fray  until  the  poop  was  cleared. 
"Keep  them  back  there!"  Mr.  Atherton  shouted  as  the 
natives  came  swarming  up  the  ladder  on  -the  port  side. 
Several  shots  were  fired,  but  the  passengers  were  too 
startled  for  their  aim  to  be  true. 

"Give  me  your  musket,  Kenshaw!"  Mr.  Atherton  ex- 
claimed, snatching  the  piece  the  latter  had  just  dis- 
charged from  his  hands,  "my  rifle  is  too  good  for  this 
work."  He  then  clubbed  the  weapon,  and  whirling  it 
round  his  head  as  if  it  had  been  a  straw,  fell  upon  the 
natives,  who  were  just  pouring  up  on  to  the  poop,  shout- 
ing to  the  passengers,  "Fire  on  the  mass  below!  I  will 
keep  these  fellows  at  bay!"  Every  blow  that  fell 
Stretched  a  man  lifeless  on  deck,  until  those  who  had 


MAORI  AND  SETTLOR. 

gaii^d  tju<j  poop,  unable  to  retreat  owing  to  the  pressure 
of  those  behind  them,  and  terrified  by  the  destruction 
wrought  by  this  giant,  sprang  over  the  bulwark  into  the 
sea.  Just  as  they  did  so  the  little  party  of  sailors  and 
steerage  passengers,  finding  themselves  unable  to  resist 
the  pressure,  made  their  way  up  to  the  poop  by  the  star- 
board ladder,  hotly  pressed  by  the  natives. 

By  this  time  several  of  the  male  passengers  who  had 
rushed  below  for  their  weapons  ran  up,  and  Wilfrid  and 
the  Aliens  having  reloaded,  such  a  discharge  was  poured 
into  the  natives  on  the  port  ladder  that  the  survivors 
leaped  down  on  to  the  deck  below,  and  the  attack  for  a 
moment  ceased.  The  whole  of  the  forward  portion  of 
the  ship  was  by  this  time  in  the  hands  of  the  natives. 
Three  sailors  who  were  at  work  there  had  been  at  once 
murdered,  only  one  of  the  party  having  time  to  make  his 
escape  up  the  fore-rigging.  Spears  now  began  to  fly  fast 
over  the  poop. 

"We  must  fall  back  a  bit,  Mr.  Rawlins,  or  we  shall  be 
riddled,"  Mr.  Atherton  said.  "Your  men  had  better 
run  down  and  get  muskets;  we  will  keep  these  fellows  at 
bay.  -  I  do  not  think  they  will  make  a  rush  again  just  at 
present.  Will  you  see  that  the  door  leading  out  on  to 
the  waist  is  securely  barricaded,  and  place  two  or  three 
men  there?  Mr.  Renshaw,  will  you  and  some  of  the 
other  passengers  carry  down  those  ladies  who  have 
fainted,  and  assure  them  all  that  the  danger  is  really 
over. ' ' 

Mr.  Atherton  had  so  naturally  taken  the  command  that 
the  second  mate  at  once  obeyed  his  instructions.  Most  of 
the  ladies  had  rushed  below  directly  the  fray  began,  but 
two  or  three  had  fainted,  and  these  were  soon  carried 
below.  The  male  passengers, -eighteen  in  all,  were  now 
on  deck.  Several  of  them  looked  very  pale  and  scared, 


124  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

but  even  the  most  timid  felt  that  his  life  depended  on  his 
making  a  fight  for  it.  A  perfect  shower  of  spears  were 
now  flying  over  the  poop  from  the  natives  in  the  canoes 
alongside,  and  from  the  ship  forward. 

"We  had  best  lie  down,,  gentlemen,"  Mr.  Atherton 
said.  "If  the  natives  make  a  rush  up  the  ladders  we 
must  be  careful  not  to  fire  all  at  once  or  we  should  be  at 
their  mercy.  Let  those  by  the  bulwarks  fire  first,  and 
the  others  take  it  up  gradually  while  the  first  reload.  Of 
course  if  they  make  a  really  determined  rush  there  will 
be  nothing  to  do  but  to  meet  them  and  drive  them  back 
again." 

Unfortunately  the  four  cannon  of  the  Flying  Scud 
were  all  amidships,  and  were  therefore  not  available  for 
the  defense. 

"If  we  could  make  a  breastwork,  Mr.  Atherton,  so  that 
we  could  stand  up  behind  it  and  fire  down  into  the  waist 
•we  might  drive  these  fellows  out,"  the  second  officer 
suggested. 

"A  very  good  idea.  Wilfrid,  will  you  run  down  and 
ask  the  ladies  to  get  up  to  the  top  of  the  companion  all 
the  mattresses,  trunks,  and  other  things  that  would  do 
to  form  a  barricade?  It  will  be  a  good  thing  for  them  to 
have  something  to  do.  Mr.  RawJins,  will  you  send  down 
the  stewards  to  help?  they  might  get  some  cases  and 
barrels  up.  As  fast  as  they  bring  them  up  we  will  push 
them  along  the  deck  and  form  a  breastwork." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.      -  125 


CHAPTEE 

THE  END  OF  THE    VOYAGE. 

WHEN  Wilfrid  went  below  to  get  materials  for  a  barri- 
cade he  found  the  ladies  kneeling  or  sitting  calm  and 
quiet,  although  very  pale  and  white,  round  the  table, 
while  Mrs.  Renshaw  was  praying  aloud.  She  concluded 
her  prayer  just  as  he  came  down.  There  was  a  general 
chorus  of  questions. 

"Everything  is  going  on  well,"  Wilfrid  said  cheer- 
fully; "but  we  want  to  make  a  breastwork,  for  the  spears 
are  flying  about  so  one  cannot  stand  up  to  fire  at  them. 
I  have  come  to  ask  you  all  to  carry  up  mattresses  and 
pillows  and  cushions  and  portmanteaus,  and  everything 
else  that  will  make  a  barricade.  The  stewards  will  open 
the  lazaret  and  send  up  barrels  and  things.  Please  set 
to  work  at  once." 

Not  a  moment  was  lost;  the  ladies  carried  the  things 
rapidly  up  the  companion,  two  of  the  passengers  passed 
them  outside,  and  others  lying  in  a  line  pushed  them 
forward  from  one  to  another  until  they  arrived  at  those 
lying,  rifle  in  hand,  twenty  feet  aft  of  the  poop  rails. 
There  was  soon  a  line  of  mattresses  four  deep  laid  across 
the  deck. 

"That  will  do  to  begin  with,"  Mr.  Atherton  said. 
"Now,  let  us  push  these  before  us  to  the  end  of  the  poop, 
and  we  can  then  commence  operations.  The  sailors, 
Wilfrid  Renshaw,  the  Aliens,  and  myself  will  first  open 
fire.  Will  the  rest  of  you  please  continue  to  pass  things 


136  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

along  to  add  to  the  height  of  our  barricade?  I  wish  we 
knew  how  they  are  getting  on  onshore."  For  almost 
immediately  after  the  struggle  had  begun  on  board  the 
Bound  of  musketry  had  broken  out  from  that  quarter, 
and  they  knew  that  the  watering  party  had  been  attacked 
directly  the  natives  knew  that  their  chiefs  had  com- 
menced the  massacre  on  board  ship. 

Several  times,  in  spite  of  the  danger  from  the  flying 
spears,  Mr.  Atherton  had  gone  to  the  stern  and  looked 
toward  the  shore.  The  boats  lay  there  seemingly 
deserted,  and  the  fight  was  going  on  in  the  wood.  A 
number  of  canoes  had  placed  themselves  so  as  to  cut  off 
the  return  of  the  boats  should  the  sailors  succeed  in 
making  their  way  to  them. 

As  soon  as  the  line  of  mattresses  was  pushed  forward 
to  the  edge  of  the  poop  a  steady  fire  was  opened  upon  the 
natives  who  had  already  taken  off  the  hatches,  and  were 
engaged  in  bringing  their  plunder  up  on  deck,  deferring 
the  dangerous  operation  of  carrying  the  poop  for  the 
present. 

As  soon,  however,  as  the  fire  opened  upon  them  they 
seized  their  spears  and  tomahawks,  and,  led  by  one  of 
their  chiefs,  made  a  rush  at  the  two  poop  ladders.  Mr. 
Atherton  gave  a  shout,  and  the  whole  of 'the  passengers 
seizing  their  muskets,  sprang  to  their  feet  and  ran  for- 
ward to  the  barricade,  and  so  heavy  a  fire  was  poured 
into  the  natives  as  they  tried  to  ascend  the  ladders  that 
they  fell  back  again  and  -contented  themselves  with  re- 
plying to  the  fire  with  volleys  of  spears.  The  passen- 
gers at  once  renewed  their  work  of  passing  the  materials 
for  the  barricade  forward,  and  this  was  continued  until 
it  rose  breast-high.  They  then  took  their  places  closely 
together  behind  it,  and  joined  its  defenders  in  keeping 
up  a  heavy  fire  upon  the  natives.  So  deadly  was  its 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER  127 

effect  that  the  latter  began  to  lose  heart  and  to  jump 
over  into  the  canoes  alongside. 

A  cheer  broke  from  the  passengers  as  they  saw  the 
movement  of  retreat.  It  was  no  longer  necessary  for  any 
to  reserve  their  fire,  and  this  was  redoubled.  The  natives 
were  discouraged  by  the  want  of  leaders ;  their  principal 
chiefs  had  all  been  killed  on  the  poop,  and  anj'  other 
who  attempted  to  rallj"  them  and  lead  them  again  to  an, 
attack  was  instantly  shot  down  by  Mr.  Atherton,  who, 
as  Wilfrid,  who  was  standing  next  to  him  observed,  never 
once  failed  to  bring  down  the  man  he  aimed  at." 

"I  think  we  might  get  at  them,  sir,  now,"  the  second 
officer  said  to  Mr.  Atherton;  "the  fight  is  all  out  erf 
them." 

"I  think  so  too,  Bawlins.  Now,  gentlemen,  give  them 
one  last  volley  and  then  pull  down  the  barricade  across 
the  ends  of  the  ladders  and  charge  them."  The  volley 
wag  given,  and  then  with  a  ringing  cheer  the  barricade 
was  thrust  aside,  and  led  on  one  side  by  Mr.  Athertoii 
and  on  the  other  by  the  second  officer,  the  defenders  of 
the  poop  sprang  down  the  ladders  and  rushed  forward. 
The  natives  did  not  stop  to  await  them,  but  sprang  over- 
board with  the  greatest  precipitation,  and  the  Flying 
Scud  was  once  again  in  the  hands  of  its  lawful  owners. 

"Now,  Rawlins,  do  you  and  the  sailors  work  the  guns; 
vre  will  pepper  them  with  our  rifles,"  Mr.  Atherton  said. 
"Mr.  Eenshaw,  will  you  go  aft  and  tell  the  ladies  that 
all  is  over?" 

But  this  they  had  already  learned.  Marion,  after  the 
things  had  been  passed  up,  had  taken  her  place  at  the 
top  of  the  companion,  occasionally  peering  out  to  see 
what  was  going  on,  and  running  down  with  the  news  to 
them  below,  and  as  the  loud  cheer  which  preceded  the 
charge  had  broken  from  those  on  deck,  she  had  called 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

out  to  the  ladies  below  that  the  natives  were  beaten. 
The  shower  of  spears  from  the  boats  had  ceased  as  soon 
as  the  natives  saw  their  friends  leaping  overboard,  and  as 
Mr.  Eenshaw  ascended  the  poop  to  deliver  the  message 
the  ladies  were  flocking  out  on  deck,  each  anxious  to 
ascertain  whether  those  most  dear  to  them  had  suffered 
in  the  fray.  Marion  ran  forward  and  threw  herself  into 
his  arms. 

"Not  hurt,  father?" 

"No,  my  dear,  thank  God.  Some  of  us  have  go*  apear 
wounds  more  or  less  awkward,  but  nobody  has  been 
killed  except  those  who  were  struck  down  at  the  begin- 
ning."  As  he  spoke  the  four  cannon  boomed  out  one 
after  another,  for  they  had  been  loaded  some  days  be- 
fore, and  a  hail  of  bullets  and  pieces  of  iron  with  which 
they  had  been  crammed  tore  through  the  canoes,  while 
terrible  yells  rose  from  the  natives.  Three  of  the  canoes 
were  instantly  sunk,  and  half  the  paddlers  in  the  large 
boat  of  the  chief  were  killed  or  disabled.  Almost  the 
same  instant  a  dropping  fire  of  musketry  was  opened, 
the  passengers  firing  as  soon  as  they  had  reloaded  their 
pieces. 

"Give  another  dose  to  that  big  fellow!"  the  second 
officer  shouted  to  the  men  at  the  two  guns  at  that  side  of 
the  ship.  "Shove  a  ball  in,  men,  and  a  bagful  of  bullets 
• — take  steady  aim,  and  remember  the  poor  captain!"  A 
minute  later  the  guns  were  fired.  A  terrible  cry  was 
heard,  and  almost  instantaneously  the  great  canoe  disap- 
peared below  the  water. 

"Get  the  other  two  guns  over  to  this  side,"  Mr.  Eaw- 
lins  said ;  "we  must  lend  a  hand  now  to  the  party  ashore. 
Load  all  the  guns  with  grape,  and  aim  at  those  canoes 
between  us  and  them."  These,  following  the  example  of 
those  around  the  ship,  were  already  moving  toward  the 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  129 

shore,  and  the  discharge  of  the  four  guns  sank  two  of 
them  and  sent  the  others  off  in  headlong  flight. 

"What  had  we  better  do  now,  Mr.  Atherton?" 

"I  should  load  with  round  shot  now,  Rawlins,  and 
open  fire  into  the  wood  on  both  sides  of  the  landing- 
place.  The  sound  of  the  shot  crashing  among  the  trees 
will  demoralize  the  scoundrels  even  if  you  do  not  hit 
any  one. ' ' 

Three  or  four  rounds  were  fired,  and  then  those  on 
board  gave  a  cheer  as  they  saw  the  sailors  issue  out 
from  among  the  trees  and  take  their  places  in  the  boats. 
Half  a  minute  later  they  were  rowing  toward  the  vessel, 
unmolested  by  the  natives.  Mr.  Ryan  stood  up  in  the 
stern  of  his  boat  as  soon  as  they  were  within  hailing  dis- 
tance and  shouted — "How  has  it  gone  with  you?" 

"We  have  beaten  them  off,  as  you  see, "  the  second 
officer  shouted  back;  "but  the  ship  was  pretty  nearly  in 
their  hands  for  a  time.  The  captain  is  killed,  I  am 
sorry  to  say ;  four  of  our  men,  and  two  of  the  passengers. 
How  have  you  done?" 

"We  have  lost  three  men,"  Mr.  Ryan  replied,  "and 
most  of  us  are  wounded." 

The  boats  were  soon  alongside,  and  Mr.  Ryan,  after 
hearing  what  had  taken  place  on  board,  related  his  ex- 
perience. "We  had  got  about  half  the  casks  filled  when 
we  heard  a  rifle  shot  on  board  the  ship,  followed  directly 
by  the  yells  of  the  black  divils.  I  ordered  the  men  to 
drop  the  casks  and  take  to  their  guns,  but  I  had  scarcely 
spoken  when  a  volley  of  spears  fell  among  us.  Two  men 
were  killed  at  once.  I  had  intended  to  take  to  the  boats 
and  come  off  to  lend  you  a  hand, but  by  the  yelling  and  the 
ghower  of  spears  I  saw  that  the  spalpeens  were  so  thick 
round  us  that  if  we  had  tried  we  should  pretty  well  all 
be  killed  before  we  could  get  fairly  out,  so  I  told  the 


130 


XAORl  AND  SETTLER 


men  to  take  to  the  trees  and  keep  up  a  steady  fire  when- 
ever the  natives  tried  to  make  a  rush  at  us.  I  was,  of 
course,  terribly  anxious  about  you  all  at  first,  and  I 
knew  that  if  the  ship  was  taken  they  must  have  us  all 
sooner  or  later.  After  the  first  few  shots  there  was 
silence  for  a  time,  and  I  feared  the  worst." 

"The  spears  were  flying  so  thick  we  could  not  stand 
up  to  fire,"  the  second  officer  put  in. 

"Ah!  that  was  it.  Well,  I  was  afraid  you  had  all 
been  massacred,  and  you  may  imagine  how  relieved  I 
was  when  I  heard  a  dropping  fire  of  musketry  begin ;  I 
knew  then  that  they  had  failed  to  take  you  by  surprise. 
The  fire  at  last  got  so  heavy  I  was  sure  that  most  of  you 
had  escaped  the  first  attack,  and  we  then  felt  pretty 
hopeful,  though  I  did  not  see  how  we  were  to  get  down 
to  the  boats  and  get  off  to  you.  When  we  heard  the  first 
cannon  shot  we  gave  a  cheer  that  must  have  astonished 
the  natives,  for  we  knew  you  must  have  cleared  the  deck 
of  the  scoundrels.  I  had  set  a  man  at  the  edge  of  the 
trees  by  the  water  to  let  us  know  how  you  were  going 
on,  and  he  soon  shouted  that  the  canoes  were  drawing 
off.  Then  we  heard  the  big  canoe  was  sunk,  and  that 
you  had  driven  off  the  craft  that  were  lying  between  us 
and  the  ship.  A  minute  later  the  round  shot  came 
crashing  among  the  trees,  and  almost  immediately  the 
yelling  round  us  ceased,  and  we  felt  sure  they  must  be 
drawing  off.  We  waited  until  you  had  fired  a  couple 
more  rounds,  and  then  as  all  seemed  quiet  we  fell  back 
to  the  boats,  and,  as  you  saw,  got  off  without  a  single 
spear  being  thrown  at  us.  I  am  awfully  sorry  for  the 
poor  captain.  If  he  had  but  taken  your  advice,  Mr. 
Athertou,  all  this  would  not  have  happened ;  but  at  last 
he  got  to  trust  these  treacherous  scoundrels,  and  this  is 
the  result. ' ' 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  131 

"Well,  Mr.  Eyan,  you  are  in  command  now,"  Mr. 
Atherton  said,  "and  we  are  all  ready  to  carry  out  any 
orders  that  you  will  give  us." 

"First  of  all  then,  Mr.  Atherton,  I  must  in  the  name 
of  the  owners  of  this  ship,  of  myself,  the  officers  and 
crew,  thank  you  for  having  saved  it  and  us  from  the 
hands  of  these  savages.  From  what  Mr.  Eawlins  tells 
me,  and  from  what  I  know  myself,  I  am  convinced  that 
had  it  not  been  for  your  vigilance,  and  for  the  part  you 
have  taken  in  the  defense  of  the  ship,  the  natives  would 
have  succeeded  in  their  treacherous  design  of  massacring 
all  on  board  almost  without  resistance." 

A  cheer  broke  from  the  passengers  and  crew,  and  Mr. 
Renshaw  said,  when  it  had  subsided:  "I,  on  the  part  of 
the  passengers,  indorse  all  that  Mr.  Eyan  has  said;  we 
owe  it  to  you,  Athertou,  that  by  God's  mercy  we  and 
those  dear  to  us  have  escaped  from  death  at  the  hands 
of  these  savages.  It  was  you  who  put  some  of  us  on  our 
guard ;  it  was  your  marvelous  shooting  with  the  revolver 
that  first  cleared  the  poop;  and  your  extraordinary 
strength  that  enabled  you  single-handed  to  check  the 
onslaught  of  the  natives  and  give  us  time  to  rally  from 
our  first  surprise,  and  saved  the  ship  and  us." 

"Do  not  let  us  say  anything  more  about  it,"  Mr. 
Atherton  said;  "we  have  all  done  our  duty  to  the  best 
of  our  power,  and  have  reason  to  be  heartily  thankful  to 
God  that  we  have  got  out  of  this  scrape  without  heavier 
loss  than  has  befallen  us.  Now,  Mr.  Eyan,  please  give 
your  orders." 

"The  first  thing,  undoubtedly,  is  to  clear  the  deck  of 
these  bodies,"  Mr.  Eyan  said. 

"What  about  the  wounded?"  Mr.  Eenshaw  asked,  "no 
doubt  some  of  the  poor  wretches  are  still  alive." 

"They  do  not  deserve  any  better  fate  than  to  be  tossed 


132  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

overboard  with  the  others ;  still  as  that  would  go  against 
the  grain,  we  will  see  what  we  can  do."  He  looked  over 
the  side.  "There  is  a  good-sized  canoe  floating  there 
fifty  yards  away.  I  suppose  the  fellows  thought  it  would 
be  safer  to  jump  overboard  and  swim  ashore.  Four  of 
you  men  get  out  the  gig  and  tow  the  canoe  alongside. 
We  will  put  any  wounded  we  find  into  it  and  send  it 
adrift ;  they  will  come  out  and  pick  it  up  after  we  are 
fairly  off." 

The  bodies  of  sixty  natives  who  had  been  killed  out- 
right were  thrown  overboard,  and  eighteen  who  were 
found  to  be  still  alive  were  lowered  into  the  canoe.  "I  do 
not  think  we  are  really  doing  them  much  kindness, 
though  of  course  we  are  doing  the  best  we  can  for  them," 
Mr.  Atherton  said  to  Mr.  Renshaw.  "I  doubt  if  one  of 
them  will  live.  You  see,  all  who  were  able  to  drag  them- 
selves to  the  side  jumped  overboard,  and  were  either 
drowned  or  hauled  into  the  canoes." 

As  soon  as  the  operation  was  over  the  casks  of  water 
were  got  on  board  and  the  boats  hoisted  to  the 
davits.  The  anchor  was  then  hove  up  and  some  of  the 
sails  shaken  out,  and  with  a  gentle  breeze  the  vessel  be- 
gan to  draw  off  the  land.  As  soon  as  this  was  done  all 
hands  set  to  work  washing  down  the  deckjp;  and  in  two 
or  three  hours,  except  for  the  bullet  marks  on  the  deck 
and  bulwarks,  there  were  no  signs  left  of  the  desperate 
conflict  that  had  raged  on  board  the  Flying-  Scud.  At 
sunset  all  hands  gathered  on  the  poop,  and  the  bodies  of 
the  captain  and  two  passengers,  and  of  the  sailors  who 
had  fallen,  were  reverently  delivered  to  the  deep,  Mr. 
Ryan  reading  the  funeral  service. 

The  ladies  had  retired  below  after  the  boats  had  come 
alongside,  and  did  not  come  up  until  all  was  ready  for 
the  funeral.  Mrs.  Renshaw  and  three  or  four  of  the 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  133 

ethers  had  been  employed  in  dressing  the  wounds  of 
those  who  had  been  injured.  Four  out  of  the  six  sailors 
who  had  survived  the  massacre  on  board  had  been  more 
or  less  severely  wounded  before  they  won  their  way  on 
the  quarter-deck,  and  six  of  the  watering  party  were  also 
wounded.  Eight  of  the  passengers  had  been  struck  with 
the  flying  spears;  but  only  two  of  these  had  received 
wounds  likely  to  cause  anxiety.  After  the  funeral  was 
over  more  sail  was  hoisted,  the  breeze  freshened,  and  the 
Flying  Scud  proceeded  briskly  on  her  way. 

The  rest  of  the  voyage  was  uneventful.  Thankful  as 
all  were  for  their  escape,  a  gloom  hung  over  the  ship. 
The  death  of  the  captain  was  much  felt  by  all.  He  had 
been  uniformly  kind  and  obliging  to  the  passengers,  and 
had  done  everything  in  his  power  to  make  the  voyage  a 
pleasant  one.  One  of  the  passengers  who  was  killed  was 
a  young  man  with  none  on  board  to  mourn  him,  but  the 
other  had  left  a  widow  and  two  children,  whose  presence 
in  their  midst  was  a  constant  reminder  of  their  narrow 
escape  from  destruction. 

The  voyage  had  produced  a  very  marked  change  in  Mr. 
Kenshaw.  It  had  brought  him  in  far  closer  connection 
with  his  children  than  he  had  ever  been  before,  with 
results  advantageous  to  each.  Hitherto  they  had 
scarcely  ever  seen  him  except  at  meals,  and  even  at  these 
times  his  thoughts  were  so  wholly  taken  up  with  the 
writings  on  which  he  was  engaged  that  he  had  taken  but 
little  part  in  the  general  conversation  beyond  giving  a 
willing  assent  to  any  request  they  made,  and  evincing  no 
interest  whatever  in  their  plans  and  amusements. 

Now,  although  for  four  or  five  hours  a  day  he  worked 
diligently  at. his  study  of  the  Maori  language,  he  was  at 
other  times  ready  to  join  in  what  was  going  on.  He 
often  walked  the  deck  by  the  hour  with  Wilfrid  and 


134  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Marion,  and  in  that  time  learned  far  more  'of  their  past 
life,  of  their  acquaintances  and  amusements  at  their  old 
home,  than  he  had  ever  known  before.  He  was  genial 
and  chatty  with  all  the  other  passengers,  and  the  aston- 
ishment of  his  children  was  unbounded  when  he  began 
to  take  a  lively  part  in  the  various  amusements  by  which 
the  passengers  whiled  away  the  long  hours,  and  played 
at  deck  quoits  and  bull.  The  latter  game  consists  of  a 
board  divided  into  twelve  squares,  numbered  one  to  ten, 
with  two  having  bulls'  heads  upon  them;  leaden  disks 
covered  with  canvas  are  thrown  on  to  this  board,  count- 
ing according  to  the  number  on  which  they  fall,  ten 
being  lost  for  each  quoit  lodged  on  a  square  marked  by  a 
bull's  head. 

On  the  evening  of  the  day  before  the  shores  of  New 
Zealand  came  in  sight  Mr.  Eenshaw  was  sitting  by  his 
wife.  "The  voyage  is  just  finished,  Helen,"  he  said. 
"It  has  been  a  pleasant  time.  I  am  sorry  it  is  over." 

"A  very  pleasant  time,  Alfred,"  she  replied,  "one  of 
the  most  pleasant  I  have  ever  spent." 

"I  see  now,"  he  went  on,  "that  I  have  made  a  mistake 
of  my  life,  and  instead  of  making  an  amusement  of  my 
hobby  for  archaeology  have  thrown  away  everything  for 
it.  I  have  been  worse  than  selfish.  I  have  utterly 
neglected  you  and  the  children.  "Why,  I  seem  only  to 
have  made  an  acquaintance  with  them  since  we  came 
on  board  ship.  I  see  now,  dear,  that  I  have  broken  my 
marriage  vows  to  you.  I  have  always  loved  you  and  al- 
ways honored  you,  but  I  have  altogether  failed  to  cherish 
you." 

"You  have  always  been  good  and  kind,  Alfred,"  she 
said  softly. 

"A  man  may  be  good  and  kind  to  a  dog,  Helen;  but 
that  is  not  all  that  a  wife  has  a  right  to  expect.  I  see 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  135 

now  that  I  have  blundered  miserably.  I  cannot  change 
my  nature  altogether,  dear ;  that  is  too  late.  I  cannot 
develop  a  fund  of  energy  by  merely  wishing  for  it;  but 
I  can  make  the  happiness  of  my  wife  and  children  my 
first  thought  and  object,  and  my  own  pursuits  the  second. 
I  thought  the  loss  of  our  money  was  a  terrible  misfor- 
tune. I  do  not  think  so  now.  I  feel  that  I  have  got  my 
wife  again  and  have  gained  two  children,  and  whatever 
coires  of  our  venture  here  I  shall  feel  that  the  failure  of 
the  bank  has  brought  undeserved  happiness  to  me." 

"And  to  me  also,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said  softly  as  she 
pressed  her  husband's  hand.  "I  feel  sure  that  we  shall 
all  be  happier  than  we  have  ever  been  before.  Not  that 
we  have  been  unhappy,  dear,  very  far  from  it;  still,  you 
have  not  been  our  life  and  center,  and  it  has  been  so 
different  since  the  voyage  began." 

"He  is  not  half  a  bad  fellow,  after  all,"  Mr.  Atherton 
said,  as  leaning  against  the  bulwark  smoking  his  cigar 
he  had  glanced  across  at  the  husband  and  wife  seated 
next  to  each  other  talking  in  low  tones,  and  evidently 
seeing  nothing  of  what  was  passing  around  them.  "He 
has  brightened  up  wonderfully  since  we  started.  Of 
course,  he  will  never  be  a  strong  man,  and  is  no  more  fit 
for  a  settler's  life  than  he  is  for  a  habitation  in  the  moon. 
Still,  he  is  getting  more  like  other  people.  His  thoughts 
are  no  longer  two  or  three  thousand  years  back.  He  has 
become  a  sociable  and  pleasant  fellow,  and  I  am  sure  he 
is  very  fond  of  his  wife  and  children.  It  is  a  pity  he 
has  not  more  backbone.  Still,  I  think  the  general  out- 
look is  better  than  I  expected.  Taking  it  altogether,  it 
has  been  as  pleasant  a  voyage  as  I  have  ever  made. 
There  is  the  satisfaction  too  that  one  may  see  something 
of  one's  fellow-passengers  after  we  land.  This  northern 
island  is  not,  after  all,  such  a  very  big  place.  That  is 


136  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

the  worst  of  homeward  voyages.  People  who  get  to 
know  and  like  each  other  when  they  arrive  in  port  scat- 
ter like  a  bombshell  in  every  direction,  and  the  chances 
are  against  your  ever  running  up  against  any  of  them 
afterward." 

Somewhat  similar  ideas  occupied  the  minds  of  most  of 
the  passengers  that  evening.  The  voyage  had  been  a 
pleasant  one,  and  they  were  almost  sorry  that  it  was 
over;  but  there  was  a  pleasurable  excitement  at  the 
thought  that  they  should  next  day  see  the  land  that  was 
to  be  their  home,  and  the  knowledge  that  they  should  all 
be  staying  for  a  few  days  at  Wellington  seemed  to  post- 
pone the  break-up  of  their  party  for  some  little  time. 

No  sooner  was  the  anchor  dropped  than  a  number  of 
shore  boats  came  off  to  the  ship.  Those  who  had  friends 
on  shore  and  were  expecting  to  be  met  watched  anxiously 
for  a  familiar  face,  and  a  cry  of  delight  broke  from  the 
two  Mitfords  as  they  saw  their  father  and  mother  in  one 
of  these  boats.  After  the  first  joyful  greeting  was  over 
the  happj-  little  party  retired  to  the  cabin,  where  they 
could  chat  together  undisturbed,  as  all  the  passengers 
were  on  deck.  Half  an  hour  later  they  returned  to  the 
deck,  and  the  girls  led  their  father  and  mother  up  to 
Mrs.  Renshaw. 

"I  have  to  thank  you  most  heartily,  Mrs.  Eenshaw, 
for  your  great  kindness  to  my  girls.  They  tell  me  that 
you  have  throughout  the  voyage  looked  after  them  as  if 
they  had  been  your  own  daughters." 

"There  was  no  looking  after  required,  I  can  assure 
you, "Mrs.  Eenshaw  said.  "I  was  very  pleased,  indeed, 
to  have  them  in  what  I  may  call  our  little  party,  and  it 
was  a  great  advantage  and  pleasure  to  my  own  girl. " 

"We  are  going  ashore  at  once,"  Mr.  Mitford  said. 
"My  girls  tell  me  that  you  have  no  acquaintances  here. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  137 

My  own  place  is  hundreds  of  miles  away,  and  we  are 
staying  with  some  friends  while  waiting  the  arrival  of 
the  ship,  and  therefore  cannot,  I  am  sorry  to  say,  put 
you  up ;  but  in  any  other  way  in  which  we  can  be  of 
assistance  we  shall  be  delighted  to  give  any  aid  in  our 
power.  The  girls  say  you  are  thinking  of  making  this 
your  headquarters  until  you  decide  upon  the  district  in 
which  you  mean  to  settle.  In  that  case  it  will,  of  course, 
be  much  better  for  you  to  take  a  house,  or  part  of  a 
house,  than  to  stop  at  an  hotel ;  and  if  so  it  will  be  best 
to  settle  upon  one  at  once,  so  as  to  go  straight  to  it  and 
avoid  all  the  expenses  of  moving  twice.  It  is  probable 
that  our  friends,  the  Jacksons,  may  know  of  some  suita- 
ble place,  but  if  not  I  shall  be  glad  to  act  as  your  guide 
in  house-hunting." 

Mr.  Renshaw  here  came  up  and  was  introduced  to  Mr. 
Mitford,  who  repeated  his  offer. 

"We  shall  be  extremely  glad,"  Mr.  Renshaw  replied; 
"though  I  really  think  that  it  is  most  unfair  to  take  you 
even  for  a  moment  from  your  girls  after  an  absence  of 
five  years." 

"Oh,  never  mind  that,"  Mr.  Mitford  said;  "we  shall 
land  at  once,  and  shall  have  all  the  morning  to  talk  with 
them.  If  you  and  Mrs.  Renshaw  will  come  ashore  at 
four  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  my  wife  and  I  will  meet  you 
at  the  landing-place.  Or  if,  as  I  suppose  you  would 
prefer  to  do,  you  like  to  land  this  morning  and  have  a 
look  at  Wellington  for  yourselves,  this  is  our  address, 
and  if  you  will  call  at  two  o'clock,  or  any  time  later,  we 
shall  be  at  your  service.  I  would  suggest,  though,  that 
if  you  do  land  early,  you  should  first  come  round  to  us, 
because  Jackson  may  know  some  plaee  to  suit  you ;  and 
if  not,  I  am  sure  that  he  will  be  glad  to  accompany  you 
and  act  as  your  guide." 


138  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"I  should  not  like  to  trouble — "  Mr.  Kenshaw  began. 
"My  dear  sir,  you  do  not  know  the  country.  Every 
one  is  glad  to  help  a  new  chum — that  is  the  name  for 
fresh  arrivals — to  the  utmost  of  his  power  if  he  knows 
anything  whatever  about  him,  and  no  one  thinks  any- 
thing of  trouble." 

"In  that  case,"  Mr.  Kenshaw  said,  smiling,  "we  will 
gladly  avail  ourselves  of  the  offer.  We  should  all  have 
been  contented  if  the  voyage  had  lasted  a  month  longer; 
but  being  here,  we  all,  I  suppose,  want  to  get  ashore  as 
soon  as  possible.  Therefore  we  shall  probably  call  at 
your  address  in  the  course  of  an  hour  or  so  after  you  get 
there." 

Wilfrid  and  Marion  were  indeed  in  such  a  hurry  to 
get  ashore  that  a  very  few  minutes  after  the  Mitfords  left 
the  side  of  the  ship  the  Eenshaws  took  a  boat  and  started 
for  the  shore.  Most  of  the  other  passengers  also  landed. 
"We  shall  go  in  alongside  the  quays  in  an  hour's 
time,"  the  captain  said,  as  they  left;  "so  you  must  look 
for  us  there  when  you  have  done  sightseeing.  We  shall 
begin  to  get  the  baggage  up  at  once  for  the  benefit  of 
those  who  are  in  a  hurry  to  get  away  to  the  hotels;  but 
I  shall  be  glad  for  you  all  to  make  the  ship  your  home 
until  to-morrow." 

For  an  hour  after  landing  the  Renshaws  wandered 
about  Wellington,  which  they  found  to  be  a  pretty  and 
well-built  town  with  wide  streets. 

"Why,  it  is  quite  a  large  place!"  Wilfrid  exclaimed  in 
surprise.  "Different,  of  course,  from  towns  at  home, 
with  more  open  spaces.  I  expected  it  would  be  much 
rougher  than  it  is." 

"It  is  the  second  town  of  the  island,  you  see,"  Mr. 
Renshaw  said;  "and  is  an  important  place.  Well,  lam 
glad  we  did  not  cumber  ourselves  by  bringing  everything 


MAORI  AFD  SETTLER.  139 

out  from  England,  for  there  will  be  no  difficulty  in  pro- 
viding ourselves  with  everything  we  require  here." 

After  wandering  about  for  an  hour  they  proceeded  to 
the  address  Mr.  Mitford  had  given  them.  It  was  a  house 
of  considerable  size,  standing  in  a  pretty  garden,  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  business  part  of  the  town. 
They  were  warmly  received  by  the  Mitfords,  and  intro- 
duced to  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Jackson. 

"Mr.  Mitford  has  been  telling  me  that  you  want  to  get 
a  house  or  part  of  a  house,  for  a  few  weeks  till  you  look 
about  you  and  decide  where  you  will  settle  down,"  Mr. 
Jackson  said.  "I  am  a  land  and  estate  agent,  beside 
doing  a  little  in  other  ways.  "We  most  of  us  turn  our 
hands  to  anything  that  presents  itself  here.  I  have  taken 
a  holiday  for  this  morning  and  left  my  clerk  in  charge, 
so  I  am  quite  at  your  service.  You  will  find  it  difficult 
and  expensive  if  you  take  a  whole  house,  so  I  should 
advise  you  strongly  to  take  lodgings.  If  you  vrere  a 
large  party  it  would  be  different,  but  you  only  want  a 
sitting  room  and. three  bedrooms." 

""We  could  do  with  a  sitting-room,  a  good-sized  bed- 
room for  my  wife  and  myself,  and  a  small  one  for  my 
daughter,"  Mr.  Renshaw  said;  "and  take  a  bedroom  out 
for  a  few  nights  for  Wilfrid,  as  he  will  be  starting  with 
a  friend  to  journey  through  the  colony  and  look  out  for 
a  piece  of  land  to  suit  us. " 

"Then  there  will  be  no  difficulty  at  all.  You  will  find 
lodgings  rather  more  expensive  than  in  England.  I  do 
not  mean  more  expensive  than  a  fashionable  watering- 
place,  but  certainly  more  expensive  than  in  a  town  of  the 
same  kind  at  home.  House  rent  is  high  here;  but  then, 
on  the  other  hand,  your  living  will  cost  you  less  than  at 
home." 

After  an  hour's  search  lodgings  were  found  in  a  house 


140  MAORI  AND  STZTTLER. 

at  no  great  distance  from  that  of  Mr.  Jackson.  It  wag 
a  email  bouse,  kept  by  the  widow  of  the  owner  and  cap- 
tain of  a  small  trading  ship  that  had  been  lost  a  year 
previously.  The  ship  had  fortunately  been  insured,  and 
the  widow  was  able  to  keep  on  the  house  in  which  she 
lived,  adding  to  her  income  by  letting  a  portion  of  it  to 
new  arrivals,  who,  like  the  Kenshaws,  intended  to  make 
a  stay  of  some  little  time  in  "Wellington  before  taking 
any  steps  to  establish  themselves  as  settlers. 

"I  think,"  Mr.  Jackson  said  when  this  was  settled, 
"you  are  doing  wisely  by  letting  your  son  here  take  a  run 
through  the  colony.  There  is  no  greater  mistake  than 
for  newcomers  to  be  in  a  hurry.  Settle  in  haste  and 
repent  at  leisure  is  the  rule.  Mr.  Mitford  was  saying 
that  he  hoped  that  you  might  settle  down  somewhere  in 
his  locality ;  but  at  any  rate  it  will  be  best  to  look  round 
first.  There  is  plenty  of  land  at  present  to  be  obtained 
anywhere,  and  there  are  many  things  to  be  considered  in 
choosing  a  location.  Carriage  is  of  course  a  vital  con- 
sideration, and  a  settler  on  a  river  has  a  great  advantage 
over  one  who  has  to  send  his  produce  a  long  distance  to 
market  by  wagon.  Then,  again,  some  people  prefer  tak- 
ing up  virgin  land,  and  clearing  it  for  themselves,  while) 
others  are  ready  to  pay  a  higher  sum  to  take  possession 
of  a  holding  where  much  of  the  hard  work  has  already 
been  done,  and  a  house  stands  ready  for  occupation. 

"At  present  no  one,  of  course,  .with  a  wife  and 
daughter  would  think  of  settling  in  the  disturbed  dis- 
trict, although  farms  can  be  bought  there  for  next  to 
nothing.  The  war  is,  I  hope,  nearly  at  an  end,  now  that 
we  have  ten  British  regiments  in  the  island.  They  have 
taken  most  of  the  enemy's  pahs,  though  they  have  been 
a  prodigious  time  about  it,  and  we  colonists  are  very 
discontented  with  the  dilatory  way  in  which  the  war  has 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  141 

been  carried  on,  and  think  that  if  things  had  been  left  to 
ourselves  we  could  have  stamped  the  rebellion  out  in  half 
the  time.  The  redcoats  were  much  too  slow,  too  heavily 
weighted,  and  too  cautious  for  this  sort  of  work.  The 
Maoris  defend  their  pahs  well,  inflict  a  heavy  loss  upon 
their  assailants,  and  when  the  latter  at  last  make  their 
attack  and  carry  the  works  the  Maoris  manage  to  slip 
away,  and  the  next  heard  of  them  is  they  have  erected  a 
fresh  pah,  and  the  whole  thing  has  to  be  gone  through 
again.  However,  we  need  not  discuss  that  now.  I  take 
it  that  anyhow  you  would  not  think  of  settling  down 
anywhere  in  the  locality  of  the  tribes  that  have  been  in 
revolt." 

"Certainly  not,"  Mr.  Renshaw  said.  "lam  apeaceful 
man,  and  if  I  could  get  a  house  and  land  for  nothing  and 
an  income  thrown  into  the  bargain,  I  should  refuse  it  if 
I  could  not  go  to  bed  without  the  fear  that  the  place 
might  be  in  flames  before  the  morning." 

"I  am  bound  tcr  say  that  the  natives  have  as  a  whole 
behaved  very  well  to  the  settlers;  it  would  have  been 
easy  in  a  great  number  of  cases  for  them  to  have  cut 
them  off  had  they  chosen  to  do  so.  But  they  have  fought 
fairly  and  well  according  to  the  rules  of  what  we  may 
call  honorable  warfare.  The  tribesmen  are  for  the  most 
part  Christians,  and  have  carried  out  Christian  precepts. 

"In  one  case,  hearing  that  the  troops  assembling  to 
attack  one  of  their  pahs  were  short  of  provisions,  they 
sent  down  boatloads  of  potatoes  and  other  vegetables  to 
them,  saying  that  the  Bible  said,  'If  thine  enemy  hunger 
feed  him. '  Still,  in  spite  of  instances  of  tins  kind>  I 
should  certainly  say  do  not  go  near  the  disturbed'  dis- 
tricts, for  one  cannot  assert  that  if  hostilities  continue 
they  will  always  be  carried  on  in  that  spirit.  However, 
things  are  at  present  perfectly  peaceable  throughout  the 


142  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

provinces  of  "Wellington  and  Hawke  Bay,  and  it  may  be 
hoped  it  may  continue  so.  I  have  maps  and  plans  of  all 
the  various  districts,  and  before  your  son  starts  will  give 
him  all  the  information  I  possess  as  to  the  advantages 
and  disadvantages  of  each  locality,  the  nature  of  the  soil, 
the  price  at  which  land  can  be  purchased,  and  the  repu- 
tation of  the  natives  in  the  neighborhood." 

The  next  day  the  Eenshaws  landed  after  breakfast  and 
took  up  tbeir  abode  in  the  new  lodgings.  These  were 
plainly  but  comfortably  furnished,  and  after  one  of  the 
trunks  containing  knickknacks  of  all  descriptians  had 
been  opened,  and  some  of  the  contents  distributed,  the 
room  assumed  a  comfortable  homelike  appearance.  A 
lodging  had  been  obtained  close  by  for  the  two  Grim- 
stones.  The  young  fellows  were  heartily  glad  to  be  on, 
shore  again,  for  life  among  the  steerage  passengers  dur- 
ing a  long  voyage  is  dull  and  monotonous.  Mr.  Kenshaw 
had  looked  after  them  during  the  voyage,  and  had  sup- 
plied them  from  his  own  stores  with  many  little  comforts 
in  the  way  of  food,  and  with  books  to  assist  them  to  pass 
their  time;  still  they  were  very  glad  the  voyage  was  over. 

When  he  now  told  them  it  was  probable  that  a  month 
or  even  more  might  pass  after  their  arrival  in  the  colony 
before  he  could  settle  on  a  piece  of  land,  and  that  during 
that  time  they  would  remain  at  Wellington,  they  at  once 
asked  him  to  get  them  work  of  some  kind  if  he  could. 
"We  should  be  learning  something  about  the  place,  sir; 
and  should  probably  get  our  food  for  our  work,  and 
should  be  costing  you  nothing,  and  we  would  much 
rather  do  that  than  loiter  about  town  doing  nothing." 

Mr.  Eenshaw  approved  of  their  plan,  and  mentioned  it 
to  Mr.  Jackson,  who,  on  the  very  day  after  their  land- 
ing, spoke  to  a  settler  who  had  come  in  from  a  farm  some 
twenty  miles  in  the  interior. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  143 

"They  are  active  and  willing  young  fellows  and  don't 
vrant  pay,  only  to  be  put  up  and  fed  until  the  man  who 
has  brought  them  out  here  with  him  gets  hold  of  a  farm." 

"I  shall  be  extremely  glad  to  have  them,"  the  settler 
said.  "This  is  a  very  busy  time  with  us,  and  a  couple  of 
extra  hands  will  be  very  useful.  They  will  learn  a  good 
deal  as  to  our  ways  here  in  the  course  of  a  month,  and, 
as  you  say,  it  would  be  far  better  for  them  to  be  at  work 
than  to  be  loafing  about  the  place  doing  nothing." 

Accordingly,  the  next  morning  the  two  Grimstonea 
went  up  country  and  set  to  work. 


144  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 


CHAPTER    IX. 

THE    NEW  ZEALAND  WAE. 

FOB  a  few  days  the  greater  part  of  the  passengers  who 
had  arrived  by  the  Flying  Scud  remained  in  Wellington. 
Mr.  Atherton  and  the  two  Aliens  had  put  up  at  the  same 
hotel.  The  latter  intended  to  go  out  as  shepherds  or  in 
any  other  capacity  on  a  farm,  for  a  few  months  at  any 
rate,  before  investing  in  land.  They  had  two  or  three 
letters  of  introduction  to  residents  in  Wellington,  and 
ten  days  after  the  arrival  of  the  ship  they  called  at  the 
Eenshaws  to  say  good-by,  as  they  had  arranged  to  go  for 
some  months  with  a  settler  up  the  country.  They  prom- 
ised to  write  regularly  to  Wilfrid  and  tell  him  all  about 
the  part  to  which  they  were  going. 

"Mr.  Atherton  has  promised  to  write  to  us,  "they  said, 
"and  tell  us  about  the  districts  he  visits  with  you,  and 
if  you  and  he  discover  anything  particularly  inviting  we 
shall  at  any  rate  come  and  see  you,  if  you  will  give  us  an 
invitation  when  you  are  settled,  and  look  round  there 
before  buying  land  anywhere  else.  It  would  be  very 
pleasant  to  be  somewhere  near  you  and  him." 

"WTe  shall  be  very  glad,  indeed,  to  see  you,"  Mrs.  Ben- 
shaw  said;  "still  more  glad  if  you  take  up  a  piece  of 
ground  near  us.  Having  friends  near  is  a  very  great 
point  in  such  a  life  as  this,  and  it  would  be  most  agreea- 
ble having  a  sort  of  little  colony  of  our  own." 

"We  should  have  liked  very  much,"  James  Allen  said, 
"to  say  good-by  to  the  Miss  Mitfords,  but  as  we  do  not 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  145 

know  their  father  and  mother  it  might  seem  strange  for 
us  to  call  there." 

"I  do  not  think  they  are  at  all  people  to  stand  on  cere- 
mony, Mrs.  Renshaw  said;  "but  I  will  put  on  my  bonnet 
and  go  round  with  you  at  once  if  you  like." 

This  was  accordingly  done.  Mr.  Mitford  had  heard 
of  the  young  men  as  forming  part  of  the  little  group  of 
passengers  on  board  the  Flying  Scud,  and  gave  them  a 
hearty  invitation  to  pay  him  a  visit  if  they  happened  to 
be  in  his  neighborhood,  and  the  next  day  they  started 
for  the  farm  on  which  they  had  engaged  themselves. 
Two  days  later  there  was  a  general  break-up  of  the  party, 
for  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Mitford  started  with  their  daughters  in 
a  steamer  bound  to  Hawke  Bay. 

"Will  you  tell  me,  Mr.  Jackson,  what  all  the  trouble 
in  the  north  has  been  about, ' '  "Wilfrid  asked  that  even- 
ing, "for  I  have  not  been  able  to  find  out  from  the 
papers?" 

"It  is  a  complicated  question,  Wilfrid.  When  New 
Zealand  was  first  colonized  the  natives  were  very  friendly. 
The  early  settlers  confidently  pushed  forward  into  the 
heart  of  the  native  districts,  bought  tracts  of  land  from 
the  chiefs,  and  settled  there.  Government  purchased 
large  blocks  of  land,  cut  off  by  intervening  native  terri- 
tory from  the  main  settlements,  and  sold  this  land  to 
settlers  without  a  suspicion  that  they  were  thereby  doom- 
ing them  to  ruin.  The  settlers  were  mostly  small  far- 
mers, living  in  rough  wooden  houses  scattered  about  the 
country,  and  surrounded  BV  a  few  fields;  the  adjoining 
land  is  usually  fern  or  forest  held  by  the  natives.  They 
fenced  their  fields,  and  turned  their  cattle,  horses,  and 
sheep  at  large  in  the  open  country  outside  these  fences, 
paying  rent  to  the  natives  for  the  privilege  of  doing  so. 

"This  led  to  innumerable  quarrels.     The  native  plan- 


146  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

tations  of  wheat,  potatoes,  or  maize  are  seldom  fenced  in, 
and  the  cattle  of  the  settlers  sometimes  committed  much 
devastation  among  them ;  for  the  Maori  fields  were  often 
situated  at  long  distances  from  their  villages,  and  the 
cattle  might,  therefore,  be  days  in  their  patches  before 
they  were  found  out.  On  the  other  hand,  the  gaunt, 
long-legged  Maori  pigs,  which  wander  over  the  country 
picking  up  their  own  living,  were  constantly  getting 
through  the  settlers'  fences,  rooting  up  their  potatoes, 
and  doing  all  sorts  of  damage. 

"In  these  cases  the  settlers  always  had  the  worst  of 
the  quarrel.  They  either  had  no  weapons,  or,  being 
isolated  in  the  midst  of  the  natives,  dared  not  use  them; 
while  the  Maoris,  well  armed  and  numerous,  would  come 
down  waving  their  tomahawks  and  pointing  their  guns, 
and  the  settlers,  however  much  in  the  right,  were  forced 
to  give  way.  The  natural  result  was  that  the  colonists 
were  continually  smarting  under  a  sense  of  wrong, 
while  the  Maoris  grew  insolent  and  contemptuous  and 
were  filled  with  an  overweening  confidence  in  their  own 
powers,  the  result  of  the  patience  and  enforced  submis- 
sion of  the  settlers.  The  authority  of  the  queen  over  the 
natives  had  always  been  a  purely  nominal  one.  There 
was  indeed  a  treaty  signed  acknowledging  her  govern- 
ment, but  as  none  of  the  chiefs  put  their  name  to  this, 
and  the  men  who  signed  were  persons  of  inferior  rank 
•with  no  authority  whatever  to  speak  for  the  rest,  the 
treaty  was  not  worth  the  paper  on  which  it  was  written. 

"The  Maoris  from  the  first  exhibited  a  great  desire  for 
education.  They  established  numerous  schools  in  their 
own  districts  and  villages;  in  most  cases  accepted  nomi- 
nally if  not  really  the  Christian  religion,  and  studied 
history  with  a  good  deal  of  intelligence.  Some  of  them 
read  that  the  Romans  conquered  England  by  making 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  U? 

roads  everywhere  through  the  island,  and  the  natives 
therefore  determined  that  no  roads  should  be  constructed 
through  their  lands,  and  every  attempt  on  the  part  of 
government  to  carry  roads  beyond  the  lands  it  had 
bought  from  them  was  resisted  so  firmly  and  angrily  that 
the  attempt  had  to  be  abandoned.  The  natives  were 
well  enough  aware  that  behind  the  despised  settlers  was 
the  power  of  England,  and  that  if  necessary  a  numerous 
army  could  be  sent  over,  but  they  relied  absolutely  upon 
their  almost  impassable  swamps, .  their  rivers,  forests, 
and  mountains. 

"Here  they  thought  they  could  maintain  themselves 
against  any  force  that  might  be  sent  against  them,  and 
relying  upon  this  they  became  more  and  more  insolent 
and  overbearing,  and  for  some  time  before  the  outbreak 
in  1860  everyone  saw  that  sooner  or  later  the  storm 
would  burst,  and  the  matter  have  to  be  fought  out  until 
either  we  were  driven  from  the  island  or  the  natives  be- 
came thoroughly  convinced  of  their  inability  to  oppose 
us. 

"At  first  the  natives  had  sold  their  land  willingly,  but 
as  the  number  of  the  European  settlers  increased  they 
became  jealous  of  them,  and  every  obstacle  was  thrown 
in  the  way  of  land  sales  by  the  chiefs.  Disputes  were 
constantly  arising  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  absolute 
ownership  of  land  was  verj-  ill  defined,  and  perhaps  a 
dozen  or  more  persons  professed  to  have  claims  of  some 
sort  or  other  on  each  piece  of  land,  and  had  to  be  in- 
dividually settled  with  before  the  sale  could  be  effected. 
When  as  it  seemed  all  was  satisfactorily  concluded,  fresh 
claimants  would  arise,  and  disputes  were  therefore  of 
constant  occurrence,  for  there  were  no  authorities  out- 
side the  principal  settlements  to  enforce  obedience  to  the 
law. 


148  MAORI  AJffD  SETTLER. 

"Even  in  Auckland  itself  the  state  of  things  •was  al- 
most unbearable.  Drunken  Maoris  would  indulge  in 
insolent  and  riotious  behavior  in  the  street;  for  no  native 
could  be  imprisoned  without  the  risk  of  war,  and  with 
the  colonists  scattered  about  all  over  the  country  the 
risk  was  too  great  to  be  run.  In  addition  to  the  want 
of  any  rule  or  authority  to  regulate  the  dealings  of  the 
natives  with  the  English,  there  were  constant  troubles 
between  the  native  tribes. 

"Then  began  what  is  called  the  king  movement.  One 
of  the  tribes  invited  others  to  join  in  establishing  a  cen- 
tral authority,  who  would  at  once  put  a  stop  to  these 
tribal  feuds  and  enforce  something  like  law  and  order, 
and  they  thought  that  having  a  king  of  their  own  would 
improve  their  condition — would  prevent  land  from  being 
sold  to  the  whites,  and  be  a  protection  to  the  people  at 
large,  and  enable  them  to  hold  their  own  against  the  set- 
tlers. Several  of  the  tribes  joined  in  this  movement. 
Meetings  were  held  in  various  parts  in  imitation  of  the 
colonial  assemblies.  The  fruit  of  much  deliberation  was 
that  a  chief  named  Potatau,  who  was  held  in  the  highest 
esteem  not  only  by  the  tribes  of  Waikato,  but  throughout 
the  whole  island,  as  one  of  the  greatest  of  their  warriors 
and  wisest  of  their  chiefs,  was  chosen  as  king. 

"The  movement  excited  much  apprehension  in  Auck- 
land and  the  other  settlements,  for  it  was  plain  that  if  the 
Maoris  were  governed  by  one  man  and  laid  aside  their 
mutual  enmities  they  would  become  extremely  formida- 
ble. At  the  great  meeting  that  was  held,  the  bishop  of 
New  Zealand,  the  head  of  the  Wesleyan  body,  and  several 
other  missionaries  were  present,  and  warned  the  Maoris 
of  the  dangers  that  would  arise  from  the  course  they 
were  taking. 

"The  warning  was  in  vain,  and  Potatau  was  chosen 


MA  ORI  AND  SETTLER.  \  49 

king.  Mr.  Fenton,  a  government  official,  went  on  a  tour 
among  the  natives.  He  found  that  there  was  still  what 
was  called  a  queen's  party,  but  the  king's  party  was  very 
much  the  strongest.  For  two  years,  however,  things 
went  on  somewhat  as  before,  and  it  was  not  until  1860, 
when  a  quarrel  arose  over  some  laud  in  the  province  of 
Taranaki,  that  troubles  fairly  began.  In  this  district 
a  chief  named  "Wirernu-Kingi  had  established  a  sort  of 
land  league,  and  given  notice  to  the  governor  that  he 
would  not  permit  any  more  laud  to  be  sold  in  the  dis- 
trict. A  native  named  Teira,  who  owned  some  land  at 
Waiteira,  offered  it  for  sale  to  the  government.  After 
examining  his  title,  and  finding  that  it  was  a  valid  one, 
the  land  was  purchased. 

"In  the  spring  of  1860  the  governor  tried  to  take  pos- 
session. Wiremu-Kingi  forcibly  resisted,  the  troops 
were  called  out,  and  war  began.  Wiremu-Kingi  had  un- 
questionably certain  rights  on  Teira's  land,  for  he  and 
his  tribe  were  amicably  settled  upon  it,  had  built  houses, 
and  were  making  plantations;  but  of  these  facts  the  gov- 
ernment were  ignorant  when  they  bought  the  land. 
Wiremu-Kingi  at  once  joined  the  king  movement,  from 
which  he  had  previously  stood  aloof.  A  meeting  was 
held  at  Waikato.  Chief  Wiremu-Kingi  and  Mr.  McLean 
the  native  secretaiT,  both  addressed  the  meeting,  and 
Potatau  and  many  of  the  chiefs  were  of  opinion  that  the 
English  had  acted  fairly  in  the  case.  Many  of  the 
younger  chiefs,  however,  took  the  part  of  the  Taranaki 
natives,  and  marched  away  and  joined  them. 

"Unfortunately,  in  the  first  fight  that  took  place,  our 
troops  were  driven  back  in  an  attack  upon  a  pah,  and 
the  news  of  this  success  so  fired  the  minds  of  all  the 
fighting  men  of  the  Waikato  and  neighboring  tribes  that 
they  flocked  down  to  Taranaki  and  joined  in  plundering 


15(T  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

the  deserted  homes  of  the  settlers,  and  in  the  attacks 
upon  the  troops.  Potatau  and  his  council  did  all  they 
could  to  stop  their  men  from  going,  but  the  desire  to 
distinguish  themselves  and  to  take  part  in  the  victories 
over  the  Pakehas,  which  is  what  the  natives  call  the 
whites,  were  too  strong  for  them.  In  the  midst  of  all 
this  turmoil  Potatau  died,  and  his  son  Matu-Taera  was 
made  king. 

£<In  the  fighting  that  went  on  in  Taranaki  discipline 
and  training  soon  began  to  make  themselves  felt.  The 
troops  in  the  colony  were  largely  reinforced,  and  pah 
after  pah  were  captured.  The  war  went  on.  But 
though  English  regiments  with  a  strong  force  of  artillery 
were  engaged  in  it,  it  cannot  be  said  that  the  natives 
have  been  conquered,  and  General  Cameron,  who  came 
out  and  assumed  the  command,  found  the  task  before 
him  a  very  difficult  one. 

"There  was  for  a  time  a  pause  in  hostilities  when  Sir 
George  Grey  came  out  as  governor  in  thei)lace  of  Gover- 
nor Brown,  but  the  natives  recommenced  hostilities  by  a 
treacherous  massacre  near  New  Plymouth,  and  fighting 
began  again  at  once. 

"The  native  pah-near  the  Katikara  river  was  attacked 
by  a  column  of  infantry  with  artillery,  and  shelled  by 
the  guns  of  a  ship  of  war,  and  the  Maoris  were  driven 
out  of  a  position  that  they  believed  impregnable.  The 
Waikatos  now  rose  and  murdered  and  plundered  many  of 
the  settlers,  and  a  force  marched  for  the  first  time  into 
their  country,  carried  a  formidable  pah,  at  Koheroa,  and, 
although  unprovided  with  artillery,  defeated  the  Maoris 
in  a  fight  in  the  thick  bush.  The  very  formidable  posi- 
tion at  Merimeri,  which  lay  surrounded  by  swamps  near 
the  Waikato  river,  was  next  captured,  although  held  by 
eleven  hundred  Maoris,  led  by  their  great  chief  "Wiremu- 
Tamehana,  called  by  the  missionaries  William  Thompson. 


MAOEI  AND  SETTLER,  151 

"The  next  attack  was  upon  a  strongly  fortified  posi- 
tion at  Rangiriri,  lying  between  the  Waikato  river  and 
"Waikare  lake.  This  was  successful,  and  the  natives  were 
.next  thrashed  at  Rangiawhia,  at  Kaitake,  on  the  25th  of 
last  March.  Thus,  you  see,  in  almost  all  of  these  fights 
we  succeeded  in  capturing  the  enemy's  pah  or  in  defeat- 
ing them  if  they  fought  in  the  open.  Unfortunately, 
although  these  engagements  showed  the  natives  that  in 
fair  fighting  they  were  no  match  for  our  troops,  they 
have  done  little  more.  When  their  pahs  were  captured 
they  almost  invariably  managed  to  make  their  way 
though  the  dense  bush,  and  it  can  scarcely  be  said  that 
we  do  more  than  hold  the  ground  occupied  by  our 
soldiers.  And  so  matters  still  go  on.  The  fighting  has 
been  confined  to  the  Taranaki  and  Auckland  provinces, 
and  we  may  hope  that  it  will  go  no  further." 

"Well,  it  is  quite  evident,"  Mr.  Renshaw  said,  "that 
neither  the  Waikato  country  nor  Taranaki  are  fit  places 
for.  quiet  people  to  settle  at  the  present  time,  and  I  sup- 
pose the  northern  part  of  Wellington  is  not  much 
better?" 

"No,  I  cannot  say  it  is,"  Mr.  Jackson  said.  "The 
Wanganui  tribe,  on  the  river  of  that  name,  are  in  alliance 
with  the  Taranaki  people,  and  have  joined  them  in  fight- 
ing against  us,  and  I  believe  that  General  Cameron  will 
shortly  undertake  a  campaign  against  them.  I  shall 
strongly  advise  you  to  turn  your  attention  to  the  eastern 
side  of  this  province,  or  to  the  province  of  Hawke  Bay, 
higher  up,  where  they  have  had  no  trouble  whatever, 
and  where,  as  you  know,  our  friends  the  Mitfords  are 
settled. " 

"What  is  this  that  I  have  heard  about  a  new  religion 
that  has  been  started  among  the  Maoris?" 

"There  is  but  little  known  about  it,  and  if  it  were  not 


152  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

that  should  this  religion  spread  it  will  add  to  our  diffi- 
culties, no  one  would  think  anything  about  it  one  way  or 
the  other.  There  was  a  fellow  named  Te  TTa,  who  had 
always  been  looked  upon  as  a  harmless  lunatic.  No  doubt 
he  is  a  lunatic  still,  though  whether  he  will  be  harmless 
remains  to  be  seen.  However,  he  some  little  time  ago 
gave  out  that  the  archangel  Michael,  the  angel  Gabriel, 
and  hosts  of  minor  spirits  visited  him  and  gave  him  per- 
mission to  preach  a  new  religion,  and  bestowed  on  him 
great  power. 

"The  religion  was  to  be  called  Pai  Marire,  which  in- 
terpreted literally  means  good  and  peaceful ;  and  it  is  also 
called  Hau-Hau,  the  meaning  of  which  is  obscure,  but  it 
is  a  special  word  of  power  that  Te  Ua  professes  to  have 
specially  received  from  the  angel  Gabriel.  As  far  as  we 
have  been  able  to  learn  the  Hau-Haus  have  no  special 
belief  or  creed,  except  that  their  leader  has  a  divine  mis- 
sion, and  that  all  he  says  is  to  be  implicitly  obeyed. 
Certainly  the  religion  has  spread  quickly  among  the 
tribes,  and  has  latterly  taken  the  form  of  hostility  to  us. 
Still,  we  may  hope  that  it  will  soon  die  out.  It  is  said 
that  Te  TJa  has  told  his  followers  that  they  are  invulnera- 
ble, but  if  they  try  conclusions  with  us  they  will  very 
speedily  find  that  he  has  deceived  them,  and  are  not 
likely  to  continue  their  belief  in  him." 

"Then  the  colonists  themselves,  Mr.  Jackson,  have 
taken  but  little  share  in  the  fighting  so  far?" 

"Oh,  yes,  they  have.  There  have  been  several  corps 
of  rangers  which  have  done  capital  service.  The  corps 
led  by  Majors  Atkinson,  "Von  Tempsky,  and  McDonnell 
have  done  great  service,  and  are  far  more  dreaded  by  the 
natives  than  are  the  slow-moving  regular  troops.  They 
fight  the  natives  in  their  own  manner — make  raids  into 
their  country  and  attack  their  positions  at  ni&ht,  and  so 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  Io3 

much  are  they  dreaded  that  the  natives  in  Tillages  in 
their  vicinity  are  in  the  habit  of  leaving  their  huts  at 
night  and  sleeping  in  the  bush  lest  they  should  be  sur- 
prised by  their  active  enemy.  The  general  opinion 
among  us  colonists  is  that  ten  companies  like  Von  Temp- 
sky's  would  do  a  great  deal  more  than  ten  British  regi- 
ments toward  bringing  the  matter  to  a  conclusion. 

"In  the  first  place,  the  officers  and  troops  of  the  regu- 
lar array  cannot  bring  themselves  to  regard  the  natives 
with  the  respect  they  deserve  as  foes.  Their  movements 
are  hampered  by  the  necessity  of  a  complicated  system 
of  transport.  Their  operations,  accompanied  as  they  are 
by  artillery  and  a  wagon  train,  are  slow  in  the  extreme, 
and  do  what  they  will  the  natives  always  slip  through 
their  hands.  The  irregular  corps,  on  the  other  hand, 
thoroughly  appreciate  the  activity  and  bravery  of  the 
Maoris.  They  have  lived  among  them,  and  know  their 
customs  and  ways.  They  have  suffered  from  the  arro- 
gance and  insolence  of  the  natives  before  the  outbreak  of 
the  war,  and  most  of  them  have  been  ruined  by  the 
destruction  of  their  farms  and  the  loss  of  years  of  patient 
labor.  •  Thus  they  fight  with  a  personal  feeling  of  enmity 
against  their  foes,  and  neither  fatigue  nor  danger  is  con- 
sidered by  them  if  there  is  a  chance  of  inflicting  a  blow 
upon  their  enemy.  I  am  convinced  that  at  last  the  im- 
perial government  will  be  so  disgusted  at  the  failure  of 
the  troops  to  bring  the  war  to  a  conclusion,  and  at  the 
great  expense  and  loss  of  life  entailed  by  the  operations, 
that  they  will  recall  the  regulars  and  leave  the  colonists 
to  manage  the  affair  themselves,  in  which  case  I  have  no 
fear  whatever  as  to  their  bringing  it  to  a  prompt  conclu- 
sion. Looking  at  the  matter  from  a  business  point  of 
view,  there  is  no  doubt,  Mr.  Eenshaw,  that  those  who, 
like  yourself,  come  out  at  the  present  time  will  benefit 


154  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

considerably.  You  will  get  land  at  a  quarter  the  price 
you  would  have  had  to  pay  for  it  had  it  not  been  for 
these  troubles,  and  as  soon  as  the  war  is  over  the  tide 
of  emigration  will  set  in  again  more  strongly  than  before, 
and  land  will  go  to  prices  far  exceeding  those  that  ruled 
before  the  outbreak  began." 

Upon  the  following  morning  Mr.  Atherton  and  Wilfrid 
embarked  in  the  schooner.  They  had  been  furnished  by 
Mr.  Jackson  with  a  number  of  letters  of  introduction  to 
settlers  in  every  district  they  were  to  visit.  "These  will 
really  only  be  of  use  to  you  in  the  small  towns,"  he  said, 
"for  in  the  country  districts  every  house  is  open,  and 
you  have  generally  only  to  ride  up  to  a  door,  put  up  your 
horses,  and  walk  in,  and  you  are  almost  sure  to  meet  with  a 
hearty  welcome.  Still,  as  you  are  newcomers,  and  have 
not  rubbed  off  your  old  country  ideas,  it  will  be  more 
pleasant  for  you  to  take  letters.  At  the  ports,  such  as 
they  are,  you  may  really  find  them  useful,  for  you  will 
not  find  any  inns.  You  can  strike  out  anywhere  into  the 
back  country  without  the  least  fear  of  being  inconven- 
ienced by  natives." 

The  two  friends  spent  a  pleasant  fortnight  touching  at 
the  settlements,  situated  for  the  most  part  at  the  mouths 
of  the  rivers,  and  spending  the  time  the  vessel  remained 
there  in  short  excursions  into  the  interior.  They  were 
most  pleased  with  the  Wairarapa  Valley,  running  up 
from  Palliser  Bay;  but  this  being  near  Wellington  the 
land  was  all  taken  up,  and  there  were  many  flourishing 
villages  and  small  towns. 

"This  is  very  nice,"  Wilfrid  said,  "but  the  price  of 
land  is  far  too  high  for  us,  and  we  might  almost  as  well 
have  taken  to  farming  in  England." 

The  eastern  coast  of  the  province  was  dotted  by  little 
settlements,  lying  for  the  most  part  at  the  mouths  of 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  155 

email  rivers,  and  several  of  these  offered  favorable  facili- 
ties for  settlement.  Passing  on,  they  found  that  the 
coast  was  bolder  along  the  province  of  Hawke  Bay.  They 
stopped  at  Clive,  at  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  for  a  day  or 
two,  and  went  up  th.e  Tukataki  river  in  a  canoe  to  the 
town  of  Waipawa.  But  here  they  found  the  farms  thick 
and  land  comparatively  expensive.  They  left  the 
schooner  at  Napier,  the  chief  town  of  the  province,  and 
after  making  several  excursions  here  went  up  in  a  coast- 
ing craft  to  the  mouth  of  the  river  Mohaka,  which  runs 
into  the  sea  a  short  distance  to  the  south  of  the  boundary 
line  between  Hawke  Bay  and  the  province  of  Auckland. 
A  few  miles  up  this  river  was  the  farm  of  Mr.  Mitford. 
Hiring  a  boat  they  proceeded  up  the  river,  and  landed 
in  front  of  the  comfortable-looking  farmhouse  of  the 
settler. 

Mr.  Mitford,  seeing  strangers  approaching,  at  once 
came  down  to  meet  them,  and  received  them  with  the 
greatest  cordiality  as  soon  as  he  saw  who  they  were. 

"I  am  heartily  glad  to  see  you!"  he  exclaimed,  "and 
the  girls  will  be  delighted.  They  have  been  wondering 
ever. since  we  got  here  when  you  would  arrive.  You  have 
not,  I  hope,  fixed  upon  any  land  yet,  for  they  have  set 
their  heart  upon  your  settling  down  as  our  neighbors. 
This  is  as  pretty  a  valley  as  there  is  in  the  island,  and 
you  will  have  no  difficulty  in  getting  land  at  the  lowest 
government  price.  There  being  no  settlement  of  any 
size  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  has  deterred  emigrants 
from  coming  here  to  search  for  land.  But  we  can  talk 
about  that  afterward.  Come  straight  up  to  the  house. 
I  will  send  down  one  of  my  native  boys  to  bring  up  your 


They  spent  a  very  pleasant  evening  at  the  farmhouse. 
Mr.  Mitford  owned  a  considerable   extent  of  land,  and 


156  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

was  doing  very  well.  He  reared  cattle  and  horses,  which 
he  sent  down  for  sale  to  "Wellington.  The  house  was 
large  and  comfortable,  and  bore  signs  of  the  prosperity 
of  its  owner.  The  girls  were  delighted  at  the  place. 
They  had  been  left  in  care  of  relatives  at  home  when, 
their  father  and  mother  came  out  six  years  before  to 
settle  in  New  Zealand,  and  everything  was  as  new  to 
them  as  to  Wilfrid.  They  had  taken  to  riding  as  soon  as 
they  arrived,  and  had  already  made  excursions  far  up 
the  valley  with  their  father. 

"We  were  at  a  place  yesterday,  Wilfrid,"  the  eldest 
girl  said,  "that  we  agreed  would  suit  your  father  admira- 
bly. It  is  about  ten  miles  up  the  river.  It  was  taken 
up  onlj'  last  year,  father  says,  by  a  young  Englishman, 
who  is  going  to  make  a  home  for  some  one  he  was  en- 
gaged to  in  England.  A  few  days  since  he  was  killed  by 
a  tree  he  was  cutting  down  falling  upon  him.  He  lived 
twenty-four  hours  after  the  accident,  and  father  rode  out 
to  him  when  he  heard  it.  He  directed  him  to  sell  the 
land  for  whatever  it  would  fetch,  and  to  send  the  money 
over  to  England.  There  are  two  hundred  acres  on  the 
river  and  a  comfortable  log  hut,  which  could  of  course 
be  enlarged.  He  had  about  fifteen  acres  cleared  and 
cultivated.  The  scenery  is  beautiful,  much  prettier  than 
it  is  here,  with  lots  of  lovely  tree-ferns;  and  there  are 
many  open  patches,  so  that  more  land  can  be  cleared  for 
cultivation  easily.  Mabel  and  I  agreed  when  we  rode 
over  there  two  days  ago  that  it  would  be  just  the  place 
for  you." 

"It  sounds  first-rate,"  Wilfrid  said;  "just  the  sort  of 
place  that  will  suit  us." 

"But  how  about  me,  Miss  Mitford?"  Mr.  Atherton 
asked.  "Have  you  had  my  interest  at  heart  as  well  as 
those  of  Wilfrid  and  his  people?" 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  157 

can  take  up  the  next  bit  of  laud  above  it,"  Mr. 
Mitford  said.  "Langston's  was  the  last  settlement  on 
the  river,  so  you  can  take  up  any  piece  of  land  beyond  it 
at  the  government  upset  price,  and  do  as  much  fishing 
and  shooting  as  you  like,  for  I  heard  from  my  daughters 
that  you  are  not  thinking  of  permanently  settling  here, 
but  are  only  a  bird  of  passage.  Anyhow,  it  would  not  be 
a  bad  investment  for  you  to  buy  a  considerable  acreage, 
for  as  soon  as  the  troubles  are  over  there  is  sure  to  be  a 
rush  of  emigration ;  and  there  are  very  few  places  now 
where  land  is  to  be  had  on  a  navigable  river,  so  that 
when  you  are  tired  of  the  life  you  will  be  able  to  sell  out 
at  considerable  profit." 

"It  sounds  tempting,  Mr.  Mitford,  and  I  will  certainly 
have  a  l.ook  at  the  ground.  How  much  would  this  piece 
of  land  be  of  Mr.  Langston's?" 

"The  poor  fellow  told  me  to  take  anything  that  I  could 
get.  He  said  he  knew  that  at  present  it  was  very  diffi- 
cult to  sell  land,  as  no  new  settlers  were  coming  out,  and 
that  he  should  be  very  glad  if  I  got  what  he  gave  for  it, 
which  was  ten  shillings  an  acre,  and  to  throw  in  the  im- 
provements he  had  made;  so  that  a  hundred  pounds 
would  buy  it  all.  I  really  don't  think  that  Mr.  Renshaw 
could  do  better  if  he  looked  all  through  the  island. 
With  a  cow  or  two,  a  pen  of  pigs,  and  a  score  or  two  of 
fowls,  he  would  practically  be  able  to  live  on  his  land 
from  the  hour  he  settled  there." 

Wilfrid  was  greatly  pleased  at  the  idea.  He  knew  that 
his  father  and  mother  had  still  eight  hundred  pounds 
untouched ;  two  hundred  pounds,  together  with  the  pro- 
ceeds of  his  mother's  trinkets  and  jewels,  and  the  sale  of 
the  ponies  and  pony  carriage,  which  had  been  her  own 
property,  having  sufficed  to  pay  for  the  passage  of  them- 
selves and  their  two  laborers,  and  for  all  expenses  up  to 


158  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

the  time  of  their  arrival  at  Wellington.  "If  we  could 
get  another  piece  of  two  hundred  acres  adjoining  it  at 
the  same  price  I  think  my  father  would  like  to  take  it," 
he  said;  "it  would  give  more  room  for  horses  and  cattle 
to  graze.  Of  course  we  should  not  want  it  at  first ;  but  if 
as  we  got  on  we  wanted  more  land,  and  had  neighbors  all 
round  us  and  could  not  get  it,  it  would  be  a  nuisance." 

"I  agree  with  you,"  Mr.  Mitford  said.  "Two  hun- 
dred acres  is  more  than  you  want  if  you  are  going  to  put 
it  under  the  plow;  it  is  not  enough  if  you  are  going  to 
raise  cattle  and  horses.  I  should  certainly  recommend 
you  to  take  up  another  two  hundred.  The  next  land  on 
this  side  is  still  vacant.  Poor  Langston  chose  the  spot 
because  it  happened  to  be  particularly  pretty,  with  an 
open  glade  down  to  the  river,  but  the  land  for  fully  two 
miles  on  this  side  is  unoccupied.  You  can  get  it  at  ten 
shillings  an  acre  at  present.  I  will  see  about  it  for  you 
if  you  make  up  your  mind,  after  seeing  Langston 'sjplace, 
to  take  it." 

"Of  course  I  cannot  settle  it  by  myself,  sir,  not  abso- 
lutely. I  can  only  recommend  it  to  my  father  as  the 
best  place  that  I  have  seen.  If  it  is  as  you  describe  it 
they  will  be  delighted." 

"Well,  we  will  ride  over  to-morrow  and  have  a  look  at 
it.  The  only  possible  objection  I  have  is  loneliness; 
but  that  will  improve  in  time ;  the  natives  here  are  per- 
fectly peaceful,  and  we  have  never  had  the  slightest  trouble 
with  them." 

"We  are  a  good  large  party  to  begin  with,  you  see," 
Wilfrid  said.  "Having  the  two  men  with  us  will  take 
away  the  feeling  of  loneliness,  especially  if  Mr.  Atherton 
decides  upon  taking  the  piece  of  land  next  to  us.  Then 
there  are  the  two  Aliens  who  came  out  with  us.  I  prom- 
ised to  write  and  tell  them  if  I  found  any  nice  place; 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  159 

and  they  said  particularly  that  they  wanted  ground  on  a 
river  if  they  could  get  it,  as  they  are  fond  of  boating  and 
fishing,  and  fancied  that  if  there  were  other  farms  around 
that  they  could,  until  their  own  place  paid,  help  to  keep 
themselves  by  taking  their  neighbors'  crops  down  to 
market." 

"Yes,  it  might  pay  if  they  got  a  large  flatboat  capable 
of  carrying  cargo ;  but  as  far  as  light  goods,  letters,  and 
groceries  from  town  are  concerned,  the  Indians  could  do 
it  cheaper  in  their  canoes.  However,  at  present  there  is 
no  market  for  them  to  come  down  to.  I  keep  what  I  call 
a  grocery  store  for  the  benefit  of  the  two  or  three  score 
of  settlers  there  are  on  the  river.  I  do  not  make  any 
profit  out  of  the  matter,  but  each  season  get  a  hogshead 
<or  two  of  sugar,  a  couple  tons  of  flour,  some  barrels  of 
molasses,  a  few  chests  of  tea,  and  an  assortment  of  odds 
and  ends,  such  as  pickles,  etc.,  with  a  certain  amount  of 
rum  and  whisky,  and  sell  them  at  the  price  they  stand 
me  in  at.  I  do  not  know  what  they  would  do  without 
it  here.  I  only  open  the  store  on  the  first  Monday  of 
each  month,  and  they  then  lay  in  what  stores  they  re- 
quire, so  it  gives  me  very  little  trouble.  I  generally 
take  produce  in  return.  My  bills  run  on  until  they  gefc 
tip  to  the  value  of  something  a  customer  wants  to  sell — a 
norse,  or  two  or  three  dozen  sheep.  That  suits  me  just 
as  well  as  money,  as  I  send  a  cargo  off  to  Wellington 
every  two  or  three  months. 

"In  time,  no  doubt,  a  settlement  will  spring  up  some- 
where near  the  mouth  of  the  river,  and  we  shall  have  a 
trader  or  two  establishing  themselves  there;  but  at  pres- 
ent I  am  the  purveyor  of  the  district,  and  manage  mosfc 
of  the  business  of  the  settlers  in  the  way  of  buying  and 
Belling  at  Wellington.  So  you  see,  if  you  establish  your- 
self here  you  will  have  no  choice  but  to  appoint  me  your 


160  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"Wilfrid  laughed.  "It  will  be  a  great  advantage  to  us 
to  be  able  to  get  our  things  so  close  at  hand.  I  was 
wondering  how  people  did  in  the  back  settlements." 

"They  generalb'  send  their  drays  every  two  or  three 
months  down  to  the  nearest  store,  which  may,  of  course, 
be  fifty  miles  off,  or  even  more.  Here,  fortunately,  you 
will  not  be  obliged  at  first  to  have  a  dray,  but  can  send 
any  produce  you  have  to  sell  down  by  water,  which  is  a 
far  cheaper  and  more  convenient  mode  of  carriage.  You 
will  not  have  much  to  send  for  some  time,  so  that  will 
not  trouble  you  at  present. ' ' 

"Oh,  no.  We  shall  be  quite  content  if  we  can  live  on 
the  produce  of  our  farm  for  the  next  year  or  two,"  Wil- 
frid laughed. 

"It  is,"  Mr.  Mitford  said,  "an  immense  advantage  to 
settlers  when  they  have  sufficient  funds  to  carry  them  on 
for  the  first  two  or  three  years,  because  in  that  case  they 
gain  the  natural  increase  of  their  animals  instead  of  hav- 
ing to  sell  them  off  to  pay  their  way.  It  is  wonderful 
how  a  flock  of  sheep  or  a  herd  of  cattle  will  increase  if 
there  is  no  selling.  You  may  take  it  that  under  favora- 
ble circumstances  a  herd  of  cattle  will  nearly  double 
itself  every  two  years,  allowing,  of  course,  a  large  propor- 
tion of  the  bull  calves  to  be  sold  off  as  soon  as  they  arrive 
at  maturity.  Sheep  will  increase  even  faster.  If  you 
can  do  without  selling,  you  will  be  surprised,  if  you 
start  with  say  fifty  sheep  or  ten  cows,  in  how  short  a 
time  you  will  have  as  many  animals  as  your  land  will 
carry." 

"But  what  are  we  to  do  then,  sir?" 

"Well,  you  will  then,  providing  the  country  has  not 
in  the  meantime  become  too  thickly  settled,  pay  some 
small  sum  to  the  natives  for  the  right  of  grazing  your 
cattle  on  their  unoccupied  ground.  They  cultivate  a 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  161 

inere  fraction  of  the  land.  In  this  way  you  can  keep 
vastly  larger  herds  than  your  own  ground  could  carry. 
However,  it  is  time  to  be  turning  in  for  the  night.  To- 
morrow we  will  start  the  first  thing  after  breakfast  to 
inspect  Langston's  lund." 


162  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 


CHAPTER    X. 

THE  GLADE. 

WHEN  the  party  assembled  at  breakfast  the  next  morn- 
ing, Mr.  Atherton's  first  question  was: 

"Is  there  such  a  thing  as  a  boat  or  a  good-sized  canoe 
to  le  had,  Mr.  Mitford?  If  you  had  an  elephant  here  I 
might  manage,  but  as  I  suppose  you  do  not  keep  such 
an  animal  in  jrour  stud  I  own  that  I  should  greatly  pre- 
fer going  \>y  water  to  running  the  risk  of  breaking  a 
horse's  back  and  my  own  neck.  If  such  a  thing  cannot 
be  obtained  I  will  get  you,  if  you  will,  to  let  me  have  a 
native  as  guide,  and  I  will  walk,  taking  with  me  some 
small  stock  of  provisions.  I  can  sleep  at  this  hut  of 
Langston's,  for  I  say  frankly  that  I  should  not  care  about 
doing  the  distance  there  and  back  in  one  day." 

"I  have  a  boat,"  Mr.  Mitford  said,  smiling,  "and  you 
shall  have  a  couple  of  natives  to  paddle  you  up.     I  will 
give  orders   for   them   to  be  ready  directly   after  break- 
fast.     You  will   scarcely  be  there  as  soon  as  we  are,  but 
you  will   be   there  long  before  we  leave.     Of  course  we 
shall  spend  some  time  in  going  over  the  ground,  and  we 
shall  take  a  boy  with  us  with  a  luncheon  basket,  so  you 
will  find  refreshment  awaiting  you  when  you  get  there." 
"That  will   suit   me   admirably,"  Mr.   Atherton  said. 
"A  boating   excursion  up  an  unknown  river  is  just  the 
thing  I  like — that  is,  when  the  boat  is  a  reasonable  size. 
I  was  once  fool  enough  on  the  Amazon  to  allow  myself  to 
be  persuaded  that  a  canoe  at  most  two  feet  wide  would 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  163 

carry  me,  and  the  tortures  I  suffered  during  that  expedi- 
tion, wedged  in  the  bottom  of  that  canoe,  and  holding 
on  to  the  sides,  I  shall  never  forget.  The  rascally 
Indians  made  matters  worse  by  occasionally  giving  sly 
lurches  to  the  boat,  and  being  within  an  ace  of  capsizing 
her.  I  had  two  days  of  that  work  before  I  got  to  a  vil- 
lage where  I  could  obtain  a  craft  of  reasonable  size,  and 
I  should  think  I  must  have  lost  two  stone  in  weight  dur- 
ing the  time.  You  think  that  was  rather  an  advantage  I 
can  see,  Miss  Mitford, "  he  broke  off,  seeing  a  smile  upon 
the  girl's  face.  "Well,  yes,  I  could  spare  that  and  more, 
but  I  should  prefer  that  it  was  abstracted  by  other  meana 
than  that  of  agon}'  of  mind ;  beside,  these  improvements 
are  not  permanent." 

After  a  hearty  breakfast  the  party  prepared  for  their 
start.  Mrs.  Mitford  had  already  said  that  she  should 
not  accompany  them,  the  distance  being  longer  than  she 
cared  to  ride ;  and  four  horses  were  therefore  brought 
round.  Mr.  Atherton  was  first  seen  fairly  on  his  way  in 
a  good-sized  boat,  paddled  by  two  powerful  Maoris. 
Mr.  Mitford,  his  daughters,  and  "Wilfrid  then  mounted; 
the  lad  had  already  been  asked  if  he  was  accustomed  to 
riding. 

"Not  lately,"  he  replied,  "but  I  used  to  have  a  pony 
and  rode  a  good  deal  when  I  was  a  small  boy,  and  I  dare 
say  I  can  stick  on." 

Wilfrid  was  delighted  with  his  ride  through  the  forest. 
In  his  other  trips  ashore  their  way  had  led  through 
an  open  country  with  low  scrub  bush,  and  this  was  his 
first  experience  of  a  New  Zealand  forest.  Ferns  were 
growing  everywhere.  The  tree-ferns,  coated  with  scales, 
rose  from  thirty  to  forty  feet  in  the  air.  Hymenophylla  and 
polypodia,  in  extraordinary  variety,  covered  the  trunks 
of  the  forest  trees  with  luxuriant  growth.  Smaller  ferns 


164.  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

grew  between  the  branches  and  twigs,  and  a  thick  growth 
of  ferns  of  many  species  extended  everywhere  over  the 
ground. 

The  trees  were  for  the  most  part  pines  of  different 
varieties,  but  differing  so  widely  in  appearance  from 
those  Wilfrid  had  seen  in  England  that  had  not  Mr. 
Mitford  assured  him  that  they  were  really  pines  he  would 
never  have  guessed  they  belonged  to  that  family.  Mr. 
Mitford  gave  him  the  native  names  of  many  of  them. 
The  totara  matai  were  among  the  largest  and  most  beau- 
tiful. The  rinu  was  distinguished  by  its  hanging  leaves 
and  branches,  the  tanekaha  by  its  parsley-shaped  leaves. 
Among  them  towered  up  the  poplar-shaped  rewarewa 
and  the  hinau,  whose  fruit  Mr.  Mitford  said  was  the  fav- 
orite food  of  the  parrots. 

Among  the  great  forest  trees  were  several  belonging  to 
the  families  of  the  myrtles  and  laurels,  especially  the 
rata,  whose  trunk  often  measured  forty  feet  in  circum- 
ference, and  on  whose  crown  were  branches  of  scarlet 
blossoms.  But  it  was  to  the  ferns,  the  orchids,  and  the 
innumerable  creepers,  which  covered  the  ground  with  a 
natural  netting,  coiled  round  every  stem,  and  entwined 
themselves  among  the  topmost  branches,  that  the  forest 
owed  its  peculiar  features.  Outside  the  narrow  cleared 
track  along  which  they  were  riding  it  would  have  been 
impossible  for  a  man  to  make  his  way  unless  with  the 
assistance  of  knife  and  hatchet,  especially  as  some  of  the 
climbers  were  completely  covered  with  thorns. 

And  yet,  although  so  very  beautiful,  the  appearance  of 
the  forest  was  somber  and  melancholy.  A  great  propor- 
tion of  the  plants  of  New  Zealand  bear  no  flowers,  and 
except  high  tip  among  some  of  the  treetops  no  gay 
blossoms  or  color  of  any  kind  meet  the  eye  to  relieve  the 
monotony  of  the  verdure.  A  deep  silence  reigned. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  165 

Wilfrid  did  not  see  a  butterfly  during  his  ride,  or  hear 
the  song  or  even  the  chirp  of  a  single  bird.  It  was  a 
•wilderness  of  tangled  green,  unrelieved  by  life  or  color. 
Mr.  Mitford  could  give  him  the  names  of  only  a  few  of 
the  principal  trees;  and  seeing  the  infinite  variety  of  the 
foliage  around  him,  Wilfrid  no  longer  wondered  Mr. 
Atherton  should  have  made  so  long  a  journey  in  order  to 
study  the  botany  of  the  island,  which  is  unique,  for  al- 
though many  of  the  trees  and  shrubs  can  be  found  else- 
where, great  numbers  are  entirely  peculiar  to  the  island. 

"Are  there  any  snakes?"  Wilfrid  asked. 

"No;  you  can  wander  about  without  fear.  There  is 
only  one  poisonous  creature  in  New  Zealand,  and  that  is 
found  north  of  the  port  of  Tauranga,  forty  or  fifty  miles 
from  here.  They  say  it  exists  only  there  and  round 
Potaki,  near  Cook's  Strait.  It  is  a  small  black  spider, 
with  a  red  stripe  on  its  back.  The  natives  all  say  that 
its  bite  is  poisonous.  It  will  not,  they  say,  cause  death 
to  a  healthy  person,  though  it  will  make  him  very  ill ; 
but  there  are  instances  of  sickly  persons  being  killed  by 
it.  Anyhow,  the  natives  dread  it  vary  much.  However, 
as  the  beast  is  confined  to  two  small  localities,  you  need 
not  trouble  about  it.  The  thorns  are  the  only  enemies 
you  have  to  dread  as  you  make  your  way  through  the 
forest." 

"That  is  a  comfort,  anyhow,"  Wilfrid  said;  "it  would 
be  a  great  nuisance  to  have  to  be  always  on  the  watch 
against  snakes." 

The  road  they  were  traversing  had  been  cleared  of 
trees  from  one  settler's  holding  to  another,  and  they 
stopped  for  a  few  minutes  at  three  or  four  of  the  farm- 
houses. Some  of  these  showed  signs  of  comfort  and 
prosperity,  while  one  or  two  were  mere  log  cabins. 

"I  suppose  the  people  here  have  lately  arrived?"  Wil- 


166  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

frid  remarked    as  they    rode    by  one   of   these    without 
stopping. 

"They  have  been  here  upward  of  two  years,"  Mr.  Mit- 
ford  replied;  "but  the  place  is  not  likely  to  improve 
were  they  to  be  here  another  ten.  They  are  a  thriftless, 
lazy  lot,  content  to  raise  just  sufficient  for  their  actual 
wants  and  to  pay  for  whisky.  These  are  the  sort  of  peo- 
ple who  bring  discredit  on  the  colony  by  writing  home 
declaring  that  there  is  no  getting  on  here,  and  that  a 
settler's  life  is  worse  than  a  dog's. 

"People  who  come  out  with  an  idea  that  a  colony  is  an 
easy  place  to   get  a  living  in   are  completely  mistaken. 
For  a  man  to  succeed   he   must   work   harder   and   live 
harder  here  than  he  would   do  at  home.     He  is   up  with 
the  sun,  and  works  until   it   is  too  dark  to  work  longer. 
If  he  employs  men  he  must  himself  set  an   example  to 
them.     Men  will  work  here  for  a  master  who  works 'him- 
self, but  one  who    thinks   that  he  has  only   to  pay  his 
hands  and  can  spend  his   time  in  riding  about  the  coun- 
try making  visits,  or  in  sitting  quietly  by  his  fire,  will 
find  that  his  hands  will  soon  be  as  lazy  as  he  is  himself. 
Then  the  living  here   is  rougher  than   it  is  at  home  for 
one  in  the  same  condition  of  life.      The  fare  is  necessarily 
monotonous.     In  hot  weather  meat  will  not  keep  more 
than  a  day  or  two,  and  a  settler  cannot  afford  to  kill  a 
sheep  every  day ;  therefore  he  has  to  depend  either  upon 
bacon  or  tinned  meat,  and  I  can  tell   yon   that  a  continu- 
ance of  such  fare  palls  upon  the  appetite,  and  one's  meals 
cease  to  be  a  pleasure.     But  the  curse  of  the  country,  as 
of  all  our  colonies,  is  whisky.     I  do  think   the  monotony 
of  the  food  has  something  to  do  with  it,  and  that  if  men 
could  but  get  greater  variety   in   their  fare  they  would 
not  have  the  same  craving  for  drink.     It  is  the  ruin  of 
thousands.     A  young  fellow  who  lands  here  and  deter- 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  167 

mines  to  work  hard  and  to  abstain  from  liquors — I  do 
not  mean  totally  abstain,  though  if  he  has  any  inclina- 
tion at  all  toward  drink  the  only  safety  is  total  abstinence 
— is  sure  to  get  on  and"  make  his  way,  while  the  man 
who  gives  way  to  drink  is  equally  certain  to  remain  at 
the  bottom  of  the  tree.  Now  we  are  just  passing  the 
boundary  of  the  holding  you  have  come  to  see.  You  see 
that  piece  of  bark  slashed  off  the  trunk  of  that  tree? 
That  is  what  we  call  a  blaze,  and  marks  the  line  of  the 
boundary." 

After  riding  a  few  minutes  further  the  trees  opened, 
and  they  found  themselves  in  a  glade  sloping  down  to  the 
river.  A  few  acres  of  land  ha<l  been  plowed  up  and  put 
under  cultivation.  Close  by  stood  the  hut,  and  beyond  a 
grassy  sward,  broken  by  a  few  large  trees,  stretched  down 
to  the  river.  _ 

"That's  the  place/'  Mr.  Mitford  said,  "and  a  very 
pretty  one  it  is.  Poor  young  Langston  chose  his  farm 
specially  for  that  bit  of  scenery." 

"l£  is  pretty,"  Wilfrid  agreed;  "I  am  sure  my  father 
and  mother  will  be  delighted  with  it.  As  you  said,  it  is 
just  like  a  piece  of  park  land  at  home." 

The  hut  was  strongly  built  of  logs.  It  was  about 
thirty  feet  long  by  twenty  wide,  and  was  divided  into 
two  rooms;  the  one  furnished  as  a  kitchen  and  living- 
room,  the  other  opening  from  it  as  a  bedroom. 

"There  is  not  much  furniture  in  it,"  Mr.  Mitford  said; 
"but  what  there  is  is  strong  and  serviceable,  and  is  a 
good  deal  better  than  the  generality  of  things  you  will 
find  in  a  new  settler's  hut.  He  was  getting  the  things 
in  gradually  as  he  could  afford  them,  so  as  to  have  it 
really  comfortably  furnished  by  the  time  she  came  out  to 
join  him.  Of  course  the  place  will  not  be  large  enough 
for  your  party,  but  you  can  easily  add  to  it ;  and  at  any 


168  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

rate  it  is  vastly  better  coming  to  a  shanty  like  this  than 
arriving  upon  virgin  ground  and  having  everything  to 
do." 

"I  think  it  is  capital,"  Wilfrid  said. 

"Now  we  will  take  a  ride  over  the  ground,  and  I  will 
show  you  what  that. is  like.  Of  course  it  will  give  you 
more  trouble  clearing  away  the  forest  than  it  would  do  if 
you  settled  upon  land  without  trees  upon  it.  But  forest 
land  is  generally  the  best  when  it  is  cleared ;  and  I  think 
that  to  people  like  your  father  and  mother  land  like  this 
is  much  preferable,  as  in  making  the  clearings  clumps 
and  belts  of  trees  can  be  left,  giving  a  homelike  appear- 
ance to  the  place.  Of  course  upon  bare  land  you  can 
plant  trees,  but  it  is  a  long  time  before  these  grow  to 
sufficient  size  to  give  a  character  to  a  homestead.  Be- 
side, as  I  told  you,  there  are  already  several  other 
natural  clearings  upon  the  ground,  enough  to  afford  grass 
for  quite  as  many  animals  as  you  will  probably  start 
with." 

After  an  hour's  ride  over  the  holding  and  the  lands 
adjoining  it,  which  Mr.  Mitford  advised  should  be  also 
taken  up,  they  returned  to  the  hut.  A  shout  greeted 
them  as  they  arrived,  and  they  saw  Mr.  Atherton  walk- 
ing up  from  the  river  toward  the  hut. 

"A  charming  site  for  a  mansion,"  he  said  as  they 
rode  up.  "Mr.  Mitford,  I  think  I  shall  make  you  a 
bid  for  this  on  my  own  account,  and  so  cut  out  my  young 
friend  Wilfrid." 

"I  am  afraid  you  are  too  late,"  Mr.  Mitford  laughed. 
"I  have  already  agreed  to  give  him  the  option  of  it, 
keeping  it  open  until  we  can  receive  a  reply  from  hia 
father. ' ' 

"I  call  that  too  bad,"  Mr.  Atherton  grumbled. 
"However,  I  suppose  I  must  move  on  further.  But 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  ]  60 

really  this  seems  a  charming  place,  and  I  am  sure  Mrs. 
Renshaw  will  be  delighted  with  it.  Why,  there  must  be 
thirty  acres  of  natural  clearing  here?" 

"About  that,"  Mr.  Mitford  replied;  "and  there  are 
two  or  three  other  patches  which  amount  to  about  as 
much  more.  The  other  hundred  and  forty  are  bush  and 
forest.  The  next  lot  has  also  some  patches  of  open  land, 
so  that  altogether  out  of  the  four  hundred  acres  there 
must  be  about  a  hundred  clear  of  bush." 

"And  how  about  the  next  lot,  Mr.  Mitford?" 

"I  fancy  that  there  is  about  the  same  proportion  of 
open  laud.  I  have  only  once  been  up  the  river  higher 
than  this,  but  if  I  remember  right  there  is  a  sort  of  low 
bluff  rising  forty  or  fifty  feet  above  the  river  which 
would  form  a  capital  site  for  a  hui 

"I  will  set  about  the  work  of  exploration  this  after- 
noon,"  Mr.  Atherton  said,  "and  if  the  next  lot  is  any- 
thing like  this  I  shall  be  very  well  contented  to  settle 
down  upon  it  for  a  bit.  I  have  always  had  a  fancy  for  a 
sort  of  Robinson  Crusoe  life,  and  I  think  I  can  get  it 
here,  tempered  by  the  change  of  an  occasional  visit  to 
our  friends  when  I  get  tired  of  my  own  company." 

The  men  had  by  this  time  brought  up  the  basket  of 
provisions,  and  the  two  girls  were  spreading  a  cloth  on 
the  grass  in  the  shade  of  a  tree  at  a  short  distance  from 
the  hut,  for  all  agreed  that  they  would  rather  take  their 
lunch  there  than  in  the  abode  so  lately  tenanted  by  young 
Langston.  After  the  meal  was  over  the  party  mounted 
their  horses  and  rode  back.  One  of  the  natives  -who  had, 
come  up  from  the  boat  remained  with  Mr.  Atherton,  the 
others  started  back  in  the  boat,  as  Mr.  Atherton  declared 
himself  to  be  perfectly  capable  of  making  the  journey  on 
foot  when  he  had  finished  his  explorations.  He  returned 
two  days  later,  and  said  he  was  quite  satisfied  with  the 
proposed  site  for  his  hut  and  with  the  ground  and  forest. 


270  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"I  regard  myself  as  only  a  temporary  inhabitant,"  he 
said,  "and  shall  be  "well  content  if,  when  I  am  ready  for 
another  move,  I  can  get  as  much  for  the  ground  as  I  gave 
for  it.  In  that  way  I  shall  have  lived  rent  free  and  shall 
have  had  my  enjoyment  for  nothing,  and,  I  have  no 
doubt,  a  pleasant  time  to  look  back  upon." 

"Do  you  never  mean  to  settle  down,  Mr. •  Atherton?" 
Mrs.  Mitford  asked. 

"In  the  dim  future  I  may  do  so,"  he  replied.  "I  have 
been  wandering  ever  since  I  left  college,  some  fifteen 
years  ago.  I  return  to  London  periodically,  spend  a  few 
•weeks  and  occasionally  a  few  months  there,  enjoy  the 
comforts  of  good  living  and  club  life  for  a  bit;  then  the 
wandering  fit  seizes  me  and  I  am  off  again.  Nature  alto- 
gether made  a  mistake  in  my  case.  I  ought  to  have 
been  a  thin,  wiry  sort  of  man,  and  in  that  case  I  have  no 
doubt  I  should  have  distinguished  myself  as  an  African 
explorer  or  something  of  that  sort.  Unfortunately  she 
placed  my  restless  spirit  in  an  alinost  immovable  frame 
of  flesh,  and  the  consequence  is  the  circle  of  my  wander* 
ing  is  to  a  certain  extent  limited." 

"You  make  yourself  out  to  be  much  stouter  than  you 
are,  Mr.  Atherton.  Of  course  you  are  stout,  but  not 
altogether  out  of  proportion  to  your  height  and  width  of 
shoulders.  I  think  you  put  it  on  a  good  deal  as  an  ex- 
cuse for  laziness." 

Mr.  Atherton  laughed.  "Perhaps  you  are  right,  Mrs. 
Mitford,  though  my  weight  is  really  a  great  drawback  to 
my  carrying  out  my  views  in  regard  to  travel.  You  see, 
I  am  practically  debarred  from  traveling  in  countries 
where  the  only  means  of  locomotion  is  riding  on  horses. 
I  could  not  find  animals  in  any  foreign  country  that 
would  carry  me  for  any  distance.  I  might  in  England, 
I  grant,  find  a  weight-carrying  cob  capable  of  conveying 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  171 

twenty  stone  along  a  good  road,  but  I  might  search  all 
Asia  in  vain  for  such  a  horse,  while  as  for  Africa  it  would 
take  a  dozen  natives  to  carry  me  in  a  hammock.  No,  I 
suppose  I  shall  go  on  wandering  pretty  nearly  to  the  end 
of  the  chapter,  and  shall  then  settle  down  in  quiet  lodg- 
ings somewhere  in  the  region  of  Pall  Mall." 

Upon  the  day  after  his  return  from  the  inspection  of 
the  farm  Wilfrid  wrote  home  to  his  father  describing  the 
location,  and  saying  tha't  he  thought  it  was  the  very 
thing  to  suit  them.  It  would  be  a  fortnight  before  an 
answer  could  be  received,  and  during  that  time  he  set  to 
work  at  Mr.  Mitford's  place  to  acquire  as  much  knowl- 
edge as  possible  of  the  methods  of  farming  in  the  colony. 
The  answer  arrived  in  due  course,  and  with  it  came  the 
two  Grimstones.  Wilfrid  had  suggested  in  his  letter 
that  if  his  father  decided  to  take  the  farm  the  two  men 
should  be  sent  up  at  once  to  assist  in  adding  to  the  hut 
and  in  preparing  for  their  coming,  and  that  they  should 
follow  a  fortnight  later.  Mrs.  Mitford  also  wrote,  offer- 
ing them  a  warm  invitation  to  stay  for  a  time  with  her 
until  their  own  place  should  be  ready  for  their  occupa- 
tion^ 

Mr.  Mitford  had  an  inventory  of  the  furniture  of  the 
hut,  and  this  was  also  sent,  in  order  that  such  further 
furniture  as  was  needed  might  be  purchased  at  Welling- 
ton. As  soon  as  the  letter  was  received,  inclosing,  as  it 
did,  a  check  for  a  hundred  pounds,  Wilfrid  went  over 
with  the  two  Grimstones  and  took  possession.  Mr."  Mit- 
ford, who  was  the  magistrate  and  land  commissioner  for 
the  district,  drew  up  the.  papers  of  application  for  the 
plot  of  two  hundred  acres  adjoining  the  farm,  and  sent  it 
to  Wellington  for  Mr.  Eenshaw's  signature,  and  said  that 
in  the  meantime  Wilfrid  could  consider  the  land  as  be- 
longing to  them,  as  it  would  be  theirs  as  soon  as  the 


173  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

necessary  formalities  were  completed  and  the  money 
paid. 

When  Wilfrid  started,  two  natives,  whom  Mr.  Mitford 
had  hired  for  him,  accompanied  him,  and  he  also  lent 
him  the  services  of  one  of  his  own  men,  who  was  a  handy 
carpenter.  The  Grimstones  were  delighted  with  the 
site  of  their  new  home. 

"Why,  it  is  like  a  bit  of  England,  Master  Wilfrid! 
That  might  very  well  be  the  Thames  therr,  and  this  some 
gentleman's  place  near  Reading;  only  the  trees  are 
different.  When  we  get  up  a  nice  house  here,  with  a 
garden  round  it,  it  will  be  like  home  again." 

During  the  voyage  the  Renshaws  had  amused  them- 
selves by  drawing  a  plan  of  their  proposed  house,  and 
although  this  had  to  be  somewhat  modified  by  the  exist- 
ence of  the  hut,  Wilfrid  determined  to  adhere  to  it  as 
much  as  possible.  The  present  kitchen  should  be  the 
kitchen  of  the  new  house,  and  the  room  leading  from  it 
should  be  allotted  to  the  Grimstones.  Adjoining  the 
kitchen  he  marked  out  the  plan  of  the  house.  It  was  to 
consist  of  a  sitting-room  twenty  feet  square;  beyond  this 
•was  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Renshaw's  bedroom;  while  behind  it 
were  two  rooms,  each  ten  feet  square,  for  himself  and 
Marion.  The  roof  was  to  project  four  feet  in  front  of  the 
sitting-r6om,  so  as  to  form  a  veranda  there. 

A  boatload  of  supplies  was  sent  up  from  Mr.  Mitford's 
stores.  These  consisted  of  flour,  sugar,  tea,  molasses, 
and  bacon,  together  with  half  a  sheep.  It  was  arranged 
that  while  the  building  was  going  on  Wilfrid  and  the  two 
Grimstones  should  occupy  the  bedroom,  and  that  the 
natives  should  sleep  in  'the  kitchen.  The  Grimstones 
had  brought  with  them  the  bedding  and  blankets  with 
which  they  had  provided  themselves  on  board  ship,  while 
Wilfrid  took  possession  of  the  bed  formerly  occupied  by 


WILFRID  AND  THE  GRIMSTONES  FIND  IT  HARD  WORK.— Page  173 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  173 

the  young  settler.  Mr.  Mitford  himself  came  over  next 
morning  and  gave  general  instructions  as  to  the  best  way 
of  setting  about  the  building  of  the  house.  He  had 
already  advised  that  it  should  be  of  the  class  known  as 
log  huts. 

"They  are  much  cooler,"  he  said,  "in  the  heat  of  sum- 
mer than  frame  huts,  and  have  the  advantage  that  in  the 
very  improbable  event  of  troubles  with  the  natives  they 
are  much  more  defensible.  If  you  like,  afterward,  you 
can  easily  face  them  outside  and  in  with  match-board 
and  make  them  as  snug  as  you  like;  but  to  begin  with,  I 
should  certainly  say  build  with  logs.  My  boy  will  tell 
you  which  trees  you  had  better  cut  down  for  the  work. 
It  will  take  you  a  week  to  fell,  lop,  and  roughly  square 
them,  and  this  day  week  I  will  send  over  a  team  of  bul- 
locks with  a  native  to  drag  them  up  to  the  spot." 

The  work  was  begun  at  once.  Half  a  dozen  axes,  some 
adzes,  and  other  tools  had  been  brought  up  with  the 
supplies  from  the  stores,  and  the  work  of  felling  com- 
menced. 

Wilfrid  would  not  have  any  trees  touched  near  the  hut. 

"There  are  just  enough  trees  about  here,"  he  said, 
"and  it  would  be  an  awful  pity  to  cut  them  down  merely 
to  save  a  little  labor  in  hauling.  It  will  not  make  any 
great  difference  whether  we  have  the  team  for  a  week  or 
a  fortnight. "  . 

Wilfrid  and  the  two  young  Englishmen  found  chop- 
ping very  hard  work  at  first,  and  were  perfectly  as- 
tounded at  the  rapidity  with  which  the  Maoris  brought 
the  trees  down,  each  of  them  felling  some  eight  or  ten 
before  the  new  hands  had  managed  to  bring  one  to  the 
ground. 

"I  would  not  have  believed  it  if  I  had  not  seen  it." 
Bob,  the  elder  of  the  two  brothers,  exclaimed  as  he  stood 


17i  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

breathless  with  the  perspiration  streaming  from  his  fore- 
head, "that  these  black  chaps  could  have  beaten  English- 
men like  that !  Half  a  dozen  strokes  and  down  topples 
the  tree,  while  I  goes  chop,  chop,  chop,  and  don't  seem 
to  get  any  nearer  to  it. ' ' 

"It  will  come  in  time,"  Wilfrid  said.  "I  suppose 
there  is  a  knack  in  it,  like  everything  else.  It  looks 
easy  enough,  but  it  is  not  easy  if  you  don't  know  how  to 
do  it.  It  is  like  rowing ;  it  looks  the  easiest  thing  in 
the  world  until  you  try,  and  then  you  find  that  it  is  not 
easy  at  all. ' ' 

When  work  was  done  for  the  day  Wilfrid  and  the 
Grimstones  could  scarcely  walk  back  to  the  hut.  Their 
backs  felt  as  if  they  were  broken,  their  arms  and  shoul- 
ders ached  intolerably,  their  hands  smarted  as  if  on 
fire;  while  the  Maoris,  who  had  each  achieved  ten  times 
the  result,  were  as  brisk  and  fresh  as  they  were  at  start- 
ing. One  of  them  had  left  work  an  hour  before  the 
others,  and  by  the  time  they  reached  the  hut  the  flat 
cakes  of  flour  and  water  known  as  dampers  had  been 
cooked,  and  a  large  piece  of  mutton  was  frizzling  over 
the  fire.  Wilfrid  and  his  companions  were  almost  too 
tired  to  eat,  but  they  enjoyed  the  tea,  although  they 
missed  the  milk  to  which  they  were  accustomed.  They 
were  astonished  at  the  Maoris'  appetite,  the  three  natives 
devouring  an  amount  of  meat  which  would  have  fasted 
the  others  for  a  week. 

"No  wonder  they  work  well  when  they  can  put  away 
Buch  a  lot  of  food  as  that,"  Bob  Grimstone  said,  after 
watching  them  for  some  time  in  silent  astonishment. 
"Bill  and  me  was  always  considered  as  being  pretty  good 
feeders,  but  one  of  these  chaps  would  eat  twice  as  much 
as  the  two  of  us.  I  should  say,  Mr.  Wilfrid,  that  in 
future  your  best  plan  will  be  to  let  these  chaps  board 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  175 

themselves.  Why,  it  would  be  dear  to  have  them  with- 
out pay  if  you  had  to  feed  them ! ' ' 

"Mutton  is  cheap  out  here,"  Wilfrid  said.  "You  can 
get  five  or  six  pounds  for  the  price  which  one  would  cost 
you  at  home ;  but  still,  I  do  not  suppose  they  give  them  as 
much  meat  as  they  can  eat  every  day.  I  must  ask  Mr. 
Mitford  about  it. ' ' 

He  afterward  learned  that  the  natives  received  rations 
of  flour  and  molasses  and  tobacco,  and  that  only  occa- 
sionally salt  pork  or  fresh  meat  were  issued  to  them. 
But  Mr.  Mitford  advised  that  Wilfrid  should,  as  long  as 
they  were  at  this  work,  let  them  feed  with  the  men. 

"You  will  get  a  good  deal  more  out  of  them  if  they 
are  well  fed  and  in  good  humor.  When  your  people 
arrive  the  natives  will  of  course  have  a  shanty  of  their 
own  at  some  distance  from  your  house,  and  then  you  will 
put  things  on  regular  footing  and  serve  out  their  rations 
to  them  weekly.  I  will  give  you  the  scale,  usually 
adopted  in  the  colony." 

The  second  day  Wilfrid  and  the  Grimstones  were  so 
stiff  that  they  could  at  first  scarcely  raise  their  axes. 
This  gradually  wore  off,  and  at  the  end  of  three  or  four 
da3rs  they  found  that  they  could  get  through  a  far  greater 
amount  than  at  first  with  much  less  fatigue  to  themselves; 
but  even  on  the  last  day  of  the  week  they  could  do  little 
more  than  a  third  of  the  amount  performed  by  the 
natives.  By  this  time  an  ample  supply  of  trees  had  been 
felled.  The  trunks  had  been  cut  into  suitable  lengths 
and  roughly  squared.  The  bullocks  arrived  from  Mr. 
Mitford 's,  and  as  soon  as  the  first  logs  were  brought  up 
to  the  house  the  work  of  building  was  commenced.  The 
Maori  carpenter  now  took  the  lead,  and  under  his  in- 
structions the  walls  of  the  house  rose  rapidly.  The  logs 
were  mortised  into  each  other  at  the  corners ;  openings 


176  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

were  left  for  the  doors  and  windows.  These  were  ob» 
tained  from  Mr.  Mitford's  store,  as  they  were  constantly 
required  by  settlers. 

At  a  distance  of  four  feet  in  front  of  the  house  holes- 
were  dug  and  poles  erected,  and  to  these  the  framework  of 
the  roof  was  extended.  This  point  was  reached  ten  days 
after  the  commencement  of  the  building,  and  the  same 
evening  a  native  arrived  from  Mr.  Mitford's  with  a  mes- 
sage that  the  party  from  Wellington  had  arrived  there 
and  would  come  over  the  next  day.  He  also  brought  a 
letter  to  Wilfrid  from  the  Aliens,  in  answer  to  one  he 
had  written  them  soon  after  his  arrival,  saying  that  they 
were  so  pleased  with  his  description  of  the  district  they 
should  come  down  at  once,  and  if  it  turned  out  as  he 
described  it,  take  up  a  tract  of  land  in  his  neighbor- 
hood. 

While  Wilfrid  had  been  at  work  he  had  seen  Mr. 
Atherton  several  times,  as  that  gentleman  had,  upon  the 
very  day  after  his  first  trip  up  the  river,  filled  up  the 
necessary  papers,  hired  half  a  dozen  natives,  and  started 
up  the  river  in  a  boat  freighted  with  stores  to  his  new 
location.  Wilfrid  had  not  had  time  to  go  over  to  see 
him  there,  but  he  had  several  times  sauntered  over  from 
his  place,  which  was  half  a  mile  distant,  after  the  day's 
work  was  over.  He  had  got  up  his  hut  before  Wilfrid 
fairly  got  to  work. 

It  was,  he  said,  a  very  modest  shanty  with  but  one 
room,  which  would  serve  for  all  purposes;  his  cooking 
being  done  by  a  native,  for  whom  he  had  erected  a  small 
shelter  twenty  yards  away  from  his  own. 

"I  have  not  quite  shaken  down  yet,"  he  said,  "and  do 
not  press  you  to  come  over  to  see  me  until  I  have  got 
everything  into  order.  I  am  sure  you  feel  thankful  to 
me  that  I  do  not  expect  you  to  be  tramping  over  to  see 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER  177 

me  after  your  long  day's  work  here.  By  the  time  your 
people  arrive  I  shall  have  everything  in  order.  I  am  ex- 
pecting the  things  I  have  written  for  and  my  own  heavy 
baggage  in  a  few  days  from  Wellington." 

Glad  as  he  was  to  hear  that  his  father  and  mother  had 
arrived,  Wilfrid  would  have  preferred  that  their  coming 
should  have  been  delayed  until  the  house  was  finished 
and  ready  for  them,  and  after  his  first  greeting  at  the 
waterside  he  said:  "You  must  not  be  disappointed, 
mother,  at  what  you  will  see.  Now  everything  is  in 
confusion,  and  the  ground  is  covered  with  logs  and 
chips.  It  looked  much  prettier,  I  can  assure  you,  when 
I  first  saw  it,  and  it  will  do  so  again  when  we  have  fin- 
ished and  cleared  up." 

"We  will  make  all  allowances,  Wilfrid,"  his  mother 
replied  as  he  helped  her  from  the  boat;  "but  I  do  not 
see  that  any  allowance  is  necessary.  This  is  indeed  a 
sweetly  pretty  spot,  and  looks  as  you  said  like  a  park  at 
home.  If  the  trees  had  been  planted  with  a  special  view 
to  effect  they  could  not  have  been  better  placed." 

"You  have  done  excellently,  Wilfrid,"  his  father  said, 
putting"  his  hand  on  his  shoulder.  "Mr.  Mitford  here 
has  been  telling  me  how  energetically  you  have  been 
working,  and  I  see  that  the  house  has  made  wonderful 
progress." 

Marion  had,  after  the  first  greeting,  leaped  lightly 
from  the  boat  and  run  up  to  the  house,  toward  whi3h  the 
others  proceeded  at  a  more  leisurely  pace,  stopping  often 
and  looking  round  at  the  pleasant  prospect.  Marion  was 
full  of  questions  to  Wilfrid  when  they  arrived.  Why 
were  the  walls  made  so  thick?  How  were  they  going  to 
stop  up  the  crevices  between  the  logs?  Where  were  the 
windows  and  doors  coming  from?  What  was  the  roof 
going  to  be  made  of?  Was  there  going  to  be  a  floor,  or 


178  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

was  the  ground  inside  going  to  be  raised  to'  the  level  of 
the  door-sill?  When  did  he  expect  to  get  it  finished, 
and  when  would  they  be  ready  to  come  in?  Couldn't 
they  get  some  creepers  to  run  up  and  hide  these  ugly 
logs?  "Was  it  to  be  painted  or  to  remain  as  it  was? 

Wilfrid  answered  all  these  questions  as  well  as  he  was 
able.  There  was  to  be  a  floor  over  all  the  new  portion  of 
the  building;  Mr.  Mitford  was  getting  up  the  requisite 
number  of  planks  from  a  sawmill  at  the  next  settlement. 
The  crevices  were  to  be  stopped  with  moss.  It  would  be 
for  their  father  to  decide  whether  the  logs  should  be 
covered  with  match-boarding  inside  or  out,  or  whether 
they  should  be  left  as  they  were  at  present.  It  would 
probably  take  another  fortnight  to  finish  the  roof,  and  at 
least  a  week  beyond  that  before  the  place  would  be  fit  for 
them  to  move  in. 

"You  see,  Marion,  I  have  built  it  very  much  on  the 
plan  we  decided  upon  on  board  the  ship,  only  I  was 
obliged  to  make  a  change  in  the  position  of  the  kitchen 
and  men's  room.  The  two  Grimstones  are  going  to  set  to 
work  to-morrow  to  dig  up  a  portion  of  the  plowed  land 
behind  the  house  and  sow  vegetable  seeds.  Things 
grow  very  fast  here,  and  we  shall  soon  get  a  kitchen- 
garden.  As  to  flowers,  we  shall  leave  that  to  be  decided 
when  you  come  here.  " 

"I  wish  I  could  come  over  and  live  here  at  once  and 
help,"  Marion  said. 

"There  is  nothing  you  can  help  in  at  present,  Marion, 
and  it  will  be  much  more  useful  for  you  to  spend  a  month 
in  learning  things  at  Mr.  Mitford 's.  You  undertook  to 
do  the  cooking;  and  I  am  sure  that  will  be  quite  neces- 
sary, for  father  and  mother  could  never  eat  the  food  our 
Maori  cook  turns  out.  And  then  you  have  got  to  learn 
to  make  butter  and  cheese  and  to  cure  bacon.  That  is  a 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  179 

most  important  point,  for  we  must  certainly  keep  pigs 
and  cure  our  own  as  Mr.  Mitford  does,  for  the  stuff  they 
have  got  at  most  of  the  places  we  touched  at  was  almost 
uneatable.  So,  you  see,  there  is  plenty  to  occupy  your 
time  until  you  move  in  here,  and  our  comfort  will  depend 
a  vast  deal  upon  the  pains  you  take  to  learn  to  do  things 
properly. ' ' 

"  What  are  you  going  to  roof  it  with,  Wilfrid?"  Mr. 
Renshaw  asked. 

"We  are  going  to  use  these  poles,  father.  They  will 
be  split  in  two  and  nailed  with  the  flat  side  down  on  the 
rafters,  and  the  shingles  are  going  to  be  nailed  on  them. 
That  will  give  a  good  solid  roof  that  will  keep  out  a  good 
deal  of  heat.  Afterward  if  we  like  we  can  put  beams 
across  the  room  from  wall  to  wall  and  plank  them,  and 
turn  the  space  above  into  a  storeroom.  Of  course  that 
will  make  the  house  cooler  and  the  rooms  more  comforta- 
ble, but  as  it  was  not  absolutely  necessary  I  thought  it 
might  be  left  for  awhile." 

"I  think,  "Wilfrid,  I  should  like  to  have  the  rooms 
done  with  boards  inside  at  once.  The  outside  and  the 
ceiling  you  speak  of  can  very  well  wait,  but  it  will  be 
impossible  to  get  the  rooms  to  look  at  all  neat  and  tidy 
with  these  rough  logs  for  walls." 

"It  certainly  will  be  more  comfortable,"  Wilfrid 
agreed.  "Mr.  Mitford  will  get  the  match-boards  for 
you.  I  will  measure  up  the  walls  this  evening  and  let 
you  know  how  much  will  be  required.  And  now  shall 
we  take  a  walk  round  the  place?" 

The  whole  party  spent  a  couple  of  hours  in  going  over 
the  property,  with  which  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Renshaw  were 
greatly  pleased.  Luncheon  had  been  brought  up  in  the 
boat,  and  by  the  time  they  returned  from  their  walk  Mrs. 
Mitford  and  her  daughters,  who  had  not  accompanied 


130  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

them,  had  lunch  ready  and  spread  out  on  the  grass. 
The  meal  was  a  merry  one.  Mr.  Eenshaw  was  in  high 
epirits  at  finding  things  so  much  more  homelike  and 
comfortable  than  he  had  expected.  His  wife  was  not 
only  pleased  for  herself,  but  still  more  so  at  seeing  that 
her  husband  evinced  a  willingness  to  look  at  matters  in 
the  best  light,  and  to  enter  upon  the  life  before  him. 
without  regret  over  the  past. 

"What  are  you  going  to  call  the  place,  Mr.  Renshaw?" 
Mrs.  Mitford  asked.  "That  is  always  an  important 
point. ' ' 

"I  have  not  thought  about  it,"  Mr.  Eenshaw  replied. 
"What  do  you  think?" 

"Oh,  there  are  lots  of  suitable  names,"  she  replied, 
looking  round.  "We  might  call  it  Riverside  or  The 
Park  or  The  Glade. " 

"I  think  The  Glade  would  be  verj'  pretty,"  Marion 
said.  "Riverside  would  suit  many  places." 

"I  like  The  Glade  too,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said.  "Have 
you  thought  of  anything,  Wilfrid?" 

"No,  mother,  I  have  never  given  it  a  thought.  I 
think  The  Glade  will  do  nicely."  And  so  it  was  settled, 
and  success  to  The  Glade  was  thereupon  formally  drunk 
in  cups  of  tea. 

A  month  later  the  Renshaws  took  possession  of  their 
new  abode.  It  looked  very  neat  with  its  veranda  in  front 
of  the  central  portion,  and  the  creepers  which  Wilfrid 
had  planted  against  the  walls  on  the  day  after  their  visit 
promised  speedib'  to  cover  the  logs  of  which  the  house 
was  built.  Inside  the  flooring  had  been  planed,  stained 
a  deep  brown  and  varnished,  while  the  match-boarding 
which  covered  the  walls  was  stained  a  light  color  and 
also  varnished.  The  furniture,  which  had  arrived  ftie 
day  before  from  Hawke's  Bay,  was  somewhat  scanty,  but 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  ,       181 

Wilfrid  and  Marion,  who  had  come  over  for  the  purpose, 
had  made  the  most  of  it.  A  square  of  carpet  and  some 
rugs  gave  a  cozy  appearance  to  the  floor,  white  curtains 
hung  before  the  windows  and  a  few  favorite  pictures 
and  engravings,  which  they  had  brought  with  them  from 
home,  broke  the  baroness  of  the  walls.  Altogether  it 
was  a  very  pretty  and  snug  little  abode  of  which  Mr.  and 
Mra.  Renshaw  took  possession. 


182  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 


CHAPTER    XL 

THK  HAU-HAUS. 

THE  next  three  months  made  a  great  change  in  the 
appearance  of  The  Glade.  Three  or  four  plots  of  gay 
flowers  cut  in  the  grass  between  the  house  and  the  river 
gave  a  brightness  to  its  appearance.  The  house  was  now 
covered  as  far  as  the  roof  with  greenery,  and  might  well 
have  been  mistaken  for  a  rustic  bungalow  standing  in 
pretty  grounds  on  the  banks  of  the  Thames.  Behind,  a 
large  kitchen-garden  was  in  full  bearing.  It  was  sur- 
rounded by  wire  network  to  keep  out  the  chickens, 
ducks,  and  geese,  which  wandered  about  and  picked  up 
a  living  as  they  chose,  returning  at  night  to  the  long, 
low  shed  erected  for  them  at  some  distance  from  the 
house,  receiving  a  plentiful  meal  on  their  arrival  to  pre- 
vent them  from  lapsing  into  an  altogether  wild  condition. 

Forty  acres  of  land  had  been  replowed  and  sown,  and 
the  crops  had  already  made  considerable  progress.  In 
the  more  distant  clearings  a  dozen  horses,  twenty  oir 
thirty  cows,  and  a  small  flock  of  a  hundred  sheep  grazed, 
while  some  distance  up  the  glade  in  which  the  house 
stood  was  ^he  pigsty,  whose  occupants  were  fed  with 
refuse  from  the  garden,  picking  up,  however,  the  larger 
portion  of  their  living  by  rooting  in  the  woods. 

Long  before  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Renshaw  moved  into  the 
house,  Wilfrid,  whose  labors  were  now  less  severe,  had 
paid  his  first  visit  to  Mr.  Atherton's  hut.  He  was  at 
once  astonished  and  delighted  with  it.  It  contained 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  183 

indeed  but  one  room,  sixteen  feet  square,  but  that  room 
had  been  made  one  of  the  most  comfortable  dens  possi- 
ble. There  was  no  flooring,  but  the  ground  had  been 
beaten  until  it  was  as  hard  as  baked  clay,  and  was  almost 
covered  with  rugs  and  sheepskins ;  a  sort  of  divan  ran 
round  three  sides  of  it,  and  this  was  also  cushioned  with 
skins.  The  log  walls  were  covered  with  cowhides  cured 
with  the  hair  on,  and  from  hooks  and  brackets  hung 
rifles,  fishing  rods,  and  other  articles,  while  horns  and 
other  trophies  of  the  chase  were  fixed  to  the  walls. 

While  the  Renshaws  had  contented  themselves  with 
Btoves,  Mr.  Atherton  had  gone  to  the  expense  and  trouble 
of  having  a  great  open  fireplace,  with  a  brick  chimney 
outside  the  wall.  Here,  even  on  the  hottest  day,  two  or 
three  logs  burned  upon  old-fashioned  iron  dogs.  On  the 
wall  above  was  a  sort  of  trophy  of  oriental  weapons. 
Two  very  large  and  comfortable  easy-chairs  stood  by  the 
side  of  the  hearth,  and  in  the  center  of  the  room  stood 
an  old  oak  table,  richly  carved  and  black  with  age.  A 
bookcase  of  similar  age  and  make,  with  its  shelves  well 
filled  with  standard  works,  stood  against  the  one  wall 
unoccupied  by  the  divan. 

"Wilfrid  stood  still  with  astonishment  as  he  looked  in 
at  the  door,  which  Mr.  Atherton  had  himself  opened  in 
response  to  his  knock. 

"Come  in,  "Wilfrid.  As  I  told  you  yesterday  evening 
I  have  just  got  things  a  little  straight  and  comfortable." 

"I  should  think  you  had  got  them  comfortable,"  "Wil- 
frid said.  "I  should  not  have  thought  that  a  log  cabin 
could  have  been  made  as  pretty  as  this.  Why,  where 
did  you  get  all  the  things?  Surely  you  can  never  have 
brought  them  all  with  you?" 

"No,  indeed,"  Mr.  Atherton  laughed;  "the  greatest 
portion  of  them  are  products  of  the  country.  There  was 


184  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

no  difficulty  in  purchasing  the  skins,  the  arms,  and  those 
Bets  of  horns  and  trophies.  Books  and  a  few  other  things 
I  brought  \vith  me.  I  have  a  theory  that  people  very 
often  make  themselves  uncomfortable  merely  to  effect  the 
saving  of  a  pound  or  two.  Now,  I  rather  like  making 
myself  snug,  and  the  carriage  of  all  those  things  did  not 
add  above  five  pounds  to  my  expenses." 

"But  surely  that  table  and  bookcase  were  never  made 
in  New  Zealand?" 

"Certainly  not,  Wilfrid.  At  the  time  they  were  made 
the  natives  of  this  country  hunted  the  Moa  in  happy 
ignorance  of  the  existence  of  a  white  race.  No,  I  regard 
my  getting  possession  of  those  things  as  a  special  stroke 
of  good  luck.  I  was  wandering  in  the  streets  of  Well- 
ington on  the  very  day  after  my  arrival,  when  I  saw 
them  in  a  shop.  No  doubt  they  had  been  brought  out 
by  some  well-to-do  emigrant,  who  clung  to  them  in  re- 
membrance of  his  home  in  the  old  country.  Probably 
at  his  death  his  place  came  into  the  hands  of  some  Goths, 
who  preferred  a  clean  deal  table  to  what  he  considered 
old-fashioned  things.  Anyhow,  there  they  were  in  the 
shop,  and  I  bought  them  at  once;  as  also  those  arm- 
chairs, which  are  as  comfortable  as  anything  of  the  kind 
I  have  ever  tried.  By  the  way,  are  you  a  good  shot  with 
the  rifle,  Wilfrid?" 

"No,  sir;  I  never  fired  a  rifle  in  my  life  before  I  left 
England,  nor  a  shotgun  either." 

"Then  I  think  you  would  do  well  to  practice,  lad;  and 
those  two  men  of  yours  should  practice  too.  You  never 
can  say  what  may  come  of  these  native  disturbances; 
the  rumors  of  the  progress  of  this  new  religion  among 
them  are  not  encouraging.  It  is  quite  true  that  the 
natives  on  this  side  of  the  island  have  hitherto  been  per- 
fectly peaceable,  but  if  they  get  inoculated  with  this 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  185 

new  religious  frenzy  there  is  no  saying  what  may  hap- 
pen. I  will  speak  to  your  father  about  it.  Not  in  a  way 
to  alarm  him ;  but  I  will  point  out  that  it  is  of  no  use 
your  having  brought  out  firearms  if  none  of  you  know 
how  to  use  them,  and  suggest  that  it  will  be  a  good  thing 
if  you  and  the  men  were  to  make  a  point  of  firing  a  dozen 
shots  every  morning  at  a  mark.  I  shall  add  that  he  him- 
self might  just  as  well  do  so,  and  that  even  the  ladies 
might  find  it  an  amusement,  using,  of  course,  a  light 
rifle,  or  firing  from  a  rest  with  an  ordinary  rifle  with 
light  charges,  or  that  they  might  practice  with  revolvers. 
Anyhow,  it  is  certainly  desirable  that  you  and  your 
father  and  the  men  should  learn  to  be  good  shots  with 
these  weapons.  I  will  gladly  come  over  at  first  and  act 
as  musketry  instructor. ' ' 

"Wilfrid  embraced  the  idea  eagerly,  and  Mr.  Atherton 
on  the  occasion  of  his  first  visit  to  The  Glade  in  a  casual 
sort  of  way  remarked  to  Mr.  Renshaw  that  he  thought 
every  white  man  and  woman  in  the  outlying  colonies 
ought  to  be  able  to  use  firearms,  as,  although  they  might 
never  be  called  upon  to  use  them  in  earnest,  the  knowl- 
edge that  they  could  do  so  with  effect  would  greatly  add 
to  their  feeling  of  security  and  comfort.  Mr.  Benshaw 
at  once  took  up  the  idea  and  accepted  the  other's  offer 
to  act  as  instructor.  Accordingly,  as  soon  as  the  Ken- 
shaws  were  established  upon  their  farm,  it  became  one  of 
the  standing  rules  of  the  place  that  "Wilfrid  and  the  two 
men  should  fire  twelve  shots  at  a  mark  every  morning 
before  starting  for  their  regular  work  at  the  farm. 

The  target  was  a  figure  roughly  cut  out  of  wood,  repre- 
senting the  size  and  to  some  extent  the  outline  of  a  man's 
figure. 

"It  is  much  better  to  accustom  yourself  to  fire  at  a 
mark  of  this  kind  than  to  practice  always  at  a  target," 


186  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Mr.  Atherton  said.  "A  man  may  shoot  wonderfully  well 
at  a  black  mark  in  the  center  of  a  white  square,  and  yet 
make  very  poor  practice  at  a  human  figure  with  its  dull 
shades  of  color  and  irregular  outline." 

"But  we  shall  not  be  able  to  tell  where  our  bullets 
hit,"  Wilfrid  said;  "especially  after  the  dummy  has 
been  hit  a  good  many  times." 

"It  is  not  very  material  where  you  hit  a  man,  Wilfrid, 
so  that  you  do  hit  him.  If  a  nan  gets  a  heavy  bullet, 
whether  in  an  arm,  a  leg,  or  the  body,  there  is  no  more 
fight  in  him.  You  can  tell  by  the  sound  of  the  bullet  if 
you  hit  the  figure,  and  if  you  hit  him  you  have  done 
what  you  want  to.  You  do  not  need  to  practice  at  dis- 
tances over  three  hundred  yards ;  that  is  quite  the  out- 
side range  at  which  you  would  ever  want  to  do  any 
shooting,  indeed  from  fifty  to  two  hundred  I  consider 
the  useful  distance  to  practice  at.  If  you  get  to  shoot  so 
well  that  you  can  with  certainty  hit  a  man  between  those 
ranges,  you  may  feel  pretty  comfortable  in  your  mind 
that  you  can  beat  off  any  attack  that  might  be  made  on  a 
house  you  are  defending. 

"When  you  have  learned  to  do  this  at  the  full-size 
figure  you  can  put  it  in  a  bush  so  that  only  the  head  and 
shoulders  are  visible,  as  would  be  those  of  a  native  stand- 
ing up  to  fire.  All  this  white  target-work  is  very  well 
for  shooting  for  prizes,  but  if  troops  were  trained  to  fire 
at  dummy  figures  at  from  fifty  to  two  hundred  yards  dis- 
tance, and  allowed  plenty  of  ammunition  for  practice  and 
kept  steadily  at  it,  you  would  see  that  a  single  company 
would  be  more  than  a  match  for  a  whole  regiment  trained 
as  our  soldiers  are." 

With  steady  practice  every  morning,  Wilfrid  and  the 
two  young  men  made  very  rapid  progress,  and  at  the 
end  of  three  months  it  was  very  seldom  that  a  bullet  was 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  187 

thrown  away.  Sometimes  Mr.  Eenshaw  joined  them  in 
their  practice,  but  he  more  often  fired  a  few  shots  some 
time  during  the  day  with  Marion,  who  became  quite  an 
enthusiast  in  the  exercise.  Mrs.  Eenshaw  declined  to 
practice,  and  said  that  she  was  content  to  remain  a  non- 
combatant,  and  would  undertake  the  work  of  binding  up 
wounds  and  loading  muskets.  On  Saturday  afternoons, 
when  the  men  left  off  work  somewhat  earlier  than  usual, 
there  was  always  shooting  for  small  prizes.  Twelve  shots 
were  fired  by  each  at  a  figure  placed  in  the  bushes  a 
hundred  yards  away,  with  only  the  head  and  shoulders 
visible.  After  each  had  fired,  the  shotholes  were 
counted  and  then  filled  up  with  mud,  so  that  the  next 
marks  made  were  easily  distinguishable. 

Mr.  Renshaw  was  uniformly  last.  The  Grimstones 
and  Marion  generally  ran  each  other  very  close,  each 
putting  eight  or  nine  of  their  bullets  into  the  figure. 
Wilfrid  was  always  handicapped  two  shots,  but  as  he  gen- 
erally put  the  whole  of  his  ten  bullets  into  the  mark,  he 
was  in  the  majority  of  cases  the  victor.  The  shooting 
party  was  sometimes  swelled  by  the  presence  of  Mr. 
Atherton  and  the  two  Aliens,  who  had  arrived  a  fort- 
night after  the  Keushaws,  and  had'  taken  up  the  section 
of  land  next  below  them.  Mr.  Atherton  was  incompara- 
bly the  best  shot  of  the  party.  Wilfrid,  indeed,  seldom 
missed,  but  he  took  careful  and  steady  aim  at  the  object, 
while  Mr.  Atherton  fired  apparently  without  waiting  to 
take  aim  at  all.  Sometimes  he  would  not  even  lift  his 
gun  to  his  shoulder,  but  would  fire  from  his  side,  or 
standing  with  his  back  to  the  mark  would,  turn  round 
and  fire  instantaneously. 

"That  sort  of  thing  is  only  attained  by  long  practice," 
he  would  say  in  answer  to  Wilfrid's  exclamations  of 
astonishment.  "You  see,  I  have  been  shooting  in  differ* 


188  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

ent  parts  of  the  world,  and  at  different  sorts  of  "game  for 
some  fifteen  years,  and  in  many  cases  quick  shooting  is 
of  just  as  much  importance  as  straight  shooting." 

But  it  was  with  the  revolver  that  Mr.  Atherton  most 
surprised  his  friends.  He  could  put  six  bullets  into  half 
a  sheet  of  note-paper  at  a  distance  of  fifty  yards,  firing 
•with  such  rapidity  that  the  weapon  was  emptied  in  two 
or  three  seconds. 

"I  learned  that,"  he  said,  "among  the  cowboys  in  the 
"West.  Some  of  them  are  perfectly  marvelous  shots.  It 
is  their  sole  amusement,  and  they  spend  no  inconsidera- 
ble portion  of  their  pay  on  cartridges.  It  seems  to  be- 
come an  instinct  with  them  ;  however  small  the  object  at 
which  they  fire  they  are  almost  certain  to  hit  it.  It  is  a 
common  thing  with  them  for  one  man  to  throw  an  empty 
meat-tin  into  the  air  and  for  another  to  put  six  bullets  in 
it  before  it  touches  the  ground.  So  certain  are  they  of 
their  own  and  each  other's  aim,  that  one  will  hold  a  half- 
penny between  his  finger  and  thumb  for  another  to  fire 
at  from  a  distance  of  twenty  yards,  and  it  is  a  common 
joke  for  one  to  knock  another's  pipe  out  of  his  mouth 
when  he  is  quietly  smoking. 

"As  you  see,  though  my  shooting  seems  to  you  won- 
derful, I  should  be  considered  quite  a  poor  shot  among 
the  cowboys.  Of  course,  with  incessant  practice  such 
as  they  have  I  should  shoot  a  good  deal  better  than  I  do; 
but  I  could  never  approach  their  perfection,  for  the  sim- 
ple reason  that  I  have  not  the  strength  of  wrist.  They 
pass  their  lives  in  riding  half-broken  horses,  and  inces- 
sant exercise  and  hard  work  harden  them  until  their 
muscles  are  like  steel,  and  they  scarcely  feel  what  to  an 
ordinary  man  is  a  sharp  wrench  from  the  recoil  of  a 
heavily  loaded  Colt." 

Life  was  in  every  way  pleasant  at  The  Glade.     The 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  189 

work  of  breaking  up  the  land  went  on  steadily,  but  the 
labor,  though  hard,  was  not  excessive.  In  the  evening 
the  Aliens  or  Mr.  Atherton  frequently  dropped  in,  and 
occasionally  Mr.  Mitford  and  his  daughters  rode  over,  or 
the  party  came  up  in  the  boat.  The  expense  of  living 
was  small.  They  had  an  ample  supply  of  potatoes  and 
other  vegetables  from  their  garden,  of  eggs  from  their 
poultry,  and  of  milk,  butter,  and  cheese  from  their  cows. 
While  salt  meat  was  the  staple  of  their  food,  it  was  varied 
occasionally  by  chickens,  ducks,  or  a  goose,  while  a 
sheep  now  and  then  afforded  a  week's  supply  of  fresh 
meat. 

Mr.  Renshaw  had  not  altogether  abandoned  his  origi- 
nal idea.  He  had  already  learned  something  of  the 
Maori  language  from  his  studies  on  the  voyage,  and  he 
rapidly  acquired  a  facility  of  speaking  it  from  his  con- 
versations with  the  two  natives  permanently  employed  on 
the  farm.  One  of  these  was  a  man  of  some  forty  years 
old  named  Wetini,  the  other  was  a  lad  of  sixteen,  his  son, 
whose  name  was  Whakapanakai,  but  as  this  name  was 
Toted  altogether  too  long  for  conversational  purposes 
he  was  rechristened  Jack. 

Wetini  spoke  but  a  few  words  of  English,  but  Jack, 
who  had  been  educated  at  one  of  the  mission  schools, 
spoke  it  fluently.  They  with  Wetini's  wife,  inhabited  a 
small  hut  situated  at  the  edge  of  the  wood,  at  a  distance 
of  about  two  hundred  yards  from  the  house.  It  was 
Mr.  Renshaw 's  custom  to  stroll  over  there  of  an  evening, 
and  seating  himself  by  the  fire,  which  however  hot  the 
weather  the  natives  always  kept  burning,  he  would  con- 
verse with  Wetini  upon  the  manners  and  customs,  the 
religious  beliefs  and  ceremonies,  of  his  people. 

In  these  conversations  Jack  at  first  acted  as  interpreter, 
but  it  was  not  many  weeks  before  Mr.  Renshaw  gained 


190  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

such  proficiency  in  the  tongue  that  such  assistance  was 
no  longer  needed. 

But  the  period  of  peace  and  tranquillity  at  The  Glade 
was  but  a  short  one.  "Wilfrid  learned  from  Jack,  who 
had  attached  himself  specially  to  him,'  that  there  were 
reports  among  the  natives  that  the  prophet  Te  Ua  waa 
sending  out  missionaries  all  over  the  island.  This  state- 
ment was  true.  Te  Ua  had  sent  out  four  sub-prophets 
with  orders  to  travel  among  the  tribes  and  inform  them 
that  Te  Ua  had  been  appointed  by  an  angel  as  a  prophet, 
that  he  was  to  found  a  new  religion  to  be  called  Pai 
Marire,  and  that  legions  of  angels  waited  the  time  when, 
all  the  tribes  having  been  converted,  a  general  rising 
would  take  place,  and  the  Pakeha  be  annihilated  by  the 
assistance  of  these  angels,  after  which  a  knowledge  of  all 
languages,  and  of  all  the  arts  and  sciences,  would  be 
bestowed  upon  the  Pai  Marire. 

Had  Te  Ua's  instructions  been  carried  out,  and  hia 
agents  traveled  quietly  among  the  tribes,  carefully  ab- 
staining from  all  open  hostility  to  the  whites  until  the 
whole  of  the  native  population  had  been  converted,  the 
rising  when  it  came  would  have  been  a  terrible  one,  and 
might  have  ended  in  the  whole  of  the  white  population 
being  either  destroyed  or  forced  for  a  time  to  abandon 
the  island.  Fortunately  the  sub-prophets  were  men  of 
ferocious  character.  Too  impatient  to  await  the  ap- 
pointed time,  they  attacked  the  settlers  as  soon  as  they 
collected  sufficient  converts  to  do  so,  and  so  they  brought 
about  the  destruction  of  their  leader's  plans. 

These  attacks  put  the  colonists  on  their  guard,  enabled 
the  authorities  to  collect  troops  and  stand  on  the  dafen* 
sive,  and,  what  was  still  more  important,  caused  many  of 
the  tribes  which  had  not  been  converted  to  the  Pai 
Marire  faith  to  range  themselves  on  the  side  of  the  Eng- 


MAORI  AND  SETTLES.  191 

lish.  Not  because  they  loved  the  whites,  but  because 
from  time  immemorial  the  tribes  had  been  divided 
against  each  other,  and  their  traditional  hostility  weighed 
more  with  them  than  their  jealousy  with  the  white 
settlers. 

Still,  although  these  rumors  as  to  the  spread  of  the 
>Pai  Marire  or  Hau-Hau  faith  reached  the  ears  of  the 
/settlers,  there  were  few  in  the  western  provinces  who 
believed  that  here  was  any  real  danger.  The  Maoris  had 
always  been  peaceful  and  friendly  with  them,  and  they 
could  not  believe  that  those  with  whom  they  had  dwelt 
so  long  could  suddenly  and  without  any  reason  become 
bloodthirsty  enemies. 

Wilfrid  said  nothing  to  his  parents  as  to  what  he  had 
heard  from  Jack,  but  he  talked  it  over  with  Mr.  Atherton 
and  the  Aliens.  The  latter  were  disposed  to  make  light 
of  it,  but  Mr.  Atherton  took  the  matter  seriously. 

"There  is  never  any  saying  how  things  will  go  with 
the  natives,"  he  said.  "All  savages  seem  to  be  alike. 
Up  to  a  certain  point  they  are  intelligent  and  sensible ; 
but  they  are  like  children;  they  are  easily  excited,  super- 
stitious in  the  extreme,  and  can  be  deceived  without  the 
slightest  difficulty  by  designing  people.  Of  course  to 
us  this  story  of  Te  Ua's  sounds  absolutely  absurd,  but 
that  is  no  reason  why  it  should  appear  absurd  to  them. 
These  people  have  embraced  a  sort  of  Christianity,  and 
they  have  read  of  miracles  of  all  sorts,  and  will  have  no 
more  difficulty  in  believing  that  the  angels  could' destroy 
all  the  Europeans  in  their  island  than  that  the  Assyrian 
army  was  miraculously  destroyed  before  Jerusalem. 

"Without  taking  too  much  account  of  the  business, 
I  think,  Wilfrid,  that  it  will  be  just  as  well  if  all  of  us  in 
these  outlj'ing  settlements  take  a  certain  amount  of  pre- 
cautions. I  shall  write  down  at  once  to  my  agent  ai 


192  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Hawke  Bay  asking  him  to  buy  me  a  couple  of  dogs  and 
send  them  up  by  the  next  ship.  I  shall  tell  him  that  it 
does  not  matter  what  sort  of  dogs  they  are  so  that  they 
are  good  watchdogs,  though,  of  course,  I  should  prefer 
that  they  should  be  decent  dogs  of  their  sort,  dogs  one 
could  make  companions  of.  I  should  advise  you  to  do 
the  same. 

"I  shall  ask  Mr.  Mitford  to  get  me  up  at  once  a  heavy 
door  and  shutters  for  the  window,  strong  enough  to  stand 
an  assault.  Here  again  I  should  advise  you  to  do  the 
same.  You  can  assign  any  reason  you  like  to  your 
father.  With  a  couple  of  dogs  to  give  the  alarm,  with  a 
strong  door  and  shutters,  you  need  not  be  afraid  of  being 
taken  by  surprise,  and  it  is  only  a  surprise  that  you 
have  in  the  first  place  to  fear.  Of  course  if  there  were 
to  be  anything  like  a  general  rising  we  should  all  have  to 
gather  at  some  central  spot  agreed  upon,  or  else  to  quit 
the  settlement  altogether  until  matters  settle  down. 
Still,  I  trust  that  nothing  of  that  sort  will  take  place. 
At  any  rate,  all  we  have  to  fear  and  prepare  against  at 
present  is  an  attack  by  small  parties  of  fanatics." 

Wilfrid  had  no  difficulty  in  persuading  his  father  to 
order  a  strong  oak  door  and  shutters  for  the  windows, 
and  to  get  a  couple  of  dogs.  He  began  the  subject  by 
saying:  "Mr.  Atherton  is  going  to  get  some  strong  shut- 
ters to  his  window,  father.  I  think  it  would  be  a  good 
thing  if  we  were  to  get  the  same  for  our  windows. " 

"What  do  we  want  shutters  for,  Wilfrid?" 

"For  just  the  same  reason  that  we  have  been  learning 
to  use  our  firearms,  father.  We  do  riot  suppose  that  the 
natives,  who  are  all  friendly  with  us,  are  going  to  turn 
treacherous.  Still,  as  there  is  a  bare  possibility  of  such 
a  thing,  we  have  taken  some  pains  in  learning  to  shoot 
straight.  In  the  same  way  it  would  be  just  as  well  to 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  193 

have  strong  shutters  put  up.  We  don't  at  all  suppose 
we  are  going  to  be  attacked,  but  if  we  are  the  shutters 
would  be  invaluable,  and  would  effectually  prevent  any- 
thing like  a  night  surprise.  The  expense  wouldn't  be 
great,  and  in  the  unlikely  event  of  the  natives  being 
troublesome  in  this  part  of  the  island  we  should  all  sleep 
much  more  soundly  and  comfortably  if  we  knew  that 
there  was  no  fear  of  our  being  taken  by  surprise.  Mr. 
Atherton  is  sending  for  a  couple  of  dogs  too.  I  have 
always  thought  that  it  would  be  jolly  to  have  a  dog  or 
two  here,  and  if  we  do  not  want  them  as  guards  they 
would  be  pleasant  as  companions  when  one  is  going 
about  the  place. " 

A  few  days  after  the  arrival  of  two  large  watchdogs 
and  of  the  heavy  shutters  and  door,  Mr.  Mitford  rode  ia 
to  The  Glade.  He  chatted  for  a  few  minutes  on  ordinary 
subjects,  and  then  Mrs.  Renshaw  said:  "Is  anything  the 
matter,  Mr.  Mitford?  you  look  more  serious  than  usual." 

"I  can  hardly  say  that  anything  is  exactly  the  matter, 
Mrs.  Eenshaw;  but  I  have  a  batch  of  newspapers  and 
letters  from  Wellington  this  morning,  and  they  give 
rather  stirring  news.  The  Hau-Haus  have  come  into 
collision  with  us  again.  You  know  that  a  fortnight 
since  we  had  news  that  they  had  attacked  a  party  of 
our  men  under  Captain  Lloyd  and  defeated  them,  and, 
contrary  to  all  native  traditions,  had  cut  off  the  heads  of 
the  slain,  among  whom  was  Captain  Lloyd  himself.  I 
was  afraid  that  after  this  we  should  soon  hear  more  of 
them,  and  my  opinion  has  been  complete^'  justified.  On 
the  1st  of  May  two  hundred  of  the  Ngataiwa  tribe,  and 
three  hundred  other  natives  under  Te  Ua's  prophet 
Hepanaia  and  Parengi-Kingi  of  Taranaki,  attacked  a 
strong  fort  on  Sentry  Hill,  garrisoned  by  fifty  men  of  the 
Fifty-second  Regiment  under  Major  Short. 


194  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"Tne  Ngataiwa  took  no  part  in  the  action,  but  the 
Hau-Haus  charged  with  great  bravery.  The  garrison 
fortunately  being  warned  by  their  yells  of  what  was  com- 
ing, received  them  with  such  a  heavy  fire  that  their  lead- 
ing ranks  were  swept  away,  and  they  fell  back  in  confu- 
sion. They  made  a  second  charge,  which  was  equally 
unsuccessful,  and  then  fell  back  with  a  loss  of  fifty-two 
killed,  among  whom  were  both  the  Hau-Hau  prophet  and 
Parengi-Kingi. 

"The  other  affair  has  taken  place  in  the  Wellington 
district.  Matene,  another  of  the  Hau-Hau  prophets, 
came  down  to  Pipiriki,  a  tribe  of  the  Wanganui.  These 
people  were  bitterly  hostile  to  us,  as  they  had  taken  part 
in  some  of  the  former  fighting,  and  their  chief  and  thirty 
six  of  his  men  were  killed.  The  tribe  at  once  accepted 
the  new  faith.  Mr.  Booth,  the  resident  magistrate,  who 
was  greatly  respected  among  them,  went  up  to  try  to 
smooth  matters  down,  but  was  seized,  and  would  have 
been  put  to  death  if  it  had  not  been  for  the  interference 
in  his  favor  of  a  young  chief  named  Hori  Patene,  who 
managed  to  get  him  and  his  wife  and  children  safely 
down  in  a- canoe  to  the  town  of  Wagnai.  The  Hau-Hau8 
prepared  to  move  down  the  river  to  attack  the  town,  and 
sent  word  to  the  Ngatihau  branch  of  the  tribe  who  lived 
down  the  river  to  join  them.  They  and  two  other  of  the 
Wanganui  tribes  living  on  the  lower  part  of  the  river  re- 
fused to  do  so,  and  also  refused  to  let  them  pass  down 
the  river,  and  sent  a  challenge  for  a  regular  battle  to  take 
place  on  the  island  of  Moutoa  in  the  river. 

"The  challenge  was  accepted.  At  dawn  on  the  follow- 
ing morning  our  natives,  three  hundred  and  fifty  strong, 
proceeded  to  the  appointed  ground.  A  hundred  picked 
men  crossed  on  to  the  island,  and  the  rest  remained  on 
the  banks  as  spectators.  Of  the  hundred,  fifty  divided 


MAORI  AND  SETTLES.  195 

into  three  parties  each  under  a  chief,  formed  the  advance 
guard,  "while  the  other  fifty  remained  in  reserve  at  the 
end  of  the  island  two  hundred  yards  away,  and  too  far  to 
be  of  much  use  in  the  event  of  the  advance  guard  being 
defeated.  The  enemy's  party  were  a  hundred  and  thirty 
strong,' and  it  is  difficult  to  understand  why  a  larger 
body  was  not  sent  over  to  the  island  to  oppose  them, 
especially  as  the  belief  in  the  invulnerability  of  the  Hau- 
Haus  was  generally  believed  in,  even  by  the  natives 
opposed  to  them. 

"It  was  a  curious  fight,  quite  in  the  manner  of  the 
traditional  warfare  between  the  various  tribes  before  our 
arrival  on  the  island.  The  lower  tribesmen  fought,  not 
for  the  defense  of  the  town,  for  they  were  not  very 
friendly  with  the  Europeans,  having  been  strong  sup- 
porters of  the  king  party,  but  simply  for  the  prestige  of 
the  tribe.  No  hostile  war  party  had  ever  forced  the 
river,  and  none  ever  should  do  so.  The  Hau-Haus  came 
down  the  river  in  their  canoes  and  landed  without  oppo- 
sition. Then  a  party  of  the  "Wanganui  advance  guard 
fired.  Although  the  Hau-Haus  *vere  but  thirty  yards 
distant  none  of  them  fell,  and  their  return  volley  killed 
the  chiefs  of  two  out  of  the  three  sections  of  the  advance 
guard  and  many  others. 

"Disheartened  by  the  loss  of  their  chiefs,  the  two  sec- 
tions gave  way,  shouting  that  the  Hau-Haus  were  invul- 
nerable. The  third  section,  well  led  by  their  chief,  held 
their  ground,  but  were  driven  slowly  back  by  the  over- 
whelming force  of  the  enemy.  The  battle  appeared  to 
be  lost,  when  Tamehana,  the  sub-chief  of  one  of  the  fly- 
ing sections,  after  vainly  trying  to  rally  his  men,  arrived 
on  the  ground,  and,  refusing  to  obey  the  order  to  take 
cover  from  the  Hau-Haus'  fire,  dashed  at  the  enemy  and 
killed  two  of  them  with  his  double-barreled  gun.  The 


196  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

last  of  the  three  leaders  was  at  this  moment  shot  dead. 
Nearly  all  his  men  were  more  or  less  severely  wounded, 
but  as  the  Hau-Haus  rushed  forward  they  fired  a  volley 
into  them  at  close  quarters,  killing  several.  But  they 
still  came  on,  when  Tamehana  again  rushed  at  them. 
Seizing  the  spear  of  a  dead  man  he  drove  it  into  the 
heart  of  a  Hau-Hau.  Catching  up  the  gun  and  toma- 
hawk of  the  fallen  man,  he  drove  the  latter  so  deeply 
into  the  head  of  another  foe  that  in  wrenching  it  out  the 
handle  was  broken.  Finding  that  the  gun  was  unloaded, 
he  dashed  it  in  the  face  of  his  foes,  and  snatching  up 
another  he  was  about  to  fire,  when  a  bullet  struck  him  in 
the  arm.  Nevertheless  he  fired  and  killed  his  man,  but 
the  next  moment  was  brought  to  the  ground  by  a  bullet 
that  shattered  his  knee. 

"At  this  moment  Hainoina,  who  commanded  the  re- 
serve, came  up  with  them,  with  the  fugitives  whom  he 
had  succeeded  in  rallying.  They  fired  a  volley,  and 
then  charged  down  upon  the  Hau-Haus  with  their  toma- 
hawks. After  a  desperate  fight  the  enemy  were  driven 
in  confusion  to  the  upper  end  of  the  island,  where  they 
rushed  into  the  water  and  attempted  to  swim  to  the  right 
bank.  The  prophet  was  recognized  among  the  swim- 
mers. One  of  the  Wangenui  plunged  in  after  him,  over- 
took him  just  as  he  reached  the  opposite  bank,  and  in 
spite  of  the  prophet  uttering  the  magic  words  that  should 
have  paralyzed  his  assailant,  killed  him  with  his  toma- 
hawk and  swam  back  with  the  body  to  Hainoma. " 

"They  seem  to  have  been  two  serious  affairs,"  Mr. 
Kenshaw  said;  "but  as  the  Hau-Haus  were  defeated  in 
each  we  may  hope  that  we  have  heard  the  last  of  them, 
for  as  both  the  prophets  were  killed  the  belief  in  the 
invulnerability  of  Te  Ua's  followers  must  be  at  an  end." 

"I  wish  I  could  think  so,"  Mr.  Mitford  said;  "but  it 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  197 

is  terribly  hard  to  kill  a  superstition.  Te  Ua  will,  of 
course,  say  that  the  two  prophets  disobeyed  his  positive 
instructions  and  thus  brought  their  fate  upon  themselves, 
and  the  incident  may  therefore  rather  strengthen  than 
decrease  his  influence.  The  best  part  of  the  business  in 
my  mind  is  that  some  of  the  tribes  have  thrown  in  their 
lot  on  our  side,  or  if  not  actually  on  our  side  at  any  rate 
against  the  Hau-Haus.  After  this  we  need  hardly  fear 
any  general  action  of  the  natives  against  us.  There  are 
all  sorts  of  obscure  alliances  between  the  tribes  arising 
from  marriages,  or  from  their  having  fought  on  the  same 
side  in  some  far-back  struggle.  The  result  is  that  the 
tribes  who  have  these  alliances  with  the  Wanganui  will 
henceforth  range  themselves  on  the  same  side,  or  will  at 
any  rate  hold  aloof  from  this  Pai  Marire  movement. 
This  will  also  force  other  tribes,  who  might  have  been 
willing  to  join  in  a  general  movement,  to  stand  neutral, 
und  I  think  now,  that  although  we  may  have  a  great  deal 
of  trouble  with  Te  Ua's  followers,  we  may  regard  any 
absolute  danger  to  the  European  population  of  the  island 
as  past. 

"There  may,  I  fear,  be  isolated  massacres,  for  the 
Hau-Haus,  with  their  cutting  off  of  heads  and  carrying 
them  about,  have  introduced  an  entirely  new  and  savage 
feature  into  Maori  warfare.  I  was  inclined  to  think  the 
precautions  you  and  Atherton  are  taking  were  rather 
superfluous,  but  after  this  I  shall  certainly  adopt  them 
myself.  Everything  is  perfectly  quiet  here,  but  when 
we  see  how  readily  a  whole  tribe  embrace  the  new  reli- 
gion as  soon  as  a  prophet  arrives,  and  are  ready  at  once  to 
massacre  a  man  who  had  long  dwelt  among  them,  and 
for  whom  they  had  always  evinced  the  greatest  respect 
and  liking,  it  is  impossible  any  longer  to  feel  confident 
that  the  natives  in  this  part  of  the  country  are  to  be 
relied  upon  as  absolutely  friendly  and  trustworthj". 


198  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"I  am  sorry  now  that  I  have  been  to  some  extent  the 
means  of  inducing  you  all  to  settle  here.  At  the  time  I 
gave  my  advice  things  seemed  settling  down  at  the  other 
end  of  the  island,  and  this  Hau-Hau  movement  reached 
us  only  as  a  vague  rumor,  and  seemed  so  absurd  in  itself 
that  one  attached  no  importance  to  it." 

"Pray  do  not  blame  yourself,  Mr.  Mitford;  whatever 
comes  of  it  we  are  delighted  with  the  choice  we  have 
made.  We  are  vastly  more  comfortable  than  we  had 
expected  to  be  in  so  short  a  time,  and  things  look  promis- 
ing far  beyond  our  expectations.  As  you  say,  you  could 
have  had  no  reason  to  suppose  that  this  absurd  movement 
•was  going  to  lead  to  such  serious  consequences.  Indeed 
you  could  have  no  ground  for  supposing  that  it  was 
likely  to  cause  trouble  on  this  side  of  the  island,  far  re- 
moved as  we  are  from  the  scene  of  the  troubles.  Even 
now  these  are  in  fact  confined  to  the  district  where  fight- 
ing has  been  going  on  for  the  last  three  or  four  years — 
Taranaki  and  its  neighborhood ;  for  the  Wanganui  river, 
although  it  flows  into  the  sea  in  the  north  of  the  Welling- 
ton district,  rises  in  that  of  Taranaki,  and  the  tribes  who 
became  Hau-Haus  and  came  down  the  river  had  already 
taken  part  in  the  fighting  with  our  troops.  I  really  see 
no  reason,  therefore,  for  fearing  that  it  will  spread  in 
this  direction." 

"There  is  no  reason  whatever,"  Mr.  Mitford  agreed; 
"only,  unfortunately,  the  natives  seldom  behave  as  we 
expect  them  to  do,  and  generally  act  precisely  as  we  ex- 
pect they  will  not  act.  At  any  rate  I  shall  set  to  work 
at  once  to  construct  a  strong  stockade  at  the  back  of  my 
house.  I  have  long  been  talking  of  forming  a  large 
cattle-yard  there,  so  that  it  will  not  in  any  case  be  labor 
thrown  away,  while  if  trouble  should  come  it  will  serve 
as  a  rallying  place  to  which  all  the  settlers  of  the  dis- 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  199 

trict  can  drive  in  their  horses  and  cattle  for  shelter,  and 
where  they  can  if  attacked  hold  their  own  against  all  the 
natives  of  the  districts." 

"I  really  think  you  are  looking  at  it  in  almost  too 
serious  a  light,  Mr.  Mitford ;  still,  the  fact  that  there  is 
such  a  rallying  place  in  the  neighborhood  will  of  course 
add  to  our  comfort  in  case  we  should  hear  alarming 
rumors." 

"Quite  so,  Mr.  Eenshaw.     My  idea  is  there  is  nothing 
like  being  'prepared,  and  though  I  agree  with  you  that 
there  is  little  chance  of  trouble  in  this  remote  settlement, 
.  it  is  just  as  well  to  take  precautions  against  the  worst." 


800  MAORI  AND  SETTLED 


CHAPTER   XIL 

THE     FIRST     ALARM. 

ONE  morning  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Renshaw  went  down  to 
epend  a  long  day  with  the  Mitfords.  The  latter  had 
sent  up  the  boat  overnight,  and  they  started  the  first 
thing  in  the  morning.  For  the  two  or  three  days  pre- 
vious Jack,  the  young  native,  had  more  than  once  spoken 
to  Wilfrid  of  the  propriety  of  the  hands  keeping  near 
the  house,  but  Wilfrid  had  failed  to  obtain  from  him  any 
specific  reasons  for  the  warning. 

"Bad  men  come  down  from  Waikato,"  he  said. 
"Much  talkee  talkee  among  natives." 

"But  what  do  they  talk  about,  Jack?" 

Jack  shook  his  head. 

"Jack  no  hear  talkee.  Men  come  to  hut  and  talk  with 
father.  Other  Maoris  on  land  steal  in  and  talk  too,  but 
no  talk  before  Jack;  always  turn  him  out  or  send  him  on 
errand.  But  Jack  hear  sometimes  a  word,  and  think 
that  trouble  come.  Young  master  better  not  go  far  away 
by  himself,  and  tell  two  white  men  to  keep  close  to  hut. 
Perhaps  nothing  come,  but  better  to  be  on  guard." 

"Very  well,  Jack;  I  am  obliged  to  you  for  the  warn- 
ing. I  will  tell  the  Grimstones  not  to  go  out  to  the  out- 
lying clearings,  but  to  occupy  themselves  with  what  they 
can  find  to  do  near  home." 

Jack  nodded.  -"That  best,  Master  Wilfrid,  but  no 
talk  too  much  with  me.  If  my  people  thought  I  speak  to 
-you  then  trouble  come  to  Jack." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  201 

"Wilfrid  nodded,  and  without  saying  anything  to  his 
father  and  mother  told  the  Grimstones  to  keep  near  the 
house.  "After  you  have  done  shooting  of  a  morning," 
he  said,  "instead  of  bringing  your  guns  into  the  house 
as  usual  take  them  down  with  you  to  the  place  where  you 
are  at  work,  so  that  they  will  be  handy  in  case  of  neces- 
sity. Most  likely  there  is  no  danger  whatever ;  but  I 
have  heard  a  rumor  that  some  people  from  Waikato  have 
come  into  this  neighborhood,  and  if  so  no  doubt  they  are 
toying  to  get  the  tribes  here  to  join  the  Hau-Haus.  I 
do  not  think  that  there  is  much  chance  of  their  succeed- 
ing, for  the  natives  have  always  been  very  friendly,  and 
there  has  been  no  dispute  about  land  or  any  other  griev- 
ance; but  when  one  knows  how  suddenly  they  have 
risen  in  other  places  it  is  better  to  take  precautions." 

After  breakfast  on  the  morning  when  his  father  and 
mother  had  started,  Wilfrid  strolled  out  on  to  .the  ver- 
anda, and  stood  for  some  little  time  hesitating  what  he 
should  do.  The  Grimstones  had  just  started  to  look  up 
some  cattle  in  one  of  the  distant  clearings,  one  of  the 
native  hands  having  reported  the  evening  before  two  of 
the  animals  were  missing. 

"I  will  not  go  far  till  they  come  back,  he  said  to  him- 
self. "The  garden  wants  hoeing.  Weeds  grow  as  fast 
here  as  they  do  at  home.  That  will  be  just  the  job  for 
me." 

He  was  about  to  turn  to  enter  the  house  when  he  saw 
four  natives  emerge  from  the  trees  and  make  toward  him. 

"Marion,"  he  said  through  the  open  door,  "get  the 
guns  down  from  the  rack,  and  see  that  they  are  capped 
and  ready.  There  are  four  natives  coming  toward  the 
house.  I  dare  say  they  are  friendly,  and  are  probably 
only  on  the  way  down  to  the  river  to  look  for  work. 
Still,  as  we  are  alone  you  cannot  be  too  careful. ' ' 


202  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Hearing  Marion  reply  "All  right,  Wilfrid!"  the  lad 
leaned  against  the  door  in  a  careless  attitude  and  awaited 
the  coming  of  the  natives.  As  they  approached  he  saw 
they  were  all  strangers  to  him,  although  he  knew  most 
of  the  natives  in  the  neighborhood  by  sight,  for  these 
not  unfrequently  came  in  to  barter  a  pig  or  a  sheep  for 
tobacco,  sugar,  or  other  things  necessary  to  them.  The 
natives  as  they  came  up  gave  the  usual  salutation,  of 
good-day,  to  which  Wilfrid  replied. 

"We  are  hungry,"  a  tall  Maori,  who  Lby  his  dress  ap- 
peared to  be  a  chief,  said. 

"I  will  get  you  something  to  eat,"  Wilfrid  answered. 

The  Maoris  would  have  followed  into  the  house,  but 
he  stopped  and  said  sharply,  "We  do  not  allow  strangers 
in  the  house.  Those  we  know  are  free  to  enter  and  de- 
part as  they  choose,  but  I  have  not  seen  any  of  you  be- 
fore. If  you  will  sit  down  on  that  bench  outside  I  will 
bring  you  food." 

He  soon  reappeared  with  a  dish  of  maize  and  boiled 
pork,  for  a  supply  was  generally  kept  in  readiness  in  casi> 
any  of  the  natives  should  come  in. 

"Shuffle  about  and  make  a  noise,"  he  said  to  Marion 
as  she  got  the  dish  from  the  cupboard.  "They  cannot 
know  who  are  inside,  and  if  they  mean  [mischief — and 
honestly  I  do  not  like  their  looks — they  will  be  more 
likely  to  try  it  on  if  they  think  that  I  am  alone." 

The  Maoris  took  the  food  in  silence,  and  as  they  ate  it 
Wilfrid  was  amused  to  hear  Marion  stamping  heavily 
about  inside,  and  occasionally  speaking  as  if  to  her 
father.  He  could  see  that  the  men  were  listening,  and 
they  exchanged  words  in  a  low  tone  with  each  other. 

Presently  the  leader  of  the  party  said,  "Drink!" 
Wilfrid  went  in  and  brought  out  a  pitcher  of  water. 
"Gin!"  the  chief  said  shortly. 


Maori  MARION   COVERS  THE  NATIVE  WITH   HER  RlFLE.— Page  203. 


JfAORI  AND  SETTLER.  203 

"I  have  no  gin  to  give  you,"  Wilfrid  replied;  "we  do 
not  keep  spirits." 

The  natives  rose  to  their  feet.  "We  will  come  in  and 
see,"  the  leader  said. 

"No,  you  won't!"  Wilfrid  said  firmly.  "I  have  given 
you  what  food  there  is  in  the  house,  and  you  are  welcome 
to  it;  but  strangers  don't  come  into  the  house  unless 
they  are  invited." 

The  native  laid  his  hand  on  Wilfrid's  shoulder  to  push 
him  aside,  but  four  months  of  chopping  and  digging  had 
hardened  every  muscle  in  the  lad's  body.  He  did  not 
move  an  inch,  but  jerked  the  Maori's  hand  off  his 
shoulder. 

With  an  exclamation  of  anger  the  native  drew  a  heavy 
knobbed  stick  from  the  girdle  round  his  waist,  but  be- 
fore he  could  raise  it  to  strike  another  figure  appeared  at 
the  door.  Marion  held  a  gun  in  her  hand  which  she 
raised  to  her  shoulder.  "Drop  that,"  she  said,  in  a 
clear,  ringing  voice,  "or  I  fire!" 

Taken  by  surprise,  and  seeing  the  rifle  pointed  full  at 
his  head,  the  chief  instantly  dropped  his  club.  At  the 
same  instant  Wilfrid  sprang  to  the  door,  exclaiming  "Go 
in,  Marion!"  and  before  the  natives  had  recovered  from 
their  surprise  the  door  was  shut  and  barred. 

They  had  not  been  deceived  by  Marion's  attempt  to 
personate  a  man,  and  their  sharp  ears  had  told  them 
while  eating  their  meal  that  there  was  but  one  person  in 
the  house,  and  that  it  was  a  girl.  They  knew  that  there 
was  no  other  about,  having  watched  the  house  for  some 
time,  and  had  therefore  anticipated  that  the  work  of 
iQurder  and  plunder  would  be  accomplished  without 
difficulty.  The  instant  the  door  was  closed  they  bounded 
»,way  at  the  top  of  their  speed  to  the  shelter  of  the  bush, 
expecting  every  moment  to  hear  the  report  of  a  rifle  be- 
hind them ;  but  the  Benshaws  had  not  thought  of  firing. 


204  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

"Well  done,  Marion!"  Wilfrid  exclaimed,  as  soon  as 
the  door  was  fastened.  "I  was  on  the  point  of  spring- 
ing upon  him  when  I  heard  your  voice  behind  me ;  I 
think  that  I  could  have  tripped  him  backward,  but  if  I 
had  done  so  the  others  would  have  been  upon  me  with 
their  clubs.  Now,  let  us  close  and  fasten  the  shutters, 
though  I  do  not  think  we  need  have  any  fear  of  their 
coming  back.  In  each  case  we  have  heard  of  they  have 
always  fallen  on  the  settlers  suddenly  and  killed  them 
before  they  had  time  for  resistance,  and  I  do  not  think 
there  is  a  chance  of  their  trying  to  attack  UB  now  that 
they  know  we  are  ready  for  them.  I  expect  that  they 
were  passing  down  to  some  of  their  people  below,  and 
seeing,  as  they  thought,  a  defenseless  hut,  thought  it 
would  be  an  easy  business  to  plunder  it  and  knock  on 
the  head  any  one  they  might  find  here.  Ndw  that  they 
have  failed  they  will  probably  go  on  their  journey  again. " 

"I  was  horribly  frightened,  Wilfrid,"  Marion  said, 
when  they  joined  each  other  in  the  sitting-aroom  after 
making  all  the  fastenings  secure. 

"You  did  not  look  frightened  a  bit,  Marion;  and  you 
certainly  gave  that  fellow  a  tremendous  scare.  Didn't 
he  drop  his  club  sharp?  And  now,  what  do  you  think 
\ve  had  better  do  ?  The  first  thing  is  to  get  the  Grim- 
Btones  in.  Those  fellows  may  have  been  watching  for 
some  time  and  saw  them  go  out." 

"But  they  have  got  their  guns  with  them,  Wilfrid. 
The  natives  would  surely  not  think  of  attacking  two 
men  with  guns  when  they  have  nothing  but  their  clubs." 

"No,  they  certainly  would  not  think  of  doing  that, 
Marion.  But  the  chances  are  that  they  have  got  guns, 
and  that  they  left  them  in  the  bush  when  they  sallied 
out,  as  they  wanted  to  look  peaceful  and  take  us  by  sur- 
prise. " 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  205 

•'I  did  not  think  of  that,  Wilfrid.  Yes,  perhaps  they 
have  guns.  Well,  you  know,  it  has  always  been  agreed 
that  in  case  of  danger  three  shots  should  be  fired  as  a 
warning  to  those  who  might  be  out.  If  we  fire  and  they 
hear  it  they  will  hurry  back. ' ' 

"Yes,  but  they  might  be  shot  as  they  make  their  way 
down  to  the  house;  that  is  what  I  am  afraid  of." 

Marion  was  silent  for  a  minute.  "Do  you  know  where 
they  have  gone  to,  Wilfrid?" 

"They  have  gone  in  the  first  place  to  the  clearing  with 
those  two  big  trees  standing  in  the  center,  but  I  cannot 
say  where  they  may  go  afterward,  for  they  had  to  look 
for  four  or  five  of  the  cattle  that  had  strayed  away." 

"I  can  slip  out  from  the  window  in  the  men's  room 
and  get  into  the  bush  and  work  round  to  the  clearing, 
Wilfrid,  alW  fire  three  shots  there;  that  would  bring 
them  to  me  at  once.  You  see,  the  natives  couldn't  cross 
the  clearing  here  without  your  having  them  under  your 
gun." 

"No,  Marion,"  Wilfrid  said  decidedly;  "that  is  not 
to  be  thought  of.  If  they  saw  you  going  they  could 
work  up  through  the  bush  on  their  side  to  the  top  of  the 
clearing,  and  then  follow  you.  No;  I  think  I  will  fire 
the  three  shots.  We  have  talked  it  over  several  times, 
you  know,  and  the  Grimstones  have  been  tofd  that  if 
they  heard  the  alarm  they  must  make  their  way  cau- 
tiously to  the  top  of  the  clearing  and  see  what  is  going 
on  before  they  venture  to  make  for  the  house.  As  soon 
as  I  see  them  I  can  shout  to  them  to  keep  to  the  bush  on 
their  left  till  they  get  opposite  the  house.  Everything 
is  so  still  that  one  can  hear  a  shout  a  long  way,  and  I 
feel  sure  I  could  make  them  understand  as  far  off  as  the 
end  of  the  clearing.  It  isn't  as  if  we  were  sure  that 
these  fellows  were  still  hanging  about  ready  to  attack  us; 


206  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

the  probabilities  are  all  the  other  way.  They  would 
have  murdered  us  if  they  could  have  taken  us  by  sur« 
prise,  but  that  is  a  different  thing  altogether  to  making 
an  attack  now  they  know  we  are  armed  and  ready." 

Taking  three  of  the  rifles,  Wilfrid  opened  one  of  the 
shutters  at  the  back  of  the  house  and  fired  them,  with  an 
interval  of  about  five  seconds  between  each  shot;  then 
he  stood  at  the  window  and  watched  the  upper  end  of 
the  glade.  "Dear  me!"  he  exclaimed  suddenly,  "lam 
sorry  we  fired." 

"Why?"  Marion  asked  in  surprise. 

"Because  Mr.  Atherton  is  sure  to  hear  it  if  he  is  at 
home,  and  will  come  hurrying  over ;  and  if  these  fellows 
are  still  there  he  may  come  right  into  the  middle  of 
them." 

"I  do  not  think  he  would  do  that,  Wilfred,"  Marion 
said,  after  thinking  for  a  moment  or  two.  "Mr.  Ather- 
ton is  not  like  the  Grimstones.  He  has  been  in  all  sorts 
of  adventures,  and  though  I  am  sure  he  will  come  to  our 
help  as  soon  as  he  can,  I  think  he  would  take  every  pre- 
caution. He  would  know  that  the  natives  will  be  likely 
to  come  from  above,  and  therefore  be  between  him  and 
us,  and  would  come  along  carefully  so  as  not  to  be  sur- 
prised." 

"I  hope  so,  I  am  sure,"  Wilfrid  said;  for  he  is  an 
awfully  good  fellow.  Still,  as  you  say,  he  is  sure  to  keep 
his  eyes  opened,  and  unless  they  surprise  him  I  should 
back  him  against  the  four  of  them." 

In  a  quarter  of  an  hour  they  heard  a  shout  from  the 
edge  of  the  clearing.  "There  are  the  Aliens!"  Wilfrid 
exclaimed  as  he  leaped  to  the  door.  "I  forgot  about 
them,  although  of  course  they  are  nearer  than  Mr.  Ather- 
ton. Allright!"  he  shouted;  "you  can  come  on. "  The 
two  Aliens  ran  across  the  open  space  between  the  wood 
and  the  house. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  207 

"What  is  it,  "Wilfrid?"  they  exclaimed  as  they  came 
up.  "You  fired  the  alarm  signal,  did  you  not?"  Both 
were  breathless  with  the  speed  at  which  they  had  run. 
They  had  been  engaged  in  felling  when  they  heard  the 
shots,  and  had  thrown  down  their  axes,  run  into  the  hut 
for  their  guns,  and  made  for  The  Glade  at  the  top  of 
their  speed.  In  a  few  words  Wilfrid  explained  what 
had  happened,  and  that  there  was  every  reason  to  believe 
that  four  hostile  neighbors  were  lurking  in  the  bush  on 
the  opposite  side  of  the  glade.  The  Aliens  at  once  vol- 
unteered to  go  up  to  the  head  of  the  clearing  to  warn 
the  Grimstones.  Returning  to  the  point  where  they  had 
left  the  forest,  they  made  their  way  among  the  trees  until 
they  reached  the  upper  end  of  the  clearing ;  then  sat 
down  and  listened.  In  a  few  minutes  they  heard  the 
sound  of  breaking  twigs.  "Here  come  the  men, "the 
elder  Allen  said ;  "the  Maoris  would  come  along  noise- 
lessly." Two  or  three  minutes  later  the  Grimstones 
came  up  at  a  run,  accompanied  by  their  two  dogs. 

"This  way,"  James  Allen  said. 

"What  is  it,  sir?"  Bob  Grimstone  gasped.  "We  were 
a  long  way  in  the  woods  when  we  thought  we  heard  three 
shots.  We  were  not  quite  sure  about  it,  but  we  started 
back  as  fast  as  we  could  come.  There  is  nothing  wrong, 
I  hope?" 

"Fortunately  nothing  has  happened,"  James  Allen 
replied;  "but  four  strange  Maoris  came  up  to  the  house 
and  would  certainly  have  murdered  Mr.  Wilfrid  and  his 
sister  if  they  had  not  been  prepared  for  them.  Whether 
they  are  in  the  bush  now  or  not  I  do  not  know ;  but  we 
have  come  up  to  warn  you  not  to  go  up  the  clearing,  as 
if  they  are  there  they  might  pick  you  off  as  you  did  so. 
We  must  come  down  under  shelter  of  the  trees  till  we 
are  opposite  the  house." 


208  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

In  ten  minutes  they  reached  the  house.  Just  as  they 
did  so  Mr.  Atherton  appeared  at  the  edge  of  the  wood 
which  they  had  just  left. 

"Thank  God  you  are  all  safe!"  he  said  as  he  strolled 
up  to  the  house.  "Your  three  shots  gave  me  a  fright; 
but  as  I  heard  no  more  I  was  relieved,  for  the  signal  told 
that  you  had  not  been  taken  by  surprise,  and  as  there 
was  no  more  firing  it  was  clear  they  had  drawn  off." 

"But  how  did  you  get  to  that  side  of  the  clearing,  Mr. 
Mherion?" 

"I  followed  the  wood  till  within  a  few  hundred  yards 
&  the  clearing,  as  I  made  sure  if  there  were  hostile 
A&tives  about  they  would  be  at  the  edge  of  the  bush. 
'Chen  I  got  down  into  the  river  and  waded  along  the 
fcdge.  The  bank  in  front  here  was  not  high  enough  to 
hide  me,  though  I  stooped  as  much  as  I  could;  but  I 
reckoned  that  all  eyes  would  be  fixed  on  the  house,  and 
it  was  not  likely  I  should  be  noticed.  And  now,  what  is 
it  all  about?  I  am  sure  you  would  not  have  fired  the 
signal  unless  there  had  been  good  cause  for  the  alarm." 

Wilfrid  related  what  had  taken  place. 

"Well  done,  Miss  Marion!"  Mr.  Atherton  said  when 
he  had  finished.  "It  was  lucky  for  your  brother  that 
you  did  not  go  with  your  father  and  mother  this  morn- 
ing." 

"It  was  lucky,"  Wilfrid  agreed;  "but  at  the  same 
time,  if  I  had  been  quite  alone  I  should  have  closed  the 
shutters  and  door  as  they  came  up,  and  kept  indoors.  I 
only  ventured  to  meet  them  outside  because  I  knew  that 
Marion  had  a  gun  ready  to  hand  to  me  the  moment  I 
wanted  it." 

"Yes;  but  you  see  there  was  not  time  to  hand  you  the 
gun,  Wilfrid,  as  it  turned  out,  and  you  would  have  been 
knocked  on  the  head  to  a  certainty  if  your  sister  had  not 
come  to  your  rescue." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  £09 

"That  I  certainly  should;  and  I  know  that  I  owe 
Marion  my  life.  What  do  you  think  we  had  better  do 
now?" 

"I  do  not  think  we  can  do  anything,  Wilfrid,  beyond 
trying  to  find  out  whether  the  fellows  who  came  here 
were  alone,  or  were  part  of  larger  party.  Where  are  your 
natives?" 

"The  three  men  are  chopping,  and  Jack  went  out  with 
the  Grimstones  to  look  for  the  cattle." 

"Was  he  with  you  when  you  heard  the  shots  fired, 
Bob?" 

"He  was  with  us  a  minute  or  two  before,  and  was  fol- 
lowing a  track.  After  we  heard  the  signal  we  did  not 
think  anything  more  about  him,  and  whether  he  followed 
us  or  went  on  looking  after  the  cattle  I  do  not  know." 

"If  you  go  to  the  door,  Wilfrid,  and  give  a  loud  cooey 
it  will  bring  him  in  if  he  is  within  hearing.  You  may  be 
sure  that  he  heard  the  signal,  for  his  ears  are  keener 
than  those  of  your  men;  but  he  would  not  rush  straight 
back,  but  would  come  cautiously  through  the  woods 
according  to  his  nature." 

Wilfrid  went  to  the  door  and  gave  a  loud  cooey.  A 
mimite  later  the  Maori  issued  from  the  bush,  nearly 
opposite  the  house,  and  ran  in. 

"That's  j-ust  where  the  natives  took  to  the  bush,"  Wil- 
frid said.  "Perhaps  he  will  be  able  to  tell  us  something 
about  them." 

"I  expect  he  has  been  scouting,"  Mr.  Atherton  said, 
"and  his  coming  boldly  out  from  that  point  is  a  pretty 
sure  proof  that  the  natives  have  made  off.  Well,  Jack,  so 
you  heard  our  signal?" 

Jack  nodded. 

"And  what  kave  you  been  doing  since?"  Wilfrid 
asked. 


310  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"Jack  went  through  the  bush  fast  till  he  got  near 
house,  then,  as  the  guns  were  not  going  off,  he  kne\V 
there  could  be  no  attack;  but  thought  black  man  might 
be  lying  in  bush,  so  he  crept  and  crawled.  Presently  he 
heard  man  talk,  and  then  saw  four  Maori  walking  fast 
away  from  house.  He  only  heard  them  say  as  he  passed, 
'No  use  now;  too  many  Pakehas.  Come  another  day  and- 
finish  them  all.'  Jack  was  coming  straight  to  house 
when  he  heard  cooey." 

"You  have  seen  nothing  of  your  father  and  the  other 
two  men,  Jack?" 

The  Maori  boy  shook  [his  head.  "They  chop  wood; 
perhaps  not  heard  signal." 

"More  likely  they  heard,  but  thought  it  better  to  stay 
away,"  Wilfrid  said. 

"No  got  guns;  they  not  fighting  men,"  Jack  said,  as 
if  in  excuse. 

"There  is  something  in  that,"  Mr.  Atherton  said. 
"The  Hau-Haus  have  always  proved  themselves  even 
more  merciless  towrard  the  friendly  natives  than  toward 
the  whites;  and  these  men,  being  unarmed,  might  even 
with  the  best  disposition  in  the  world  be  afraid  to  come 
to  the  house.  At  any  rate,  I  am  glad  those  fellows  have 
made  off.  You  see,  they  were  in  a  position  to  shoot  any 
of  us  as  if  they  got  the  chance,  while  we  were  scarce  in  a 
position  to  return  the  compliment." 

"Why  not?"  James  Allen  asked. 

"Because,  although  we  could  have  now  no  doubt  what- 
ever as  to  their  intentions,  the  have  committed  no  actual 
assault.  They  tried  their  best  to  push  their  way  into 
the  house,  and  when  Wilfrid  opposed  them  one  of  them 
drew  his  club;  but  they  might  say  this  was  only  done  to 
frighten  him,  and  that  they  had  no  thought  of  using  it. 
If  they  had  fired  a  shot,  we  should  of  course  be  justified 


WAORI  AND  SETTLER.  2ll 

an  killing  them ;  but  were  we  to  begin  the  shooting,  the 
whole  tribe  they  belong  to  would  take  it  up,  and  there 
would  be  a  cry  for  vengeance;  and  even  if  nothing  were 
done  at  once,  we  should  be  marked  down  to  be  wiped 
out  at  the  first  opportunity. 

"We  shall  learn  in  a  day  or  two  whether  the  matter 
was  serious  or  not,"  Mr.  Atherton  went  on.  "If 
there  is  anything  like  a  general  defection  of  the  natives 
in  these  parts  yours  will  not  have  been  the  only  place 
threatened,  and  we  shall  hear  of  attacks  on  other  settlers. 
If  we  do  not  hear  of  such  attacks  we  can  safely  put  it 
down  that  these  four  fellows  were  mere  haphazard  pass- 
ers, like  tramps  at  home,  who  were  tempted  by  the  fact 
that  the  house  contained  only  two  persons.  In  that  case 
we  need  feel  no  further  anxiety;  for  as  you  would  be 
able  to  recognize  them  if  you  met  them  anywhere,  they 
would  not  be  likely  to  come  near  this  part  of  the  district 
again.  At  any  rate  I  will  set  off  with  the  boy  here  and 
one  of  the  dogs,  and  will  follow  up  their  tracks  and  see 
if  they  have  gone  well  a  \vr.y.  I  have  no  doubt  they  have 
done  so;  still,  it  will  be  more  comfortable  to  make  cer- 
tain of  it. ' ' 

"By  the  way,  Bob,"  Wilfrid  said,  "don't  you  take 
those  two  dogs  out  again.  I  don't  think  they  would  be 
any  good  for  hunting  cattle,  and  would  be  much  more 
likely  to  frighten  and  hunt  them  away  than  to  help  you 
to  drive  them  in.  At  any  rate  they  were  bought  as 
guards,  and  are  to  remain  about  the  house.  Shall  I  go 
with  you,  Mr.  Atherton?" 

"No,  thank  you,  Wilfrid;  Jack  will  be  enough  to  help 
me  follow  the  tracks,  for  what  he  heard  them  say  is  al- 
most proof  that  they  have  gone.  I  shall  go  round  to  my 
own  place  when  I  have  followed  them  fairly  off 
the  land,  but  will  come  round  here  to-morrow  morning, 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

•when  we  will  hold  a  general  council  of  war.  It  is  no  use 
my  coming  back  again  this  evening,  as  your  father  and 
the  others  will  not  be  here  before  that  time.  It  is  possi- 
ble that  they  will  bring  us  some  news  from  the  Mitfords. 
If  there  is  any  trouble  anywhere  along  the  river  Mitford 
is  sure  to  be  the  first  to  hear  it.  I  will  send  a  message 
back  by  Jack  when  he  has  gone  as  far  as  necessary  for 
our  purpose." 

Two  hours  later  Jack  returned  with  the  news  that  the 
Maoris  had  gone  straight  on  without  makiug  a  stop. 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Kenshaw  were  expected  back  at  about  ten 
o'clock.  They  were  to  breakfast  early  at  the  Mitfords 
and  to  come  up  with  their  light  canoe.  They  arrived, 
however,  soon  after  eight  o'clock. 

"Is  all  well?"  Mr.  Renshaw  shouted  as  ke  stepped 
from  the  boat. 

"All  well,  father,"  Marion  replied,  running  down  to 
meet  them.  "We  had  a  little  unpleasantness  yesterday, 
but  nothing  of  consequence.  What  brings  you  back  so 
early?  You  must  have  started  before  daylight." 

"Bad  news  came  in  yesterday  evening,  and  we  should 
have  come  straight  over  if  it  had  been  possible,  but  Mr. 
Mitford  would  not  let  us  leave  till  morning.  We  have 
been  very  anxious  about  you." 

"What  is  the  news?"  Wilfred  asked. 

"The  natives  murdered  two  settlers  at  a  farm  some 
four  miles  from  Mr.  Mitford 's.  Yesterday  he  received 
letters  both  from  Poverty  Bay  and  Napier  saying  that 
the  natives  were  in  a  very  disturbed  state,  that  Hau-Hau 
prophets  had  been  going  about  among  them,  and  that  in 
both  districts  there  had  been  several  murders.  Corps  of 
volunteers  are  being  raised  at  Napier,  and  they  have  sent 
to  Wellington  for  a  company  of  the  constabulary.  The 
settlers  at  Poverty  Bay  are  also  making  preparations  for 


IfAORI  AND  SETTLER.  213 

defense.  Mr.  Mitford  was  asked  to  get  all  the  colonists 
on  this  river  to  arm  and  prepare  for  an  attack.  Of 
course  this  news  was  very  alarming  in  itself,  and  when 
two  or  three  hours  later  the  news  came  in  of  the  murders 
in  our  own  settlement  we  were  naturally  most  anxious 
about  you.  However,  as  we  could  not  come  over  in  the 
dark  through  the  forest,  and  as  Mitford  pointed  out  that 
the  house  was  well  prepared  for  defense,  and  that  you 
would  certainly  be  on  the  alert  and  had  the  dogs,  who 
would  give  you  notice  of  any  body  of  men  coming,  we 
Consented  to  remain  if  he  would  send  us  home  in  the 
canoe  at  five  o'clock  in  the  morning.  And  now,  what 
is  it  that  happened  here  yesterday?" 

"It  was  nothing  very  alarming,  father.  Four  natives 
came  up  and  asked  for  food,  which  of  course  I  gave 
them.  Then  they  wanted  gin,  and  seeing  that  I  was 
alone  tried  to  push  their  way  into  the  house.  I  tried  to 
stop  them.  The  fellow  snatched  at  his  club.  As  he  did 
so  Marion  appeared  at  the  door  with  a  leveled  rifle,  and 
the  fellows,  who  had  no  guns  with  them,  took  to  their 
heels.  .  We  gave  the  alarm  signal,  and  the  Aliens  and 
Mr.  Atherton  came  over  at  once,  and  the  Grimstones  ran 
in  from  their  work.  However,  the  natives  had  made  their 
way  off,  and  I  do  not  suppose  we  shall  hear  any  more  of 
them." 

"I  don't  know,  Wilffrid, "  his  father  said.  "If  it  had 
been  only  this  affair  I  should  not  have  thought  much 
about  it.  The  natives  are  often  rude  and  insolent,  and 
these  men  might  not  have  meant  to  do  more  than  help 
themselves  to  a  bottle  of  spirits,  but  taken  with  these 
accounts  from  Napier  and  Poverty  Bay,  and  with  the 
murders  yesterday,  I  think  it  is  very  serious. ' ' 

"Mr.  Atherton  and  the  Aliens  promised  to  come  over 
at  ten  o'clock,  father,  to  chat  the  matter  over  with  you, 


214  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

and  hear  whether  you  had  brought  news  of  any  troubles 
elsewhere.  So  we  shall  have  quite  a  council.  And  now 
let  us  have  breakfast.  We  were  just  going  to  sit  down 
when  we  heard  your  call,  and  I  am  sure  you  must  be  as 
hungry  as  hunters  after  your  three  hours  on  the  water." 

Breakfast  was  scarcely  finished  when  Mr.  Atherton  and 
the  Aliens  arrived,  and  were  made  acquainted  with  the 
news  of  the  murder  of  the  two  setttlers  on  ihe  previous 
day. 

"It  is  clear,"  Mr.  Atherton  said,  "that  the  affair  here 
yesterday,  was  not,  as  I  hoped,  a  mere  incident,  such  as 
might  happen  anywhere  if  a  party  of  ruffianly  fellows 
arrived  at  a  lonely  house  which  they  thought  they  could 
rob  with  impunity.  This  sad  business  you  tell  us  of 
shows  that  there  is  a  general  movement  among  the 
natives,  the  result,  I  suppose,  of  the  arrival  of  some  emis- 
sary from  the  Hau-Haus.  It  is  an  awkward  business. 
What  is  Mr.  Mitford's  opinion  on  the  subject?" 

"He  thinks  it  will  be  well  that  all  settlers  on  the  river 
capable  of  bearing  arms  should  be  enrolled  as  a  volunteer 
corps,  and  be  in  readiness  to  turn  out  at  a  moment's 
notice.  He  is  of  opinion  that  all  those  whose  farms  lie 
at  a  distance  from  the  main  body  should  drive  in  their 
animals  and  bring  in  such  goods  as  they  can  carry  to  his 
station,  as  one  of  the  most  central.  Huts  could  be  got 
up  there,  and  the  animals  all  kept  at  night  in  his  large 
stockaded  yard.  In  case  the  natives  seem  inclined  to 
make  a  regular  attack  the  women  and  children  could  be 
sent  down  the  river  in  boats  or  put  on  board  a  ship  and 
sent  to  Napier.  Fortunately,  there  is  seldom  a  week 
without  a  craft  of  some  sort  putting  into  the  river." 

"There  is  no  doubt  that  this  would  be  the  safest  plan," 
Mr.  Atherton  said,  "but  it  would  be  a  serious  thing  for 
the  settlers  to  abandon  their  crops  and  houses  to  tha 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  215 

natives  unless  it  was  certain  that  the  danger  was  very 
.great." 

"That  is  my  opinion,"  Mr.  Renshaw  said.  "I  am 
certainly  not  disposed  to  have  the  results  of  our  labor 
destroyed  without  a  struggle." 

"Wilfrid  looked  alike  surprised  and  pleased.  "I  am 
glad  to  hear  you  say  so  father.  It  would  be  an  awful 
nuisance  and  loss  to  have  all  our  crops  destroyed  and  our 
house  burned  down,  and  to  have  to  begin  the  whole  thing 
over  again.  I  don't  see  what  would  have  been  the  use 
of  getting  everything  ready  for  defense  if  we  are  all  to 
run  away  directly  there  is  danger;  but  I  think  it  would 
be  a  good  thing  to  send  the  animals  down  to  Mr.  Mit- 
ford's,  as  he  is  good  enough  to  offer  to  take  them.  We 
might  send  down  the  three  natives  to  look  after  them,  as 
of  course  they  will  have  to  go  out  to  graze  in  the  day- 
time, and  keep  Jack  here.  I  do  not  know  about  the 
other  men,  and  one  doesn't  seem  able  to  trust  the  natives 
in  the  slightest;  but  I  feel  sure  of  Jack,  and  he  would  be 
useful  to  us  in  many  ways  in  the  house,  beside  being 
able  to  scout  in  the  woods  far  better  than  we  could  do." 

"I  think  that  you  are  right,  Mr.  Renshaw,"  Mr. 
Atherton  said.  "I  should  propose  as  an  addition  that 
the  Aliens  here  and  I  make  this  our  headquarters  while 
the  scare  lasts.  We  could  run  up  a  light  shanty  with  a 
few  hours'  work  just  behind  the  house.  The  Aliens 
could  go  over  to  their  work  during  the  day  and  return 
here  at  night,  and  I  should  wander  about  the  woods  with 
my  gun  as  usual.  I  do  not  think  we  need  fear  any  attack 
in  the  daytime.  If  it  comes  at  all  it  will  be  at  night  or 
at  early  morning.  The  natives  will  know  from  the  men 
who  were  here  that  you  are  well  armed,  and  will  try  to 
«atch  you  napping.  We  won't  be  any  more  trouble  to 
you  than  we  can  help,  and  with  the  addition  of  our  three 


1 216  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

guns  I  think  we  could  defend  ourselves  against  any 
number  of  natives.  What  do  you  think  of  my  proposal, 
lads?" 

The  Aliens  said  at  once  that  they  thought  it  was  an. 
excellent  one,  if  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Eenshaw  were  willing  to 
have  the  trouble  of  them. 

"It  will  be  no  trouble  at  all,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said, 
"and  will  be  a  very  great  comfort.  With  seven  men  to 
protect  us  Marion  and  I  shall  feel  perfectly  safe,  and  it 
will  be  in  all  ways  pleasant  to  have  you  here  with  us.  I 
do  not  see  that  you  need  build  a  hut  outside  at  all. 
There  will  be  no  difficulty  in  making  up  beds  her^  and  in 
the  kitchen,  and  then  we  shall  be  all  together." 

"But  I  do  not  propose  that  you  should  cook  for  us, 
Mrs.  Renshaw.  If  we  had  a  hut  of  our  own  our  boys 
could  do  that  for  us.  You  see,  we  are  coming  up  here 
for  our  own  defense  as  well  as  yours. ' ' 

"I  should  not  think  of  such  a  thing,"  Mrs.  Renshaw 
said  decidedly.  "There  is  no  more  trouble  in  cooking 
for  nine  than  there  is  for  six;  and,  as  I  have  said,  it  will 
be  a  real  pleasure  to  us  to  have  you  stopping  here." 

"Very  well.  Then  in  that  case,  Mrs.  Renshaw,  we 
will  accept  your  invitation.  I  will  bring  over  my  be- 
longings to-day  and  store  them  in  your  loft  above,  and 
the  Aliens  had  better  bring  over  anything  they  do  not 
want  burned  by  the  natives.  I  still  hope  that  these  out- 
rages are  the  work  of  a  few  ruffians,  and  that  the  natives 
in  general  will  not  allow  themselves  to  be  persuaded  into 
hostilities  against  us;  still,  if  the  worst  comes  to  the 
worst,  I  am  convinced  that  we  can  hold  this  house  against 
quite  as  strong  a  force  as  they  are  likely  to  bring  to  attack 
it.  There  is  one  precaution  I  should  advise  you  to  take 
at  once,  and  that  is  to  lay  in  a  store  of  water.  I  dare 
gay  you  have  got  some  empty  molasses  .and  pork  casks, 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  217 

tnat  it  if  you  not  not  bum  them  as  soon  as  you  empty 
them.  If  not  we  must  set  to  work  and  make  a  strong 
wooden  tank.  In  case  we  were  really  besieged,  it  would 
be  fatal  to  us  if  we  were  caught  without  a  supply  of 
water. ' ' 

Fortunately  there  were  three  or  four  empty  casks. 
These  were  taken  down  to  the  river  and  thoroughly 
washed,  filled  with  water,  and  rolled  up  to  the  house. 
"While  this  was  being  done,  Wilfrid,  with  the  Grimstones 
and  the  natives,  had  gone  out  and  driven  in  all  the 
animals  from  the  clearings,  and  as  soon  as  they  were 
brought  in  Wilfrid  with  the  natives  started  to  drive  them 
to  Mr.  Mitford's.  Mr.  Atherton  went  over  to  his  hut, 
and  before  night  his  two  natives  had  brought  over  all  his 
most  valuable  property,  and  the  next  day  his  hut  was 
completely  stripped.  The  Aliens  only  brought  over  a 
few  things.  Their  furniture  was  rough  and  heavy,  and 
they  contented  themselves  by  carrying  it  out  into  the 
forest  near  and  hiding  it  in  the  undergrowth.  Wilfrid 
returned  to  The  Glade  in  the  evening.  He  said  that 
many  of  the  settlers  had  come  in,  and  were  erecting 
shelters  of  hides,  canvas,  and  wood  near  Mr.  Mitford's 
house.  The  men  were  all  being  enrolled.  Officers  had 
been  appointed,  and  the  natives  were  likely  to  meet  with 
a  stout  resistance  if  they  ventured  on  hostilities. 

Mrs.  Mitford  had  sent  an  earnest  invitation  to  Mrs. 
Kenshaw  and  Marion  to  take  up  their  abode  with  her. 
Mr.  Mitford  had  approved  of  their  intention  of  holding 
the  house.  He  knew  its  capabilities  of  defense  and 
thought  that,  unless  taken  by  surprise,  they  would  be 
able  to  hold  it. 

"It  will  be  a  sort  of  outpost  for  the  colony,"  he  said, 
"and  will  add  to  our  safety;  for  if  any  strong  body  of 
natives  were  approaching  they  would  probably  attack 


218  MAORI  AND  SETTLER 

you  before  coming  on  here.  The  instant  we  hear  that 
you  are  attacked  we  will  come  up  to  aid  you.  We  shall 
be  able  to  muster  in  all  something  like  fifty  mounted 
men — a  strength  sufficient  to  meet  any  number  of  natives 
likely  to  assemble  in  these  parts." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

THE  ATTACK  ON  THE  GLADE. 

FOB  three  days  things  went  on  quietly  at  The  Glade. 
The  first  thing  in  the  morning  Jack  went  out  with  two  of 
the  dogs  and  scouted  in  the  bush.  As  soon  as  he  returned 
with  the  news  that  he  could  find  no  signs  of  natives  the 
household  broke  up.  The  Aliens  went  through  the  bush 
to  their  clearing  and  continued  their  work  of  felling 
trees.  Mr.  Atherton  sauntered  off  with  his  two  dogs 
into  the  forest  in  search  of  plants.  Wilfrid  and  the 
Grimstones  pursued  their  work  of  digging  and  planting 
iu  the  upper  part  of  the  glade.  Jack  and  the  two  dogs 
were  on  watch  round  the  house.  Mr.  Renshaw  worked 
at  his  Maori  vocabulary,  and  his  wife  and  daughter 
carried  on  the  business  of  the  house. 

At  night  two  of  the  dogs  were  chained  up  outside ;  the 
other  two  slept  in  the  kitchen,  while  Jack  was  allowed  to 
sleep  up  in  the  loft.  At  daybreak  on  the  fourth  day  the 
party  were  awoke  by  a  growl  from  one  of  the  dogs  out- 
side. Each  of  the  occupants  of  the  house  had  been 
allotted  his  post,  and  in  a  minute  all  were  standing  rifle 
in  hand,  at  the  windows  they  were  to  guard.  Mr.  Ather- 
ton opened  the  front  door  and  went  out,  followed  by 
Jack.  It  was  just  getting  light  enough  to  make  out 
objects  in  the  clearing.  Everything  seemed  quiet. 

"What  is  it,  Ponto?"  he  said  to  his  dog,  who  was 
standing  with  his  eyes  fixed  upon  the  bush  to  the  right, 


220  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

his  ears  pricked  and  his  hair  bristling.  "What  do  you 
hear,  old  fellow?" 

The  dog  uttered  another  deep  growl.  A  moment  later 
there  was  a  loud  yell.  A  number  of  dark  figures  leaped 
from  the  edge  of  the  bush  and  ran  toward  the  house. 
They  had  made  out  Mr.  Atherton's  figure,  and  knew 
that  their  hope  of  surprising  the  place  was  at  an  end. 
Mr.  Atherton  leveled  his  rifle  and  fired,  and  one  of  the 
natives  fell  dead.  Then  stooping  he  quietly  unfastened 
the  dog's  chain  from  his  collar,  telling  Jack  to  do  the 
same  to  the  other  dog,  "Come  into  the  house,  sir,"  he 
ordered;  "it's  no  use  your  being  here  to  be  shot." 

His  shot  had  been  answered  by  a  dozen  rifles,  but 
fired  in  haste,  as  the  men  were  running,  none  of  the  bul- 
lets struck  him.  Four  shots  were  fired  simultaneously 
from  the  windows  looking  toward  the  bush,  and.  three 
more  natives  fell.  This  proof  of  the  accuracy  of  the  de- 
fenders' shooting  staggered  the  Maoris  and  they  paused 
for  a  moment,  then,  moved  by  the  exhortations  of  their 
chief,  they  again  rushed  forward.  The  whole  of  the  de- 
fenders were  now  gathered  at  the  windows  facing  them, 
and  seven  shots  were  fired  in  quick  succession.  Three 
natives  fell  dead.  Four  others  were  wounded,  two  so 
seriously  that  they  had  to  be  carried  off  by  their  com- 
rades, who  at  once  ran  back  to  the  bush,  and  from  ita 
edge  opened  a  straggling  fire  against  the  house.  The 
shutters  that  had  been  thrown  open  at  the  two  windows 
were  at  once  closed. 

"This  is  what  I  call  beating  them  off  handsomely,1* 
Mr.  Atherton  said.  "Now  you  see  the  advantage,  "Wil- 
frid, of  the  pains  you  have  taken  to  learn  to  shoot 
straight.  There  have  been  only  eleven  shots  fired,  and  I 
fancy  there  are  at  least  ten  casualties  among  them.  X 
call  that  a  very  pretty  average  for  young  hands." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER  221 

''What  will  they  do  next,  do  you  think?"  Mr.  Ren- 
»naw  asked. 

"They  will  not  try  another  open  attack,  I  fancy.  We 
may  expect  them  to  try  to  work  round  us.  Jack,  do  you 
go  to  the  other  side  of  the  house  and  keep  a  sharp  look- 
out on  t  e  bush  there.  Wilfrid,  you  take  post  at  the 
•windows  we  fired  from,  and  peep  out  from  time  to  time 
through  the  loopholes  in  the  shutters.  Between  times 
keep  yourself  out  of  the  line  of  fire.  The  betting  is  a 
thousand  to  one  against  a  bullet  coming  through,  still 
there  is  no  use  in  running  any  risk  if  it  can  be  avoided. 
Jim  Allen,  you  and  I  will  take  up  our  place  at  the  back 
of  the  house ;  they  may  try  to  work  up  among  the  crops. 
In  fact,  I  expect  that  is  the  course  they  will  take  unless 
.they  have  had  enough  of  it  already.  Bob  Grimstone, 
you  keep  watch  at  one  of  the  front  windows.  I  don'fc 
think  there  is  much  chance  of  attack  from  that  side,  but 
it  is  as  well  to  keep  a  lookout.  Some  of  them  may  at- 
tempt to  cross  to  the  opposite  bush,  keeping  down  by 
the  river.  The  other  three  guns  will  be  in  reserve." 

"Don't  you  think  they  are  likely  to  go  away  now  that 
they  have  suffered  so  much  loss?"  Mrs.  IJenshaw  asked. 

"No,  I  cannot  say  I  think  so,  Mrs.  Eenshaw.  The 
Maoris,  from  what  I  have  heard,  always  try  to  get  revenge 
for  the  death  of  a  kinsman  or  fellow-tribesman.  Of 
course  it  depends  how  many  of  them  there  are.  I  should 
judge  that  there  were  about  thirty  showed  themselves. 
If  that  is  all  there  are  of  them  I  should  say  they  would 
not  attack  again  at  present.  They  must  know  by  our 
firing  that  there  are  seven  or  eight  of  us  here.  But  I 
should  not  rely  altogether  even  upon  that,  for  the  natives 
regard  themselves  as  fully  a  match,  man  for  man,  with 
the  whites,  and  in  their  fights  with  our  troops  we  were 
often  greatly  superior  in  numbers.  Still,  it  is  one  thing 


222  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

to  defend  a  strong  pah  and  another  to  attack  resoiut* 
men  snugly  sheltered  behind  bullet-proof  logs.  Thejf 
may  %ry  again,  but  if  there  are  any  more  of  their  people 
•within  reasonable  distance  I  fancy  they  will  be  inora 
likely  to  send  for  them  and  keep  a  sharp  watch  round 
us  until  they  come  up.  Now  I  will  go  to  my  post. " 

For  a  quarter  of  an  hour  the  two  watchers  at  the  back 
of  the  house  saw  no  signs  of  life.  Then  Mr.  Atherton 
said:  "There  is  a  movement  among  that  corn,  Jim.  Do 
you  see,  there — just  in  a  line  with  that  big  tree  at  the 
other  end  of  the  clearing?  It  is  moving  in'several  places. 
Call  your  brother  and  young  Grimstone  to  this  side  of 
the  house,  and  do  you  all  take  steady  aim  at  these  mov- 
ing patches.  I  will  fire  first.  I  think  I  can»  pretty  well 
mark  the  spot  where  one  of  the  fellows  is  making  his  wa;/ 
down.  If  I  hit  him  the  others  are  likely  enough  to  start 
up.  Then  will  be  your  time  for  taking  a  shot  at  them. " 

As  soon  as  the  others  were  in  position  and  ready  Mr. 
Atherton  fired.  There  was  a  yell.  A  dark  figure  sprang 
up,  stood  for  an  instant-,  and  then  fell  back.  Almost  at 
the  same  instant  half  a  dozen  others  leaped  to  their  feet 
and  dashed  away.  Three  rifles  were  fired.  Two  of  the 
natives  fell,  but  one  almost  immediately  rose  again  and 
followed  the  others. 

"You  ought  to  have  done  better  than  that  at  a  hun- 
dred yards, "  Mr.  Atherton  said.  "You  two  lads  ought 
to  have  practiced  a  little  more  steadily  than  you  have. 
It  was  Grimstone  brought  down  that  man.  His  rifle 
went  off  a  second  before  yours,  and  the  man  was  falling 
when  you  fired.  The  great  thing  in. firing  at  natives  is 
that  every  shot  should  tell.  It  is  the  certainty  of  the 
thing  that  scares  them.  If  they  hear  bullets  singing 
about  with  only  occasionally  a  man  dropping  they  gain 
confidence,  but  a  slow,  steady  fire  with  every  shot  telling 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.        ,  223 

shakes  their  nerves,  and  makes  them  very  careful  of 
showing  themselves. " 

Half  an  hour  later  Jack  reported  he  could  see  figures 
moving  in  the  bush  on  his  side,  and  soon  afterward  a  fire 
was  opened  on  the  hut  from  that  direction. 

"They  have  worked  round  the  end  of  the  clearing," 
Mr.  Atherton  said.  "Now  it  is  our  turn  to  begin  to  fire. 
We  have  let  them  have  their  own  way  long  enough,  and 
there  is  plenty  of  light  now,  and  I  think  we  shall  soon 
be  able  to  put  a  stop  to  this  game.  Now,  Wilfrid,  do 
you  with  one  of  the  Grimstones  take  up  your  place  at  the 
loopholes  at  that  end  of  the  house,  and  I  with  the  others 
will  take  up  mine  on  the  right.  Keep  a  sharp  lookout, 
and  do  not  throw  away  a  shot  if  you  can  help  it.  As  we 
have  not  answered  their  fire  they  have  probably  got  care- 
less, and  are  sure  to  expose  themselves  as  they  stand  up 
to  fire.  Now,  Bob,"  he  went  on,  as  he  took  his  place  at 
the  loophole,  "I  will  take  the  first  who  shows  himself.  I 
do  not  think  you  would  miss,  but  I  am  sure  that  I  shall 
not,  and  it  is  important  not  to  make  a  mistake  the  first 
time." 

Half  a  minute  later  a  native  showed  his  head  and 
shoulders  over  a  bush  as  he  rose  to  fire.  Before  he  could 
raise  his  gun  to  his  shoulder  he  fell  with  a  bullet  through 
his  head  from  Mr.  Atherton's  unerring  rifle.  That  gen- 
tleman quietly  reloaded. 

"You  had  better  take  the  next  again,  sir,"  Bob  Grim- 
stone  said  quietly.  "I  do  not  suppose  I  should  miss, 
but  I  might  do.  I  do  not  reckon  on  hitting  a  small  mark 
more  than  eight  out  of  twelve  times. " 

Tt  was  nearly  four  minutes  before  another  native 
•howed  himself. 

"I  think,  sir,  there  is  one  standing  behind  that  big 
tree  twenty  yards  in  the  bush.  I  thought  I  saw  some- 
thing move  behind  it  just  now." 


224  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"I  will  watch  it,  Bob,"  Mr.  Atherton  said,  rmo/ng  his 
rifle  to  his  shoulder  and  looking  along  it  through  the 
loophole. 

Two  minutes  passed,  and  then  a  head  and  shoulder 
appeared  from  behind  the  tree.  Instantaneously  Mr. 
Atherton 's  rifle  cracked,  and  the  native  fell  forward,  his 
gun  going  off  as  he  did  so. 

"We  need  not  stand  here  any  longer,"  Mr.  Atherton 
said  quietljr,  "there  will  be  no  .more  shooting  from  that 
Bide  for  some  time." 

Mr.  Atherton  went  to  the  other  end  of  the  house. 

"How  are  you  getting  on,  Wilfrid?" 

"We  have  had  three  shots.  I  fired  twice  and  Bill 
once.  •  I  think  I  missed  once  altogether,  the  other  time 
the  native  went  down.  Bill  wounded  his  man — hit  him 
in  the  shoulder,  I  think.  They  haven't  fired  since." 

"Then  you  can  put  down  your  guns  for  the  present. 
Mrs.  Eenshaw  has  just  told  me  that  breakfast  is  ready." 

Mrs.  Renshaw  and  Marion  had  indeed  gone  quietly 
about  the  work  of  preparing  breakfast  for  their  defenders. 

"So  you  are  a  noncombatant  this  morning,  Miss 
Marion?"  Mr.  Atberton  said  as  he  took  his  place  with 
the  rest  of  the  party,  with  the  exception  of  the  Grim- 
stones,  who  were  placed  on  the  watch,  at  the  table. 

"Yes,"  the  girl  replied;  "if  I  thought  there  were  any 
danger  of  the  natives  fighting  their  way  into  the  house, 
of  course  I  should  do  my  best  to  help  to  defend  it ;  but  I 
do  not  think  that  there  is  the  least  fear  of  such  a  thing, 
so  I  am  quite  content  to  leave  it  to  you.  It  does  not" 
4seem  to  me  that  a  woman  has  any  business  to  fight  unless 
absolutely  driven  to  do  so  in  defense  of  her  life.  If  the 
natives  really  do  come  on  and  get  up  close  to  the  house 
I  think  that  I  ought  to  help  to  keep  them  out ;  but  it  is 
a  dreadful  thing  to  have  to  shoot  any  one — at  least  it 
seems  so  to  me." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  225 

"It  is  not  a  pleasant  thing  when  considered  in  cold 
blood;  but  when  men  go  out  of  their  way  to  take  one's 
life,  I  do  not  feel  the  slightest  compunction  myself  in 
taking  theirs.  These  natives  have  no  cause  of  complaint 
against  us.  They  have  assembled  and  attacked  the  set- 
tlement in  a  treacherous  manner,  and  without  the  slight- 
est warning  of  their  intentions.  Their  intention  is  to 
slay  man,  woman  and  child  without  mercy,  and  I  there- 
fore regard  them  as  human  tigers,  and  no  more  deserv- 
ing of  pity.  At  the  same  time  I  can  quite  enter  into 
your  feelings,  and  think  you  are  perfectly  right  not  to 
take  any  active  part  in  the  affair  unless  we  are  pressed 
by  the  savages.  Then,  of  course,  you  would  be  not  only 
justified,  but  it  would,  I  think,  be  your  absolute  duty  to 
do  your  best  to  defend  the  place." 

"Do  you  think  that  it  is  all  over  now,  Mr.  Atherton?" 
Mrs.  Renshaw  asked.  "We  regard  you  as  our  command- 
ing officer,  for  you  are  the  only  one  here  who  ever  saw  a 
shot  fired  in  anger  before  our  voyage  out,  and  your  ex- 
perience is  invaluable  to  us  now.  Indeed,  both  my  hus- 
band and  myself  feel  that  it  is  to  your  suggestion  that 
we  should  put  up  the  strong  shutters  and  doors  that  we 
owe  the  lives  of  our  children ;  for  had  it  not  been  for 
that,  those  men  who  came  first  might  have  taken  the 
house  when  they  found  them  alone  in  it." 

"I  cannot  accept  your  thanks  for  that,  Mrs.  Renshaw. 
It  may  be  if  this  goes  on  that  the  shutters  will  be  found 
of  the  greatest  use,  and  indeed  they  have  probably 
stopped  a  good  many  balls  from  coming  in  and  so  saved 
some  of  our  lives,  but  on  the  first  occasion  Wilfrid  and 
your  daughter  owed  their  lives  to  their  being  prepared 
and  armed,  while  the  natives,  relying  upon  surprising 
them,  had  left  their  guns  in  the  wood.  The  shutters 
were  not  closed  until  after  they  made  off,  and  had  they 


226  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

not  been  there  those  four  natives  could  never  have  passed 
across  the  clearing  and  reached  the  house  under  the  fire 
of  two  cool  and  steady  marksmen. 

"Aa  to  your  first  question,  -whether  it  is  all  over,  it 
depends  entirely  upon  whether  the  party  who  attacked 
us  are  the  main  force  of  the  natives.  If  so,  I  do  not 
think  they  will  renew  the  attack  at  present.  They  have 
suffered  terribly,  and  know  now  that  it  is  almost  certain 
death  for  any  of  them  to  show  themselves  'within  range 
of  our  guns.  They  have  lost  fourteen  or  fifteen  men, 
and  I  do  not  think  they  numbered  above  forty  at  first. 
But  if  they  are  only  a  detached  party,  and  a  main  body 
o<  the  tribe  is  making  an  attack  elsewhere,  perhaps  upon 
the  settlers  at  Mitford'Sj  a  messenger  will  by  this  time 
have  been  dispatched  to  them,  and  we"  may  all  have  a 
much  more  serious  attack  to  encounter  to-night  or  to- 
morrow morning. 

"I  have  no  idea  what  tribe  these  fellows  belong  to;  but 
there  are  few  of  the  tribes  that  cannot  put  five  hundred 
men  in  the  field,  while  some  can  put  five  times  that  num- 
ber. So,  you  see,  we  are  entirely  in  the  dark.y  Of 
course  things  will  depend  a  good  deal  as  to  how  the  main 
body,  if  there  is  a  main  body,  has  fared.  If  they  have 
been,  as  I  feel  sure  they  will  be  if  they  venture  to  attack 
Mitford's  place,  roughly  handled,  the  whole  body  may 
return  home.  The  natives  have  proved  themselves 
through  the  war  admirable  in  defense;  but  they  have 
by  no  means  distinguished  themselves  in  the  attack,  and 
have  not  so  far  as  I  remember,  succeeded  in  a  single  in- 
stance in  capturing  a  position  stoutly  held. 

"It  is  one  thing  to  fight  behind  strong  palisades,  de- 
fended by  interior  works  skillfully  laid  out,  and  quite 
another  to  advance  across  the  open  to  assault  a  defended 
position ;  and  my  belief  is  that,  if  they  are  beaten  at 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  %%) 

Mitford's  as  well  as  here,  we  shall  hear  no  more  of  them 
at  present.  Mind,  I  do  not  say  that  after  this  I  think 
that  it  would  be  safe  to  continue  to  live  in  an  outlying 
station  like  this  until  matters  have  again  settled  down  in 
this  part  of  the  island.  No  doubt,  as  soon  as  the  news 
is  known  at  Napier  and  Wellington  a  force  will  be  sent 
here,  or  perhaps  to  Poverty  Bay,  which  is  only  some 
twenty  miles  higher  up  the  coast,  and  is,  I  think,  from 
what  I  hear,  better  suited  as  the  base  of  operations  than 
this  river  would  be. 

"This  force  will  no  doubt  make  an  expedition  inland 
to  punish  the  tribes  connected  with  this  affair,  for  it  is 
of  course  most  important  to  let  the  natives  on  this  side 
of  the  island  see  that  they  cannot  attack  our  settlements 
with  impunity.  After  that  is  done  it  will  no  doubt  be 
safe  to  recommence  operations  here;  but  at  present  I  fear 
you  will  find  it  necessary  for  a  time  to  abandon  the  place, 
and  either  take  up  your  abode  at  the  Mitford's,  or  go 
down  to  Napier  or  Wellington.  This  will,  of  course, 
involve  the  loss  of  the  crops  you  have  planted,  and  possi- 
bly of  your  house;  but  as  you  have  saved  all  your 
animals,  the  loss  will  be  comparatively  small  and  easily 
repaired. " 

"Whether  large  or  small,"  Mr.  Benshaw  said,  "we 
cannot  hesitate  over  it.  It  will,  as  you  say,  be  out  of 
the  question  to  live  here  exposed  at  any  instant  to  attack, 
and  never  knowing  what  the  day  or  night  may  bring 
forth.  The  house  has  not  cost  above  a  hundred  pounds, 
and  we  must  put  up  with  that  loss.  We  are  fortunately 
in  a  very  much  better  position  than  most  settlers  in  hav- 
ing a  reserve  to  fall  back  upon,  so  there  will  be  no  hesi- 
tation on  my  part  in  taking  this  step.  The  furniture  is 
worth  more  than  the  hut,  but  I  suppose  that  must  go 
too." 


228  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"Not  necessarily,  Mr.  Renshaw.  We  cannot  get  away 
now ;  for  although  we  can  defend  ourselves  well  enough 
here,  we  could  not  make  our  way  down  through  the 
woods  to  Mitford's  without  great  risks.  They  are  accus- 
tomed to  bush  fighting,  and  as  they  are  still  five  to  one 
against  us,  it  would  be  a  very  serious  matter  to  try  to 
fight  our  way  down.  I  think  that  we  have  no  choice 
but  to  remain  where  we  are  until  we  are  either  relieved 
or  are  perfectly  certain  that  they  have  made  off.  In 
either  case  we  should  then  have  ample  time  to  make  our 
preparations  for  retiring,  and  could  strip  the  house  and 
send  everything  down  in  boats  or  bullock-carts,  and 
might  even  get  up  the  potatoes,  and  cut  such  of  the  crops 
as  are  ripe,  or  nearly  ripe,  and  send  them  down  also. 

"The  corps  that  has  been  got  up  among  the  settlers 
will  be  sure  to  join  in  the  expedition  for  the  punishment 
of  these  scoundrels,  and  indeed  it  is  most  probable  that 
all  able-bodied  settlers  will  be  called  out.  In  any  case  I 
think  I  shall  'chip  in,'  as  the  Americans  say.  I  shall 
have  an  opportunity  of  going  into  little  explored  tracts 
in  the  interior  and  adding  to  my  collections ;  and  to  tell 
you  the  truth,  I  feel  anxious  to  take  a  part  in  revenging 
the  massacres  that  these  treacherous  natives  have  com- 
mitted. Unless  they  get  a  sharp  lesson  the  lives  of  the 
settlers  in  all  the  outlying  districts  in  the  colony  will  be 
unsafe." 

Wilfrid  glanced  at  Mr.  Atherton  and  nodded,  to  inti- 
mate that  he  should  be  willing  and  ready  to  join  in  such 
an  expedition ;  but  he  thought  it  better  to  say  nothing 
at  present.  The  two  Aliens,  however,  said  at  once  that 
if  obliged  to  quit  their  clearing  they  would  join  one  of 
the  irregular  corps  for  the  defense  of  the  colony. 

"We  shall  get  pay  and  rations,"  James  Allen  said, 
"and  that  will  keep  us  going  until  things  get  settled; 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  229 

and  I  should  certainly  like  to  lend  a  hand  in  punishing 
these  treacherous  natives.  It  is  horrible  to  think  of 
their  stealing  upon  defenseless  people  at  night  and  mur- 
dering men,  women,  and  children.  It  is  as  bad  as  the 
Sepoy  mutiny.  And  now  the  troops  have  been  almost 
all  withdrawn,  and  the  colony  has  been  left  to  shift  for 
itself,  I  think  it  is  no  more  than  the  duty  of  all  who 
have  no  special  ties  to  aid  in  the  defense  against  these 
fanatical  Hau-Haus. " 

"Very  well,  then,  James;  we  will  march  side  by  side, 
and  when  you  see  me  give  out  you  shall  carry  me." 

"That  would  be  worse  than  fighting  the  natives," 
James  Allen  replied  with  a  laugh.  "If  I  were  you,  Mx\ 
Atherton,  I  should  engage  ten  natives  to  accompany  me 
with  poles  and  a  hammock." 

"That  is  not  a  bad  idea,"  Mr.  Atherton  said  calmly, 
"and  possibly  I  may  adopt  it;  but  in  that  case  I  shall 
have  to  go  as  a  free  lance,  for  I  fear  it  would  scarcely  be 
conducive  to  military  discipline  to  see  one  of  an  armed 
band  carried  along  in  the  ranks." 

None  would  have  thought  from  the  cheerful  tone  of 
the  conversation  that  the  party  were  beleaguered  by  a 
bloodthirsty  enemy.  But  Mr.  Atherton  purposely  gave 
a  lively  tone  to  the  conversation  to  keep  up  their  spirits. 
He  felt,  as  he  expressed  himself,  perfectly  confident  that 
they  could  beat  off  any  attack  in  the  daytime ;  but  he 
knew  that  if  their  assailants  were  largely  reinforced,  and 
the  place  attacked  by  night,  the  position  would  be  a  very 
Berious  one.  He  even  was  convinced  that  the  assailants 
would  not  be  able  to  force  their  way  in,  but  they  would 
assuredly  try  to  fire  the  house;  and  although  the  solid 
logs  would  be  difficult  to  ignite,  the  matchboard  cover- 
ing and  the  roof  would  both  readily  catch  fire.  How- 
ever, his  hope  lay  in  preventing  the  natives  from  firing 


230  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

it,  as  it  would  be  difficult/  in  the  extreme  to  bring   ujk 
burning  branches  under  the  fire  of  the  defenders. 

"It  is  a  pity  now,  Wilfrid,"  he  said  to  the  lad  after 
breakfast  was  over,  and  they  had  taken  up  their  place 
together  at  one  of  the  windows,  "that  we  did  not  dio- 
suade  your  father  from  putting  that  boarding  to  the  logs. 
You  did  not  intend  to  have  it  at  first,  and  now  it  adds  a 
good  deal  to  our  danger.  The  only  thing  I  am  afraid  of 
is  fire,  though  I  own  I  do  not  think  that  there  is  much 
chance  of  any  of  them  getting  up  with  a  lighted  brand 
under  the  fire  of  our  rifles.  If  the  natives  were  not  in 
the  bush  at  the  present  moment,  I  should  say  that  the 
best  thing  by  far  to  do  would  be  for  all  hands  to  set  to 
work  to  tear  off  the  match-boarding,  and  to  get  down 
the  whole  of  the  covering  of  the  roof;  they  could  not 
well  hurt  us  then. " 

"Shall  we  do  it  at  once,  Mr.  Atherton?" 

"They  would  shoot  us  down  at  their  leisure,  Wilfrid. 
No,  that  is  not  to  be  thought  of.  We  must  run  the 
risk  of  fire  now;  and  I  feel,  as  I  said,  pretty  confident 
that  we  are  too  good  shots  to  let  men  with  fire  get  up  to 
the  walls.  I  wish  we  could  send  down  word  to  Mitford's 
that  we  are  besieged  here.  Of  course,  if  he  is  attacked 
himself  he  could  not  help  us ;  but  if  he  is  not,  I  know  he 
would  come  out  at  once  with  a  strong  party  to  our  relief. 
I  wonder  whether  that  native  boy  of  yours  would  try  to 
carry  a  message.  None  of  us  would  have  a  chance  of 
getting  through,  but  these  fellows  can  crawl  like  snakes, 
and  by  working  up  through  the  crops  to  the  upper  end 
of  the  glade  he  might  gain  the  bush  unobserved." 

"I  will  ask  him  anyhow,"  Wilfrid  said. 

Jack  on  being  promised  a  new  suit  of  clothes  and  a 
present  in  money  if  he  would  carry  a  note  through  to 
Mr.  Mitford,  at  once  undertook  the  mission.  Mr.  Ken- 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  23 1 

Bhaw  on  being  told  what  was  arranged,  wrote  a  not« 
stating  their  position,  and  Jack,  divesting  himself  of  th« 
greater  portion  of  his  clothes,  crept  out  through  the 
door  at  the  back  of  the  house,  and  lying  down  at  once  be- 
gan to  crawl  through  the  potato  patch  toward  the  upper 
end  of  the  clearing.  From  the  loopholes  of  the  windows 
the  defenders  watched  his  progress.  Although  aware  of 
his  approximate  position  they  were  soon  unable  to  trace 
his  progress. 

"He  ^will'do,"  Mr.  Atherton  said;  "if  we,  knowing 
the  line  he  is  taking,  can  see  nothing  move,  you  may  be 
sure  that  those  fellows  in  the  bush  will  not  be  able  to 
make  him  out.  Well,  we  shall  have  assistance  in  four  or 
five  hours  if  Mitford's  hands  are  free." 

A  quarter  of  an  hour  passed  and  all  was  still  quiet. 

"He  is  in  the  bush  by  this  time,"  Mr.  Atherton  said; 
"now  we  can  take  matters  easy." 

An  occasional  shot  was  fired  from  the  bush,  and  shouts 
raised,  which  Mr.  Renshaw  interpreted  to  be  threats  of 
death  and  extermination. 

"They  say  that  all  the  white  men  are  to  be  driven  into 
the  s'ea — not  one  left  alive  on  the  island." 

"Well,  we  shall  see  about  that,"  Mr.  Atherton  said; 
"they  are  not  getting  on  very  fast  at  present." 

As  time  went  on  it  was  only  the  occasional  crack  of  a 
gun,  accompanied  by  the  thud  of  a  bullet  against  the  logs, 
that  told  that  the  natives  were  still  present.  They  now 
never  raised  themselves  to  fire,  but  kept  well  back  in  the 
bush,  shifting  their  position  after  each  shot.  Time 
passed  somewhat  slowly  inside,  until  about  four  o'clock 
in  the  afternoon  the  sharp  crack  of  a  rifle  was  heard. 

"There  is  Mitford!"  Mr.  Atherton  exclaimed;  "that 
is  not  a  Maori  gun.  Man  the  loopholes  again!  We  must 
prevent  any  of  the  fellows  on  the  other  side  crossing  to 


232  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

the  assistance  of  their  friends,  and  give  it  to  the  others 
hot  if  they  are  driven  out  oi  the  shelter  of  the  bush." 

The  rifle-shpt  was  speedily  followed  by  others,  and 
then  came  the  deeper  report  of  the  Maori  muskets.  Eng- 
lish shouts  were  heard,  mingled  with  the  yells  of  the 
natives.  The  fight  was  evidently  sharp,  for  Jack  had  led 
the  relieving  party  down  upon  the  rear  of  the  natives 
engaged  in  attacking  the  house  from  the  left.  The  latter 
began  to  fall  back,  and  the  defenders  of  the  house  pres- 
ently caught  sight  of  their  figures  as  they  flitted  from 
tree  to  tree. 

"We  must  be  careful,"  Mr.  Atherton  said,  "for  every 
bullet  that  misses  might  strike  our  friends.  I  think  that 
you  had  all  better  reserve  your  fire  till  they  make  a  break 
across  the  open.  You  can  see  by  the  direction  they  are 
firing  and  the  sound  of  the  rifles  Mitford  is  closing  in  on 
both  their  flanks  so  as  to  drive  them  out  of  the  bush.  I 
can  trust  myself  not  to  miss,  and  will  pick  them  off  when 
I  see  any  of  them  sheltering  on  this  side  of  the  trees. 
There  is  a  fellow  there  just  going  to  fire."  His  rifle 
cracked,  and  the  native  fell  among  the  bushes. 

This  completed  the  scare  of  the  natives,  who  had  al- 
ready been  much  disconcerted  at  the  unexpected  attack 
made  upon  them.  The  leader  of  the  party  shouted  an 
order,  and  the  whole  of  them  made  a  sudden  rush  through 
the  bush  down  toward  the  river.  Three  or  four  fell  be- 
neath the  rifles  of  the  whites  on  that  side  of  them,  but 
the  rest  burst  through  and  continued  their  course  down 
to  the  river,  and,  plunging  in,  swam  to  the  other  side 
without  once  giving  the  defenders  of  the  house  the 
chance  of  a  shot  at  them. 

"Now  we  can  sally  out,"  Mr.  Renshaw  said. 

The  door  was  opened,  and  they  hurried  out  just  as  a 
party  of  whites  issued  from  the  wood  and  ran  toward  the 
house. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  233 

"Thanks  for  your  speedy  aid,  Mitford!"  Mr.  Kenshaw 
exclaimed  as  he  wrung  the  hand  of  the  settler. 

"You  are  heartily  welcome,  my  dear  sir,  A  party  was 
just  setting  off  to  see  how  you  had  fared  when  your 
native  boy  arrived  with  your  note,  and  it  was  a  great 
relief  to  us  to  know  that  you  had  repulsed  their  attack 
with  such  heavy  loss  to  them ;  I  am  afraid  that  several 
others  have  not  fared  so  well.  Two  or  three  native  serv- 
ants have  come  in  this  morning  with  news  of  massacres 
of  whole  families,  they  themselves  having  managed  to 
make  their  escape  in  the  confusion ;  and  I  am  afraid  that 
we  shall  hear  of  other  similar  cases.  Your  gallant  de- 
fense of  your  station  has  been  of  most  important  service 
to  us  all.  There  is  no  doubt  that  it  saved  us  from  an 
attack  at  our  place.  There  were  a  good  many  natives  in 
the  bush  round  us  this  morning  yelling  and  shouting, 
but  they  did  not  venture  on  an  attack;  and  I  have  no 
doubt  they  were  waiting  for  the  arrival  of  the  party  told 
off  to  attack  your  place  on  their  way.  Do  you  think  that 
there  are  any  of  them  still  in  the  bush  on  the  other 
Bide?" 

"I  should  hardly  think  so,"  Mr.  Atherton  replied. 
"There  must  have  been  fully  half  of  them  in  the  party 
you  attacked,  and  the  others  are  hardly  likely  to  have 
waited  after  they  saw  you  had  defeated  their  friends; 
but  I  think  that  it  would  be  as  well  for  a  party  of  us  to 
ascertain,  for  if  they  are  still  lurking  there  some  of  us 
may  be  shot  down  as  we  move  about  outside  the  house. 
We  are  quite  strong  enough  now  to  venture  upon  such  a 
Btep." 

"I  think  so,  too,"  Mr.  Mitford  agreed.  "There  are 
ten  men  beside  m*self  and  your  party.  We  had  better 
leave  four  here,  the  rest  of  us  will  make  a  dash  down  to 
the  edge  of  the  bush  and  then  skirmish  through  it." 


234  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Mr.  Renshaw,  the  two  Grimstones,  and  one  of  the  set- 
tlers were  appointed  to  remain  behind  to  guard  tho 
house,  and  the  rest  of  the  party  then  dashed  at  full  speed 
across  the  glade  to  the  edge  of  the  bush.  Not  a  shot  waa 
fired  as  they  did  so,  and  having  once  gained  the  shelter 
they  advanced  through  the  trees.  After  pushing  for- 
ward for  half  a  mile  they  came  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
Maoris  had  retreated.  Many  signs'  were  seen  of  their 
presence.  There  were  marks  of  blood  here  and  there, 
and  the  bushes  were  broken  down  where  they  had  car- 
ried off  those  who  had  fallen  killed  or  wounded  in  the 
bush ;  the  bodies  of  those  who  had  fallen  in  the  open  still 
remained  there. 

Upon  the  return  of  the  party  Mr.  Mitford  was  informed 
of  the  determination  that  had  been  arrived  at.  This  met 
with  his  cordial  approval. 

"I  think,  Mrs.  Renshaw,"  he  said,  "that  the  best  plan 
will  be  for  you  and  your  husband  and  daughter  to  return 
at  once  with  me.  I  will  leave  a  couple  of  my  men  here 
with  your  garrison,  and  in  the  morning  will  come  out 
with  a  strong  party  and  three  or  four  bullock  drays  to 
fetch  in  all  your  portable  property.  They  can  make 
another  trip  for  your  potatoes  and  such  of  your  crops  aa 
can  be  got  in.  After  the  sharp  lesson  the  natives  have 
had  here  they  are  not  likely  to  venture  in  this  neighbor- 
hood again  for  some  time ;  and,  indeed,  now  that  they 
find  that  the  whole  settlement  it  aroused  and  on  its  guard 
I  doubt  whether  we  shall  hear  anything  more  of  them  at 
present,  and  possibly  you  may,  when  matters  settle  down 
again,  find  your  house  just  as  it  is  left." 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Renshaw  agreed  to  the  plan  proposed, 
«nd  in  a  quarter  of  an  hour  the  party  started,  leaving 
The  Glade  under  the  protection  of  the  garrison  of  eight 
men.  The  night  passed  off  quietly,  and  at  daybreak  all 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  235 

set  to  work  to  get  up  the  potatoes  and  to  cut  down  the 
crops  that  were  sufficiently  ripe.  At  nine  o'clock  the 
wagons  arrived,  and  the  furniture  and  stores  were  loaded 
up.  By  twelve  o'clock  next  day  the  work  in  the  fields 
was  completed  and  the  wagons  again  loaded.  The  house 
was  then  locked  up  and  the  whole  party  proceeded  to  the 
settlement.  They  found  on  their  arrival  that  a  strong 
stockade  had  been  erected  near  Mr.  Mitford's  house,  and 
that  rough  tents  and  huts  had  been  got  up  there  for  the 
use  of  the  settlers;  the  whole  of  the  animals  belonging 
to  the  various  farmers  on  the  river  had  been  driven  into 
the  stockaded  inclosure  behind  the  house. 

Here  it  was  decided  that  all  the  settlers  should  remain 
until  help  arrived  from  Wellington  or  Napier,  but  in  the 
meantime  twenty-five  of  the  younger  men  were  enrolled 
as  a  volunteer  corps ;  a  Mr.  Purcell,  who  had  served  for 
some  years  as  an  officer  in  the  army,  being  unanimously 
elected  to  command.  There  still  remained  enough  men 
capable  of  bearing  arms  to  defend  the  stockade  in  case  of 
attack  during  the  absence  of  the  corps.  Wilfrid  and  the 
two  Aliens  were  among  those  who  enrolled  themselves. 
Mr.  Atherton  said  that  he  fully  intended  to  accompany 
them  if  possible  upon  any  expedition  they  might  make, 
but  that  he  should  not  become  a  member  of  the  corps. 

"You  may  have  long  marches,"  he  said,  "through  the 
bush,  or  may,  when  the  reinforcements  arrive,  be  called 
upon  to  make  an  expedition  into  the  hill  country  to 
punish  the  natives.  I  could  not  possibly  keep  up  with 
you  during  a  heavy  day's  marching,  so  I  shall,  like  Hal 
of  the  Wynd,  fight  for  my  own  sword.  I  dare  say  I 
shall  be  there  or  thereabout  when  there  is  any  work  to  be 
done,  but  I  must  get  there  in  my  own  way  and  in  my 
own  time.  I  shall  have  my  own  commissariat  train.  I 
have  had  my  share  of  living  on  next  to  nothing,  and  have 


236  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

become  somewhat  of  an  epicure,  and  and  I  know  that  the 
sort  of  rations  you  are  likely  to  get  on  a  march  though  a 
rough  country  would  not  suit  my  constitution.  But,  as 
I  said  before,  I  hope  if  there  is  any  fighting  done  to  be 
somewhere  in  the  neighborhood." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  23? 


CHAPTER    IV. 

FKESH     TROUBLES. 

THREE  days  later  a  small  steamer  arrived  from  Napier, 
bringing  a  reply  to  the  urgent  request  that  had  been  sent 
for  the  dispatch  of  a  body  of  constabulary  for  the  protec- 
tion of  the  settlers.  Sir  Donald  McLean,  the  superin- 
tendent of  the  province,  sent  word  that  this  was  impossi- 
ble at  present,  as  the  alarming  news  had  just  been 
received  that  the  notorious  chief  Te  Kooti,  who  had  been 
captured  and  imprisoned  at  Chatham  Island,  had  effected 
his  escape  with  the  whole  of  the  natives  confined  in  the 
island,  had  captured  a  schooner,  and  had,  it  was  re- 
ported, landed  near  Poverty  Bay. 

"It  is  probable,"  Sir  Donald  wrote,  "that  it  is  the 
news  of  his  landing  which  has  excited  one  of  the  tribes 
of  the  neighborhood  to  make  an  attack  upon  ycfu.  A 
strong  expedition  will  be  fitted  out,  and  we.  shall  doubt- 
less have  to  supply  a  contingent.  I  can  only  advise  you 
to  organize  yourselves  into  a  militia,  and  to  stand  for  the 
present  on  the  defensive.  As  soon  as  operations  begin 
from  Poverty  Bay  you  will  be  relieved  from  all  further 
danger,  as  the  attention  of  the  hostile  tribes  will  be  fully 
occupied  in  that  direction." 

Hitherto  the  province  of  Hawke  Bay  had  been  compara- 
tively free  from  the  troubles  that  had  so  long  disturbed 
Auckland,  Taranaki,  and  the  northern  portion  of  Well- 
ington. Only  one  xising  had  taken  place,  and  this  had 
been  so  promptly  crushed  that  the  tribes  had  since  re- 


238  MAORI  AND  SETTLER? 

mained  perfectly  quiet.  In  October,  1866,  a  party  of  it 
hundred  fighting  men  had  suddenly  appeared  near  the 
Meanee  village.  Their  principal  chief  had  hitherto 
borne  a  very  high  character,  and  had  been  employed  by 
the  government  to  improve  the  mail  road  between  Napier 
and  Taupo.  Colonel  Witmore,  who  was  in  command  of 
the  colonial  forces — for  the  regular  troops  had  now  been 
almost  entirely  withdrawn  from  the  island — had  just  re- 
turned from  punishing  some  natives  who  had  committed 
massacres  higher  up  on  the  coast,  and  was,  fortunately, 
at  Napier ;  he  at  once  dispatched  a  company  of  colonists 
under  Major  Eraser,  with  thirty  or  forty  friendly  natives, 
to  hold  the  natives  in  check. 

Just  as  they  had  been  sent  off  the  news  came  that  an- 
other and  more  numerous  body  of  Hau-Haus  were  ad- 
vancing by  way  of  Petanc  to  attack  Napier.  Major  Fraser 
and  his  company  were  sent  off  to  check  these,  while 
Colonel  "Whitmore,  with  one  hundred  and  eighty  of  the 
colonial  militia,  marched  against  the  smaller  force,  and 
McLean,  with  two  hundred  friendly  natives,  established 
himself  in  the  rear  of  the  village  they  occupied.  An 
officer  was  sent  in  to  summon  them  to  surrender,  and  as 
no  answer  could  be  obtained  from  them  the  colonists  ad- 
vanced. The  enemy  fought  with  resolution,  but  the 
colonists  opened  a  cross-fire  upon  them,  and  after  fight- 
ing for  some  time  the  natives  were  driven  out  of  their 
cover.  Finding  no  mode  of  retreat  open  to  them  they 
laid  down  their  arms,  some  who  endeavored  to  escape 
being  cut  off  and  also  captured.  The  native  loss  was 
twenty-three  killed  and  twenty  eight  wounded — many  of 
them  mortally;  forty -four  taken  prisoners.  Only  two  or 
three  of  the  whole  party  escaped.  Upon  the  same  day 
Major  Fraser's  little  force  attacked  the  other  party  of 
Hau-Haus,  killed  their  chief  with  twelve  of  his  followers, 
and  put  the  rest  to  flight. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  239 

From  that  time  peace  had  been  unbroken  in  Hawke 
Bay;  but  there  had  been  several  outbreaks  at  Poverty 
Bay,  which  lay  just  north  of  the  province,  and  mas- 
sacres at  Opotaki  and  other  places  further  to  the  north, 
and  almost  continuous  fighting  in  the  northern  districts 
of  Wellington.  The  news  of  Te  Kooti's  escape  and  of 
his  landing  at  Poverty  Bay  naturally  caused  considera- 
ble alarm  among  the  settlers,  but  hopes  were  entertained 
that  the  whites  at  Poverty  Bay,  aided  by  the  friendly 
natives,  would  be  able  to  recapture  Te  Kooti  and  his  fol- 
lowers before  they  could  do  any  harm. 

The  next  day  a  small  vessel  came  down  from  Poverty 
Bay  with  a  message  from  Major  Biggs,  who  commanded 
at  that  settlement,  to  ask  for  assistance  if  it  could  be 
spared  him.  A  consultation  was  held  and  it  was  agreed 
that  the  best  plan  of  defending  their  own  settlement  was 
to  aid  in  the  recapture  of  Te  Kooti,  and  that  the  little 
force  of  twenty  men  should  at  once  go  up  to  aid  the  set- 
tlers under  Major  Biggs.  Accordingly  they  embarked 
without  delay,  Mr.  Atherton  making  a  separate  bargain 
with  the  captain  of  the  craft  for  his  passage,  and  the 
next  morning  they  arrived  in  Poverty  Bay. 

Major  Biggs  had,  as  soon  as  the  news  reached  him, 
raised  a  force  of  a  hundred  Europeans  and  natives.  He 
found  Te  Kooti's  party,  a  hundred  and  ninety  strong, 
holding  a  very  strong  position  near  the  sea,  and  sent  a 
chief  to  them  to  say  that  if  they  would  lay  down  their 
arms  he  would  try  and  smooth  matters  over  with  govern- 
ment. A  defiant  answer  was  returned,  and  Major  Biggs 
gave  orders  to  commence  the  attack.  But  the  natives, 
who  formed  the  bulk  of  his  force, -refused  to  move,  say- 
ing that  the  Hau-Haus  were  too  numerous  and  too 
strongly  posted.  Under  these  circumstances  an  attack 
was  impossible,  for  had  the  little  body  of  whites  been 


240  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

defeated  the  whole  settlement  would  have  been  open  to 
ravage  and  destruction. 

During  the  night  Te  Kooti  and  his  men  started  for  the 
interior,  carrying  with  them  all  the  stores  and  provisions 
they  had  taken  from  the  schooner.  When  it  was  found 
they  had  escaped  Major  Biggs  ordered  Mr.  Skipwith  to 
follow  with  some  friendly  natives,  pressing  on  their  rear 
until  he  ascertained  their  line  of  retreat,  when  he  was  to 
cut  across  country  and  join  the  main  body  who  were  to 
march  to  Paparatu,  a  point  which  Te  Kooti  would  in  all 
probability  pass  in  his  retreat.  The  arrival  of  the  coaster 
with  the  little  band  from  the  Mohaka  River  was  hailed 
with  joy  by  the  Poverty  Bay  settlers.  They  arrived  just 
in  time  to  join  Major  Biggs  and  raised  his  force  to  fifty 
white  men,  who,  with  thirty  Maoris,  started  for  Papa- 
ratu and  arrived  there  on  the  following  morning.  The 
Europeans  were  commanded  by  Captains  Westrupp  and 
Wilson.  In  the  afternoon  Mr.  Atherton  arrived  with  a 
party  of  four  natives  whom  he  had  hired  to  carry  his 
store  of  provisions,  ammunition  and  baggage. 

"So  I  am  in  plenty  of  time, "  he  said  when  he  came  up. 
"I  could  not  bring  myself  to  undertake  a  night  march, 
but  as  those  fellows  have  got  to  lug  all  the  stores  they 
have  captured  over  the  mountains  I  felt  pretty  sure  that 
I  should  be  in  time." 

"I  am  glad  you  are  in  time,  Mr.  Atherton,"  Wilfrid 
said.  "The  assistance  of  your  rifle  is  not  to  be  despised. 
The  sooner  the  natives  come  now  the  better,  for  we  have 
only  brought  four  days'  provisions  in  our  haversacks.  I 
hear  that  a  reserve  force  is  to  come  up  in  two  days  with 
rations  and  ammunition;  but  one  can  never  calculate 
upon  these  natives." 

The  camp  was  pitched  in  a  hollow  to  avoid  the  obser- 
vation of  the  enemy,  but  it  was  proposed  to  fight  at  a 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  241 

point  a  mile  distant,  in  a  position  commanding  the  spur 
of  the  hill,  up  which  the  natives  must  advance  after 
crossing  a  ford  on  the  Arai  river.  Four  days  passed 
and  there  was  no  news  of  the  convoy  with  the  provisions, 
and  the  supply  in  camp  was  almost  exhausted.  That 
evening  Major  Biggs  started  to  bring  up  the  supplies 
with  all  speed,  as  otherwise  starvation  would  compel  the 
force  to  retreat.  The  same  day  Mr.  Skipwith  had  arrived 
with  news  that  Te  Kooti  was  undoubtedly  marching  on 
Paparatu,  but  was  making  slow  progress,  owing  to  the 
heavy  loads  his  men  were  carrying. 

The  fifth  day  passed  slowly.  The  men  being  altogether 
without  food  Mr.  Atherton  divided  his  small  stock  of 
provisions  and  wine  among  them,  and  then  taking  his 
rifle  went  out  among  the  hills,  accompanied  by  two  of 
his  natives.  Late  in  the  evening  he  returned,  the  natives 
bearing  an  old  boar  which  he  had  shot.  This  was  a  great 
piece  of  luck,  for  the  island  contained  no  wild  animals  fit 
for  eating,  and  the  boar  had  probably  escaped  from  some 
settler's  farm  or  native  clearing  when  young  and  taken, 
to  the  woods.  It  was  at  once  cut  up  and  divided  among 
the  hungry  men.  The  next  day  Mr.  Skipwith,  with  two 
natives,  went  out  to  reconnoiter,  and  soon  returned  at 
full  speed,  saying  that  the  natives  were  crossing  the 
river.  Captain  Wilson,  with  twenty  men,  took  posses- 
sion of  a  hill  on  the  right  flank — an  almost  impregnable 
position,  while  Captain  Westrupp,  with  the  main  body, 
marched  to  support  the  picket  which  had  been  placed  on 
the  position  which  it  had  been  arranged  they  should 
occupy;  but  before  they  could  arrive  there  Te  Kooti, 
•with  overwhelming  numbers,  had  driven  the  picket  from 
the  ground  and  occupied  the  hill. 

"This  is  going  to  be  an  awkward  business,  Wilfrid," 
\Ir.  Atherton  said.  "We  have  only  thirty  rounds  of 


242  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

ammunition  a  man,  and  we  have  had  nothing  to  eat  for 
the  last  forty-eight  hours  but  a  mouthful  of  meat.  We 
have  suffered  the  natives  to  take  the  position  we  fixed  on. 
"We  are  outnumbered  three  to  one,  and  there  are  not  ten 
men  in  the  force  who  have  had  any  experience  in  fight- 
ing. If  the  worst  comes  to  the  worst,  Wilfrid,  do  you 
and  the  Aliens  take  to  the  bush.  Mind,  it  is  no  use  try- 
ing to  run  from  the  natives.  If  the  men  were  all  like 
our  party  the  other  day  we  could  keep  these  fellows  at 
bay  for  any  time;  but  they  are  most  of  them  young 
hands.  They  will  blaze  away  their  ammunition,  and 
may  be  seized  with  a  panic.  I  shall  keep  close  to  you, 
and  if  things  do  go  badly  we  will  keep  together  and  sell 
our  lives  dearly." 

"We  must  retake  that  place  if  possible,  lads,"  Captain 
Westrupp  said  at  that  moment.  "Spread  out  in  skir- 
mishing order  and  take  advantage  of  any  cover  you  can 
find,  but  let  there  be  no  stopping  or  lagging  behind. 
We  must  all  get  up  there  together  and  carry  it  with  a 
rush." 

There  was  no  time  lost.  The  men  spread  out,  and 
with  a  cheer  started  up  the  hill.  They  were  received 
with  a  storm  of  bullets;  but  the  natives  from  their  emi- 
nence fired  high,  and  without  suffering  loss  they  reached 
a  small  ridge  near  the  summit,  about  twelve  yards  from 
the  enemy,  and  separated  from  them  by  a  narrow  gully. 
Here  they  threw  themselves  down,  and  their  fire  at  once 
caused  the  Hau-Haus  to  throw  themselves  down  among 
the  bushes  on  their  side  of  the  gully.  The  position  of 
the  colonists  was  a  fairly  strong  one.  On  their  right  flank 
the  ground  was  open,  with  a  few  scattered  bushes  here 
and  there,  but  the  left  was  covered  by  a  steep  ravine, 
which  fell  away  sharply.  The  Hau-Haus  kept  up  a 
heavy  fire,  to  which  the  colonists  replied  but  seldom, 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  243 

their  officer  continally  impressing  upon  them  the  neces- 
sity for  husbanding  their  ammunition.  Mr.  Atherton 
had  arrived  breathless  in  the  rear  of  the  partjT,  and  had 
thrown  himself  down  by  "Wilfrid's  side,  the  two 
Aliens  lying  next  in  order.  For  some  minutes  Mr. 
Atherton  did  not  speak,  but  lay  panting  heavily. 

"This  is  a  nice  preparation  for  shooting,"  he  said 
present^.  "However,  I  suppose  my  hand  will  steady 
itself  after  a  bit  I  have  seen  a  fellow's  head  show  under 
that  bush  there  twice,  and  each  time  his  bullet  came  just 
over  our  heads.  I  will  have  a  talk  with  him  as  soon  as  I 
get  my  wind  back  again.  This  is  not  a  bad  position 
after  all,  providing  they  don't  work  round  to  our  right." 

Ten  minutes  later  Wilfrid,  who  had  his  eyes  fesed  on  a 
bush  from  which  four  or  five  shots  had  been  fired,  wait- 
ing for  another  puff  of  smoke  to  indicate  the  exact  posi- 
tion in  which  the  man  was  lying,  heard  the  sharp  report 
of  Mr.  Atherton 's  rifle. 

"You  have  got  him,  I  suppose?" 

"Of  course,  lad;  there  is  one  less  of  the  yelling  rascals 
to  deal  with.  I  wish  we  could  see  Biggs  and  his  people 
coming  along  the  road  behind.  If  we  could  get  a  square 
meal  all  round  and  a  good  supply  of  ammunition  I  think 
we  should  be  able  to  turn  the  tables  on  these  fellows. 
The  men  are  all  fighting  very  steadily,  and  are  husband- 
ing their  ammunition  better  than  I  expected  to  see  them 
do." 

The  fight  went  on  for  four  hours.  Then  a  number  of 
the  Hau-Haus  leaped  to  their  feet  and  made  a  rush  toward 
the  settlers,  but  the  volley  they  received  proved  too  much 
for  them.  Several  fell,  and  the  rest  bolted  back  into 
shelter.  Again  and  again  this  was  tried,  but  each  time 
without  success.  At  three  in  the  afternoon  some  men  were 
seen  coming  along  the  road  behind  toward  the  deserted 


244  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

camp.  Captain  Westrupp  at  once  wrote  a  note  and  sent 
it  down  by  one  of  the  men,  but  to  the  disappointment  of 
the  settlers  he  soon  returned  with  the  news  that  the  new 
arrivals  consisted  of  only  nine  Maoris  carrying  rations. 
They  had  opened  the  rum  bottles  on  their  way,  and  most 
of  them  were  excessively  drunk.  Two  of  them  who  were 
sufficiently  sober  came  up  to  help  in  the  defense,  but  one 
was  shot  dead  almost  immediately,  one  of  the  settlers 
being  killed  and  many  wounded  more  or  less  severely. 

Just  as  evening  was  coining  on  the  force  was  startled 
by  hearing  a  Hau-Hau  bugle  in  their  rear,  and  presently 
made  out  a  party  of  the  enemy  moving  toward  the  camp 
through  the  broken  ground  on  the  left  rear.  It  was  now 
evident  that  either  the  enemy  must  be  driven  off  the  hill 
in  front  or  the  party  must  retire  to  a  position  on  the  hill 
behind  the  camp.  Captain  Westrupp  determined  to  try 
the  former  alternative  first.  Calling  upon  the  men  to 
follow  him,  he  dashed  across  the  gully  and  up  on  to  the 
crest  held  by  the  Maoris.  The  men  followed  him  gallantly ; 
but  the  fire  from  the  Maoris  hidden  among  the  bushes 
was  so  heavy  that  they  were  forced  to  fall  back  again, 
seven  more  of  their  number  being  wounded.  They  now 
retired  in  good  order  down  to  the  camp  and  up  the  hill 
behind  it,  and  were  here  joined  by  Captain  Wilson  with 
his  twenty  men. 

It  was  now  determined  to  throw  up  a  sort  of  intrench- 
ment  and  hold  this  position  until  help  came;  but  the 
settlers,  who  had  hitherto  fought  well,  were  dispirited  by 
their  want  of  success,  and  by  the  non-arrival  of  the  rein- 
forcement, and  were  weak  with  their  long  fast.  As  soon 
as  it  became  dark  thejr  began  to  steal  off  and  to  make 
their  way  back  toward  their  homes,  and  in  an  hour  half 
the  force  had  retreated.  The  officers  held  a  council.  It 
was  evident  the  position  could  not  long  be  held,  and  thai 


MAORI  AND  SETTLES.  245 

want  of  food  and  ammunition  would  compel  a  retreat  in 
the  morning.  It  was  therefore  decided  to  fall  back 
under  cover  of  the  darkness. 

The  chief  of  the  friendly  natives,  who  had  behaved 
admirably  through  the  fight,  offered  to  guide  the  party 
across  the  country.  The  officers  were  obliged  to  leave 
their  horses,  and  the  party  of  forty  half-starved  men,  of 
whom  a  fourth  were  wounded-^-two  so  severely  that  it  was 
necessary  to  carry  them — set  out.  It  was  a  terrible 
march  for  the  exhausted  men,  up  the  bed  of  a  mountain 
creek,  often  waist-deep  in  water,  and  over  steep  fern- 
covered  hills,  until,  just  as  day  was  breaking,  they 
reached  an  out-station.  Here  they  managed  to  get  two 
sheep,  and  just  as  they  had  cooked  and  eaten  these 
Colonel  Whituaore,  the  commander  of  the  colonial  forces, 
arrived  with  thirty  volunteers  from  Napier,  who  had 
reached  the  bay  on  the  previous  day. 

He  at  once  paraded  the  men,  thanked  thejn  for  their 
behavior  on-  the  previous  day,  and  warned  them  to  be 
ready  to  start  in  pursuit  of  the  enemy  at  once.  One  of 
the  settlers,  acting  as  spokesman  for  the  rest,  stepped 
forward,  pointed  out  that  they  had  been  fighting  with- 
out intermission  for  twenty-four  hours,  that  they  had 
been  for  the  last  forty-eight  hours  almost  without  food, 
and  that  it  was  impossible  for  them  to  set  out  on  a  fresh 
march  until  they  had  taken  some  rest.  Colonel  Whit- 
more  was  a  hot-tempered  man,  and  expressed  himself  so 
strongly  that  he  caused  deep  offense  among  the  settlers. 

They  remained  firm  in  their  determination  not  to  move 
until  the  following  day,  and  the  forward  movement  was 
therefore  necessarily  abandoned.  On  the  day  previous 
to  the  fight  Lieutenant  Gascoigne  had  been  dispatched 
by  Major  Biggs  to  Te  Wairoa  with  dispatches  for  Mr. 
Deighton,  who  commanded  at  that  station,  warning  him, 


246  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

to  muster  all  the  force  at  his  disposal,  and  prepare  to  in- 
tercept Te  Kooti  at  the  Waihau  Lakes  in  case  he  should 
fight  his  way  through  Captain  Westrupp's  force.  Orders 
were  sent  to  the  friendly  Mahia  tribe  to  muster,  and  a 
hundred  men  at  once  assembled ;  but  as  they  had  only- 
four  rounds  of  ammunition  apiece,  nothing  could  be  done 
until  three  casks  of  ammunition  were  obtained  from  some 
of  the  Wairoa  chiefs. 

Two  days  were  lost  in  consequence,  and  this  gave  time 
to  Te  Kooti ;  they  then  started — eighteen  European  vol- 
unteers and  eighty  natives;  a  larger  body  of  natives  pre- 
paring to  follow  as  soon  as  possible.  After  being  met 
by  messengers  with  several  contradictory  orders,  they 
arrived  at  Waihau,  and  just  before  dark  Te  Kooti  was 
seen  crossing  the  hills  toward  them  with  his  whole  force. 
Captain  Richardson  determined  to  fight  them  in  the 
position  he  occupied,  but  the  native  chief,  with  sixty  of 
his  followers,  at  once  bolted.  Captain  Richardson  was 
therefore  obliged  with  the  remainder  to  fall  back,  and, 
unfortunately,  in  the  retreat  one  of  the  natives  fell ;  his 
gun  went  off  and,  bursting,  injured  his  hand.  This  was 
considered  by  the  natives  a  most  unfortunate  omen,  and 
dissipated  what  little  courage  remained  in  the  Wairoa 
tribe. 

At  eleven  o'clock  next  morning  the  enemy  advanced 
and  the  action  began ;  but  the  Wairoa  chief,  with  fifty  of 
his  men,  again  bolted  at  the  first  shot.  Captain  Richard- 
Bon  with  the  remainder  held  the  position  until  four  in 
the  afternoon,  when  the  ammunition  being  almost  ex- 
hausted, he  retired  quietly.  The  force  fell  back  to 
Wairoa,  where  it  was  reorganized  and  increased  to  two 
hundred  men.  In  the  meantime  Colonel  Whitmore  had 
been  toiling  on  over  a  terrible  country  in  Te  Kooti 's 
War,  having  with  him  in  all  about  two  hundred  men,  as 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

he  had  been  joined  by  Major  Eraser  with  fifty  of  the  No. 
1  Division  Armed  Constabulary. 

But  when  they  arrived  at  the  boundary  of  the  Poverty 
Bay  district  the  settlers  belonging  to  it,  who  had  not 
recovered  from  their  indignation  at  Colonel  "Whitmore's 
unfortunate  remarks,  refused  to  go  further,  saying  that 
the  militia  regulations  only  obliged  them  to  defend. their 
own  district.  Colonel  Whitmore,  therefore,  with  a  hun- 
dred and  thirty  men  of  whom  but  a  handful  were  whites, 
marched  on  to  attack  two  hundred  and  twenty  Hau-Haus 
posted  in  a  very  strong  positien  in  the  gorge  of  a  river. 
Twelve  of  the  little  party  from  the  Mohaka  river  still 
remained  with  the  column,  one  had  been  killed,  four 
wounded,  while  five  had  remained  behind  completely 
knocked  up  by  the  fatigues  they  had  encountered. 

Mr.  Atherton  had  not  gone  on  with  them  after  the 
arrival  of  Colonel  Whitmore.  "It  is  of  no  use  my  dear 
lad,"  he  said  to  Wilfrid.  "I  know  Colonel  Whitmore 
well  by  reputation,  and  the  way  in  which  he  blew  us  up 
this  morning  because,  exhausted  as  we  were,  we  were 
physically  unable  to  set  out  for  a  fresh  march,  confirms 
what  I  have  heard  of  him.  He  is  a  most  gallant  officer, 
and  is  capable  of  undergoing  the  greatest  fatigue  and 
hardships,  and  is  of  opinion  that  everyone  else  is  as  tire- 
less and  energetic  as  he  is.  He  will  drive  you  along 
over  mountain,  through  rivers,  with  food  or  without 
food,  until  you  come  up  to  Te  Kooti,  and  then  he  will 
fight,  regardless  of  odds  or  position,  or  anything  else. 
It  isn't  the  fighting  I  object  to;  but  I  never  could  keep 
up  with  the  column  on  such  a  march.  It  would  be  a 
physical  impossibility,  and  I  am  not  going  to  attempt  it. 
I  shall  take  a  week  to  recover  from  my  fatigues  of  last 
night,  and  shall  go  down  and  stay  quietly  at  the  settle- 
ment. If  Te  Kooti  takes  it  into  his  head  to  come  down 


248'  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

there,  I  shall  have  great  pleasure  in  doing  my  best 
toward  putting  a  stop  to  his  rampaging  over  the  coun- 
try- If  he  does  not  come  down  I  shall,  as  they  say, 
await  developments,  and  shall  find  plenty  to  do  in  the 
way  of  botanizing." 

Mr.  Atherton  had  not  exaggerated  the  fatigues  and 
hardships  that  the  force  would  be  called  upon  to  undergo, 
and  they  were  worn  out  and  exhausted  when  at  last  they 
came  upon  the  track  of  the  Hau-Haus.  When  they  were 
resting  for  a  short  halt,  Captain  Carr,  late  K.  A.,  who  was 
with  the  force  as  a  volunteer,  reconnoitered  a  short  dis- 
tance ahead  and  found  the  enemy's  fire  still  burning. 
The  news  infused  fresh  life  into  the  tired  and  hungry 
men,  and  they  again  went  forward.  The  track  led  up 
the  bed  of  a  river  which  ran  between  low,  steep  cliffs 
impossible  to  climb,  and  the  men  had  to  advance  in 
single  file.  After  marching  for  some  distance  they 
reached  a  bend  in  the  river  where  a  narrow  track  ran 
through  a  break  in  the  cliff  and  up  the  spur  of  a  hill. 
The  advanced  guard,  consisting  of  six  men,  led  by  Cap- 
tain Carr,  were  within  fifty  yards  of  this  point,  when  a 
heavy  fire  was  opened  upon  them.  Just  where  they  were 
the  river  bank  was  sufficiently  low  to  enable  them  to 
climb  it  and  take  cover  in  the  thick  scrub  above,  whence 
they  replied  vigorously  to  the  Hau-Haus,  who  were 
within  a  few  yards  of  them.  In  the  meantime  the  enemy 
had  opened  fire  from  the  base  of  the  hill  at  the  river 
bend  upon  the  main  body,  who,  standing  in  single  file  in 
the  river,  where  unable  to  reply  or  to  scale  the  steep 
bank  and  take  covering  in  the  scrub.  Colonel  Whitmore 
and  Captain  Tuke  tried  to  lead  the  men  up  to  charge, 
but  this  could  only  be  done  in  single  file,  and  the  fire  of 
the  enemy  was  so  hot  that  those  who  attempted  this  were 
killed  or  wounded,  Captain  Tuke  being  severely  hurt. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLES.  349 

The  rest  found  what  shelter  they  could  among  the  bowl- 
ders in  the  river  bed,  and  remained  here  until  the  ad- 
vanced guard  fell  back,  hard  pressed  by  the  enemy,  and 
reported  the  death  of  Captain  Carr  and  Mr.  Canning, 
another  volunteer. 

The  natives  now  pressed  through  the  scrub  above  the 
cliffs  to  cut  off  the  retreat.  The  friendly  natives,  who 
were  well  behind,  were  ordered  to  scale  the.  cliff  then, 
and  hold  the  enemy  in  check.  One  of  them  was 
wounded,  and  the  rest  hastily  retreated  down  the  river; 
the  constabulary  and  settlers,  altogether  about  fifty 
strong,  fell  back  to  an  island  about  half  a  mile  to  the 
rear,  and  here  calmly  awaited  the  attack  of  the  enemy. 
These,  however,  drew  off  without  disturbing  them,  dis- 
heartened by  the  fact  that  Te  Kooti  had  received  a  wound 
in  the  foot,  and  the  troops  then  retired.  Only  a  few  of 
the  strongest  men  reached  the  camp  that  night;  the  rest, 
knocked  up  by  want  of  food  and  fatigue,  lay  down  in  the 
pouring  rain  and  did  not  get  in  until  the  following 
morning. 

The  .result  of  this  fight  was  most  unfortunate.  Even 
Colonel  "Whitmore  saw  that,  with  the  force  at  his  dis- 
posal, nothing  could  be  done  against  Te  Kooti,  who  was 
daily  becoming  more  powerful,  and  was  being  joined  by 
the  tribes  in  the  vicinity  He  believed  that  Te  Kooti 
would  carry  out  his  expressed  intention  of  marching 
north  to  Waikato,  and  after  collecting  there  all  the  tribes 
of  the  island,  march  against  Auckland.  Thinking,  there- 
fore, that  Poverty  Bay  was  not  likely  to  be  disturbed,  he 
left  the  settlement  and  went  lound  by  sea  to  Auckland  to 
confer  with  government  as  to  the  steps  to  be  taken  to 
raise  a  force  capable  of  coping  with  what  appeared  to  be 
the  greatest  danger  that  had  as  yet  threatened  the  island. 
Te  Kooti  did  not,  however,  move  north,  but  remained  114 


250  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

his  camp  near  the  scene  of  the  fight  from  the  8th  of 
August  to  the  28th  of  October,  sending  messages  all  over 
the  island  with  the  news  of  the  defeat  he  had  inflicted 
upon  the  whites,  and  proclaiming  himself  the  savior  of 
the  Maori  people. 

From  the  position  he  occupied,  about  equidistant  from 
the  settlements  at  Wairoa  and  Poverty  Bay,  he  was  able 
to  attack  either  by  a  sudden  march  of  two  or  three  dajTs, 
and  yet  there  was  no  great  uneasiness  among  the  settlers. 
The  force  that  had  operated  against  Te  Kooti  had  been 
disbanded,  the  Napier  volunteers  had  returned,  the  con- 
stabulary withdrawn,  and  the  party  of  settlers  from  the 
Mohaka  river  had  returned  home.  Wilfrid  Eenshaw  had 
not  gone  with  them.  He  had  been  shot  through  the  leg 
in  the  fight  in  the  river  and  had  been  carried  down  to 
the  settlement.  Here  Mr.  Atherton,  who  was  lodging  in 
one  of  the  settler's  houses,  had  taken  charge  of  him  and 
nursed  him  assiduously. 

Unfortunately  the  effect  of  the  wound  was  aggravated 
by  the  exhaustion  caused  by  fatigue  and  insufficient 
food,  and  for  weeks  the  lad  lay  in  a  state  of  prostration, 
wasted  by  a  low  fever  which  at  one  time  seemed  as  if  it 
would  carry  him  off.  It  was  not  until  the  middle  of 
October  that  matters  took  a  turn,  and  he  began  slowly  to 
mend.  For  the  last  three  weeks  his  mother  had  been  by 
his  bedside.  For  some  time  Mr.  Atherton  in  his  letters 
had  made  light  of  the  wound,  but  when  the  lad's  condi- 
tion became  very  serious  he  had  written  to  Mrs.  Ren- 
shaw  saying  that  he  thought  she  had  better  come  herself 
to  help  in  the  nursing,  as  Wilfrid  was  now  suffering 
from  a  sharp  attack  of  fever  brought  on  by  his  hardships. 

Mrs.  Renshaw,  on  her  arrival,  was  dismayed  at  the  state 
in  which  she  found  her  son.  She  agreed,  however,  that 
it  was  best  not  to  alarm  them  in  her  letters  home. 


MA  OR1  AND  SETTLER.  25 1 

The  events  on  the  attack  of  the  settlement  had  much 
shaken  Mr.  Eenshaw,  and  he  was,  when  she  left  him,  in 
a  nervous  and  excited  state.  She  saw  that  Wilfrid  would 
need  every  moment  of  her  time,  and  that  were  her  hus- 
band to  come  it  would  probably  do  him  harm  and  seri- 
ously interfere  with  her  own  usefulness.  He  was,  when 
she  left,  on  the  point  of  returning  to  the  farm  with 
Marion,  as  there  had  been  no  further  renewal  of  troubles 
in  the  settlement. 

It  had  been  arranged  that  the  two  Aliens  should  take 
up  their  residence  at  The  Glade,  and  that  four  men  be- 
longing to  a  small  force  that  had  been  raised  among  the 
friendly  natives  should  also  be  stationed  there.  This 
would,  it  was  thought,  render  it  quite  safe  against  a 
sudden  attack.  Mr.  Kenshaw  was  looking  eagerly  for- 
ward to  being  at  home  again,  and  his  wife  thought  that 
the  necessity  of  superintending  the  operations  at  the 
farm  would  soothe  his  nerves  and  restore  him  to  health. 
She,  therefore,  in  her  letters  made  the  best  of  things, 
although  admitting  that  Wilfrid  was  prostrated  by  a  sort 
of  low  fever,  and  needed  care  and  nursing. 

At  the  end  of  another  fortnight  Wilfrid  was  enabled  to 
sit  up  and  take  an  interest  in  what  was  going  on  around 
him.  The  house  was  the  property  of  a  settler  named 
Sampson,  and  had  been  erected  by  a  predecessor  of  the 
farmer;  it  was  a  good  deal  larger  than  he  required, 
though  its  capacity  was  now  taxed  to  the  utmost  by  the 
addition  of  three  lodgers  to  his  family. 

"How  are  things  going  on,  Mr.  Atherton?"  Wilfrid 
asked  one  day  when  his  mother  was  not  present. 

"People  here  seem  to  think  that  they  are  going  ou 
very  well,  Wilfrid." 

"But  you  do  not  think  so,  Mr.  Atherton?"  the  lad 
asked,  struck  by  the  dry  tone  in  which  the  answer  was 
given. 


252  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

"No,  Wilfrid,  I  cannot  say  I  do.  It  seems  to  me  that 
the  people  here  are  living  in  a  fool's  paradise ;  and  as 
for  Major  Biggs  I  regard  him  as  an  obstinate  fool." 

"How  is  that?"  Wilfrid  asked,  amused  at  his  friend's 
vehemence. 

"Well,  Wilfrid,  as  far  as  I  can  see  there  is  nothing  in 
the  world  to  prevent  Te  Kooti  coming  down  and  cutting 
all  our  throats  whenever  he  pleases." 

"You  don't  say  so,  Mr.  Atherton!" 

"I  do,  indeed;  it  is  known  that  he  has  sent  messages 
down  to  the  natives  here  to  remain  apparently  loyal,  get 
what  arms  they  can  from  the  whites,  and  prepare  to  join 
him.  I  will  ^say  for  Biggs  that  he  has  repeatedly  repre- 
sented the  unprotected  position  of  the  bay  to  govern- 
ment, and  has  obtained  permission  to  place  an  officer 
and  nine  men  on  pay  as  scouts  to  watch  the  roads  lead- 
ing to  the  settlements.  Gascoigne  is  in  charge  of  them. 
There  are  two  roads  by  which  the  natives  can  come ;  the 
one  a  short  one,  and  this  is  being  watched,  the  other  a 
much  longer  and  more  difficult  one,  and  this  is  entirely 
open  ito  them  if  they  choose  to  use  it. 

"The  fact  is,  Biggs  relies  on  the  fact  that  Colonel 
Lambert  is  at  Wairoa,  and  is  collecting  a  force  of  six 
hundred  men  there  to  attack  Te  Kooti,  and  he  believes 
that  he  shall  get  information  from  him  and  from  some 
spies  he  has  in  the  neighborhood  of  Te  Kooti 's  camp 
long  before  any  movement  is  actually  made.  Of  course 
he  maj'  do  so,  but  I  consider  it  is  a  very  risky  thing  to 
trust  the  safety  of  the  whole  settlement  to  chance.  He 
ought  to  station  four  mounted  men  on  both  tracks  as 
near  as  he  dare  to  Te  Kooti 's  camp.  In  that  case  we 
should  be  sure  to  get  news  in  plenty  of  time  to  put  all 
the  able-bodied  men  under  arms  before  the  enemy  could 
ireach  the  settlement. ' ' 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  353 

"Have  they  got  a  stockade  built?" 

"No,  it  was  proposed  at  a  meeting  of  some  of  the  set- 
tlers that  this  should  be  done,  but  Biggs  assured  them  it 
was  altogeth  r  unnecessary.  I  do  not  know  how  it  is 
Wilfrid,  but  take  us  altogether  we  Englishmen  have  fully 
a  fair  share  of  common  sense.  I  have  observed  over  and 
over  again  that  in  the  majority  of  cases  when  an  English- 
man reaches  a  certain  rank  in  official  life,  he  seems  to 
become  an  obstinate  blockhead.  I  have  often  wondered 
over  it,  but  cannot  account  for  it.  Anyhow  the  state  of 
affairs  here  is  an  excellent  example  of  this.  I  suppose  in 
the  whole  settlement  there  is  not,  with  the  exception  of 
the  man  in  authority,  a  single  person  who  does  not  per- 
ceive that  the  situation  is  a  dangerous  one,  and  that  no 
possible  precaution  should  be  omitted;  and  yet  the  man 
who  is  responsible  for  the  safety  of  all  throws  cold  water 
on  every  proposal,  and  snubs  those  who  are  willing  to 
give  up  tinle  and  labor  in  order  to  insure  the  safety  of 
the  place. 

"I  suppose  he  considers  that  the  tone  he  adopts  show.8 
him  to  be  a  man  superior  to  those  around  him,  possess- 
ing alike  far  greater  knowledge  of  the  situation,  and  a 
total  freedom  from  the  cowardly  fears  of  his  neighbors. 
Well,  well,  I  hope  that  events  will  justify  his  coxn-se,  but 
I  own  that  I  sleep  with  my  rifle  and  revolvers  loaded  and 
ready  to  hand.  Mind,  I  do  not  say  that  the  chances  may 
not  be  ten  to  one  against  Te  Kooti's  making  a  raid  down 
here ;  but  I  say  if  they  were  a  hundred  to  one  it  would 
be  the  height  of  folly  not  to  take  every  possible  precau- 
tion to  insure  the  safety  of  all  here." 

"Don't  you  think,  Mr.  Atherton,  that  it  would  be 
better  for  mother  to  go  home?  I  am  getting  all  right 
now,  and  can  get  on  very  well  without  her." 

"I  am  sure  your  mother  would  not  leave  you  at  pres- 


254  MAORI  AND  8ETTL&3. 

ent,  Wilfrid,  and  I  don't  think  you  will  be  fit  to  be 
moved  for  another  fortnight  yet.  Te  Kooti  has  done 
nothing  for  two  months,  and  may  not  move  for  as  much 
more.  You  mother  knows  nothing  of  what  I  have  told 
you,  and  I  should  not  make  her  anxious  or  uncomfortable 
by  giving  her  even  a  hint  that  I  considered  there  is  dan- 
ger in  the  air." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  355 


CHAPTER   XV. 

THE  MASSACKE  AT  POVERTY  BAT. 

ANOTHER  week  passed  and  Wilfrid  was  able  to  walk 
about  the  house  and  garden.  A  ship  was  going  down  in 
three  days,  and  Mr.  Atherton  had  arranged  with  the  cap- 
tain to"  put  into  the  Mohaka  river  and  land  them  there. 
No  change  had  taken  place  in  the  situation.  There  had 
been  a  meeting  of  the  settlers  and  friendly  natives.  The 
latter  had  offered  to  erect  the  stockades  for  a  small  fort  if 
the  settlers  would  do  the  earthworks.  This  they  had  agreed 
to,  but  the  project  was  abandoned,  as  Major  Biggs  again 
declared  it  to  be  wholly  unnecessary.  Some  of  the  set- 
tlers, dissatisfied  with  the  result,  formed  themselves  into 
a  vigilance  committee  to  watch  the  ford  of  the  Waipaoa 
river. 

This  was  done  for  several  nights,  but  Major  Biggs 
again  interfered,  and  told  them  he  considered  the  act  to 
be  absurd.  The  vigilance  committee,  therefore,  ceased 
to  act.  A  few  nights  later  Te  Kooti's  people  crossed  at 
this  very  ford.  Late  in  the  evening  of  the  4th  of  Novem- 
ber Mr.  Atherton  was  about  to  go  up  to  bed  when  he 
heard  a  growl  from  a  dog  chained  up  outside.  He  lis- 
tened, and  made  out  the  voices  of  men  talking,  in.  low 
tones.  The  lower  windows  had  shutters,  and  these  Mr. 
Atherton  had  with  some  difficulty  persuaded  Mr.  Samp- 
son, who  was  himself  incredulous  as  to  the  possibility  of 
attack,  to  have  fastened  up  of  a  night.  Mr.  Atherton 
ran  upstairs,  knocked  at  the  doors  of  Wilfrid's  and  the 


256  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

settler 's  rooms,  and  told  them  to  get  up  instantly,  as 
something  was  wrong.  Then  he  threw  up  his  window. 

"Who  is  there?"  he  asked. 

"Open  the  door,"  a  native  replied,  "we  have  a  message 
for  you." 

"You  can  give  me  the  message  here.  I  shall  not  come 
down  until  I  know  who  you  are." 

"The  message  is  that  you  are  to  open  the  door  and 
come  out.  Te  Kooti  wants  you." 

Mr.  Atherton  could  just  make  out  the  figure  of  the 
speaker  in  the  darkness. 

"That  is  my  answer,"  he  said  as  he  fired. 

A  fierce  yell  from  twenty  throats  rose  in  the  air,  and 
there  was  a  rush  toward  the  door,  while  two  or  three 
shots  were  fired  at  the  window.  Mr.  Atherton  had,  how- 
ever, stepped  back  the  instant  he  had  discharged  his 
rifle,  and  now,  leaning  out,  discharged  the  chambers  of 
his  revolver  in  quick  succession  among  the  navvies  gath- 
ered round  the  door.  Shrieks  and  yells  arose  from  them, 
and  they  bounded  away  into  the  darkness,  and  again 
several  musket  shots  were  fired  at  the  window.  By  thia 
time  the  settler  and  Wilfrid  had  both  joined  Mr.  Ather- 
ton, having  leaped  from  their  beds,  seized  their  arms, 
and  ran  out  when  the  first  shot  was  fired. 

"It  is  Te  Kooti's  men,"  Mr.  Atherton  said.  "They 
have  come  at  last.  I  expect  there  will  be  a  few  minutes 
before  they  attack  again.  You  had  better  throw  on  some 
clothes  at  once  and  tell  the  ladies  to  dress  instantly.  We 
may  have  to  leave  the  house  and  try  to  escape  across 
country." 

Wilfrid  and  the  settler  gave  the  messages,  and  then 
returned. 

"How  many  of  them  do  you  think  there  are?"  Wil- 
frid asked. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  357 

" About  twenty  of  them  I  should  say,  and  we  could 
rely  upon  beating  them  off;  but  no  doubt  there  are 
parties  told  off  to  the  attack  of  all  the  outlying  settlers, 
and  when  the  others  have  done  their  work  they  may 
gather  here." 

"Where  are  they  now?"  Wilfrid  asked  as  he  gazed 
into  the  darkness. 

"I  fancy  they  are  behind  that  shed  over  there.  They 
are  no  doubt  arranging  their  plan  of  attack.  I  expect 
they  will  try  fire.  There!  do  you  see?  That  is  the  flash 
of  a  match." 

A  minute  later  a  light  was  seen  to  rise  behind  the 
shed,  and  there  was  a  sound  of  breaking  wood.  The 
light  grew  brighter  and  brighter. 

"They  will  be  coming  soon," Mr.  Atherton  said.  "Do 
not  throw  away  a  shot.  The  shingles  on  this  roof  are  as 
dry  as  tinder,  and  if  a  burning  brand  falls  on  them  the 
place  will  be  in  a  blaze  in  five  minutes.  Now!"  As  he 
spoke  a  number  of  natives,  each  carrying  a  flaming 
brand,  appeared  from  behind  the  woodshed.  Three  rifles 
cracked  out,  and  as  many  natives  fell.  The  farmer  be- 
gan to  reload  his  rifle,  while  Mr.  Atherton  and  Wilfrid 
handed  theirs  to  Mrs.  Kenshaw,  who  at  that  moment 
joined  them,  and  opened  fire  with  their  revolvers.  Only 
two  of  Wilfrid's  shots  told,  but  Mr.  Atherton's  aim  was 
as  steady  as  when  firing  at  a  mark.  Two  of  the  natives 
fell,  and  four  others,  throwing  down  their  brands,  ran 
back  wounded  to  the  shelter  of  the  woodshed.  Their 
companions  after  a  moment's  hesitation,  followed  their 
example.  There  were  now  but  six  unwounded  men  out 
of  the  twenty  who  attacked  the  house. 

"There  is  one  of  them  off  for  assistance!"  Wilfrid  ex- 
claimed as  he  caught  sight  of  a  figure  running  at  full 
speed  from  the  shed.  In  another  moment  he  was  lost  in 
the  darkness. 


358  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"Now  is  the  time  for  us  to  make  our  escape, "  Mr. 
Atherton  said,  turning  from  the  window.  "We  have 
succeeded  so  far,  but  there  may  be  three  times  as  many 
next  time,  and  we  must  be  off.  We  will  get  out  by  a 
window  at  the  back  of  the  house  and  try  and  make  our 
way  across  country  to  the  Mahia  tribe.  We  shall  be 
safe  there." 

"But  Wilfrid  cannot  walk  a  hundred  yards,"  Mrs. 
Renshaw  said. 

"Then  we  must  carry  him,"  Mr.  Atherton  replied 
cheerfully.  "He  is  no  great  weight,  and  we  can  make  a 
litter  when  we  get  far  enough  away.  Take  a  loaf  of 
bread,  Mrs.  Sampson,  a  bottle  or  two  of  water,  and  a 
flask  of  spirits.  You  will  find  one  full  on  my  table. 
Please  hurry  up,  for  there  is  not  a  moment  to  lose.  I 
will  stay  here  to  the  last  moment  and  fire  an  occasional 
shot  at  the  shed  to  let  them  know  that  we  are  still  here." 

As  the  course  Mr.  Atherton  advised  was  evidently  the 
best,  the  others  followed  his  instructions  without  dis- 
cussion, and  three  minutes  later  stepped  out  from  the 
back  window  into  the  garden.  Mr.  Atherton  had  been 
told  that  they  were  ready,  and  after  firing  a  last  shot 
from  the  window  and  reloading  his  rifle  joined  them. 
Mrs.  Sampson  had  a  small  basket  on  one  arm,  and  her 
child,  who  was  ten  years  old,  grasping  her  hand.  Mrs. 
Renshaw  had  taken  charge  of  Wilfrid's  rifle,  and  had 
offered  him  her  arm,  but  the  excitement  had  given  him 
his  strength  for  the  moment,  and  he  declared  himself 
perfectly  capable  of  walking  without  assistance. 

"Go  on  as  quietly  as  you  can,"  Mr.  Atherton  said.  "I 
will  keep  a  bit  behind  first.  They  may  possibly  have 
put  somebody  on  the  watch  on  this  side  of  the  house, 
although  I  do  not  expect  they  have.  They  have  been 
taken  too  much  by  surprise  themselves." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  259 

The  little  party  went  on  quietly  and  noiselessly  about 
three  hundred  yards,  and  then  Mr.  Atherton  joined 
them.  "Wilfrid  was  breathing  heavily  and  leaning 
against  a  tree. 

"Now  jump  up  upon  my  back,  Wilfrid,"  Mr.  Ather- 
ton said;  "your  weight  will  not  make  much  difference  to 
me  one  way  or  the  other.  That  is  right;  lend  him  a 
hand,  Sampson,  and  get  him  on  to  my  shoulders.  It 
will  be  easier  for  both  of  us,  for  I  have  got  no  hips  for 
his  knees  to  catch  hold  of.  That  is  right.  Now  if  you 
will  take  my  gun  we  shall  get  along  merrily. ' ' 

They  walked  fast  for  about  two  miles.  "Wilfrid  several 
times  offered  to  get  down,  saying  that  he  could  walk 
again  for  a  bit,  but  Mr.  Atherton  would  not  hear  of  it. 
At  the  end  of  two  miles  they  reached  the  spot  where  the 
country  was  covered  with  low  scrub. 

"We  are  pretty  safe  now,"  Mr.  Atherton  said;  "we 
can  turn  off  from  the  track  and  take  ta  the  scrub  or 
shelter,  and  there  will  be  little  chance  of  their  finding 
us.  Now,  Wilfrid,  I  will  set  you  down  for  a  bit.  This 
is  fine  exercise  for  me,  and  if  I  were  to  carry  you  a  few 
miles  every  day  I  should  fine  down  wonderfully.  Ah ! 
the  others  have  come  up. ' '  He  broke  off  as  the  sound  of 
a  native  yell  sounded  on  the  still  night  air,  and  looking 
round'  they  saw  a  bright  light  rising  in  the  direction 
from  which  they  had  come. 

"They  have  set  fire  to  the  house,"  the  settler  said; 
"there  goes  the  result  of  six  years'  work.  However,  I 
need  not  grumble  over  that  now  that  we  have  saved  our 
lives." 

"We  had  best  be  moving  on,"  Mr.  Atherton  said. 
"No  doubt  they  opened  a  heavy  fire  before  they  set  fire 
to  the  shingles  with  their  brands,  but  the  fact  that  we 
did  not  return  their  fire  must  have  aroused  their  suspi- 


260  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

cions,  and  by  this  time  they  must  have  woke  up  to  the 
fact  that  we  have  escaped.  They  will  hunt  about  for  a 
bit,  no  doubt,  round  the  house,  and  may  send  a  few  men 
some  distance  along  the  tracks,  but  they  will  know  there 
is  very  little  chance  of  catching  us  until  daylight.  Now, 
Sampson,  let  us  join  arms,  your  right  and  my  left. 
Wilfrid  can  sit  on  them  and  put  his  arm  round  our  neck. 
We  carry  our  rifles  on  our  other  shoulders,  and  that  will 
balance  matters.  That  is  right.  Now  on  we  go  again. " 

With  occasional  halts  they  went  on  for  another  four 
hours.  By  this  time  the  ladies  and  the  little  girl  were 
completely  exhausted  from  stumbling  over  roots  and  low 
shrubs  in  the  darkness,  and  the  two  men  also  were  thor- 
oughly fatigued ;  for  the  night  was  extremely  hot,  and 
the  work  of  carrying  Wilfrid  in  addition  to  the  weight 
of  their  ammunition  told  upon  them.  They  had  long 
since  lost  the  path,  but  knew  by  the  stars  that  they  were 
keeping  in  the  right  direction. 

"Now  we  will  have  a  few  hours'  halt,"  Mr.  Atherton 
said.  "We  may  consider  ourselves  as  perfectly  safe  from 
pursuit,  though  we  shall  have  to  be  cautious,  for  there 
may  be  parties  of  these  scoundrels  wandering  aboxit  the 
country.  We  may  hope  that  a  good  many  of  the  settlers 
heard  the  firing  and  made  off  in  time,  but  I  fear  we  shall 
hear  some  sad  stories  of  this  night's  work." 

Lying  down  the  whole  party  were  in  a  few  minutes 
fast  asleep.  Wilfrid  had  offered  to  keep  watch,  saying 
that  he  had  done  no  walking  and  could  very  well  keep 
awake,  but  Mr.  Atherton  said  that  nothing  would  be 
gained  by  it.  "You  could  see  nothing,  and  you  would 
hear  nothing  until  a  party  of  natives  were  quite  close, 
and  unless  they  happened  by  sheer  accident  to  stumble 
upon  us  they  could  not  find  us;  beside,  though  you 
have  done  no  absolute  walking,  the  exertion  of  sitting  up 


MAOEI  AND  SETTLER  261 

and  holding  on  has  been  quite  as  much  for  you  in  your 
weak  state  as  carrying  you  has  been  for  us.  No,  we  had 
best  all  take  a  rest  so  as  to  start  fresh  in  the  morning. ' ' 

Mr.  Atherton  woke  as  soon  as  daylight  broke,  and 
rousing  himself  cautiously  looked  round.  There  was 
nothing  in  sight,  and  he  decided  to  let  the  party  sleep 
for  a  few  hours  longer.  It  was  eight  o'clock,  and  the 
sun  was  high  before  the  others  opened  their  eyes. 

Mr.  Atherton  was  standing  up.  "There  is  a  horseman 
coming  across  the  plain,"  he  said;  "no  doubt  he  is  fol- 
io-vying the  track;  by  the  line  he  is  taking  he  will  pass  a 
little  to  our  right.  I  will  go  out  to  hear  the  news.  I 
think  you  had  better  remain  where  you  are;  he  may  be 
followed." 

Mr.  Atherton  walked  through  the  bush  until  he  reached 
the  track  just  as  the  rider  came  along. 

"Ah!  you  have  escaped,  Mr.  Atherton;  I  am  glad  of 
that.  Have  all  your  party  got  away?" 

"Yes,  thank  God!"  Mr.  Atherton  said;  "and  now 
what  is  the  news?" 

"I  cannot  tell  all,"  the  settler  said,  "but  there  has 
been  a  terrible  massacre.  I  was  pressing  wool  for  Dodd 
and  Peppard,  whose  station,  you  know,  lies  some  dis- 
tance from  any  other.  I  rode  up  there  just  as  day  was 
breaking  and  went  to  the  woolshed.  Nobody  came,  and 
I  heard  the  dog  barking  angrily ;  so  I  went  up  to  the 
house  to  see  what  was  the  matter.  I  found  the  back- 
door open  and  the  two  men  lying  dead  inside,  evidently 
killed  by  natives.  I  then  galloped  off  to  the  Mission 
Station  and  warned  them  there,  and  then  to  the  stations 
of  Hawthorne  and  Strong.  I  found  they  had  already 
been  warned,  and  were  just  about  to  start;  then  I  rode 
to  Matawhero  to  warn  the  settlers  there.  Most  of  them 
had  already  made  off.  I  passed  Bigg's  house  on  the 


262  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

way ;  there  were  ^a  number  of  natives  round  it  evidently 
in  possession,  and  as  I  passed  Mann's  house  I  saw  him 
and  his  wife  and  child  lying  outside  dead.  How  many 
more  have  been  murdered  I  do  not  know.  It  is  an  awful 
business.  Where  are  your  friends?" 

"They  are  in  the  scrub  there.  We  are  making  our 
way  to  the  Mahia." 

"Most  of  the  settlers  who  have  escaped  have  made  for 
the  old  redoubt  at  Taranganui,  and  I  fancy  they  will  be 
able  to  beat  off  any  attack  made  on  them.  I  am  riding 
for  Wairoa.  I  cannot  think  what  they  can  have  been 
about  there  to  let  Te  Kooti  slip  away  without  sending  us 
a  warning.  He  must  have  come  by  the  long  road  and 
been  six  or  seven  days  on  the  march." 

"Have  you  seen  any  natives  since  you  started?"  Mr. 
Atherton  asked. 

"I  saw  a  party  of  about  twenty  of  them  moving  across 
the  country  about  two  miles  back.  They  were  scattered 
about  in  the  bush,  and  were,  I  expect,  in  search  of  fugi- 
tives. They  were  moving  across  the  line  I  was  going, 
and  were  half  a  mile  away;  but  when  they  come  on  this 
path  they  may  follow  it,  knowing  that  those  who  made 
their  escape  and  did  not  go  to  the  redoubt  would  be 
likely  to  try  to  reach  the  Mahia  country." 

"Thank  you!  then  we  will  be  moving  on  without  de- 
lay,"  Mr.  Atherton  said;  and  the  settler  at  once  rode  on 
with  his  message  to  the  force  at  Wairoa.  As  soon  as  Mr. 
Atherton  joined  the  party  and  told  them  what  he  had 
heard  they  again  set  out.  After  walking  for  four  miles 
they  reached  the  edge  of  the  plain,  and  the  path  here 
ascended  a  sharp  rise  and  entered  a  narrow  defile. 

Wilfrid,  who  was  sitting  on  Mr.  Atherton 's  shoulders, 
looked  back  for  the  twentieth  time  as  they  ascended  the 
rise.  "Thejr  are  following  us!"  he  exclaimed.  "There 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  263 

are  a  party  of  fifteen  or  twenty  coming  along  the  path  at 
a  run.  They  are  not  more  than  a  mile  behind  at  the  out- 
side. " 

"Then  I  will  put  you  down,  Wilfrid,"  Mr.  Atherton 
said  quietly;  "that  will  give  me  time  to  cool  down  a  bit 
before  they  arrive.  They  could  not  have  come  up  at  a 
better  place  for  us.  It  is  no  use  trying  to  hide,  they 
would  track  us  directly.  We  must  make  a  stand  at  the 
mouth  of  this  defile.  It  is  a  good  place  for  defense,  and 
if  it  were  not  for  this  rascally  bush  we  should  have  no 
difficulty  in  keeping  them  off.  Even  as  it  is  I  think  we 
can  make  a  good  fight  of  it.  Now,  Mrs.  Renshaw,  will 
you  and  Mrs.  Sampson  and  the  child  go  a  little  way  in 
and  sit  down.  I  have  no  doubt  we  shall  be  able  to  beat 
these  fellows  back,  and  if  we  do  that  we  can  hope  to 
make  the  rest  of  our  journey  without  further  molesta- 
tion." 

"Could  I  be  of  any  use  in  loading  the  rifles,  Mr. 
Atherton?" 

"I  think  not,  Mrs.  Renshaw;  it  may  be  a  long  skirm- 
ish, and  we  shall  have  plenty  of  time  to  load ;  and  jrour 
being  here  with  us  and  running  the  risk  of  being  hit 
would  make  us  nervous.  I  think,  if  you  do  not  mind,  we 
would  much  rather  know  that  you  are  in  safety  behind 
us." 

"Very  well,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said  quietly;  "I  will  do 
what  you  think  best.  We  shall  be  praying  for  your  suc- 
cess until  it  is  over." 

Mr.  Atherton  looked  round  after  the  two  ladies  had 
gone  on.  "There  is  a  bush  with  a  wide  ledge  of  flat 
ground  behind  it,"  he  said,  pointing  to  a  little  clump  of 
underwood  some  ten  feet  above  them  on  the  side  of  the 
ravine.  "I  think,  with  my  help,  you  can  manage  to 
clamber  up  there,  Wilfrid.  Lying  down  you  will  Ibe 


264  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

able  to  fire  under  the  bush  and  be  in  fair  shelter.  Mr. 
Sampson  and  I  will  hold  the  path  here.  If  they  make  a 
rush  you  will  be  able  to  help  us  with  3rour  revolver.  Up 
there  you  will  have  the  advantage  of  being  able  to  see 
movements  among  the  bushes  better  than  we  shall,  and 
can  fire  down  at  them;  and  if  it  comes  to  a  hand-to-hand 
fight  will  be  of  more  use  there  than  down  here. " 

Wilfrid  at  once  assented.  "Stand  on  my  hand  and  I 
will  hoist  you  up. "  Mr.  Atherton  raised  Wilfrid  until 
he  was  able  to  get  on  to  the  ledge  of  rock  behind  the 
bushes.  Wilfrid  laid  himself  down  there,  and  with  his 
knife  cut  off  a  few  of  the  lower  twigs  so  that  he  was  able 
to  get  a  good  view  ahead.  "Keep  yourself  well  back, 
lad,  and  do  not  raise  your  head  except  to  fire.  Do  you 
see  anything  of  them?" 

"Yes,  they  are  not  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  away 
and  are  scattering  among  the  bushes.  No  doubt  they 
caught  sight  of  us  as  we  came  up  here,  and  think  it  pos- 
sible we  may  intend  to  defend  the  defile." 

"I  will  let  them  know  we  are  here;"  and  Mr.  Atherton 
made  two  steps  forward  to  the  mouth  of  the  defile.  Al- 
most at  the  same  instant  he  leveled  his  rifle  and  fired, 
and  one  of  the  Maoris  threw  up  his  arms  and  fell  back, 
the  rest  throwing  themselves  down  instantaneously 
among  the  bushes,  whence  a  moment  later  two  or  three 
shots  were  fired.  But  Mr.  Atherton  had  stepped  back, 
and  he  and  the  settler,  lying  down  on  the  ground,  worked 
themselves  forward  until  by  raising  their  heads  they 
could  command  a  vew  of  the  slope  up  to  the  mouth  of  the 
ravine. 

For  a  time  all  was  silent.  Presently  Wilfrid's  rifle 
spoke  out,  and  a  yell  testified  to  the  fact  that  the  quick 
aim  he  had  taken  at  a  dark  figure  stealing  among  the 
bushes  had  been  true.  It  was  followed  quickly  by  a 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  265 

general  discharge  of  their  pieces  by  the  natives.  The 
bullets  rattled  thickly  against  the  rock,  and  cut  leaves 
from  the  bushes  behind  which  Wilfrid  was  lying,  but  he 
had  drawn  himself  back  a  foot  or  two  the  moment  he 
fired,  and  the  balls  passed  harmlessly  over  him.  Not  so 
the  missive  dispatched  by  Mr.  Atherton  in  the  direction 
of  a  puff  of  smoke  from  a  bush  some  forty  yards  away, 
for  the  figure  behind  it  remained  still  and  immovable 
while  the  fray  went  on.  For  upward  of  an  hour  the  ex- 
change of  shots  continued,  and  then  the  assailants  were 
joined  by  fifteen  other  natives,  who  had  been  attracted 
to  the  spot  by  the  sound  of  firing. 

"I  expect  they  will  pluck  up  their  courage  to  make  a 
rush  now,  Wilfrid,"  Mr.  Atherton  said.  "If  it  had  not 
been  for  these  new  arrivals  I  think  they  would  have  soon 
drawn  off,  for  we  must  have  diminished  their  numbers 
very  considerably.  Don't  fire  again  for  a  bit;  we  had 
best  keep  our  rifles  loaded  so  as  to  be  ready  for  them 
when  they  pluck  up  courage  to  charge.  When  they  do, 
be  sure  you  keep  your  revolver  as  a  reserve  for  the  criti- 
cal moment." 

Five  minutes  later  a  tremendous  yell  rose  in  the  air. 
The  natives  leaped  to  their  feet  from  behind  the  bushes, 
fired  their  guns  at  their  hidden  foes,  and  then,  toma- 
hawk in  hand,  rushed  forward. 

Three  shots  rang  out  almost  simultaneously  from  the 
mouth  of  the  defile  and  three  of  the  natives  dropped  dead 
in  their  tracks.  The  rest  rushed  forward  in  a  body. 
Mr.  Atherton  and  the  settler  leaped  to  their  feet,  and  the 
former  opened  a  fire  with  his  Colt's  revolver  when  the 
leading  natives  were  within  ten  yards  of  him.  His  aim 
was  as  accurate  as  when  directed  against  a  mark  stuck 
against  a  tree,  and  a  man  fell  at  each  shot.  But  the 
natives'  blood  was  thoroughly  up  now,  and  in  spite  of 


266  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

the  slaughter  they  rushed  forward.  There  was  no  room 
in  the  narrow  defile  for  two  men  to  swing  their  rifles, 
and  Mr.  Atherton  and  the  settler  stepped  forward  to 
meet  the  foe  with  their  clubbed  rifle  in  their  hands. 
Two  crashing  blows  were  delivered  with  effect,  but  be- 
fore the  settler  could  again  raise  his  weapon  three  Maoris 
were  upon  him.  One  tomahawk  struck  him  in  the  shoul- 
der and  the  rifle  fell  from  his  hands.  Another  raised  his 
tomahawk  to  brain  him,  but  fell  with  a  bullet  from  Wil- 
frid's revolver  through  his  chest;  but  the  third  native 
brought  his  weapon  .down  with  terrible  force  upon  the 
settler's  head,  and  he  fell  in  a  heap  upon  the  ground. 
The  tremendous  strength  of  Mr.  Atherton  stood  him  in 
good  stead  now.  The  first  blow  he  had  dealt  had 
smashed  the  stock  of  his  rifle,  but  he  whirled  the  iron 
barrel  like  a  light  twig  round  his  head,  dealing  blows 
that  broke  down  the  defense  of  the  natives  as  if  their 
tomahawks  had  been  straw,  and  beating  them  down  as  a 
flail  would  level  a  wheat  stalk.  Those  in  front  of  him 
recoiled  from  a  strength  which  seemed  to  them  super- 
human, while  whenever  one  tried  to  attack  him  in  the 
rear  Wilfrid's  revolver  came  into  play  with  fatal  accuracy. 
At  last,  with  a  cry  of  terror,  the  surviving  natives  turned 
and  retreated  at  the  top  of  their  speed. 

"Hot  work,  Wilfrid,"  Mr.  Atherton  said  as  he  lowered 
his  terrible  weapon  and  wiped  the  streaming  perspiration 
from  his  face;  "but  we  have  given  the  rascals  such  a 
lesson  that  we  can  journey  on  at  our  leisure.  This  is  a 
bad  business  of  poor  Sampson's.  I  will  help  you  down 
first  and  then  we  will  see  to  him.  Eecharge  your  re- 
volver, lad,"  he  went  on  as  Wilfrid  stood  beside  him; 
"some  of  these  fellows  may  not  be  dead,  and  may  play 
us  an  ugly  trick  if  we  are  not  on  the  lookout." 

Wilfrid  reloaded  his  pistol,  and  Mr.  Atherton  then 
stooped  over  the  fallen  man. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  267 

"He  is  desperately  hurt,"  he  said,  "but  he  breathes. 
Hand  me  that  revolver,  Wilfrid,  and  run  back  and  tell 
Mrs.  Sampson  her  husband  is  hurt." 

Wilfrid  had  gone  but  a  yard  or  two  when  he  met  his 
mother  and  the  settler's  wife,  who,  hearing  the  cessation 
of  the  firing,  were  no  longer  able  to  restrain  their  anxiety 
as  to  what  was  going  forward.  Mrs.  Eenshaw  gave  a  cry 
of  joy  at  seeing  Wilfrid  walking  toward  her. 

"Is  it  all  over,  my  boy,  and  are  you  unhurt?" 

"It  is  all  over,  mother,  and  they  have  bolted.  I  have 
not  had  a  scratch,  for  I  have  been  lying  down  all  the 
time  in  shelter;  but  I  am  sorry  to  say,  Mrs.  Sampson, 
that  your  husband  is  badly  hurt. 

"No,  he  is  not  dead,"  he  continued  in  answer  to  the 
agonized  expression  of  inquiry  in  her  eyes.  "He  has 
been  stunned  by  the  blow  of  a  tomahawk,  and  is,  as  I 
said,  badly  hurt;  but  he  will,  I  trust,  get  over  it." 

Mrs.  Sampson  ran  forward  and  threw  herself  on  her 
knees  by  her  husband's  side,  uttering  a  suppressed  cry  as 
she  saw  the  terrible  wound  on  his  head. 

"Wilfrid,  there  is  a  bottle  of  water  untouched  in  the 
basket,"  Mr.  Atherton  said. 

"I  will  fetch  it,"  Mrs.  Kenshaw  broke  in,  hurrying 
away.  "No,  Milly,"  she  said,  as  the  child  who  had  been 
ordered  to  stay  with  the  basket  came  running  to  meet 
her.  "You  must  stay  here  for  a  little  while.  The 
natives  have  all  run  away,  but  j*our  father  is  hurt  and  for 
a  time  must  be  kept  quite  quiet.  I  will  send  Wilfrid  to 
sit  with  you." 

Taking  a  bottle  of  water  and  a  cloth  which  covered  the 
basket,  Mrs.  Eenshaw  hurried  back.  "Wilfrid,"  she 
said,  "do  you  go  and  sit  with  the  little  one.  You  can 
do  no  good  here,  and  look  completely  worn  out.  You 
will  be  making  yourself  useful  if  you  amuse  Milly  and 
keep  her  away  from  here  for  the  present." 


268  MAORI  AXD  SETTLER. 

Mr.  Atherton  poured  a  little  of  the  water  into  the  cover 
of  his  flask,  added  some  brandy,  and  poured  a  little  of  it 
between  the  wounded  man's  lips.  Then  he  saturated  the 
cloth  with  water  and  handed  it  to  Mrs.  Sampson,  who 
wiped  the  blood  from  her  husband's  head  and  face,  then 
poured  a  little  water  from  the  bottle  on  to  his  forehead. 
Some  more  brandy  and  water  was  poured  between  his 
lips  and  he  uttered  a  faint  groan. 

"I  will  examine  his  wound  now,  Mrs.  Sampson.  I 
have  had  some  experience  that  way  in  my  journey inga 
about  the  world."  Kneeling  down  he  carefully  exam- 
ined the  wound. 

"It  is  better  than  I  hoped,  Mrs.  Sampson,"  he  said 
cheerfully.  "I  expect  the  thick  hat  turned  the  toma- 
hawk a  little  and  it -fell  obliquely  on  the  side  of  the  head. 
It  has  carried  away  a  goodish  slice  of  the  hair  and  scalp, 
and  has  scraped  the  bone,  but  it  has  not  crushed  it  in, 
and  I  think  that  with  care  and  nursing  your  husband 
will  not  be  long  before  he  gets  over  it.  You  had  better 
fold  up  that  cloth  again,  pour  some  fresh  water  over  it, 
and  then  bandage  it  over  the  wound  with  a  slip  of  stuff 
torn  off  from  the  bottom  >f  your  petticoat.  You  had  bet- 
ter tear  off  two  slips,  fo.  his  arm  will  require  bandaging 
too.  I  will  look  to  tnat  as  soon  as  you  have  done  his 
head.  No,"  he  wen  on,  when  he  saw  that  Mrs.  Samp- 
son's trembling  fin  ers  were  quite  incapable  of  fixing  the 
bandage  properly f  "I  do  not  think  that  will  do.  If  you 
will  allow  me  I  ill  do  it  for  you. " 

He  took  Mi  Sampson's  place,  and  while  Mrs.  Een- 
shaw  supported,  the  settler's  head  he  wound  the  bandage 
tightly  and  sKllfully  round  it.  "Now  for  his  arm,"  he 
said,  and  drawing  out  his  knife  cut  the  sleeve  up  the 
shoulder.  'It  has  narrowly  missed  the  artery,"  he  went 
on;  ''but  though  it  is  an  ugly -looking  gash  it  is  not  seri- 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  269 

ous.  I  wish  we  had  some  more  water,  but  as  we  haven't 
we  must  do  without  it,  and  I  dare  say  we  shall  come 
across  a  stream  soon."  When  the  operation  of  banda- 
ging was  complete  Mr.  Atherton  stood  up. 

"What  are  we  to  do  next?"  Mrs.  Renshaw  asked  him. 

"We  must  cut  a  couple  of  saplings  and  make  a  litter," 
he  said.  "If  one  of  you  ladies  can  spare  a  petticoat, 
please  take  it  off  while  I  cut  the  poles."  He  went  away 
and  returned  in  a  few  minutes  with  two  poles  ten  or 
eleven  feet  long. 

"Here  is  the  petticoat,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said.  The 
settler's  wife  was  too  absorbed  by  her  grief  and  anxiety 
to  hear  Mr.  Atherton 's  request.  "What  is  to  be  done 
with  it?" 

"In  the  first  place  it  must  be  taken  out  of  that  band, 
or  whatever  you  call  it,"  Mr.  Atherton  replied,  "and 
then  split  right  down.  Here  is  my  knife." 

When  the  garment  had  been  operated  upon  there  re- 
mained a  length  of  strong  calico  nearly  three  feet  wide 
and  three  yards  long.  "That  will  do  well,"  he  said. 
"Now  we  have  to  fasten  this  to  the  poles.  How  would 
you  do  that?  It  is  more  in  your  way  than  mine." 

"I  should  roll  it  twice  round  the  pole  and  then  sew  it, 
if  I  had  a  needle  and  thread.  If  I  had  not  that  I  should 
make  holes  in  every  six  inches  and  tie  it  with  string;  but 
unfortunately  we  have  no  string  either." 

"I  think  we  can  manage  that,"  Mr.  Atherton  said; 
and  he  walked  rapidly  away  and  returned  in  a  few 
minutes  with  some  long  stalks  that  looked  like  coarse 
grass. 

"This  is  the  very  thing,  Mrs.  Renshaw,"  he  said; 
"this  is  what  is  called  New  Zealand  flax,  and  I  have  no 
doubt  it  will  be  strong  enough  for  our  purpose. "  In  a 
quarter  of  an  hour  the  litter  was  completed.  Just  as  it 


270  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Tras  finished  Mrs.  Sampson  uttered  an  exclamation  of  joy, 
and  turning  round,  they  saw  that  her  husband  had 
opened  his  eyes  and  was  looking  round  in  a  dazed,  bewil- 
dered way. 

"It  is  all  right,  Sampson,"  Mr.  Atherton  said  cheer- 
fully; "we  have  thrashed  the  natives  handsomely;  they 
have  bolted,  and  there  is  no  fear  of  their  coming  back 
again.  You  have  had  a  clip  on  the  head  with  a  toma- 
hawk, but  I  do  not  think  that  you  will  be  much  the 
worse,  for  it  at  the  end  of  a  week  or  two.  We  have  just 
been  manufacturing  a  litter  for  you,  and  now  we  will  lift 
you  on  to  it.  Now,  ladies,  I  will  take  him  by  the  shoul- 
ders; will  you  take  him  by  the  feet,  Mrs.  Eenshaw;  and 
do  you,  Mrs.  Sampson,  support  his  head?  That  is  the 
wajr.  Now,  I  will  just  roll  up  my  coat  and  put  it  under 
his  head,  and  then  I  think  he  will  do;  lay  our  rifles  be- 
side him.  Now,  I  will  take  the  two  handles  at  his  head ; 
do  you  each  take  one  at  his  feet.  The  weight  will  not 
be  great,  and  you  can  change  about  when  your  arms  get 
tired.  Yes,  I  see  what  you  are  thinking  about,  Mrs. 
Kenshaw.  We  must  go  along  bit  by  bit.  We  will  carry 
our  patient  here  for  half  a  mile,  then  I  will  come  back 
and  fetch  Wilfrid  up  to  that  point,  then  we  will  go  on 
again  and  so  on." 

"All  the  hard  work  falls  on  you,  Mr.  Atherton;  it  is 
too  bad,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said  with  grateful  tears  in  her 
eyes. 

"It  will  do  me  a  world  of  good,  Mrs.  Eenshaw.  I 
must  have  lost  over  a  stone  weight  since  yesterday.  If 
this  sort  of  thing  were  to  go  on  for  a  few  weeks  I  should 
get  into  fighting  condition.  Now,  are  you  both  ready? 
Lift." 

In  a  short  time  they  came  to  the  point  where  Wilfrid 
and  the  child  were  sitting  down  together.  Wilfrid  had 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  271 

been  impressing  upon  her  that  her  father  was  hurt,  and 
that  she  must  be  verj--  good  and  quiet,  and  walk  along 
quietly  by  her  mother's  side.  So  when  they  came  along 
she  got  up  and  approached  them  with  a  subdued  and 
awe-struck  air.  She  took  the  hand  her  mother  held  out 
to  her. 

"Is  father  very  bad,  mother?"  she  asked  in  a  low  tone. 

"He  is  better  than  he  was,  dear,  and  we  must  hope 
and  pray  that  he  will  soon  be  well  again ;  but  at  present 
you  must  not  speak  to  him.  He  must  be  kept  very  quiet 
and  not  allowed  to  talk." 

"You  sit  where  you  are,  Wilfrid,  I  will  come  back  for 
you  in  half  an  hour,"  Mr.  Atherton  said. 

"That  you  won't,  Mr.  Atherton,"  Wilfrid  said,  getting 
up.  "I  have  had  a  long  rest,  for,  except  for  pulling  my 
trigger  and  loading,  I  have  done  nothing  since  the  first 
short  walk  when  we  started  this  morning.  All  this  ex- 
citement has  done  me  a  lot  of  good,  and  I  feel  as  if  I 
could  walk  ever  so  far. " 

"Well,  put  your  rifle  in  the  litter,  then,"  Mr.  Ather- 
ton said;  "its  weight  will  make  no  difference  to  us,  and 
it  will"  make  a  lot  of  difference  to  you;  when  you  are 
tired  say  so. ' ' 

Wilfrid  struggled  on  resolutely,  refusing  to  stop  until 
they  reached  a  stream  two  miles  from  the  starting  place. 
Here  they  rested  for  an  hour.  The  settler's  wounds  were 
washed  and  rebandaged,  the  others  partook  of  a  meal  of 
bread  and  water,  and  they  then  continued  the  journey. 
At  the  end  of  another  half-mile  Wilfrid  was  obliged  to 
own  that  his  strength  could  hold  out  no  longer,  but  he 
refused  positively  to  accept  Mr.  Atherton 's  proposal  to 
come  back  for  him. 

"I  will  not  hear  of  it,  Mr.  Atherton,"  he  said.  "From 
what  Mrs.  Sampson  says  it  is  another  eight  or  ten  miles 


272  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

to  the  Mahia  country.  There  is  not  the  least  fear  of  any 
of  the  Hau-Haus  following  on  our  track.  The  best  way 
by  far  is  this :  I  will  go  a  hundred  yards  into  the  bush 
and  lie  down.  You  push  on.  It  will  be  dark  before  you 
finish  your  journey  as  it  is;  you  would  not  get  there  till 
to-morrow  morning  if  you  had  to  keep  on  coming  back 
for  me;  beside,  you  would  never  get  on  with  the  litter 
after  it  is  dark.  Leave  me  a  piece  of  bread,  a  bottle  of 
water,  my  rifle  and  revolver,  and  I  shall  be  as  comforta- 
ble among  the  bushes  there  as  if  I  were  in  bed.  In  the 
morning  you  can  send  out  a  party  of  Mahias  to  fetch  me 
in.  If  you  break  down  a  small  bough  here  by  the  side 
of  the  way,  that  will  be  quite  sufficient  to  tell  the  natives 
where  they  are  to  turn  off  from  the  path  to  look  for  me." 

"Well,  I  really  think  that  is  the  best  plan,  Wilfrid. 
There  is,  as  you  say,  no  real  danger  in  your  stopping 
here  alone.  It  would  be  a  long  job  coming  back  for  you 
every  time  we  halt,  and  it  is  of  importance  to  get  Mr. 
Sampson  laid  down  and  quiet  as  soon  as  possible." 

Mrs.  Kenshaw  did  not  like  leaving  Wilfrid  alone ;  but 
she  saw  that  she  could  be  of  no  real  assistance  to  him, 
and  her  aid  was  absolutely  required  to  carry  the  wounded 
man.  She  therefore  offered  no  objections  to  the  proposal. 

"Don't  look  downcast,  mother,"  Wilfrid  said  as  he 
kissed  her.  "The  weather  is  fine,  and  there  is  no  hard- 
ship whatever  in  a  night  in  the  bush,  especially  after 
what  we  went  through  when  we  were  following  Te 
Kooti." 

Wilfrid  made  his  way  a  hundred  yards  back  into  the 
bush  and  then  threw  himself  down  under  a  tree  fern,  and 
in  a  very  few  minutes  he  was  sound  asleep.  The  next 
time  he  woke  all  was  dark  around  him. 

"I  must  have  slept  a  good  many  hours,"  he  said.  "I 
feel  precious  hungry."  He  ate  a  hunch  of  bread,  took 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  273 

a  drink  of  water  from  the  bottle,  and  soon  fell  asleep 
again.  The  morning  was  breaking  when  he  again  woke. 
A  quarter  of  an  hour  later  he  heard  voices,  and  cocking 
his  rifle  and  lying  down  full  length  on  the  grass  waited. 
In  another  minute  to  his  joy  he  heard  Mr.  Atherton's 
voice  shouting,  "Where  are  you,  Wilfrid?  Where  have 
you  hidden  yourself?" 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER, 


CHAPTER   XVI. 

THE  PUBSUIT  OF  TE  KOOTI. 

HE  leaped  to  his  feet  and  ran  forward.  Mr.  Atherton 
was  approaching,  accompanied  by  a  party  of  six  natives. 

"Why,  Mr.  Atherton,  I  was  not  expecting  you  for  an- 
other three  hours." 

"Well,  you  see,  Wilfrid,  your  mother  was  anxious 
about  you.  She  did  not  say  anything,  for  she  is  a  plucky 
woman,  and  not  given  to  complaining  or  grumbling,  still 
I  could  see  she  was  anxious,  so  I  arranged  with  these 
natives  to  be  ready  to  start  three  hours  before  daybreak, 
so  as  to  get  here  just  as  the  sun  was  rising." 

"It  was  awfully  kind  of  you,  Atherton;  but  surely  the 
natives  would  have  been  able  to  find  me  without  your 
troubling  yourself  to  come  all  this  way  again.  I  am  sure 
you  must  have  been  dreadfully  tired  after  all  your  work 
yesterday. ' ' 

"Well,  Wilfrid,  perhaps  I  was  just  a  little  bit  anxious 
myself  about  you,  and  should  have  fussed  and  fidgeted 
until  you  got  back;  so  you  see  the  quickest  way  to  satisfy 
myself  was  to  come  with  the  natives." 

"What  time  did  you  get  in  last  night?" 

"About  eight  o'clock  in  the  evening,  I  think.  We 
were  all  pretty  well  knocked  up,  but  the  two  ladies  bore 
it  bravely,  so  you  see  I  had  no  excuse  for  grumbling." 

"I  am  sure  you  would  not  have  grumbled  anyhow, " 
Wilfrid  laughed;  "but  I  know  that  when  one  is  carrying 
any  one  the  weight  at  the  head  is  more  than  double  the 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  275 

weight  at  the  feet,  and  that  was  divided  between  them, 
while  you  had  the  heavy  end  all  to  yourself.  And  how  is 
Sampson?" 

"I  think  he  will  do,  Wilfrid.  The  natives  took  him  in 
hand  as  soon  as  he  got  there,  and  put  leaf  poultices  to 
his  wounds.  They  are  very  good  at  that  sort  of  thing, 
and  so  they  ought  to  be  considering  they  have  been 
breaking  each  others'  heads  almost  from  the  daj's  of 
Adam.  Well,  let  us  be  off.  We  have  brought  the 
stretcher  with  us,  and  shall  get  you  back  in  no  time." 

Wilfrid  lay  down  upon  the  stretcher.  Four  of  the 
natives  lifted  it  and  went  off  at  a  light  swinging  pace. 
From  time  to  time  changes  were  made,  the  other  two 
natives  taking  their  share.  Had  they  been  alone  the 
natives  could  have  made  the  ten  miles'  journey  under  the 
two  hours,  but  Mr.  Atherton  reduced  their  speed  directly 
after  they  had  started. 

"I  have  not  been  killed  by  the  Hau-Haus,  Wilfrid, 
and  I  do  not  mean  to  let  myself  be  killed  by  friendly 
natives.  Three  miles  an  hour  is  my  pace,  and  except  in 
a  case  of  extreme  emergency  I  never  exceed  it.  I  have 
no  wish,  when  I  get  back  to  England,  to  be  exhibited  as 
a  walking  skeleton. 

"It  is  good  to  hear  you  laugh  again,  lad,"  he  went  on 
as  Wilfrid  burst  into  a  shout  of  laughter,  to  the  astonish- 
ment of  his  four  bearers.  "I  was  afraid  six  weeks  back 
that  we  should  never  hear  you  laugh  again." 

"Oh,  Mr.  Atherton!"  Wilfrid  exclaimed  a  few  minutes 
later,  "were  there  any  other  of  the  Poverty  Bay  people 
there  last  night,  and  have  you  heard  what  took  place  and 
whether  many  beside  those  we  know  of  have  lost  their 
lives?" 

"Yes;  I  am  sorry  to  say  it  has  been  a  very  bad  busi- 
ness. As  we  heard  from  Butters,  Dodd  and  Eeppart 


276  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

were  killed,  and  there  is  no  doubt  that  their  shepherd 
was  also  slaughtered.  Major  Biggs,  poor  fellow,  has 
paid  for  his  obstinacy  and  overconfidence  with  his  life. 
His  wife,  baby,  and  servant  were  also  killed.  The  news 
of  this  was  brought  by  a  boy  employed  in  the  house,  who 
escaped  by  the  back  door  and  hid  in  a  flax  bush.  Cap- 
tain Wilson,  his  wife,  and  children  have  all  been  mur- 
dered. McCulloch  was  killed  with  his  wife  and  baby ; 
the  little  boy  managed  to  escape,  and  got  to  the  redoubt 
at  Taranganui.  Cadel  was  also  killed.  Fortunately 
Firmin  heard  the  sound  of  musketry  in  the  night.  He 
started  at  dawn  to  see  what  was  the  matter.  He  met  a 
native,  who  told  him  that  the  Hau-Haus  were  massacring 
the  whites,  and  at  once  rode  off  and  warned  Wylie, 
Stevenson,  Benson,  Hawthorne  and  Strong;  and  these 
all  escaped  with  their  families,  and  with  Major  Westrupp 
got  safely  to  the  Mahia  people. 

"The  boy  who  escaped  from  Major- Biggs'  house 
reached  Bloomfields,  and  all  the  women  and  children 
there  managed  to  escape.  How  they  did  it  heaven  only 
knows,  for  the  Hau-Haus  were  all  round.  That  is  all  we 
know  at  present,  and  we  hope  that  the  rest  of  the  settlers 
of  the  outlying  stations  round  Matawhero  succeeded  in 
getting  into  Taranganui.  Whether  the  Hau-Haus  will 
be  satisfied  with  the  slaughter*  they  have  effected,  or  will 
try  to  penetrate  further  into  the  settlement  or  attack 
Taranganui,  remains  to  be  seen.  Of  course  the  people 
who  have  escaped  are,  like  ourselves,  ignorant  of  every- 
thing that  has  taken  place  except  what  happened  in  their 
immediate  neighborhood.  I  should  fancy,  myself,  that 
however  widespread  the  massacre  may  have  been,  the 
Hau-Haus  started  last  night  on  their  way  back.  They 
would  know  that  as  soon  as  the  news  reached  Wairoa  the 
force  there  will  be  on  the  move  to  cut  them  off." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  277 

"Do  you   think   they  will   succeed?"   Wilfrid  asked 

eagerly. 

"I  do  not  think  so,  Wilfrid.  If  Colonel  Whitmore 
were  there  they  would  have  routed  out  Te  Kooti  long  ago, 
but  Colonel  Lambert  seems  a  man  of  a  different  stamp 
altogether.  Why,  I  heard  last  night  that  he  marched  six 
days  ago  to  Whataroa,  quite  close  to  Te  Kooti 's  place, 
and  that  a  prisoner  they  took  gave  them  positive  infor- 
mation that  the  Hau-Haus  there  had  all  left  to  assist  Te 
Kooti  in  a  raid  upon  Poverty  Bay.  It  seems  they  did 
not  believe  the  news  at  any  rate,  although  a  mail  left 
for  Poverty  Bay  on  the  day  after  they  returned  to  Wairoa, 
they  sent  no  news  whatever  of  the  report  they  had  heard. 
If  they  had  done  so  there  would  have  been  plenty  of  time 
for  the  settlers  to  prepare  for  the  attack. 

"It  is  one  of  the  most  scandalous  cases  of  neglect  that 
I  ever  heard  of,  and  Lambert  ought  to  be  tried  by  court- 
martial,  though  that  would  not  bring  all  these  people  to 
life  again.  However  there  is  one  thing  certain — the 
news  of  this  affair  will  create  such  a  sensation  through- 
out the  island  that  even  the  incapable  government  at 
Auckland,  who  have  disregarded  all  the  urgent  requests 
for  aid  against  Te  Kooti,  will  be  forced  to  do  something, 
-  and  I  sincerely  hope  they  will  dispatch  Whitmore  with  a 
strong  force  of  constabulary  to  wipe  out  Te  Kooti  and  his 
band.  It  is  curious  how  things  come  about.  Almost  all 
these  poor  fellows  who  have  been  killed  belong  to  the 
Poverty  Bay  militta,  who  refused  to  press  on  with  Whit- 
more in  pursuit  of  Te  Kooti.  Had  they  done  so,  the 
addition  of  thirty  white  men  to  his  force  might  have 
made  all  the  difference  in  that  fight  you  had  with  him, 
and  in  that  case  Te  Kooti  would  have  been  driven  far  up 
the  country  and  this  massacre  would  never  have  taken 
place. ' ' 


278  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

It  was  a  great  relief  to  Mrs.  Renshaw  when  Wilfrid 
reached  the  village.  She  was  not  given  to  idle  fears, 
and  felt  convinced  that  he  was  running  no  real  danger; 
for  she  knew  Mr.  Atherton  would  not  have  left  him  by 
himself  had  he  not  been  perfectly  convinced  there  was  no 
danger  of  pursuit.  Still  she  felt  a  weight  lifted  off  her 
mind  when  she  saw  the  party  entering  the  village. 

"Well,  mother,  you  must  have  had  a  terrible  journey 
of  it  yesterday,"  Wilfrid  said,  after  he  had  assured  her 
that  he  felt  none  the  worse  for  what  had  passed,  and  waa 
indeed  stronger  and  better  than  he  had  been  two  days 
before. 

"It  was  a  terrible  journey,  Wilfrid.  Fourteen  miles 
does  not  seem  such  a  very  long  distance  to  walk,  though 
I  do  not  suppose  I  ever  walked  as  far  since  I  was  a  girl; 
but  the  weight  of  the  stretcher  made  all  the  difference. 
It  did  not  feel  much  when  we  started,  but  it  soon  gpt 
heavier  as  we  went  on;  and  though  we  changed  sides 
every  few  minutes  it  seemed  at  last  as  if  one's  arms  were 
being  pulled  out  of  their  sockets.  We  could  never  have 
done  it  if  it  had  not  been  for  Mr.  Atherton.  He  kept  us 
cheery  the  whole  time.  It  seems  ridiculous  to  remember 
that  he  has  always  been  representing  himself  as  unequal 
to  any  exertion.  He  was  carrying  the  greater  part  of 
the  weight,  and  indeed  five  miles  before  we  got  to  the 
end  of  our  journey,  seeing  how  exhausted  we  were  be- 
coming, he  tied  two  sticks  six  feet  long  to  our  end  of  the 
poles,  and  in  that  way  made  the  work  a  great  deal  lighter 
for  us,  and  of  course  a  great  deal  heavier  for  himself. 
He  declared  he  hardly  felt  it,  for  by  that  time  I  had  torn 
two  wide  strips  from  the  bottom  of  my  dress,  tied  them 
together,  and  put  them  over  his  shoulders  and  fastened 
them  to  the  two  poles;  so  that  he  got  the  weight  on  his 
shoulders  instead  of  his  hands.  But  in  addition  to  Mr. 


ORI  AND  SETTLER.  279 

Sampson's  weight  he  carried  Hilly  perched  on  his  shoul- 
der thejast  eight  miles.  He  is  a  noble  fellow." 

"He  did  not  say  anything  about  carrying  Milly, "  Wil- 
frid said,  "or  of  taking  all  the  weight  of  the  litter.  He 
is  a  splendid  fellow,  mother." 

"He  was  terribly  exhausted  when  he  got  in,"  Mrs. 
Benshaw  said;  "and  was  looking  almost  as  pale  as  death 
when  we  went  into  the  light  in  the  hut  where  the  other 
fugitives  had  assembled.  As  soon  as  the  others  relieved 
him  of  the  weight  of  the  litter,  and  lifted  Milly  down 
from  his  shoulder,  he  went  out  of  the  hut.  As  soon  an  I 
had  seen  Mr.  Sampson  well  cared  for,  I  went  out  to  look 
for  him,  and  found  he  had  thrown  himself  down  on  the 
ground  outside,  and  was  lying  there,  I  thought  at  first 
insensible,  but  he  wasn't.  I  stooped  over  him  and  he 
said,  'I  am  all  right,  Mrs.  Benshaw,  but  I  was  not  up  to 
answering  questions.  In  half  an  hour  I  shall  be  myself 
again,  but  I  own  that  I  feel  washed  out  at  present. '  I 
took  him  out  a  glass  of  brandy  and  water,  he  drank  it 
and  said,  'I  feel  ashamed  of  being  waited  on  by  you, 
Mrs.  Benshaw,  when  you  must  be  as  tired  as  I  am. 
Please  do  not  bother  any  more  about  me,  but  if  you  will 
ask  one  of  the  others  to  get  a  native  blanket  to  throw 
over  me  to  keep  off  the  dew  I  shall  be  all  right  in  the 
morning ;  but  I  do  not  feel  that  I  could  get  ou  my  feet 
again  to-night  if  a  fortune  depended  on  it. '  Of  course  I 
did  as  he  asked  me,  and  I  was  perfectly  stupefied  this 
morning  when  I  heard  that  he  had  been  up  at  two  o'clock 
and  had  gone  off  with  a  party  of  natives  to  bring  yon 
in." 

"It  was  awfully  good  of  him,"  Wilfrid  said,  "and  he 
never  said  a  word  to  me  about  it.  Where  is  he?"  and  he 
looked  round.  But  Mr.  Atherton  had  disappeared. 
"Have  you  seen  Mr.  Atherton?"  they  asked  Mr.  Wylie, 


280  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

as  he  came  out  of  a  large  hut  that  had  been   given  up  for 
the  use  of  the  fugitives." 

"He  has  just  had  a  glass  of  spirits  and  water — unfor- 
tunately we  had  no  tea  to  offer  him — and  a  piece  of 
bread,  and  has  taken  a  blanket  and  has  gone  off  to  an 
empty  hut;  he  said  he  intended  to  sleep  until  to-morrow 
morning,"  and  indeed  it  was  not  until  next  day  that  Mr. 
Atherton  again  appeared. 

Several  friendly  natives  arrived  one  after  another  at 
the  village.  They  brought  the  news  that  the  Hau-Haus 
had  attacked  only  the  colonists  round  Matawairo,  and 
that  all  the  rest  of  the  settlers  were  gathered  at  Taran- 
ganui;  but  the  Hau-Haus  were  plundering  all  the  de- 
serted houses,  and  were  shooting  down  all  the  natives 
who  refused  to  join  them.  It  was  afterward  found  in- 
deed that  the  natives  had  suffered  even  more  severely 
than  the  whites,  for  while  thirty-three  of  the  latter  were 
murdered  thirty-seven  of  the  natives  were  killed.  Major 
Westrupp  had  left  by  ship  for  Napier  to  obtain  assist- 
ance, Lieutenant  Gascoigne  had  made  his  way  safely 
through  the  Hau-Haus  to  Taranganui,  and  had  sent  a 
whaleboat  out  to  a  schooner  that  was  seen  passing  down 
the  coast.  She  at  once  came  into  the  port,  and  the 
women  and  children  were  sent  off  to  Napier.  The  garri- 
son of  the  fort  had  been  reinforced  by  the  friendly 
natives  under  their  chief  Henare  Potare,  and  were  await- 
ing the  expected  attack  by  Te  Kooti. 

A  week  later  news  came  that  Major  Westrupp  and 
Captain  Tuke  had  arrived  from  Napier  with  three  hun- 
dred natives,  and  that  the  Hau-Haus  had  retired  with 
their  plunder.  The  party  at  Te  Mahia  at  once  started 
for  the  coast  accompanied  by  some  thirty  men  of  the 
Mahia  tribe.  A  wagon  had  been  procured  for  the  trans- 
port of  the  women  and  children,  and  a  march  of  twenty- 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  281 

four  milea  took  them  to  Taranganui.  They  found  that 
parties  had  been  out  the  day  before  to  bury  the  dead, 
and  had  brought  in  two  persons  who  were  supposed  to 
have  been  murdered.  As  one  of  the  parties  were  going 
along  they  saw  a  small  poodle  dog  run  into  a  bush,  and 
recognized  it  as  having  belonged  to  Captain  Wilson. 
They  called  and  whistled  to  it  in  vain,  and  came  to  the 
conclusion  that  some  one  must  be  in  hiding  there.  After 
half  an  hour's  search  they  discovered  little  James  Wilson 
with  the  dog  tightly  held  in  his  arms ;  the  boy  was  too 
frightened  to  distinguish  friend  from  foe,  and  was  greatly 
delighted  when  he  recognized  one  of  the  party.  He  told 
them  that  his  mother  was  alive,  and  was  lying  wounded 
in  an  outhouse  at  their  place.  He  had  lost  his  way 
while  trying  to  reach  Taranagnui  to  bring  help  to  her. 
Captain  Wilson  had  defended  his  house  with  a  revolver 
until  the  natives  brought  fire  to  burn  him  out.  As  they 
offered  to  spare  the  lives  of  all  within  if  they  surren- 
dered, Captain  Wilson,  thinking  that  there  was  a  possi- 
bility of  their  keeping  their  word  while  those  within 
would  certainly  be  burned  if  they  resisted,  surrendered. 
The  prisoners  were  being  led  along  by  their  captors, 
Captain  Wilson  carrying  the  little  boy,  when  the  natives 
fell  upon  them.  Captain  Wilson  was  shot  through  the 
back,  his  servant,  Morau,  tomahawked,  and  Mrs.  Wilson 
and  the  other  children  bayoneted.  Captain  Wilson, 
when  shot,  fell  into  a  bush,  and  the  little  boy  in  the  con- 
fusion crawled  away  unnoticed  into  the  scrub.  He  had"v 
wandered  about  sleeping  in  outhouses  for  several  nights, 
often  close  to  the  enemy,  and  at  last  found  his  way  back 
to  what  had  been  his  home,  and  found  the  bodies  of  his 
father,  brothers,  and  sisters,  and  on  going  into  an  out- 
house for  shelter  found  his  mother  alive  there. 

She  had  been  bayoneted  in  several  places  and  beaten 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

on  the  head  with  the  butt  of  a  rifle  until  they  thought 
her  dead.  Later  in  the  day  she  had  recovered  conscio'us- 
ness  and  crawled  back  to  the  house,  where  she  got  some 
water  and  then  took  refuge  in  the  outhouse,  where  two 
or  three  days  later  she  was  found  by  her  son.  She  had 
since  been  kept  alive  by  eggs  and  other  things  the  child 
found  by  foraging  round ;  but  he  had  at  last  started  to 
try  to  get  assistance  for  her. 

After  hearing  the  child's  story  the  party  had  galloped 
on  to  Captain  Wilson's,  and  the  poor  lady  had  been 
lound  and  carried  to  Taranganui.  A  few  days  later  she 
was  sent  down  to  Napier  by  ship,  but  expired  shortly 
after  from  the  effects  of  her  wounds. 

In  the  week  that  elapsed  between  the  date  of  the  mas- 
sacre and  their  return  to  the  settlement  Wilfrid  had 
regained  his  strength  wonderfully,  and  the  bracing  air 
of  the  hills  and  the  excitement  of  the  events  through 
which  he  passed  had  acted  as  a  complete  restorative. 
Mr.  Atherton  too  had  completely  recovered  from  his 
fatigue,  and  indeed,  professed  himself  to  have  benefited 
greatly  by  them,  as  he  maintained  that  in  three  days  he 
had  lost  as  many  stone  of  flesh.  The  morning  after  their 
return  to  Taranganui  they  had  a  long  talk  about  their 
plans.  It  was  settled  that  Mrs.  Renshaw  should  at  once 
return  home.  She  was  most  anxious  that  Wilfrid 
should  accompany  her;  but  this  he  would  not  consent 
to. 

"No,  mother,"  he  said;  "it  is  my  duty,  and  every 
one's  duty,  to  aid  in  hunting  down  these  murderous 
scoundrels.  They  have  massacred  a  number  of  people 
who  were  very  kind  to  me  when  I  first  became  ill,  and  I 
will  do  my  best  to  punish  them ;  besides,  until  Te 
Kooti's  band  is  destroyed  there  will  be  no  peace  or  safety 
for  any  of  the  outlying  settlements,  and  they  are  j  ust  as 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  283 

likely  to  make  an  attack  on  our  settlement  as  any  other; 
indeed,  we  are  the  nearest  to  them,  therefore  in  fighting 
here  I  am  fighting  for  the  protection  of  our  home." 

Mr.  Atherton  also  announced  his  intention  of  accom- 
panying the  column  in  pursuit  of  Te  Kooti. 

"I  dislike  fatigue  amazingly, "  he  said,  "but  for  sev- 
eral reasons  I  feel  myself  bound  to  see  this  affair  through 
to  the  end.  In  the  first  place  they  have  attacked  me  and 
caused  me  to  undergo  great  fatigue ;  in  the  second,  they 
have  murdered  a  number  of  my  acquaintances;  in  the 
third  place  I  have  to  look  after  this  boy  and  see  that  he 
gets  into  no  mischief;  and  lastly,  it  really  seems  to  me 
that  a  month  or  two  of  this  sort  of  thing  will  absolutely 
reduce  me  to  ordinary  dimensions,  a  thing  which  I  have 
for  years  given  up  even  hoping  for. " 

"Well,  Wilfrid,"  Mrs.  Kenshaw  said  at  last,  "I  sup- 
pose you  must  have  your  way.  I  do  think  that,  as  you 
say,  it  is  the  duty  of  everyone  to  do  all  that  he  can  to 
punish  the  people  who  have  committed  these  massacres 
upon  defenseless  people,  and  it  is  necessary  for  the  safety 
of  the  settlement  that  Te  Kooti 's  band  shall  be  destroyed. 
It  is  very  hard  on  us  to  know  that  our  only  son  is  fight- 
ing; but  other  men  as  well  have  to  leave  perhaps  wives 
and  children  behind,  and  if  only  those  without  ties  were 
to  go  the  force  would  be  a  small  one  indeed.  It  is  a 
comfort  to  me,  Mr.  Atherton,  that  you  have  made  up 
your  mind  to  go  too.  It  sounds  selfish  of  me  to  say  so; 
but  I  suppose  all  mothers  are  selfish  when  their  sons  are 
concerned." 

"I  understand  your  feeling,  Mrs.  Kenshaw,  and  it  is 
quite  natural.  I  do  think  that  everyone  who  can  carry 
a  musket  ought  to  join  in  this  expedition,  and  I  flatter 
myself  that  Wilfrid's  rifle  and  mine  are  allies  not  to  be 
despised.  Anyhow,  Mrs.  Renshaw,  I  promise  you  that 


284  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

we  will  not  do  what  are  called  rash  things.  We  won't 
try  to  capture  Te  Kooti  single-handed,  and  I  think  that 
we  can  be  much  more  useful  covering  an  attack  than 
leading  an  assault." 

Accordingly,  two  days  later  Mrs.  Renshaw  embarked 
on  a  coaster  for  the  Mohaka  river,  and  Mr.  Atherton  and 
"Wilfrid  announced  to  Lieutenant  Gascoigne  that  they 
would  accompany  his  force  as  volunteers. 

"I  am  heartily  glad  to  hear  it, "  that  officer  replied. 
"I  have  heard  from  Wylie  of  your  defense  of  that  pass 
against  the  Hau-Haus,  and  yesterday  I  had  a  talk  with 
Sampson,  who  is  getting  round  now,  and  he  gave  me  the 
history  of  the  affair,  and  from  what  he  says  you  and 
Renshaw  must  have  killed  at  least  twenty  Hau-Haus,  for 
Sampson  admits  that  he  is  not  much  of  a  shot  and  had  a 
very  small  share  in  the  total. : ' 

"Yes;  we  can  both  shoot  indifferently  well,"  Mr. 
Atherton  said  carelessly,  "and  can  both  be  trusted  to  hit 
a  Maori  if  we  see  him  within  about  four  hundred  yards 
of  us.  I  fancy  that  we  may  be  of  serivee  to  you  in 
keeping  down  the  fire  of  the  enemy  if  you  are  attacking 
a  pah.  There  is  nothing  cows  fellows  so  much  as  find- 
ing that  it  is  certain  death  to  raise  their  heads  from  be-, 
hind  shelter  to  take  aim.  Of  coarse  we  shall  be  ready 
generally  to  obey  orders,  but  that  is  the  special  work  we 
join  for.  You  see,  Renshaw  is  but  just  recovering  from 
illness,  and  my  build  unsuits  me  for  violent  exertion.  So 
if  you  want  to  storm  a  steep  hill  you  must  not  count  on 
us  being  with  you  except  so  far  as  shooting  goes." 

"Well,  I  will  take  you  on  your  own  terms,"  Lieuten- 
ant Gascoigne  said,  smiling.  "Mrs.  Sampson  told  me 
yesterday  how  disinclined  you  were  for  violent  exertion, 
ami  how  she  had  to  help  you  along  on  that  journey  to  Te 
Mahia." 


MA  ORI  AND  SETTLER.  285 

Mr.  Atherton  laughed.  "There  are  exceptions  to  all 
rules,"  he  said.  "I  am  a  peaceful  botanist,  but  1  had  to 
fight.  I  hate  exertion,  but  on  that  occasion  I  was  forced 
to  make  an  effort,  and  terribly  knocked  up  I  was  over  it. 
If  it  becomes  absolutely  necessary  I  may  have  to  make  an 
effort  again,  but  I  consider  it  altogether  outside  my 
province." 

The  expedition  started  on  the  following  morning,  the 
20th  of  November.  It  consisted  of  nearly  six  hundred 
natives  belonging  to  the  Napier  tribes,  the  Mahia,  and 
Marsuwai  tribes.  The  next  day  they  came  upon  the 
rearguard  of  the  Hau-Hau  tribes  of  Patutahi  and  shot 
two  of  them.  Great  quantities  of  booty  which  the  Hau- 
Haus  were  unable  to  carry  away  were  found  there,  to- 
gether with  the  bodies  of  several  friendly  natives.  The 
next  day  another  encampment  was  come  upon,  and  here 
the  carts  taken  from  the  plundered  farms  were  found.  At 
dusk  on  the  23d  the  column  came  up  with  the  main 
body  of  the  enemy,  who  were  encamped  on  the  Te 
Karetua  creek. 

A  heavy  fire  was  opened  on  both  sides,  and  the  natives 
then  charged,  but  were  driven  back  with  a  loss  of  five 
killed  and  twelve  wounded.-  Mr.  Atherton  and  Wilfrid, 
who  were  walking  leisurely  in  the  rear  of  the  column 
when  it  came  on  the  enemy,  arrived  too  late  to  take  any 
part  in  the  fight.  After  the  repulse  the  friendly  natives 
took  up  a  position  on  a  ridge  overlooking  the  Hau-Hau 
positions  and  distant  twelve  hundred  yards  from  it. 
Rifle-pits  were  dug,  and  for  the  next  week  firing  was 
kept  up  by  both  sides,  with  occasional  skirmishes  as  one 
party  or  the  other  tried  to  take  the  offensive,  but  neither 
•cared  to  try  a  determined  attack  on  the  other. 

The  Hau-Haus  had  lost  twenty  men  during  the  first 
day's  fighting,  and  suffered  more  in  the  distant  firing, 


286 

especially  whenever  they  gathered  as  if  for  an  attack, 
than  did  the  friendlies.  Thia  was  owing  in  no  small 
degree  to  the  accuracy  of  Mr.  Atherton's  fire.  He  had 
got  some  of  the  natives  to  dig  a  rifle-pit  three  or  four 
hundred  yards  down  the  hill  in  front  of  their  position, 
and  here  he  and  Wilfrid  ensconced  themselves  every 
morning  before  daybreak,  taking  down  with  them  their 
provisions  for  the  day,  and  from  this  point  they  galled 
the  Hau-Haus  greatly  with  their  fire.  Wilfrid  knew 
that  his  shooting  could  not  be  depended  upon  at  this 
distance;  but  Mr.  Atherton  had  been  accustomed  to  fire 
at  long  ranges,  and  although  at  eight  hundred  yards  his 
rifle  was  not  accurate  he  did  considerable  execution,  and 
so  alarmed  the  Hau-Haus  that  they  scarcely  dared  to 
move  by  daylight  from  one  part  of  their  intrenchment  to 
the  other.  The  friends  always  left  their  shelter  and  re- 
tired to  camp  as  soon  as  the  sun  set. 

The  Hau-Haus  were  not,  however,  idle.  A  party  of 
sixty  men  made  a  long  circuit  and  came  down  in  rear  of 
the  column,  captured  the  depot  at  Patutahi  with  eight 
kegs  of  ammunition  and  a  great  quantity  of  provisions, 
and  also  seized  a  number  of  pack  animals  on  the  way  up. 
On  the  3d  of  December  the  force  was  strengthened  by 
the  arrival  of  the  chiefs  Eapata  and  Hotene,  with  three 
hundred  and  seventy  men  from  Te  Wairoa.  These 
chiefly  belonged  to  the  Ngatiporou  tribe,  who  were  fa* 
better  fighters  than  the  Napier  or  Mahia  men. 

As  soon  as  the  reinforcements  had  arrived  it  was  de~ 
cided  at  once  to  dislodge  the  enemy  from  a  hill  of  which 
they  had  possession  and  then  to  make  a  general  attack 
on  the  intrenchments.  Forty  men  of  the  Wairoa  tribe 
under  Mr.  Preece  made  a  dashing  attack  on  the  hill,  and 
just  as  they  carried  it  Eapata  sent  a  message  to  him  to 
say  that  his  tribesmen  were  annoyed  by  the  enemy's  shot 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  287 

falling  into  their  camp,  and  were  therefore  determined 
to  attack  at  once.  That  tribe,  sallying  out,  carried  two 
of  the  enemy's  outworks  with  a  rush,  and  drove  the  Hau- 
Haus  back  to  their  last  line  of  rifle-pits  near  the  river. 
Here  they  were  attacked  by  the  Wairoa  men  on  the  left, 
Kapata  in  the  center,  and  the  tribesmen  from  Napier  on 
the  right.  The  assailants  carried  the  intrenchment  and 
drove  the  Hau-Haus  across  the  river,  these  suffering 
heavy  loss  from  the  firing  of  the  left  column,  who  from 
their  position  commanded  the  course  of  the  stream. 

Unfortunately  this  fire,  though  destructive  to  the 
enemy,  was  to  a  certain  extent  in  their  favor,  for  it  pre- 
vented the  close  pursuit  of  Rapata's  men.  Thirty-four 
Hau-Haus,  including  three  of  their  fighting  chiefs,  were 
found  dead.  Te  Kooti  himself  had  a  narrow  escape.  He 
was  still  suffering  from  his  wound  in  the  ankle,  and  was 
carried  up  the  bed  of  the  creek  on  a  woman's  back.  A 
great  quantity  of  the  loot  taken  from  the  settlers  was 
'recaptured,  and  many  of  the  friendly  natives  held  pris- 
oners by  the  Hau-Haus  escaped  during  the  fight.  Mr. 
Atherton  and  Wilfrid  had  joined  Rapata's  men  in  their 
charge,  and  after  the  fight  was  over  the  former  said : 
"Well,  Wilfrid,  it  is  a  satisfaction  to  have  got  some 
natives  with  us  at  last  who  will  fight.  It  seemed  at  first 
as  if  all  the  plucky  natives  had  joined  the  enemy ;  but 
Rapata's  men  .  are  first-rate  fellows,  though  I  wish  that 
they  had  rather  an  easier  name,  for  Ngatiporou  is  a 
crack-jaw  word  to  pronounce." 

"  Unfortunately  a  quarrel  arose  after  the  battle  between 
Rapata's  men  and  the  Napier  tribesmen,  and  three  hun- 
dred of  the  latter  went  off.  The  next  morning  Rapata 
and  his  tribe,  with  the  remaining  Wairoa  men,  marched 
out  to  attack  the  position  the  enemy  occupied  on  the 
top  of  a  hill  two  miles  away.  Mr.  Preece  led  the  ad- 


288  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

vanced  party,  and  found  the  defenses  consisted  of  two 
lines  of  strong  earthworks  extending  across  a  flat  shoul- 
der, either  end  resting  on  a  cliff.  Mr.  Preece  halted  his 
men  until  Eapata  came  up  with  the  main  body.  "Wilfrid 
and  Mr.  Atherton  had  attached  themselves  to  the 
Ngatiporou.  Just  as  they  joined  Mr.  Preece  one  of  the 
men  fired  off  a  gun,  and  the  enemy  answered  with  a  heavy 
volley.  Instantly  a  panic  set  in,  and  the  whole  force, 
•with  the  exception  of  some  sixteen  or  eighteen  men, 
bolted.  One  of  the  chiefs  under  Mr.  Preece  followed  and 
managed  to  stop  them,  and  persuaded  them  to  wait  until 
Eapata  could  return  to  them.  This  they  agreed  to  do, 
but  refused  positively  to  return  to  the  attack. 

Mr.  Preece  returned  to  Eapata,  who  was  in  a  state  of 
fury  at  the  defection  of  his  tribe.  "We  will  go  on  and 
attack  the  place  by  ourselves,"  he  said.  "Perhaps  the 
cowards  will  come  up  when  they  hear  we  are  fighting. " 
Mr.  Preece  at  once  agreed,  and  the  party,  consisting  of 
the  two  leaders,  Mr.  Atherton  and  Wilfrid,  and  fourteen 
of  Eapata 's  men,  worked  back  through  the  low  scrub 
until  within  twenty -five  yards  of  the  first  line  of  earth- 
works, when  they  opened  fire  upon  the  enemy. 

"This  is  rather  close  work,  "Wilfrid,"  Mr.  Atherton 
said.  ""We  have  the  best  of  it  in  some  respects,  because 
they  cannot  make  out  our  position  among  the  bushes, 
and  they  are  obliged  to  stand  up  and  show  their  heads 
above  the  parapet  when  they  fire.  We  ought  never  to 
miss  them  at  this  distance,  and  we  will  soon  teach  them 
that  it  is  fatal  to  pause  a  moment  to  take  aim,  so  at  the 
worst  they  will  only  blaze  away  at  random." 

For  some  time  the  fight  continued,  and  then  Eapata 
requested  Mr.  Preece  to  go  down  the  hill  and  bring  up 
some  more  men.  Only  nine  men  would  follow  Mr. 
Preece,  and  Eapata  was  so  disgusted  that  he  himself  went 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER,  289 

down  for  some  distance  and  managed  to  get  thirty  more. 
One  of  the  men  had  brought  a  bill  up  with  him,  and  with 
this  shallow  rifle-pits  were  dug  among  the  bushes,  afford- 
ing a  shelter  to  the  men  as  they  lay  flat  while  loading. 
At  three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  the  chief  called  on  his 
tribesmen  to  follow  him,  and,  leaping  up,  they  dashed  at 
one  of  the  outposts  and  carried  it.  A  man  took  the  news 
down  the  hill,  and  a  chief  and  thirty  more  men  came  up 
and  joined  in  the  fight. 

At  dusk  Eapata  requested  Mr.  Preece  to  return  to 
camp  and  try  to  get  the  main  body  back  with  ammuni- 
tion, as  their  own  was  almost  exhausted.  Mr.  Preece 
could  not  induce  the  natives  to  start,  but  they  said  they 
would  go  in  the  morning.  All  night  the  fight  went 
on,  but  before  dawn  Eapata,  having  expended  his  last 
round  of  ammunition,  retired,  having  lost  six  men  killed 
and  four  wounded.  As  he  and  his  men  came  down  they 
strode  through  the  camp  in  single  file,  not  deigning  to 
take  the  slightest  notice  of  the  fugitives,  and  passing 
on,  camped  apart  half  a  mile  further  on.  The  main  body, 
ashamed  of  their  cowardly  conduct,  were  afraid  to  go 
near  the  chief.  As  it  was  necessary  to  ascertain  what  he 
meant  to  do,  one  of  the  white  officers  went  to  see  him. 

For  some  time  the  chief  would  make  no  reply.  At 
last  he  said,  "My  men  have  betrayed  me,  and  I  will  have 
nothing  further  to  do  with  them.  I  intend  to  return 
home  and  get  other  men,  and  when  I  get  back  I  will  at- 
tack the  Napier  tribe  who  deserted  me." 

The  same  day  he  marched  for  the  coast,  followed  at  a 
distance  by  the  abashed  fugitives.  On  the  way  down 
they  met  Colonel  "Whitmore,  who  with  three  hundred  con- 
stabulary had  just  arrived  by  ship  from  the  scene  of 
operations  on  the  other  side  of  the  island. 

The  colonel  begged  Kapata  to  return  with  him,  but 


290  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

the  chief  said,  "I  never  break  my  word.  I  have  said  I 
will  go  home,  and  I  will;  but  I  will  return  with  other 
men  and  attack  the  Napier  tribes." 

After  much  persuasion  Colonel  Whitmore  got  him  to 
promise  that  he  would  not  interfere  with  the  Napier  men ; 
but  nothing  could  persuade  him  to  fight  again  with  those 
men  of  his  own  tribe  who  had  deserted  him.  Such  being 
the  case,  a  steamer  was  placed  at  his  disposal  in  order 
that  he  might  make  the  voyage  and  return  as  soon  as 
possible. 

After  Eapata  had  left  Colonel  Whitnaore  sent  out  a 
skirmishing  party  to  ascertain  whether  the  enemy  re- 
tained their  position.  The  scouts  returned  with  the 
news  that  there  were  great  fires  on  the  crest  of  the  hill, 
and  they  believed  that  the  Hau-Haus  were  burning  their 
huts  preparatory  to  returning  into  the  interior.  Colonel 
Whitmore  believed  the  report,  and  considering  that  the 
Hau-Haus  would  leave  the  neighborhood  of  the  settle- 
ment altogether,  he  ordered  the  constabulary  to  march 
down  to  the  coast  again  as  soon  as  possible  and  re-embark 
there,  as  their  presence  was  urgently  required  in  the 
north  of  the  province  of  Wellington,  which  had  been  left 
open  to  the  attack  of->the  enemy  there  by  their  with- 
drawal. 

Fortunately  before  they  re-embarked  Te  Kooti  showed 
his  hand.  He  had  no  idea  of  retreating  from  his  posi- 
tion, and  the  fires  were  caused  by  the  clearing  off  of  the 
scrub  which  had  afforded  shelter  to  Eapata's  force.  No 
sooner  did  he  hear  that  Colonel  Whitmore  had  marched 
away  than  he  sent  a  party  down  against  one  of  the  out- 
lying settlements,  where  they  murdered  Mr.  Ferguson, 
Mr.  Wylie's  son,_and  a  friendly  native.  Colonel  Whit- 
more, on  receiving  news  of  the  raid,  marched  rapidly  to 
cut  off  the  retreat  of  the  Hau-Haus;  but  they  managed 
to  evade  him  and  to  retire  to  their  main  body. 


MAORI  AND  8ETTLSR.  291 

On  the  27th  of  December  Colonel  "Whitmore's  force 
occupied  a  high  ridge  a  mile  distant  from  Te  Kooti's 
position.  Here  the  colonel  received  news  that  Rapata 
had  just  landed  with  three  hundred  and  seventy  men, 
and  messenger  after  messenger  was  sent  down  urging 
him  to  hurry  up.  The  chief,  who  was  .seriously  ill,  was 
much  annoyed  by  these  messages,  especially  by  the  last, 
that  if  he  did  not  come  soon  Whitmore  would  take  the 
place  without  him.  Rapata  replied:  "Very  well,  I  have 
tried  and  failed ;  it  is  his  turn  now, "  and  immediately 
ordered  his  men  to  camp  for  the  day. 

The  next  morning  Colonel  Whitmore  came  down  him- 
self, Laving  been  advised  that  the  only  way  to  succeed 
with  Rapata  was  to  treat  him  in  a  conciliatory  way.  The 
chief's  first  words  were,  "Have  you  taken  the  place?" 

"No,"  Colonel  Whitmore  replied.  "I  am  waiting  for 
you,  Rapata." 

"Very  good,"  Rapata  said;  "I  will  be  with  you  to- 
morrow morning. "  The  Ngatiporou  performed  a  great 
war-dance,  and  as  no  one  stumbled  or  fell  they  consid- 
ered the  omen  to  be  good  one,  and  marched  on  and  joined 
Colonel  Whitmore's  force  that  night. 


292  MAORI  AND  SETTLER, 


CHAPTER   XVII. 

BACK      AT      THE      FABM. 

THE  position  of  the  Hau-Haus  was  naturally  a  very 
strong  one,  being  at  the  top  of  a  high  conical  peak  rising 
abruptly  from  low  bush-covered  hills  to  a  height  of  two 
thousand  feet.  On  the  face,  which  had  been  before  at- 
tacked, the  ground  sloped  gradually  up  to  the  summit, 
but  on  the  right  and  left  the  slope  was  very  steep,  and  at 
one  point  there  had  been  a  landslip  leaving  a  perpendic- 
ular face  twenty  feet  high,  and  below  that,  for  fifty  feet, 
it  was  so  steep  that  it  was  difficult  to  get  a  footing.  The 
ground  in  rear  of  the  position  narrowed  into  a  razor- 
backed ridge  down  which  a  track  led,  with  rope  ladders 
to  aid  the  descent  of  the  rock  terraces. 

The  position  in  front,  where  alone  it  could  be  attacked 
was  defended  by  three  lines  of  earthworks  with  high 
parapets,  and  with  ditches  in  front  abutting  at  either  end 
on  the  steep  slopes.  The  two  lower  works  were  seven 
feet  high,  the  upper  work  was  nearly  fourteen  feet  high, 
with  sandbag  loopholes  to  enable  the  defenders  to  fire 
through.  Each  line  was  connected  with  the  one  above 
it  by  covered  ways.  Operations  commenced  by  the  ad- 
vance of  the  Arawa  division  of  the  constabulary,  and  a 
portion  of  the  Ngatiporou  under  Kapata.  Advancing 
quietly  and  cautiously  they  came  upon  a  party  of  the 
enemy  engaged  in  carrying  up  water.  They  drove  them 
up  to  the  pah  and  took  possession  of  the  only  water 
available. 


MAOttT  AND  SETTLER.  293 

Bifle-pits  were  now  dug  and  pushed  forward  gradually 
until  within  a  hundred  yards  of  the  enemy's  first  lines  of 
defense.  Number  seven  division  of  the  constabulary 
were  now  sent  up,  and  these  threw  up  a  long  line  of 
trenches  parallel  to  the  enemy's  works;  and  the  artillery- 
men having  with  great  exertion  brought  up  a  mortar,  a 
vertical  shell-fire  was  opened  upon  the  enemy's  position 
with  great  effect ;  although  to  get  them  to  the  spot  these 
shells  had  to  be  carried  on  the  men's  backs  for  three 
miles  over  some  terrific  ravines.  A  hundred  constabulary 
tinder  Colonel  Fraser  and  a  hundred  Ngatiporou  were 
sent  round  to  cut  off  the  enemy's  retreat  in  rear.  An- 
other division  of  constabulary  under  Major  Roberts  con- 
nected the  two  parties,  and  thus  all  escape  of  the  enemy 
was  cut  off,  with  the  exception  of  the  small  piece  of  cliff, 
seventy  yards  in  length,  which  was  believed  impossible 
to  descend,  and  was  moreover  exposed  to  a  flanking  fire 
from  Rapata's  force  in  front  and  that  of  Colonel  Fraser 
in  the  rear. 

For  some  days  heavy  firing  went  on,  and  the  hardships 
suffered  by  the  force  were  great,  for  the  rain  fell  without 
intermission.  There  were  many  casualties  on  both  sides. 
Captain  Brown  of  the  constabulary  was  killed,  and  Cap- 
tain Cabel  of  the  same  corps  severely  wounded.  Colonel 
Fraser 's  men  pushed  up  the  ridge  in  the  enemy's  rear, 
and  formed  rifle-pits  near  the  summit  from  which  the 
Hau-Haus  made  desperate  but  vain  attempts  to  repel 
them.  On  the  4th  of  January  Rapata,  after  consultation 
•with  Colonel  "Whitmore,  determined  to  storm  the  lower 
line  of  earthworks.  He  told  off  fifty  picked  men,  and 
sent  them  round  with  instructions  to  scale  the  cliffs  at 
the  point  where  the  parapet  ended.  The  work  was  a 
dangerous  and  difficult  one,  for  the  cliff  was  very  steep 
and  gravelly,  and  the  Hau-Haus  crowded  to  the  end  of 


294  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

the  trench  and  fired  down,  wounding  five  of  the  stormers. 
But  to  do  this  they  had  to  expose  themselves,  and  suffered 
severely  from  the  fire  of  the  men  told  off  to  cover  the  at- 
tack. Finally  the  Ngatiporou  succeeded  in  climbing  up 
under  the  outer  face  of  the  parapet,  which  they  cut 
through  with  their  spades,  and  opening  a  raking  fire 
upon  the  Hau-Haus  drove  them  out  and  took  possession 
of  the  first  line  of  defense. 

All  night  a  sap  was  carried  upward  toward  the  second 
line,  with  the  intention  of  blowing  up  the  earthworks 
and  storming  the  main  works  next  morning,  and  two 
hundred  picked  men  were  assembled  in  the  trenches 
ready  to  attack  at  daybreak.  But  at  two  o'clock  in  the 
morning  a  woman  cried  out  from  within  the  pah  that  the 
Hau-Haus  had  all  left,  leaving  only  some  wounded  men 
and  women  and  children.  Her  words  were  not  at  first 
believed,  and  they  were  considered  to  be  only  a  ruse  to 
induce  the  assailants  to  advance  up  the  hill  under  the 
enemy's  fire»  But  at  daybreak  it  was  found  that  the 
news  was  true,  that  the  whole  of  the  Hau-Haus  had  es- 
caped, by  means  of  ropes,  down  the  face  of  the  perpendic- 
ular cliff. 

Kapata  with  his  men  started  in  pursuit.  He  followed 
the  Hau-Hau  trail  for  some  distance,  and  then  scattered 
his  men  in  small  parties  as  he  guessed  that  the  enemy 
would  scatter  in  search  of  food.  A  hundred  and  twenty 
of  the  Hau-Haus  were  overtaken  and  killed,  and  Bapata 
returned  after  an  absence  of  two  days.  By  this  time  the 
whites  and  constabulary  had  left,  as  the  work  had  now 
been  done  and  the  constabulary  were  urgently  needed 
elsewhere.  Bapata  marched  back  by  a  circuitous  way, 
captured  eighty  more  prisoners,  men,  women  and  chil- 
dren, whom  he  brought  alive  down  into  the  settlement. 
Te  Kooti  had  lost  altogether  during  the  siege  and  pursuit 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  295 

a  hundred  and  fifty  of  his  men,  but  he  was  still  believed 
in  by  the  natives,  three  tribes  joining  him  at  once,  more 
than  making  up  for  the  loss  he  had  suffered. 

Mr.  Atherton  and  the  other  volunteers  with  Colonel 
Whitmore's  force  had  taken  but  small  share  in  the  second 
attack  upon  Te  Kooti's  position,  not  being  attached  to 
any  regular  force.  Rapata  had  been  greatly  struck  with 
the  coolness  of  Mr.  Atherton  and  Wilfrid  in  his  first  at- 
tack, and  astonished  at  the  accuracy  of  their  shooting, 
and  had  greeted  them  very  heartily  on  his  return,  and 
invited  them  to  act  with  his  force.  They  had,  therefore, 
during  the  siege  taken  up  their  position  in  some  rifle-pits 
in  the  rear  of  his  party,  and  from  here  had  done  great 
service  to  the  Ngatiporou  by  covering  them  from  the 
enemy's  fire,  for  the  Hau-Haus  soon  learned  that  it  was 
almost  certain  death  to  stand  up  to  take  a  steady  aim 
above  the  parapet. 

After  the  defeat  of  the  Hau-Haus  many  of  the  natives 
of  Poverty  Bay  who  had  joined  Te  Kooti,  and  taken  a 
prominent  part  in  the  massacres,  deserted  him,  and 
calmly  returned  to  the  settlement  as  if  nothing  had  taken 
place",  and  the  authorities  allowed  them  to  remain  unmo- 
lested. The  settlers,  justly  indignant  that  men  who  had 
BO  lately  murdered  women  and  children  should  be  allowed 
to  come  down  among  them  with  impunity,  formed  them- 
selves into  a  vigilance  committee,  and  some  of  them  who 
had  lost  relatives  in  the  massacre  bound  themselves  by 
oath  to  shoot  the  next  party  of  ruffians  who  made  their 
appearance. 

An  opportunity  soon  offered.  A  native  who  had  as- 
sisted in  murdering  Mr.  Wylie's  son  came  in,  and  was 
shot  by  Mr.  Benson.  The  following  morning,  to  his  as- 
tonishment, Benson  was  warned  to  attend  as  juryman  at 
the  inquest  of  his  victim.  In  vain  he  assured  the  native 


296  MAORI  AND  hETTLER. 

constable  that  he  was  the  man  who  had  done  the  deed, 
and  that  he  ought  not  therefore  to  sit.  The  constable 
refused  to  entertain  the  excuse,  and  so  Benson  not  only 
sat  on  his  own  trial,  but  gave  evidence  against  himself, 
and  the  jury,  among  whom  was  Mr.  Atherton,  having 
heard  his  statement,  brought  in  the  following  verdict: 
"We  find  that  the  deceased  was  shot  by  some  person  un- 
known, and  served  him  right." 

The  day  after  this  verdict  was  returned  Mr.  Atherton 
and  Wilfrid,  who  had  been  waiting  ten  days  for  a  coast- 
ing craft,  sailed  for  the  Mohaka  river,  and,  landing  at 
Mr.  Mitford's,  borrowed  two  horses  from  him,  and  were 
soon  at  The  Glade. 

"lam  afraid  I  am  heavy  on  a  horse  still,  Wilfrid," 
Mr.  Atherton  said  as  they  started,  "but  this  animal  may 
be  thankful  that  I  did  not  ride  him  the  last  time  I  was 
here.  I  calculate  I  must  be  at  least  four  stone  lighter 
than  I  was. ' ' 

"  You  certainly  have  lost  a  good  deal  of  flesh,  Mr. 
Atherton.  I  almost  wonder  that  you  did  not  continue 
with  our  friend  Eapata.  He  declares  that,  he  will  follow 
up  Te  Kooti  till  he  catches  him  if  it  takes  him  a  couple 
of  years." 

"No,  no,  Wilfrid,"  Mr.  Atherton  laughed,  "it  is  pos- 
sible to  have  too  much  of  a  good  thing.  I  might  jog 
along  with  a  colonial  force  well  enough  and  benefit  by  it, 
but  Bapata  and  his  men  would  kill  me  in  a  week.  I  do 
not  think  those  fellows  know  what  it  is  to  be  tired.  No, 
I  am  very  well  contented,  and  I  intend  to  do  no  end  of 
work  in  the  woods  and  keep  myself  down  to  my  present 
weight.  There  is  an  immense  deal  to  be  done  in  the 
•way  of  botanizing.  I  have  already  found  twelve  new  sorts 
of  ferns,  and  I  have  only  just  begun,  and  have  not  even 
looked  at  the  orchids  yet  or  the  mosses." 


Maori.         "  I  AM  AFRAID  I  AM  HEAVY  ON  A  HORSE  STILL,  WILFRID."— Page  296. 


297 

"I  should  have  thought,  Mr.  Atherton,  that  it  would 
have  been  well  worth  your  while  to  go  in  for  collecting 
and  sending  home  rare  and  new  plants,  instead  of  merely 
drying  specimens  for  your  herbarium.  I  know  new 
orchids  fetch  a  tremendous  price,  because  a  gentleman 
near  us  at  home  had  a  large  house  full  of  them,  and  I 
know  he  used  to  pay  what  seemed  to  me  prodigious 
prices  for  little  scraps  of  plants  not  a  bit  more  beautiful 
than  the  others,  simply  because  they  were  rare." 

"The  idea  is  a  very  good  one,  Wilfrid,  and  I  will  think 
it  over.  I  have  never  gone  in  for  collecting  in  that  way, 
for  my  income  has  been  amply  sufficient  for  my  wants, 
but  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  in  these  days,  when  peo- 
ple are  ready  to  give  such  large  sums  for  rare  plants,  a 
botanist  like  myself  might  make  a  really  good  thing  of  it 
out  here.  The  woods  are  literally  crowded  with  rare 
plants,  and  it  would  add  to  the  interest  of  my  excursions. 
As  it  is  now  I  simply  look  for  new  species,  and  even  here 
these  are  hard  to  discover;  but  if  I  took  to  getting  rare 
specimens  for  sending  home,  there  would  be  an  unlimited 
field  of  work  for  me.  Of  course  the  difficulty  is  getting 
them  home  alive,  for  in  a  country  like  this,  where  there  is 
practically  no  winter,  they  are  never  in  an  entirely 
quiescent  state,  and  would  require  the  most  careful  pack- 
ing in  cases  specially  constructed  for  them,  and  would 
need  attention  on  the  voyage.  Still  all  this  might  be 
managed,  and  a  steward  might  be  paid  well  to  take  them 
under  his  charge. 

"Well,  I  will  think  jit  over,  Wilfrid.  Your  idea  cer- 
tainly seems  a  good  one,  and  if  it  pays  the  great  horticul- 
turalists  to  send  out  skilled  men  to  collect  plants  for  them 
from  all  parts  of  the  world,  it  should  certainly  pay  me, 
who  am  living  in  the  center  of  one  of  the  most  varied 
groups  of  vegetation  in  the  world,  to  send  home  con- 
signments. ' ' 


298  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Ten  minutes  later  they  rode  into  the  clearing.  A  loud 
.  •whoop  of  welcome  was  heard  as  they  appeared,  and  Jack 
came  tearing  down  from  the  house  to  meet  them.  A 
moment  later  Marion  appeared  at  the  door,  and  she  too 
came  flying  toward  them.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Eenshaw  also 
appeared  on  the  veranda. 

"I  need  not  ask  you  how  you  are,  my  boy,"  Mr.  Een- 
shaw said  as  Wilfrid,  who  had  leaped  from  his  horse  as 
Marion  ran  up,  hastened  forward  with  her  to  the  house. 
"Your  mother  has  told  us  so  much  about  your  illness 
that  I  hardly  anticipated  seeing  you  looking  a  picture  of 
health.  Mr.  Atherton,  I  am  delighted  to  see  you.  My 
wife  has  told  me  how  much  we  all  owe  to  you  both  for 
your  care  of  Wilfrid  and  for  having  brought  him  and 
my  wife  safely  out  of  tho  hands  of  the  natives." 

"I  am  very  glad  that  I  was  able  to  be  of  some  little 
service,  Mr.  Renshaw.  It  is  quite  as  pleasant,  you  know, 
to  be  able  to  aid  as  it  is  to  be  aided,  so  wre  will  look  upon 
the  obligation  as  mutual.  Wilfrid  has  invited  me  to 
take  up  my  quarters  here  for  a  day  or  two  until  my 
shanty  is  put  in  order  again." 

"It  would  be  a  pleasure  to  us  if  you  would  take  up 
your  abode  here  permanently,"  Mr.  Eenshaw  said  as  Mr. 
Atherton  dismounted  from  his  horse  and  the  two  men 
wrung  each  other's  hands  warmly.  "Jack,  take  the  two 
horses  round  to  the  shed.  And  now  come  in.  Fortu- 
nately dinner  is  just  ready,  and  I  have  no  doubt  you  are 
ready  too." 

Wilfrid  was  struck  with  the  change  that  had  come 
over  his  father  sinse  he  had  been  away.  He  looked  bet- 
ter and  stronger  than  he  had  ever  seen  him  before,  and 
spoke  with  a  firmness  and  decision  quite  new  to  him. 
Mr.  Eenshaw,  finding  the  whole  responsibility  of  the 
farm  upon  his  shoulders,  had  been  obliged  to  put  aside 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  399 

his  books  and  to  throw  himself  into  the  business  with 
vigor.  At  first  the  unusual  exertion  involved  by  being 
out  all  day  looking  after  things  had  tried  him  a  good 
deal,  but  he  had  gained  strength  as  h*  went  on,  and  had 
even  come  to  like  the  work.  The  thought  that  his  wife 
and  Wilfrid  would  be  pleased  to  find  everything  going 
on  well  had  strengthened  Ljm  in  his  determination  to 
stick  to  it,  and  Marion  had,  as  far  as  the  housework 
allowed  her,  been  his  companion  when  about  the  farm, 
and  had  done  her  best  to  make  the  evenings  cheerful  and 
pleasant.  They  had  had  a  terribly  anxious  time  of  it 
during  the  week  between  the  arrival  of  the  news  of  the 
massacre  at  Poverty  Bay  and  Mrs.  Eenshaw's  return; 
but  after  that  their  life  had  gone  on  quietly,  although 
until  the  news  of  the  capture  of  Te  Kooti's  fortress  had 
arrived,  they  had  naturally  been  anxious  about  Wilfrid's 
safety. 

"You  are  looking  wonderfully  well  and  sunburned, 
father,"  the  lad  said  as  they  sat  at  dinner. 

"Your  father  has  been  out  from  morning  until  night, 
Wilfrid,  managing  the  farm,"  Mr.  Renshaw  said  with  a 
glad  smile,  "and  I  do  think  the  exercise  has  done  him  a 
great  deal  of  good. " 

"I  am  sure  it  has,  mother,"  Wilfrid  agreed.  "I  am 
afraid  the  book  has  not  made  much  progress,  father, 
since  I  have  been  awaj\  " 

"It  has  made  no  progress  at  all,  Wilfrid,  and  I  do  not 
suppose  it  ever  will.  Science  is  all  very  well  when  a 
man  can  afford  to  make  it  his  hobby,  but  I  have  come  to 
the  concluson  that  a  man  has  no  right  to  ride  a  hobby 
•while  his  family  have  to  work  to  make  a  living." 

"But  we  were  all  glad  to  work,  father,"  Wilfrid  said. 
"And  now  I  am  back  again  there  is  no  reason  why  you 
should  not  return  to  your  work. " 


300  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"No,  "Wilfrid.  I  have  been  selfish  a  great  deal  too 
long,  and  indeed,  now  that  I  have  broken  myself  into  an 
active  life  out  of  doors,  I  have  at  present,  at  any  rate,  no 
inclination  to  take  to  the  pen  again.  I  feel  better  than  I 
have  done  for  years,  and  am  astonished  myself  at  the 
work  I  can  get  through.  As  to  my  appetite,  I  eat  twice 
as  much  as  I  used  to,  and  really  enjoy  my  food.  Since 
the  day  we  heard  of  the  failure  of  the  bank  the  burden 
has  all  been  on  your  shoulders,  Wilfrid  and  your 
mother's.  I  am  going  to  take  my  share  of  it  in  the 
future.  As  to  the  book,  some  one  else  must  write  it.  I 
do  not  suppose  it  would  ever  have  really  paid.  I  almost 
wonder  now  how  I  could  have  thought  that  I  out  here 
could  have  derived  any  satisfaction  from  knowing  that 
my  work  was  praised  by  scientific  men  at  home ;  beside, 
to  do  it  properly  a  man  must  live  among  the  natives, 
must  travel  all  over  the  island  and  gather  the  traditions 
current  in  every  tribe.  That  I  could  not  do,  and  if  I  could 
have  no  inclination  for  it.  I  have  been  thinking  that 
I  shall  ask  Mr.  Atherton  to  teach  me  a  little  botany,  so 
that  I  can  enjoy  a  little  more  intelligently  than  I  can  now 
do  the  wonders  of  our  forests  " 

"That  I  will  gladly  do,  Mr.  Renshaw.  I  am  sure  it 
•would  add  greatly  to  the  enjoyment  of  your  life  here  to 
become  acquainted  with  the  secrets  of  the  marvelous 
vegetation  around.  It  is  extraordinary  to  me  that  men 
should  be  content  to  remain  in  ignorance  of  the  names  of 
even  the  principal  trees  and  shrubs  that  meet  their  eye 
at  every  turn.  There  is  not  one  settler  in  a  hundred  can 
tell  you  the  names  of  a  score  of  trees  in  the  island. 
While  I  have  been  away  I  have  tried  to  get  the  native 
names  of  many  of  the  trees  that  are  mostly  to  be  met 
with,  and  only  in  one  or  two  cases  could  I  get  any  infor- 
mation, although  some  of  the  settlers  have  been  living 
for  years  among  them. ' ' 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  301 

"And  now,  Mr.  Atherton,  about  what  I  was  saying 
just  now,  do  not  you  think  it  would  be  more  pleasant  for 
you  to  erect  a  fresh  hut  close  to  ours  instead  of  living  by 
yourself  away  in  the  woods?  It  would  be  a  great  pleas- 
ure to  all  of  us  to  have  you  with  us.  Your  society  would 
brighten  our  life  here.  We  should  have  the  assistance  of 
your  rifle  in  case  the  natives  broke  out  again.  You 
would,  of  course,  live  with  us,  but  you  would  have  your 
own  hut  to  retire  to  when  you  liked  to  be  alone.  What 
do  you  say?" 

"I  say  that  it  is  a  very  kind  offer,  Mr.  Renshaw,  and 
it  would  certainly  be  very  much  more  pleasant  for  me 
than  living  out  there  by  myself  at  the  mercy  of  a  native 
cook.  On  the  condition  that  you  will  allow  me  to  pay 
my  share  of  the  expenses  of  housekeeping  I  will  gladly 
accept  your  offer." 

"The  expenses  of  housekeeping  are  next  to  nothing,  Mr. 
Atherton,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  laughed;  "but  if  you  make  it 
a  condition  we  must  of  course  agree  to  your  terms,  and 
you  shall  be  permitted  to  pay  your  quota  to  the  expenses 
of  the  establishment ;  but  I  warn  you  that  the  amount 
will  not  be  a  heavy  one." 

"Heavy  or  light,  I  shall  be  glad  to  pay  it,  Mrs.  Ren- 
shaw.  The  arrangement  would  be  a  delightful  one  for 
me,  for  although  as  a  traveler  I  have  necessarily  been 
much  alone,  I  am  a  gregarious  animal,  and  fond  of  the 
company  of  mankind." 

And  so  tw#  days  later  a  party  of  natives  were  set  to 
work,  and  a  hut  was  erected  for  Mr.  Atherton  twenty 
yards  away  from  the  house,  and  was  soon  fitted  up  as  his 
other  had  been.  Wilfrid  had  at  once  taken  up  his  own 
work  at  the  farm,  but  was  now  his  father's  right  hand, 
instead  of  having  as  before  everything  on  his  shoulders. 

The  natives  in  the  neighborhood  had  now  settled  down 


302  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

again.  From  time  to  time  news  came  that  showed  that 
the  Hau-Hau  rebellion  was  almost  crushed.  Colonel 
Whitmore,  having  finally  completely  subdued  the  Hau- 
Hau  tribes  in  the  north  of  Wellington  and  Taranaki,  had 
marched  with  a  strong  force  divided  into  four  columns 
and  severely  punished  all  the  tribes  that  had  joined  Te 
Kooti  in  the  northeastern  part  of  the  island.  Te  Kooti 
himself,  after  perpetrating  several  other  massacres  of 
settlers,  was  a  fugitive,  hotly  hunted  by  Rapata,  who 
gave  him  no  rest,  surprising  him  several  times,  and  ex- 
terminating the  last  remnants  of  the  band  who  had 
escaped  with  him  from  the  Chatham  Islands.  Te  Kooti 
himself  was  now  believed  to  be  hiding  somewhere  in  the 
Waikato  country;  but  he  was  no  longer  dangerous,  his 
schemes  had  utterly  failed,  his  pretensions  had  even  in 
the  native  eyes  been  altogether  discredited,  and  all  who 
had  adhered  to  him  had  either  been  killed  or  punished 
by  the  destruction  of  their  villages  and  clearings..  There 
was  not  the  slightest  chance  that  he  would  ever  again 
trouble  the  community. 

The  settlement  on  the  Mohaka  river  had  grown,  and 
in  six  months  after  Wilfrid's  return  the  whole  of  the 
land  lying  between  the  Allen  farm  and  Mr.  Mitford's  was 
taken  up,  and  two  or  three  families  had  settled  beyond 
Mr.  Atherton's  holding.  At  The  Glade  everything  went 
on  prosperously — the  animals  multiplied,  the  crops  w.ere 
excellent,  and,  owing  to  the  many  settlers  arriving  and 
requiring  food  until  they  could  raise  it  for  themselves, 
much  better  prices  were  obtained  for  the  produce,  and  it 
was  no  longer  necessary  to  ship  it  to  Napier  or  Welling- 
ton. 

Although  Mr.  Atherton  had  not  gone  through  any 
such  fatigues  as  those  that  he  had  endured  at  Poverty 
Bay  he  had  continued  steadily  to  decrease  in  weight. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  303 

Feeling  nimself  so  much  lighter  and  more  aoiive  on  the 
return  from  the  expedition,  he  had  continued  to  stick  to 
long  and  regular  exercise,  and  was  out  every  day,  with  a 
native  to  carry  his  tin  collecting  boxes,  his  presses,  ax, 
and  trowel,  from  breakfast-time  until  dark.  As  he  stead- 
ily refused  to  take  any  food  with  him,  and  fasted  from 
breakfast-time  till  supper,  the  prolonged  exercise  in  the 
close  heat  of  the  woods  did  its  work  rapidly,  and  at  the 
end  of  a  year  from  the  date  of  his  taking  up  his  abode  at 
The  Glade  he  could  no  longer  be  called  a  stout  man,  and 
newcomers  looked  with  admiration  at  his  broad  shoulders 
and  powerful  figure. 

"When  I  first  came  to  New  Zealand,"  he  said,  "I 
thought  it  probable  that  I  should  only  stay  here  a  few 
weeks,  or  at  most  a  few  months,  and  I  had  a  strong  doubt 
whether  it  would  repay  my  trouble  in  coming  out  here. 
Now  I  am  sure  that  it  was  the  very  best  step  I  ever  took. 
I  weighed  the  other  day  at  Mitford's,  and  I  did  not  turn 
eighteen  stone,  which  is  nothing  out  of  the  way  for  a 
man  of  my  height  and  size.  Last  time  I  weighed  I 
pulled  down  twenty-six.  When  I  go  back  to  England  I 
shall  stick  to  my  two  meals  a  day,  and  go  in  regularly 
for  racquets  and  horse  exercise." 

"And  when  is  that  going  to  be,  Mr.  Atherton?"  Wil- 
frid asked. 

"I  have  not  settled  yet,  Wilfrid.  I  have  been  longer 
stationary  here  than  I  have  been  in  any  place  since  I 
left  college.  Occasionally  I  get  a  fit  of  longing  to  be 
back  in  London  again,  but  it  seldom  lasts  long.  How- 
ever, I  suppose  I  shall  yield  to  it  one  of  these  days." 

''You  are  doing  very  well  here,  Mr.  Atherton.  You 
said  only  the  other  day  that  your  consignment  of  plants 
had  sold  wonderfully,  and  that  you  expected  to  make 
nearly  a  thousand  pounds  this  year." 


304  MAORI  AND  SETTLES. 

"That  is  true  enough,  Wilfrid;  but  you  see,  unfor- 
tunately or  fortunately,  whichever  way  you  like  to  put  it, 
the  thousand  pounds  are  of  no  importance  to  me  one  way 
or  the  other.  I  am  really  what  is  generally  considered 
to  be  a  rich  man,  and  from  the  day  I  left  England,  now 
just  two  years  ago,  my  income  has  been  simply  accumu- 
lating, for  bevond  the  two  or  three  pounds  a  month  your 
mother  lets  me  pay  her  I  spend  absolutely  nothing." 

"It  must  be  very  dull  for  yoi;  here,  Mr.  Atherton, 
accustomed  as  you  have  been  to  be  always  either  travel- 
ing or  in  London,  to  be  cut  off  from  the  world  with  only 
just  our  society,  and  that  of  the  Aliens  and  Mitfords,  and 
two  or  three  neighbors." 

"I  do  not  look  dull,  do  I,  Mrs.  Benshaw?"  Mr.  Ather- 
ton laughed. 

"No;  I  have  never  seen  you  dull  since  I  knew  you, 
Mr.  Atherton,  not  even  when  you  were  toiling,  exhausted 
and  worn  out  with  that  child  on  your  shoulders  and 
the  weight  of  the  helpless  man  on  your  arms.  We  shall 
miss  you  awfully  when  you  do  go;  shall  we  not  Marion?" 
Marion  was  now  nineteen,  and  had  developed,  as  Wilfrid 
told  her  in  some  surprise — for  brothers  seldom  think 
their  sisters  good-looking — into  a  very  pretty  girl. 

"It  is  not  coming  just  yet,"  Mr.  Atherton  said;  "but 
I  have,  I  think,  pretty  well  exhausted  the  forest  for  a 
distance  of  fifty  miles  round,  and  now  that  things  are 
settling  down  I  shall  take  more  extensive  trips  to  the 
mountains  in  the  northeast  and  the  Waikato  country,  and 
the  strip  of  land  lying  north  of  Auckland.  I  have  toever 
been  absent  above  two  or  three  days  at  a  time;  but  in 
future  I  may  be  away  for  weeks.  But  this  will  always 
be  my  headquarters,  Mrs.  Benshaw.  You  see,  your  hus- 
band is  becoming  a  formidable  rival  of  mine  here,  so  I 
must  be  off  to  pastures  new." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  305 

"You  know  he  did  not  want  to  send  things  home,  Mr. 
Atherton.  It  was  only  because  you  insisted  that  he  did 
so." 

"I  am  very  glad  that  I  did  insist,  Mrs.  Renshaw.  As 
you  know,  I  only  went  into  the  trade  of  plants  to  give 
me  something  to  do  on  my  rambles  beside  looking  for 
new  species;  but  I  am  sure  it  has  been  a  capital  thing 
for  him.  He  has  always  been  accustomed  to  use  his 
brain,  and  although  he  now  takes  a  lively  interest  in 
farm  work,  he  would  in  time  have  found  a  certain  void  if 
he  had  not  taken  up  this  new  hobby.  As  it  is,  it  gives 
him  plenty  of  outdoor  work,  and  is  not  only  interesting, 
but  pays  well;  and  now  that  he  is  thoroughly  acquainted 
with  the  botany  of  this  part  of  the  island,  and  knows 
which  things  are  worth  sending  home,  and  the  price  he 
can  depend  upon  getting  for  them  he  will  make  a  far 
larger  income  out  of  it  than  he  could  do  from  farming. 
Wilfrid  will  be  quite  capable  of  looking  after  the  interests 
of  the  farm." 

Another  year  passed.  The  clearings  at  The  Glade  had 
been  greatly  enlarged;  but  clumps  of  bush  had  been 
judiciously  left  so  as  to  preserve  its  sylvan  appearance, 
the  long  operation  of  fencing  in  the  whole  property  had 
been  accomplished,  and  the  number  of  horses,  cattle,  and 
sheep  had  so  increased  that  the  greater  part  were  now 
sent  to  graze  on  Maori  land,  a  small  rate  per  head  being 
paid  to  the  natives.  Mr.  Atherton  had  come  and  gone 
many  times,  and  had  now  almost  completed  his  study  of 
the  botany  of  the  island.  Mr.  Renshaw  had  altogether 
abandoned  the  management  of  the  farm  to  Wilfrid,  and 
devoted  himself  entirely  to  the  collection  of  ferns, 
orchids,  and  other  plants,  receiving  handsome  checks  in 
return  for  the  consignment  sent  to  England  by  each 
vessel  that  sailed  from  Wellington  or  Napier.  He  had 


306  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

agents  at  each  of  these  towns,  who  made  arrangements 
•with  the  stewards  of  the  ships  for  taking  care  of  the 
plants  on  their  way  home,  their  remuneration  being  de- 
pendent upon  the  state  in  which  the  consignment  arrived 
in  England. 

Settlers  were  now  established  on  both  sides  of  the  river 
for  miles  above  The  Glade,  and  as  among  these  weie  sev- 
eral who  had  been  officers  in  the  army,  or  professional 
men  who  had  come  out  for  the  benefit  of  their  families, 
there  was  now"  much  cheerful  society,  and  The  Glade 
occupied  the  same  leading  position  in  that  part  of  the 
settlement  that  Mr.  Mitford's  had  done  on  the  lower  river 
when  they  first  arrived. 

James  Allen  had  now  been  a  year  married  to  the  eldest 
of  the  Miss  Mitfords.  His  brother  had  been  decidedly 
refused  by  Marion  when  he  proposed  to  her,  much  to  the 
surprise  of  her  father  and  mother,  who  had  seen  from 
the  frequent  visits  of  their  neighbor  during  the  past  year 
how  things  were  going  with  him,  while  Wilfrid  had  been 
quite  indignant  at  her  rejection  of  his  friend. 

" Girls  ere  extraordinary  creatures,"  he  said  to  his 
Bister.  "I  had  quite  made  up  my  mind  for  the  last  six 
months  that  you  and  Bob  were  going  to  make  a  match  of 
it,  and  thought  wyhat  a  jolly  thing  it  would  be  to  have 
you  settled  next  to  us.  I  am  sure  I  do  not  know  what 
you  want  more.  You  have  known  him  for  three  years. 
He  is  as  steady  as  possible,  and  safe  to  get  on  well,  and 
as  nice  a  fellow  as  I  know." 

"He  is  all  that,  Wilfrid,  but  you  see  I  don't  want  to 
marry  him.  I  like  him  very  much  in  the  same  way  you 
like  him,  but  I  don't  like  him  well  enough  for  that." 

"Oh,  I  suppose  you  want  a  wandering  prince  in  dis- 
guise," Wilfrid  grumbled.  "That  is  the  way  with  girls; 
they  always  want  something  that  they  cannot  get." 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER  307 

"My  dear  Wilfrid/'  Marion  said  with  spirit,  "when  I 
take  to  lecturing  you  as  to  whom  you  are  to  marry  it  will 
be  quite  time  for  you  take  to  lecturing  ine ;  but  until  I 
do  I  cannot  allow  that  you  have  any  right  in  the  matter." 

It  was  seldom  indeed  that  brother  and  sister  differed 
in  opinion  about  anything,  and  seeing  a  tear  in  Marion's 
eye  Wilfrid  at  once  gave  in  and  admitted  himself  to  be 
wrong. 

"Of  course  it  is  no  business  of  mine,  Marion,  and  I 
beg  your  pardon.  I  am  sure  I  shall  not  wish  for  a  mo- 
ment that  you  should  marry  any  one  but  the  man  that 
you  choose  for  yourself.  I  should  certainly  have  liked 
you  to  have  married  Bob  Allen,  but  if  you  do  not  fancy 
him  of  course  there  is  an  end  of  it. ' ' 

This  was  not  the  only  offer  that  Marion  had  received 
during  the  year,  for  there  were  several  young  settlers  who 
would  have  been  glad  to  have  installed  her  as  the  mis- 
tress of  their  homesteads ;  but  they  had  each  met  with 
the  same  fate  that  had  now  befallen  Bob  Allen. 

The  next  time  Mr.  Atherton  came  back  he  said,  "I 
have  taken  my  last  ramble  and  gathered  my  last  plant." 

"What!  are  you  going  home?"  Mrs.  Renshaw  ex- 
claimed. 

"Yes,  I  am  going  home,"  he  said  more  seriously  than 
he  usually  spoke.  "I  have  been  away  three  years  now, 
and  have  pretty  thoroughly  ransacked  the  island.  I  have 
discovered  nearly  eighty  new  species  of  plants  and  two 
or  three  entirely  new  families,  so  I  have  done  enough  for 
honor ;  beside,  I  am  wanted  at  home.  An  old  aunt  has 
died  and  left  me  a  considerable  sum  of  money,  just  be- 
cause I  had  plenty  of  my  own  before,  I  suppose.  It  is 
another  instance  of  female  perversity.  So  I  have  had  a 
letter  from  my  solicitor  saying  that  I  am  really  wanted ; 
but  in  any  case  I  should  have  gone  now  or  in  another 


308  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

month  or  two.  I  begin  to  feel  that  I  have  had  enough 
of  wandering,  and  at  thirty~eight  it  is  time  to  settle 
down  if  you  are  ever  going  to  do  so." 

There  was  a  silence  round  the  table  as  he  ceased  speak- 
ing, for  all  felt  that  the  loss  would  be  a  serious  one,  and 
although  Mr.  Atherton  had  tried  to  speak  lightly  they 
could  see  that  he  too  felt  the  approaching  end  of  their 
close  friendship. 

"Are  you  going  to  start  at  once?"  Mr.  Eenshaw  asked. 

"No,  I  shall  give  myself  a  fortnight  or  three  weeks 
before  I  sail.  I  have  all  the  plants  I  gathered  this  time 
to  dry  and  prepare  properly;  beside,  I  should  like  a 
quiet  stay  with  you  before  I  say  good-by.  You  see,  I 
have  not  seen  much  of  you  during  the  last  year." 

Nothing  further  was  said  on  the  subject,  which  none 
of  them  liked  to  touch  on.  For  the  next  two  days  the 
house  seemed  strangely  quiet. 

"By  the  way,  what  has  become  of  young  Allen?"  Mr. 
Atherton  said  at  dinner  on  the  third  day.  "You  told  me 
every  one  was  well,  so  I  suppose  he  is  away  from  home, 
as  I  have  not  seen  him  since  I  came,  and  he  used  to  be  a 
very  regular  visitor."  There  was  a  momentary  silence 
and  then  Mrs.  Renshaw  said : 

"I  do  not  think  he  is  away  from  home,  though  he  may 
be,  for  he  was  talking  the  other  day  of  looking  out  for  a 
fresh  piece  of  land  for  himself.  Now  that  his  brother  is 
married  I  suppose  it  is  only  natural  that  he  should  think 
of  setting  up  for  himself.  The  farm  is  of  course  their 
joint  property,  but  I  suppose  they  will  make  some 
arrangement  for  his  brother  to  take  over  his  share." 

"Naturally,"  Mr.  Atherton  agreed,  "young  Allen  would 
not  care  about  remaining  now  that  his  brother  is 
married.  When  one  of  two  partners  marries  it  generally 
breaks  up  the  partnership,  and  beside,  he  will  of  course 


MAORI  AND  BETTLER.  309 

1)8  "wanting  to  have  a  place  of  his  own,  and  the  holding 
is  not  large  enough  to  divide." 

After  dinner  Wilfrid  strolled  out  with  Mr.  Atherton. 

"I  dare  say  you  saw,  Mr.  Atherton,  that  your  question 
about  Bob  Allen  fell  rather  as  a  bombshell  among  us. 
There  is  no  reason  why  you,  who  are  a  great  friend, 
should  not  know  the  truth.  Th«  fact  is,  to  my  astonish- 
ment, Marion  has  thought  proper  to  refuse  Bob  Allen. 
I  was  never  more  surprised  in  my  life.  I  had  always 
looked  upon  it  as  certain  that  she  would  accept  him, 
especially  as  she  has  refused  three  or  four  good  offers 
this  year.  One  never  can  understand  girls." 

Mr.  Atherton  was  silent  for  a  minute  or  two.  Then  he 
said : 

"I  thought  too,  Wilfrid,  that  it  would  have  come  off. 
I  have  always  thought  so.  Well,  well."  Then  after  a 
pause  he  went  on:  "I  had  intended  to  go  over  in  the 
morning  to  see  him.  I  like  the  lad,  and  had  an  idea  of 
offering  to  advance  him  a  sum  of  money  to  set  up  in  a 
place  of  his  own  without  loss  of  time.  Then  the  young 
couple  would  have  had  a  fair  start  in  life  without  having 
to  wait  two  or  three  years  or  to  go  through  the  rough 
work  at  the  first  start  in  a  settler's  life.  The  money 
would  of  course  have  been  nothing  to  me,  and  it  would 
have  been  satisfactory  to  have  lent  a  helping  hand  toward 
seeing  your  sister  married  and  happy.  And  so  she  has 
refused  him.  Well,  I  will  take  a  turn  by  myself, 
Wilfrid." 

And  to  the  young  fellows  surprise  Mr.  Atherton  turned 
off  and  started  at  a  brisk  pace  up  the  glade. 

"He  is  evidently  as  vexed  at  Marion's  throwing  over 
Bob  Allen  as  I  am,"  Wilfrid  said  to  himself,  as  he  looked 
after  him.  "I  wish  he  would  give  her  a  good  talking  to, 
she  would  think  more  of  his  opinion  than  she  does  of 
mine. 


310  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 


CHAPTEE  XVIII. 

IN  ENGLAND. 

"I  SUPPOSE  you  have  not  settled  yet  as  to  what  ship  you 
will  return  by,  Atherton?"  Mr.  Eenshaw  asked  as  the 
party  were  gathered  in  the  veranda  in  the  evening. 

"No, "  Mr.  Atherton  replied,  absently  watching  the 
smoke  of  his  cigar  as  it  curled  up,  "nothing  is  at  all  set- 
tled; nay  plans  seem  to  be  quite  vague  now." 

"What  do  you  mean,  Mr.  Atherton?"  Mrs.  Renshaw 
asked  in  surprise,  for  Mr.  Atherton's  plans  were  gener- 
ally mapped  out  very  decidedly.  "How  is  it  that  your 
plans  are  vague?  I  thought  you  said  two  days  ago  that 
you  should  go  down  to  Wellington  about  the  20th." 

"I  did  not  mean  to  say  that  they  were  vague,  Mrs. 
Renshaw;  did  I  really  say  so?" 

"Why,  of  course  you  did,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said;  "and 
it  is  not  often  that  you  are  vague  about  anything." 

"That  shows  that  you  do  not  understand  my  character, 
Mrs.  Renshaw,"  Mr.  Atherton  said  in  his  usual  careless 
manner.  "I  am  the  vaguest  of  men — a  child  of  chance, 
a  leaf  blown  before  the  wind." 

Wilfrid  laughed.  "It  would  have  taken  a  very  strong 
wind  when  we  first  knew  you." 

"I  am  speaking  metaphorically,  Wilfrid.  I  am  at 
London,  and  the  idea  occurs  to  me  to  start  for  the 
Amazon  and  botanize  there  for  a  few  months.  I  pack  up 
and  start  the  next  morning.  I  get  there  and  do  not  like 
the  place,  and  say  to  myself  it  is  too  hot  here,  let  me 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  311 

Study  the  Arctic  flora  at  Spitzbergen.  If  I  act  upon  an 
idea  promptly,  well  and  good,  but  if  I  allow  any  time  to 
elapse  between  the  idea  striking  me  and  my  carrying  the 
thing  into  execution,  there  is  never  any  saying  whether 
I  may  not  go  off  in  an  entirely  different  groove  during 
the  interval." 

"And  is  there  any  chance  of  your  going  off  in  any 
other  groove  now,  Atherton?"  Mr.  Renshaw  asked. 

"No,  I  think  not;  just  a  Jemote  possibility  perhaps, 
but  not  more  than  that.  It  is  so  indefinitely  small,  in- 
deed, that  you  may — yes,  I  think  you  may  safely  calcu- 
late upon  my  starting  on  the  day  I  said,  or  if  I  find  a 
ship  at  Wellington  going  on  a  trading  excursion  among 
the  islands,  or  up  to  the  strait,  or  to  Japau,  I  may  likely 
enough  take  a  passage  in  her." 

"But  I  thought  you  said  that  your  business  required 
you  to  be  at  home,  Mr.  Atherton?" 

"Yes,  I  suppose  that  is  so,  "Wilfrid ;  but  I  dare  say  my 
solicitor  would  manage  it  just  as  well  if  I  did  not  turn 
up.  Solicitors  are  people  who,  as  far  as  I  can  see,  con- 
sider it  their  duty  to  bother  you,  but  if  they  find  that 
you  pay  no  attention  to  their  letters  they  manage  some- 
how or  other  to  get  on  very  well  without  you.  I  believe 
they  go  into  a  court  and  make  affidavits,  and  get  an  order 
authorizing  them  to  sign  for  you.  I  do  not  know  how  it 
generally  is  done,  but  that  is  my  experience  of  them  so 
far." 

Marion  had  said  little  that  evening,  and  had  indeed 
been  very  quiet  for  the  last  few  days.  She  was  some- 
what indignant  at  Wilfrid's  interference  in  what  she  con- 
sidered her  affairs,  and  felt  that  although  her  father  and 
mother  had  said  nothing,  they  too  were  somewhat  disap- 
pointed, and  would  have  been  glad  had  she  accepted  Bob 
Allen.  Beside  she  had  reasons  of  her  own  for  being  out 


312  MAORI  AND  SETTLER 

of  spirits.  After  breakfast  the  next  morning  Mr.  Ather* 
ton  said:  "Marion,  when  you  have  finished  your  domes- 
tic duties  and  can  be  spared,  suppose  you  put  on  your 
hat  and  come  for  a  ramble  \vith  me." 

There  was  nothing  unusual  in  the  request,  for  the  girl 
often  accompanied  him  in  his  rambles  when  he  was  not 
going  far  into  the  forest. 

"I  shall  be  ready  in  half  an  hour,  if  your  highness  can 
wait  so  long." 

"I  am  in  no  hurry,  child,  and  will  smoke  a  pipe  on 
the  veranda  until  you  are  ready. ' ' 

Marion  always  enjoyed  these  walks  with  Mr.  Atherton. 
He  was  at  all  times  a  pleasant  companion,  and  when 
alone  with  her  always  exerted  himself  to  amuse  her, 
though  he  sometimes  vexed  her  by  talking  to  her  as  if 
she  were  a  child.  To-day  he  was  muoh  more  silent  than 
usual,  and  more  than  once  she  looked  up  in  wonder  at 
his  face  as  he  walked  along  puffing  at  his  pipe,  with  his 
hands  deep  in  his  jacket  pockets  and  his  eyes  bent  on  the 
ground. 

"A  penny  for  your  thoughts, Mr.  Atherton,"  she  said  at 
last  with  a  laugh.  "It  seems  to  me  that  you  would  have 
got  on  just  as  well  without  me." 

"Well,  I  was  just  thinking  that  I  was  a  fool  to  ask  you 
to  come  with  me,  child."  Marion  opened  her  eyes  in 
surprise.  "You  see,  my  dear,"  he  went  on,  "we  all 
make  fools  of  ourselves  sometimes.  I  started  in  life  by 
making  a  fool  of  myself.  I  fell  in  love  with  a  woman 
•whom  I  thought  perfection.  She  was  an  arrant  flirt,  and 
was  only  amusing  herself  with  me  till  she  hooked  a 
young  lord  for  whom  she  was  angling.  That  was  what 
sent  me  roaming  for  the  first  time;  and,  as  you  know, 
having  once  started  I  have  kept  it  up  ever  since,  that  is 
till  I  came  out  here,  I  had  intended  to  stay  six  months; 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  313 

t  have  been  here  three  years.  Why  have  I  stopped  so 
long  ?  Simply,  child,  because  I  have  again  made  a  fool 
of  myself.  I  do  not  think  I  was  conscious  of  it  for  the 
first  two  years,  and  it  was  only  when  I  saw,  as  I  thought, 
that  young  Allen  would  win  you,  that  I  recognized  that 
a  man  of  thirty-seven  was  fool  enough  to  love  a  child 
just  eighteen  years  younger  than  myself.  At  the  same 
time  I  was  not  fool  enough  to  think  that  I  had  the  small- 
est chance.  I  could  not  stop  here  and  watch  another 
winning  you,  and  at  the  same  time  I  was  so  weak  that  I 
could  not  go  away  altogether ;  and  so  you  see  I  compro- 
mised matters  by  going  away  for  weeks  and  sometimes 
months  at  a  time,  returning  with  the  expectation  each 
time  of  hearing  that  it  was  settled.  Now  I  hear  that  you 
have  refused  him,  and  just  as  a  drowning  man  grasps  at 
a  straw,  I  resolved  to  have  my  fate  absolutely  settled  be- 
fore I  sail.  Don't  be  afraid  of  saying  'no,'  dear.  I  have 
never  for  a  moment  looked  for  any  other  answer,  but  I 
think  that  I  would  rather  have  the  'no'  than  go  away 
without  it,  for  in  after  years  I  might  be  fool  enough  to 
come  to  think  that  possibly,  just  possibly,  the  answer, 
had  Tasked  the  question,  might  have  been  'yes.'  " 

He  had  stopped  in  his  walk  when  he  began  to  speak, 
and  stood  facing  Marion,  who  had  not  raised  her  eyas 
while  he  was  speaking.  Then  she  looked  frankly  up  in 
his  face. 

"Do  you  think  I  did  not  know,"  she  said  softly,  "and 
didn  't  you  really  know  too  ?  You  are  not  so  wise  a  man 
as  I  thought  you.  Why,  ever  since  I  have  known  you  it 
seems  to  me  that — that " 

"That  you  have  loved  me,  Marion;  is  it  possible?"  he 
said,  taking  her  hand. 

"Of  course  it  is  possible,"  she  said  almost  pettishly; 
"how  could  I  help  it,  I  should  like  to  know?" 


314  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Dinner  had  been  waiting  for  some  time  before  Mr. 
Atherton  and  his  companion  returned  from  their  ramble. 

"Twenty  minutes  late !"  Wilfrid  shouted  as  they  ap- 
proached the  house;  "have  you  been  losing  yourselves  in 
the  bush?" 

"I  think  that  it  has  been  just  the  other  way,  Wilfrid," 
Mr.  Atherton  said  as  he  came  up  to  the  group  gathered 
in  the  veranda. 

"How  do  you  mean?"  Wilfrid  asked. 

"I  mean  we  have  been  finding  each  other." 

"Finding  each  other,"  Wilfrid  repeated  vaguely. 
"Why,  were  you  both  lost?" 

"I  was,  Wilfrid.  Mrs.  Benshaw,  I  have  found  your 
daughter,  and  am  going,  with  your  permission  and  that 
of  her  father,  to  keep  her.  I  am  a  good  bit  older  than 
she  is,  but  as  she  says  she  does  not  mind  that,  I  hope 
that  you  will  not,  and  at  least  I  can  promise  to  do  all  in 
my  power  to  make  her  happy." 

"I  am  surprised,  Mr.  Atherton;  surprised  and  glad 
too,"  Mrs.  Benshaw  said,  while  Mr.  Benshaw  grasped 
Mr.  Atherton's  hand  and  shook  it  heartily. 

"My  dear  sir,  there  is  no  one  in  the  world  to  whom  I 
could  intrust  Marion's  happiness  so  gladly  and  heartily. 
I  own  that  it  is  a  surprise  to  me,  as  well  as  to  her 
mother,  but  we  are  both  delighted  at  the  choice  she  has 
made." 

By  this  time  Marion  and  her  mother  had  gone  indoors 
together.  WTilfrid  had  not  yet  spoken;  his  surprise  was 
still  too  great  for  words. 

"Well,  Wilfrid,"  Mr.  Atherton  said,  turning  to  him, 
"I  hope  your  disapproval  of  Marion's  conduct  on  this 
occasion  is  not  so  great  as  it  was  when  you  were  talking 
to  me  yesterday." 

"I  hardly  know  what  to  say  yet,  you  have  taken  me  so 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  315 

by  surprise;  but  I  am  awfuly  glad — you  know  that  don't 
you?  There  is  no  one  in  the  world  I  should  like  Marion 
to  marry  so  much,  only  somehow  it  never  occurred  to 
me." 

"That  is  natural  enough,  Wilfrid.  However,  now  that 
it  has  occurred  to  you,  and  you  approve  of  it,  we  must 
hope  that  Marion  will  be  restored  to  your  good  graces 
again." 

"I  have  been  making  an  ass  of  myself,"  Wilfrid  said 
penitently;  "but  you  believe  that  I  am  awfully  glad, 
don't  you?  I  was  disappointed  about  Bob,  but  then, 
you  see,  I  never  thought  about  you.  Why,  you  must 
know,  Mr.  Atherton,  what  I  think  of  you  and  how  I  care 
for  you,  and  how  I  look  up  to  you.  Somehow  it  never 
seemed  possible  to  me  that  a  man  like  you  could  fall  in 
love." 

"And  much  more  improbable  still,  Wilfrid,  that  your 
sister  would  fall  in  love  with  me.  I  understand  you, 
lad.  We  have  been  very  close  friends  for  the  last  three 
years,  haven't  we?  I  have  been  something  like  a  very 
big  and  very  old  brother  to  you,  and  now  we  are  going 
to  be  "brothers  in  earnest;"  and  their  hands  closed  in  a 
grip  that  spoke  volumes  for  the  sincerity  and  depth  of 
their  feelings.  Then  Wilfrid  ran  into  the  house  and 
threw  his  arms  round  his  sister.  "I  have  been  an  awful 
fool,  Marion,"  he  said;  "but  you  see,  I  never  dreamed 
of  this." 

"And  are  you  really  pleased,  Wilfrid?" 

"Pleased!  I  am  delighted.  Why,  you  know,  I  think 
he  is  the  finest  fellow  in  the  world;  and  has  he  not  done 
everything  for  us,  and  stood  by  me  and  nursed  me,  and 
carried  me  for  miles,  and  saved  mother's  life  and  mine? 
But  it  never  entered  my  mind  that  you  had  fallen  in  love 
with  each  other, ' '  - 


316  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"I  do  not  know  why  it  shouldn't,  Wilfrid.  Why 
shouldn't  I  think  as  much  of  him  as  you  do?" 

"I  do  not  know,  I  am  sure,  Marion;  but  I  confess  I 
never  did  think  of  it.  Did  you,  mother?" 

"Once  or  twice,  "Wilfrid.  About  a  year  ago  it  did 
cross  my  mind  once  or  twice,  but  that  was  all.  They  say 
mothers  are  keen-sighted  as  far  as  their  daughters  are 
concerned;  but  either  I  am  less  keen-sighted  than  mothers 
in  general,  or  Marion  is  deeper  than  other  girls." 

"Well,  mother,  we  shall  have  lots  of  time  to  talk  this 
over, "  Wilfrid  said.  "Dinner  has  been  waiting  nearly 
an  hour,  and  even  this  wonderful  business  cannot  have 
taken  away  all  our  appetites.  Everything  is  ready; 
shall'I  call  them  in?"  Wilfrid  had,  however,  still  a  few 
minutes  to  wait,  for  the  two  men  were  engaged  in  earnest 
conversation  outside. 

When  they  came  in  at  last  Mr.  Renshaw  kissed  his 
daughter  fondly.  "God  bless  you,  my  child!"  he  said. 
"You  have  made  a  wise  choice  indeed,  and  I  am  sure 
that  you  will  be  very  happy  woman." 

It  was  a  quiet  meal,  for  all  were  too  happy  to  talk 
much.  After  it  was  over  the  two  men  strolled  out  to- 
gether and  renewed  their  conversation,  and  Mr.  Eenshaw 
presently  called  to  his  wife  to  join  them.  Marion  had 
gone  to  her  room,  and  Wilfrid  was  about  to  start  to  the 
other  end  of  the  farm  when  Mr.  Atherton  called  him. 

"Come  and  join  our  consultation,  Wilfrid.  You  are  as 
much  concerned  in  it  as  any  of  us,  and  I  rely  upon  your 
assistance  to  bring  round  these  two  very  obstinate  people 
to  my  side  of  the  question.  I  should  say  our  side,  for  of 
course  Marion  is  one  with  me  in  the  matter.  You  see,  I 
am  a  rich  man,  Wilfrid — really  a  rich  man,  and  I  natur- 
ally wish  that  Marion  should  be  made  as  happy  as  possi- 
ble. I  do  not  think  she  would  be  as  happy  as  possible  if 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  317 

she  were  in  England  with  me,  with  a  nice  place  in  the 
country,  and  a  town-house,  and  most  things  that  money 
could  bring  her,  if  she  knew  that  her  father  and  mother 
were  out  here  living  a  life  which,  although  they  have 
admirably  adapted  themselves  to  it,  is  yet  very  different 
to  that  to  which  they  have  been  all  their  lives  accustomed. 

"Now,  owing  to  this  absurd  freak  of  my  aunt  in  mak- 
ing me  her  heir  when  my  income  was  already  five  times 
as  much  as  I  could  spend,  I  have  the  nuisance  of  a  large 
landed  estate  on  my  hands.  There  is  a  large  house  upon 
it  which  I  suppose  Marion  and  I  will  have  to  occupy 
occasionally;  and  there  is  another  house,  which  is  known 
as  the  dower  house,  arid  which  is  a  very  snug  and  com- 
fortable abode.  Now,  it  is  quite  clear  that  I  am  the  last 
sort  of  a  man  to  look  after  an  estate.  It  would  worry  me 
most  out  of  my  mind,  and  would  be  a  perpetual  annoy- 
ance. 

"What  I  propose  is  that  your  father  and  mother  shall 
come  home  and  take  possession  of  the  dower  house,  and 
that  your  father  should  act  as  my  agent.  Living  on  the 
spot,  he  would  be  able  to  keep  an  eye  on  the  tenants, 
receive  rents,  and  that  sort  of  thing,  and  still  be  able  to 
devote  a  considerable  portion  of  his  time  to  his  favorite 
pursuits.  I  should  have  the  advantage  of  having  an 
agent  I  could  absolutely  rely  upon,  and  Marion  and  I 
would  have  the  comfort  of  having  her  father  and  mother 
close  at  hand.  It  would  be  a  little  lonely  for  you  for  a 
bit,  Wilfrid;  but  you  are  nearly  nineteen  now,  and  will, 
unless  I  am  mistaken,  ere  many  years  have  passed,  be 
bringing  a  mistress  to  The  Glade.  I  fancy  you  go  over 
to  Mitford's  a  good  deal  oftener  than  there  is  any  abso- 
lute occasion  for,  and  although  Kate  is  only  sixteen  yet, 
I  have  a  shrewd  suspicion  that  you  have  both  pretty  well 
made  up  your  minds  about  the  future." 


318  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

"Wilfrid  colored  and  laughed.  "I  don't  know  that  we 
are  as  far  advanced  as  that;  but  I  do  hope  that  some  day 
it  may  be  as  you  say.  But  about  this  other  affair. 
"What  do  my  father  and  mother  say?  It  seems  to  me  it 
would  be  a  splendid  arrangement." 

"Of  course  it  would,  "Wilfrid;  a  splendid  arrangement, 
for  Marion  and  me  especially.  That  is  what  I  am  trying 
to  persuade  them ;  but  your  mother  has  developed  quite 
a  new  line  of  obstinacy,  and  your  father  is  just  as  bad." 

"Don't  you  see,  "Wilfrid,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  said  with 
tears  in  her  eyes,  "it  is  only  an  excuse  or  Mr.  Ather- 
ton's " 

"Harry,  my  dear  madam,  Harry,"  Mr.  Atherton  inter- 
rupted. "We  have  arranged  it  is  to  be  Harry  in  future. " 

"On  Harry's  part, "  Mrs.  Eenshaw  went  on,  "to  pro- 
vide an  income  for  us." 

"But  I  have  got  to  provide  an  income  for  some  one," 
Mr.  Atherton  said.  "There  must  be  an  agent  to  look 
after  the  property  for  me ;  necessarily  that  agent  must 
have  a  salary ;  and  why  in  the  name  of  good  sense  should 
not  your  husband  be  that  agent  as  well  as  any  one  else?" 

"But  you  are  offering  a  great  deal  too  high  a  salary," 
Mr.  Renshaw  urged.  "You  could  get  an  excellent  agent 
for  less  than  half  the  sum  you  are  talking  about." 

"Not  at  all,"  Mr.  Atherton  replied;  "I  must  have  a 
gentleman,  both  for  my  own  sake  and  that  of  the  ten- 
ants, and  to  get  a  gentleman  of  high  character  and  per- 
fectly trustworthy,  I  must  necessarily  pay  him  a  good 
salary-  I  shall  be  a  good  deal  in  town,  and  my  repre- 
sentative must  therefore  be  able  to  occupy  a  good  posi- 
tion in  the  county;  besides,  as  I  have  told  you,  my  in- 
come now,  with  this  absurd  addition,  amounts  to  some- 
thing like  six  thousand  a  year.  Why,  in  the  name  of 
goodness,  should  I  not  be  allowed,  if  I  choose,  to  pay 


MAORI  ANb  SETTLER.  319 

two  or  three  hundred  a  year  over  market  price  to  my 
agent  -when  it  will  afford  my  wife  the  gratification  of 
having  her  parents  near  her,  and  me  the  pleasure  of  hav- 
ing two  dear  friends  as  my  next  neighbors.  Beside, 
The  Glade  will  not  be  a  bit  too  large  for  you  when  you 
marry,  "Wilfrid,  and  in  that  case  either  you  will  have  to 
start  in  a  fresh  place  and  begin  all  your  work  over  again, 
or  your  father  would  have  to  turn  out  to  make  room  for 
you.  I  consider  it  preposterous.  What  do  you  say, 
"Wilfrid?" 

"I  do  think  it  would  be  a  splendid  arrangement, 
mother,"  Wilfrid  answered.  "You  know  well  enough 
that  I  shall  be  very  sorry  to  lose  you  and  father ;  but  it 
would  be  awfully  nice  for  Marion,  and  I  do  think  that 
though,  as  Mr.  Athertou  says,  you  and  father  have  fallen 
in  splendidly  with  your  life  here,  the  other  would  be  in 
every  way  better  suited  to  you.  I  can  understand  your 
feelings  in  the  matter;  but  the  same  time  I  think  that 
after  Mr.  Atherton  having  saved  your  life  and  mine,  his 
feelings  and  wishes  should  influence  you  very  much." 

"If  you  hesitate  any  longer,"  Mr.  Atherton  said,  "I 
shall  go  in  and  fetch  Marion  out.  I  have  not  told  her 
about  my  plan  yet,  for  in  fact  we  had  other  things  to 
talk  about ;  but  when  I  tell  her,  and  she  adds  hei  voice 
to  ours,  I  am  sure  you  will  not  be  able  to  refuse  any 
longer. ' ' 

"Mrs.  Renshaw  exchanged  a  look  with  her  husband. 
"It  is  not  necessary,"  she  said  in  a  broken  voice.  "We 
accept,  Harry." 

"That  is  right,"  Mr.  Atherton  said  as  he  wrung  Mr. 
Renshaw 's  hand  warmly,  and  then  affectionately  kissed 
Mrs.  Renshaw.  "Now  we  are  going  to  be  a  very  happy 
and  united  family.  Now,  go  in  and  tell  Marion." 

"Tell  her  yourself,"  Mrs.  Renshaw  smiled,  wiping  her 
eyes ;  and  Mr.  Atherton  took  his  way  to  the  house. 


320  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

Marion  was  indeed  delighted  with  the  news.  The' 
thought  of  leaving  ber  mother  and  father  behind  had 
been  the  one  drawback  to  her  happiness.  She  had  been 
her  mother's  right  -hand  and  her  father's  companion. 
She  had  thought  how  terribly  they  would  miss  her,  and 
how,  as  years  went  on,  they  would,  far  more  than  now, 
feel  the  difference  between  their  present  life  and  that 
they  had  formerly  led.  The  news  that  they  would  be 
always  near  her  and  settled  in  a  comfortable  home  filled 
her  with  delight.  A  few  minutes  after  Mr.  Atherton 
entered  the  house  she  ran  out  to  her  father  and  mother 
and  threw  her  arms  fondly  around  them.  "Is  it  not 
happiness,  mother,"  she  cried,  "to  think  that  we  shall 
still  be  together?" 

"If  you  are  not  a  happy  woman,  child,  it  will  be  your 
own  fault,"  her  father  said.  "I  consider  you  a  marvel- 
ously  lucky  girl." 

"As  if  I 'did  not  know  that!"  she  replied,  laughing 
through  her  tears. 

Mr.  Atherton  did  not  sail  quite  as  soon  as  he  had  in- 
tended. A  church  had  recently  been  erected  at  the  cen- 
tral settlement,  and  a  clergyman  established  there,  and 
a  month  after  matters  were  settled  between  him  and 
Marion  their  wedding  was  celebrated,  almost  every  set- 
tler on  the  Mohaka  being  present.  The  newly-married 
couple  returned  to  The  Glade  for  a  week,  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Benshaw  and  Wilfrid  remaining  as  the  guests  of  Mr. 
Mitford.  At  the  end  of  that  time  they  returned,  and 
•with  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Renshaw  sailed  for  Napier,  where 
they  took  ship  for  England. 

"What  would  you  have  done  if  I  had  sailed  away  for 
England  without  ever  mustering  up  courage  to  speak  to 
you,  Marion?"  Mr.  Atherton  said  as  he  stood  by  the  bul- 
wark with  her  that  evening  taking  their  last  look  at  New 
Zealand. 


MAORI  AND  SETTLER.  321 

"I  should  not  have  let  you  go,  sir,"  his  wife  said 
eaucily ;  "didn't  I  know  that  you  cared  for  me,  and  had 
I  not  refused  all  sorts  of  offers  for  your  sake?  I  don't 
know  what  I  should  have  done,  or  what  I  should  have  said, 
but  I  am  quite  sure  I  should  not  have  let  you  go  unless 
I  found  that  I  had  been  making  a  mistake  all  along.  It 
would  have  been  ridiculous  indeed  to  have  sacrificed  the 
happiness  of  two  lives  merely  because  you  had  some 
absurd  ideas  about  your  age." 

"I  never  thought  you  cared  for  me,  Marion,  never." 

"That  is  because  you  never  took  the  trouble  to  find 
out,"  his  wife  retorted.  "Men  are  foolish  creatures 
sometimes,  even  the  wisest  of  them." 

Marion  Atherton's  life  was  one  of  almost  perfect  hap- 
piness. Mr.  Atherton  entirely  gave  up  his  wanderings 
abroad,  and  by  dint  of  devotion  to  racquets  and  tennis  in 
summer,  and  of  hunting  and  shooting  in  winter,  he  kept 
down  his  tendency  toward  corpulence.  He  was  an  ener- 
getic magistrate,  and  one  of  the  most  popular  men  in  the 
country-  Mr.  Eenshaw  resumed  his  former  studies  in 
archaeology,  but  they  were  now  the  amusement  instead 
of  being  the  object  of  his  life,  and  he  made  an  excellent 
agent  to  his  son-in-law.  Standing  in  the  relation  he  did 
to  Mr.  and  ^Mrs.  Atherton,  he  and  Mrs.  Renshaw  shared 
in  their  popularity,  and  occupied  a  good  position  in  the 
county. 

Three  years  after  their  return  to  England  they  re- 
ceived the  news  that  Kate  Mitford  had  changed  her 
name,  and  was  installed  as  mistress  at  The  Glade.  Every 
five  years  Wilfrid  and  his  wife,  and  as  time  went  on  his 
family,  paid  a  visit  to  England.  He  became  one  of  the 
leading  men  of  the  colony.  A  few  years  after  his  mar- 
riage Mr.  and  Mrs.  Mitford  had  returned  to  England  for 
good,  and  James  Allen  and  "Wilfrid  succeeded  to  his 


322  MAORI  AND  SETTLER. 

business  as  a  trader,  and  carried  it  on  with  energy  and 
success,  Mr.  Atherton  advancing  Wilfrid  sufficient  capi- 
tal to  enable  them  to  extend  their  business  largely.  In 
time  The  Glade  became  Wilfrid's  summer  residence  only, 
the  headquarters  of  the  firm  being  established  at  Napier. 
It  is  now  conducted  by  his  sons,  he  himself  having  re- 
turned home  with  his  wife  and  daughters  with  a  fortune 
amply  sufficient  to  enable  them  to  live  at  ease.  Marion 
was  pleased  when,  two  years  after  her  arrival  in  England, 
she  heard  from  Wilfrid  that  Bob  Allen  had  married  the 
daughter  of  an  officer  settled  on  the  Mohaka.  The  Grim- 
stones  both  did  well,  and  became  prosperous  farmers. 
Jack  remained  in  Wilfrid's  service  until  he  left  the 
colony,  and  is  now  a  trusted  agent  of  his  sons  in  their 
dealings  with  the  natives. 


TBB 


Boys'  Own  Library. 

• 

BOUND  IN   CLOTH. 

A  selection  of  the  best  books  written  by  the 
most  popular  authors  for  boys. 

The  titles  in  this  splendid  series  have  been  selected  with  care, 
and  as  a  result  all  the  stories  can  be  relied  upon  for  their  excel- 
lence. They  are  bright  and  sparkling,  not  overburdened  with 
lengthy  descriptions,  but  brimful  of  adventure  from  the  first 
page  to  the  last— in  fact,  they  are  just  the  kind  of  stories  that 
appeal  strongly  to  the  healthy  boy  who  is  fond  of  thrilling 
exploits  and  deeds  of  heroism. 

Large  Type,   Fine   Book  Paper.      Illustrated. 
Printed  Wrappers. 

Handsome   Cloth    Binding.     Covers   stamped 
in  Inks  and  Gold. 

These  Books  are  nearly  all  copyrighted. 
Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers,  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York. 


Boys'  Own  Library. 

BOUND   IN   CLOTH. 

Large  Type,  Fine  Book  Paper.  Illustrated.  Printed 
Wrappers. 

A  selection  of  the  Best  Books  for  Boys,  by  the  most 
popular  Authors. 

Handsome  Cloth  Binding.  Covers  Stamped  in  Inks 
and  Gold. 

THESE  BOOKS  ABE  NEARLY  ALL   COPYRIGHTED. 
Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


HORATIO  ALGER,  JR. 

One  of  the  best  known  and 
most  popular  writers  of  stories 
for  boys.  The  following  titles 
are  copyrighted  and  cannot  be 
had  in  any  other  cloth  edition. 

Adventures  of  a  Telegraph  Boy. 

Dean  Dunham. 

Five  Hundred  Dollar  Check. 

From  Canal  Boy  to  President. 

Mark  Stan  ton. 

Ned  Newton. 


New  York  Boy. 
Tom  Brace. 
Tom  Tracy. 
Walter  Griffith. 
Young  Acrobat. 


C.  B    ASHLEY. 

One  of  the  best  stories  ever 
written  on  hunting,  trapping 
and  adventure  in  the  West, 
after  the  Custer  massacre. 

Gilbert,  the  Trapper. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers,  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York. 


BOYS'    OWN    LIBRARY— Continued. 

Bound  lu  Cloth.    Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


ANNIE  ASHMORE. 

A  splendid  story,  recording 
the  adventures  of  a  boy  with 
smugglers. 

Smuggler's  Cave,  The. 


CAPT.  RALPH  BONEHILL. 

No  better  stories  for  boys 
have  ever  been  written  than 
these  two  books.  Capt.  Bone- 
hill  is  in  the  very  front  rank  as 
an  author  of  boys'  stories,  and 
these  are  two  of  his  best  works. 

Neka,  the  Boy  Conjurer. 
Tour -of  the  Zero  Club. 


WALTER  F.  BURNS. 

An  excellent  story  of  adven- 
ture in  the  celebrated  Sunk 
Lauds  of  Missouri  and  Arkan- 
sas. 

In  the  Sunk  Lands. 


FRANK  H.  CONVERSE. 

Frank  H.  Converse  has  es- 
tablished a  splendid  reputation 
as  a  boys'  author.  His  books 
are  usually  published  at  51.25 
and  $1.50.  We  offer  the  fol- 
lowing list,  the  most  complete 
of  any  publisher,  at  the  right 
price. 


Gold  of  Flat  Top  Mountain. 

Happy-Go-Lucky  Jack. 

Heir  to  a  Million. 

In  Search  of  an  Unknown  Race. 

In  Southern  Seas. 

Mystery  of  a  Diamond. 

That  Treasure. 

Voyage  to  the  Gold  Coast. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers,  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York. 


BOYS'    OWN    LIBRARY— Continued. 


Bound  in  Cloth.     Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


HARRY  COLLINGWOOD. 

An  English  writer,  whose 
books  are  usually  published  in 
this  country  at  $1.50.  He  is  a 
very  successful  writer  of  boys' 
stories.  This  is  one  of  his  best 
works. 

Pirate  Island. 


GEORGE  H.  COOMER. 

Two  books  that  everybody 
should  read.  One  is  a  splendid 
story  of  adventure  at  sea,  when 
American  ships  were  in  every 
port  in  the  world,  and  the 
other  tell  a  of  adventures  while 
the  first  railway  in  the  Andes 
Mountains  was  being  built. 

Boys  in  the  Forecastle. 
Old  Man  of  the  Mountain. 


WILLIAM  DALTON. 

Three  stories  by  one  of  the 
very  greatest  writers  for  boys. 
The  stories  deal  with  boys'  ad- 
ventures in  India,  China  and 
Abyssinia.  These  books  are 
strongly  recommended  for  boys' 
reading,  as  they  contain  a  large 
amount  of  historical  informa- 
tion. 

Tiger  Prince. 
War  Tiger. 
White  Elephant. 


EDWARD   S.  ELLIS. 

These  books  are  considered 
the  best  works  this  well-known 
writer  ever  produced.  The  sale 
is  very  large  and  they  are  al- 
ways in  demand. 

Arthur  Helmuth. 
Check  Number  2134. 
From  Tent  to  White  House. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers,  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York. 


i  V    OWN    LIBRARY— Continued. 

liound  in  Cloth.    Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


Golden  Rock. 

Land  of  Mystery. 

On  the  Trail  of  Geronimo. 

Perils  of  the  Jungle. 

White  Mustang. 

GEORGE  MANVILLE  FENN 

The  boys'  books  by  this  well- 
known  English  author  are  al- 
most as  popular  as  Henty's. 
For  the  past  fifty  years  Mr. 
Fenn  has  been  writing  books 
for  boys  and  popular  fiction. 
His  books  are  in  demand 
throughout  the  English-speak- 
ing world.  We  publish  the 
following  select  list  of  his  boys' 
books,  as  we  consider  them  the 
best  he  ever  wrote. 

Commodore  Junk. 
Dingo  Boys. 
Golden  Magnet. 


Grand  Chaco. 

In  the  Wilds  of  New  Mexico. 

Weathercock. 


ENSIGN  CLARK  FITCH, 

U.  S.  N. 

A  graduate  of  the  U.  S. 
Naval  Academy  at  Annapolis, 
and  thoroughly  familiar  with 
all  naval  matters,  Mr.  Fitch  has 
devoted  himself  to  literature 
and  has  written  a  series  of 
books  for  boys  that  every 
young  American  should  read. 
His  stories  are  full  of  very  in- 
teresting information  about  the 
Navy,  training  ships,  etc. 

Bound  for  Annapolis. 
Cliff,  the  Naval  Cadet. 
Cruise  of  the  Training  Ship. 
From  Port  to  Port. 
Strange  Cruise,  A. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers,  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York. 


BOYS'    OWN    LIBRARY— Continued. 

Bound  in  Cloth.    Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


WILLIAM  MURRAY  GRAY- 
DON. 

An  author  of  world-wide 
popularity,  Mr.  Graydon  is 
essentially  a  friend  of  young 
people,  and  we  offer  herewith 
eleven  of  his  best  works, 
wherein  he  relates  a  great 
diversity  of  interesting  adven- 
tures in  various  parts  of  the 
world,  combined  with  accurate 
historical  data. 


Butcher  of  Cawnpore,  The. 
Camp  in  the  Snow,  The. 
Campaigning  with  Braddock. 
Cryptogram,  The. 
From  Lake  to  Wilderness. 
In  Barracks  and  Wigwam. 
In  Fort  and  Prison. 
Jungles  and  Traitors. 


Rajah's  Fortress,  The. 
White  King  of  Africa,  The. 
With  Boer  and  Britisher. 

LIEUT.   FREDERICK  GAR- 
RISON,  U.S.A. 

Every  American  boy  takes  a 
keen  interest  in  the  affairs  of 
West  Point.  No  more  capable 
writer  on  this  popular  subject 
could  be  found  than  Lieut. 
Garrison,  who  vividly  describes 
the  life,  adventures  and  unique 
incidents  that  have  occurred 
in  that  great  institution — in 
these  famous  West  Point 
stories. 

Cadet's  Honor,  A. 

Off  for  West  Point. 

On  Guard. 

West  Point  Treasure,  The. 

West  Point  Rivals,  The. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers,  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York. 


BOYS*    OWN    LIBRARY-Continued. 

Bound  In  Cloth.    Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


HEADON  HILL. 

The  hunt  for  gold  has  always 
been  a  popular  subject  for  con- 
sideration, and  Mr.  Hill  has 
added  a  splendid  story  on  the 
subject  in  this  romance  of  the 
Klondyke. 

Spectre  Gold. 


W.  H.  G.  KINGSTON. 

An  extremely  popular  writer 
of  sea  stories  for  boys,  with 
an  occasional ' '  land  "  story  of 
equal  interest.  These  four 
books  are  probably  his  most 
entertaining  and  instructive 
works. 

Hendricks,  the  Hunter. 

Mark    Seaworth's  Voyage  on 
the  Indian  Ocean. 

Peter  Trawl, 

The  Midshipman^  Marmaduke 
Merry. 


HENRY  HARRISON  LEWIS 

Mr.  Lewis  is  a  graduate  of 
the  Naval  Academy  at  Annap- 
olis, and  has  written  a  great 
many  books  for  boys.  Among 
his  best  works  are  the  follow- 
ing titles.  The  subjects  in- 
clude a  vast  series  of  adven- 
tures in  all  parts  of  the  world. 
The  historical  data  is  correct, 
and  these  books  should  be  read 
by  all  boys,  for  the  excellent 
information  they  contain. 


Centerboard  Jim. 
Ensign  Merrill. 
King  of  the  Island. 
Midshipman  Merrill. 
Sword  and  Pen. 
Valley  of  Mystery,  The. 
Yankee  Boys  in  Japan. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers,  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York. 


BOYS'    OWN    LIBRARY— Continued. 

Hound  in  Cloth.    Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


LIEUT.  LIONEL  LOUNS- 
BERRY. 

A  series  of  books  embracing 
many  adventures  under  our 
famous  naval  commanders,  and 
with  our  army  during  the  War 
of  1812  and  the  Civil  War. 
Founded  on  sound  history, 
these  books  are  written  for 
boys,  with  the  idea  of  com- 
bining pleasure  with  profit ;  to 
cultivate  a  fondness  for  study 
— especially  of  what  has  been 
accomplished  by  our  army 
and  navy. 

Cadet  Kit  Carey. 

Capt.  Carey. 

Kit  Carey's  Protege. 

Lieut.  Carey's  Luck. 

Out  with  Commodore  Decatur. 

Randy,  the  Pilot. 

Tom  Truxton's  Ocean  Trip, 

Tom  Truxton's  School  Days. 


Treasure  of  the  Golden  Crater. 
Won  at  West  Point. 

BROOKS  McCORMICK. 

Four  splendid  books  of  ad- 
venture on  sea  and  land,  by  this 
well-known  English  writer  for 
boys.  Originally  published 
about  fifteen  years  ago,  these 
books  are  in  steady  demand  to- 
day. 

Giant  Islanders,  The. 
How  He  Won. 
Nature's  Young  Noblemen. 
Rival  Battalions. 

WALTER  MORRIS. 

This  charming  story  contains 
thirty-two  chapters  of  just  the 
sort  of  school-life  that  charms 
the  boy  readers. 

Bob  Porter  at  Lakeview  Acad- 
emy. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers,  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York. 


BOYS'    OWN    LIBRARY— Continued. 

Bound  in  Cloth.     Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


STANLEY  NORRIS. 

Mr.  Norris  is  without  a 
rival  as  a  writer  of  "Circus 
Stories  "  for  boys.  These  four 
books  are  full  of  thrilling  ad- 
ventures, but  such  as  any  boy 
may  read  of  to  advantage. 

Phil,  the  Showman. 

Young  Showman's  Rivals,  The . 

Young  Showman's  Pluck,  The. 

Young   Showman's   Triumph, 
The. 

OLIVER  OPTIC. 

William  Taylor  Adams 
(Oliver  Optic)  has  devoted  a 
lifetime  to  writing  literature 
for  young  people  and  requires 
no  introduction  to  the  reading 
public.  Of  the  hundred  or 
more  stories  from  his  pen,  we 
offer  six  of  the  best. 


All  Aboard  (Sequel  to 
Club.") 


;Boat 


Boat  Club,  The. 
Little  by  Little. 
Now  or  Never. 
Poor  and  Proud. 
Try  Again. 

LIEUT.  JAMES  K.  ORION. 

When  a  boy  has  read  one  of 
Lieut.  Orton's  thrilling  books, 
it  requires  no  urging  to  induce 
him  to  read  the  others.  They 
are  all  very  interesting  stories. 
Not  a  dull  page  in  any  of  them. 

Beach  Boy  Joe. 
Last  Chance  Mine. 
Secret  Chart,  The. 

Tom  Havens  with  the  White 
Squadron. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers,  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York. 


BOYS'    OWN    LIBRARY— Continued. 

Bound  in  Cloth.    Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


JAMES   OTIS. 

Mr.  James  Otis  Kaler  is  one 
of  the  best  known  American 
writers  of  stories  for  boys. 
His  works  are  in  great  de- 
mand and  are  issued  by  a  num- 
ber of  publishers.  "W  e  control 
the  following  titles.  They  are 
the  best  stories  he  has  written 
for  boys. 

Chased  Through  Norway. 
Inland  Waterways. 

Reuben     Green's    Adventures 
at  Yale. 

Unprovoked  Mutiny,  An. 
"Wheeling  for  Fortune. 

GILBERT  PATTEN. 

The  works  of  Mr.  Patten  are 
usuall  y  published  at  $  1 . 50.  He 
has  had  the  distinction  of  hav- 
ing his  books  adopted  by  the 
U.  S.  Government  for  all  naval 
libraries  on  board  our  war 


ships.  We  publish  what  are 
justly  considered  his  best  books 
for  boys. 

Boy  Boomers. 
Boy  Cattle  King. 
Boy  from  the  West. 
Don  Kirk's  Mine. 
Jud  and  Joe. 

ST.  GEORGE  RATHBORNE. 

Mr.  Rathborne's  stories  for 
boys  have  the  peculiar  charm 
of  dealing  with  localities  and 
conditions  with  which  he  is 
thoroughly  familiar.  The 
scenes  of  these  excellent  stories 
are  along  the  Florida  coast  and 
on  the  western  prairies. 

Canoe  and  Camp  Fire. 
Chums  of  the  Prairie. 
Gulf  Cruisers,  The. 


For  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers,  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York, 


BOYS'    OWN    LIBRARY— Continued. 

Bound  in  Cloth.    Price,  75  Cents  Each,  Postpaid. 


Paddling  Under  Palmettos. 
Rival  Canoe  Boys. 
Shifting  Winds. 
Sunset  Ranch. 
Young  Range  Riders. 

CAPT.  MAYNE  REID. 

A  good  list  of  boys'  books 
would  hardly  seem  complete 
vdthont  some  works  of  Capt. 
J.Iayne  Reid.  We  offer  here- 
with one  each  of  his  best  land 
and  sea  stories. 

Lone  Ranch,  The. 
Ran  Away  to  Sea, 

ARTHUR  SEWELL, 

An  American  story  by  an 
American  author.  It  relates 
how  a  Yankee  boy  overcame 
many  obstacles  in  school  and 
out.  There  is  nothing  of 


school  routine  work  in  this 
book.  It  is  an  entertaining 
story  throughout. 

Gay  Dashleigh's  Academy  Days 


CAPT.  DAVID  SOUTHWICK 

An  exceptionally  good  story 
of  frontier  life  among  the  In- 
dians in  the  Far  West,  during 
the  early  settlement  period. 

Jack  Wheeler. 


GORDON  STABLES. 

Mr.  Stables  has  written  a 
number  of  excellent  sea  stories 
for  boys,  which  are  replete 
with  interesting  incidents  and 
useful  information,  especially 
the  two  offered  here. 

Life  at  Sea. 

Young  Explorer,  The. 


For  sale  by  aU  booksellers,  or  sent,  postpaid,  on  rpceipt  of  price 
i-Sj  The  Federal  Book  Company,  New  York. 


UNIV.  OF  CALIF.  LIBRARY,  LOS  ANGELES 


A     000  1 24  860 


